Home

Applications Upgrade Guide for IBMi with DB2/400

1. 1 On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the Control Tables data source Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 43 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Field Description Data Source Name Verify the name of the data source Server Name Verify the name of the Enterprise Server When you defined your plan some fields were changed to reflect the previous release values Verify the values for Data Source and Database type are set as follows I for IBM iSeries Access Library Name Enter the name of the library housing your Control Tables for the selected environment ODBC Data Source Name Enter the name of the data source For example Control Tables Test Note Control Tables data sources are specific to the environment and pathcode 2 Click Advanced and verify that UNICODE is off only if the Control Tables are not set to Unicode in a previous release Note If you upgrade from Release 8 9 the Unicode flag is on 3 Click OK 5 4 11 5 Verifying the Data Dictionary Data Source To verify the Data Dictionary data source pb Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions BE rz x File Edit Preferences Form Window Help Y x amp OK Can Dis Abo Data Source Name Data Dictionary 910 Links w Advan 9 OLE a Internet Data Source Use oa Local Data Source Data Source
2. Generate Workstation Deployment Svr Map pe Data imc cretal l e Port Number e016 Logical Machine Name ENTS Database Type ji DB2 UDB on 05 400 Server Map Data Source Ente 910 Server m 910 Server Map Installation Path Ego0sys Deployment Server Name frimanic 1 On Enterprise Server Revisions complete or verify the following fields Field Description Machine Usage Displays the default value of 20 to indicate that this is an Enterprise Server Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 7 Specifying an Enterprise Server Field Description Machine Name The name of the primary Enterprise Server The name is case sensitive and should not contain any special characters Because the machine name is used to create the Server Map datasource name and because the Platform Pack Installer does not restrict you from entering a machine name that results in a datasource name greater than 30 characters if the machine name for the Enterprise Server is longer than 13 characters the resulting datasource name will be longer than the allowed 30 characters For example if your machine name is 15 characters A23456789012345 the base datasource name input into the Planner would be A23456789012345 910 Server Map Note The field in table F98611 is a hard restriction the field only allows 30 characters The actual field size cannot be modified or changed When the Planner runs it trunc
3. RCLSTG SELECT DBXREF Note that this command may run for as much as several hours 3 Restart all subsystems using this command STRSBS QCTL The cross reference table is now rebuilt and ready for use 4 4 Understanding the Platform Pack Installation on the IBM i The Platform Pack installation process installs Release 9 1 system and database files on the IBM i The Platform Pack installer does not run on the IBM i machine it can only run on a Microsoft Windows machine Oracle recommends that you run the installer from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server so that the Oracle Inventory and install history will be preserved As a prerequisite to running the installer IBM i Access for Windows must be installed on the Deployment Server 4 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i Caution Insome cases the JOEOW library may not be properly updated with the new JD Edwards EnterpriseOne programs as expected during the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Upgrade process To ensure the new JD Edwards EnterpriseOne programs are properly installed rename your existing JOEOW library prior to running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer To rename JDEOW run the following command while signed onto your IBM i JD Edwards EnterpriseOne server RNMOBJ OBJ QSYS JDEOW OBJTYPE LIB NEWOBJ JDEOW_SAVE Note If you are
4. cccccccsssssesesssesseesesesesesesescscsssesesescsessseseecscsessenseecsees 2 10 2 7 7 Working with Accounts Payable Processing ccccsssescssscsesesesescscseseseecscseseseseeceees 2 11 2 8 Verifying Software and Hardware Requirements s sssssssssssissessestertisstssentensessrsnneneeness 2 11 2 8 1 Adding a New Entry to the QAQQINI File sssssssssssessssssesstsssssiesiestsssessesinsresressesses 2 11 2 8 2 Setting up YOur IBM Ipis seene ei tiene AU ath Ais we Aaaa EE aat adeo 2 13 2 8 2 1 Setting Up AS 400 TCP IP Services wo cccccceccseccscsesesescscseesesescsssnseececsesssnseeceees 2 13 2 8 2 2 Setting Up a Network Share for IBM i Root cece ceeeeeeeeeteneneneeeees 2 15 2 8 2 3 Starting the EDRSOL Services cccssivseccccveveis sess ts rai E a a a a 2 17 2 9 2 10 2 11 Verifying the Disk Space Requirements cccccec cece cseeeeeeceseceseseneseseseseseneseseseenes 2 18 Cleaning Up Disk Space on the Server cccccccce ccc cece cseeeeeecesesssesenesesesesenesesesesesees 2 19 Applying Microsoft Product Updates 0 0 cece cece ceceeeeseseececesensnesececesensneseseenes 2 19 3 Working with the Deployment Server 3 1 Using IXS Integrated xSeries Server for DeployMEeNt cece cesses te teeseeeeeeneeeeees 3 1 3 2 Planning for IBM i Integration sissies ie s apaina a iiia siairii iaiia Daea 3 4 3 3 Installing Microsoft Windows Visual Studio ss ssesssssssssstsstissessessstinsessesnsnseerieseesesnee
5. Caution Itis important to turn off Table Auditing if you are using it before beginning the upgrade process Failure to do so may cause the audited tables to be in inconsistent states requiring the tables to be recovered For more information on turning off the Table Audit function refer to the Auditing Administration Guide including 21 CFR Part 11 Table Auditing may be turned on again after the upgrade has been completed 2 2 Preparing the Prototype Environment To make sure you retain all modifications from your prototype environment 1 D a eooo N 9 Make sure the network services JD Edwards EnterpriseOne network services are running on the Enterprise Server Note The service names will be prefixed with JDE for releases prior to 8 9 and after 8 11 while the prefixed will be PSFT for releases 8 9 8 10 and 8 11 From the System Administration Tools menu GH9011 select Batch Versions Transfer PD versions to prototype so the two environments are the same Run R9830512 Select ZJDE0001 and click Copy Create a new version name and a new version title Leave security set at 0 To select the new version on the version prompting form check the Data Selection box Select the advanced options to bring up the Advanced version prompting form and select to Override Location Click Submit 10 When prompted for the override location select LOCAL 2 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Up
6. cccccesesecseseseeeeees 5 47 5 4 16 Clearing SQL Packages from QRECOVERY ccccc sees ee ceeeeeeeseseceseeeneseceneeeees 5 47 5 5 Deleting Machines from an Installation Plan ccccesesesesssesesesescseesesescsssesesescsesesseesees 5 48 5 6 Verify and Configure Data Source for Previous Release cccccccceete eee ceeeeeeceeeees 5 48 6 Working With Installation Workbench viii 6 1 6 1 1 6 1 2 6 1 3 6 1 4 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 5 1 6 5 2 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 10 1 6 10 2 6 11 6 12 6 13 6 14 6 15 6 15 1 6 15 2 6 16 6 16 1 6 16 2 6 16 3 6 16 3 1 6 16 3 2 6 16 3 3 6 16 3 4 6 16 3 5 Understanding Workbench Components c ccscsescesescscssesssesssnesesesceeesesescenaneseseseesescseecanenens 6 1 Verifying the Network Share on the Deployment Serve cccccccesese cesses ee eeees 6 3 Loading Data Demo Data and Production Data ccccccccceseseseeteeneseeeeeneeeeeeees 6 4 Creating the JOD QU ee Sesia ulbavues aivbessten sta pastes ves sunercssepeersrstencoenc 6 7 Deferring Indexes for Table Conversion Workbench Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 6 9 Verifying OEM Mappings resm snuen koiaa rrea e anaa aiaee ea a aka ia eene ishe 6 9 Adding an Entry to the Remote Database Directory s ss sessesssritsseserttssntettessterttssneentesntens 6 9 Verifying the Language Code Character Set ccccccsessssssssseseessssssssesessnssssseeseesseseees 6 10 Working with Unattended Workbench
7. vy x Sal Ok Bann De A Links w Deplo S OLE S Internet mPlan Information Name JinsTALL Description Status In Planning Install Type Install C Upgrade C Software Update ASU ESU m Release To Release E910 ah 1 On Installation Planner complete the following fields Name Enter the name of your installation plan a Description Enter the description of your installation plan m Status Select 10 as the status of your installation plan To Verify that the release number is E910 2 Click OK The Location Search form appears 20 4 Entering a Plan Location Once basic plan installation information is entered you must choose an existing plan location For most instances choose the location defined during your base installation To enter a plan location Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 3 Entering a Plan Location Custom Installation Plan Location Search OF Xx i File Edit Preferences Window Help e x 53 E we is w Disp S OLE 9 Internet Calendar Calcula Work Center A Internal ET A External ETL Internet A Create Shortcut New York branch ae aed Can Dis yv fa x Select Find Close Seg New Dis Abo m Links w Displ S OLE Internet Calendar Calcula work Center g Internal Mail D External Mail Internet 2 Create Shortcu
8. Aplan must be associated with an HTML server If you would like to define an HTML server press OK To select an existing HTML server press select Select X cancel 1 Click OK to define a new HTML Server or click Select to choose from a list of existing HTML Servers If you choose Select you are presented with the Machine Search table from which you can make your selection a Typical Installation Plan HTML Server Revisions Bel File Edit Preferences Form Window Help la x Y x RKR u nks q ae t ok Gan Dis Abo w Window S OLE 8 Internet Machine Usage fo HTML Application Server Location Denver EAEN Machine Name DEVNTA Komam Ns JDE Description ATL Web Server iseries Release fest 0 Host Type fio ASi400 Workstation Gepiayment Enterprise 62 Crystal WE Primary HTML Server fi Protocol http Server URL fwanworacle com Http Port feo Default Login fidesserviethtm login Installation Path Deployment Server Name fritanic eee 2 On HTML Server Revisions complete these fields as Field Description Machine Usage The default value of 30 indicates that this is a HTML Web Server Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 13 Entering HTML Web Server Information Field Description Machine Name Enter the name of your HTML Web Server The name is case sensitive should not exceed 15 characters and should not contai
9. As listed in this table Installation Workbench includes the components some or all of which might be used for your upgrade depending on your installation plan Installation Workbench Component Functional Description Initial Tasks Workbench When using unattended workbench mode this workbench runs Media Object Conversion only for Xe and ERP 8 0 Release Master Copy Data Dictionary Copy System Tables and Security Copy applies to upgrades from Xe and ERP 8 0 after Installation Workbench is started and before Location Workbench begins Location Workbench This workbench copies all locations that are defined in the plan from the F9654 and F984021 tables in the Planner data source to the System 910 data source Data Source Workbench Copies all data sources that are defined in the plan from the F98611 and F986115 tables in the Planner data source to your System 910 data source It also updates the F98401 table to indicate completion Environment Workbench Copies the F0094 F00941 and F00942 tables as well as the F986101 table for each environment from your Planner data source to your System 910 data source It then updates the F98403 table to indicate completion Depending on the plan settings it also runs a batch application to copy new generic text and to create and populate Object Management Workbench and version tables Machine Workbench Copies the F9650 and F9651 tables from the Planner da
10. Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R8908495 To convert GT08495 This is to be run after N A This media object Media Object from 8 11 the F00165 table has supported resumes and SP1 or below been successfully cover letters in the upgraded in the eRecruit module Changes automatic Upgrade were made to allow the Plan resume and cover letter to be searched with Verity text search R8908490I To save Internal None N A Applicant Address Info when upgrading from 8 11 SP1 or below R89069116A To convert F069116 The processing option To update the new This TC simply calls a from 8 11 SP1 or below on this job prompts column DEFR in BSEN B8902023 that will the user for a value to F069116 Itis updated doa mass update to update the new field witha value of 1 DEFR based on the DEFR in F069116 2 or 3 based on processing option value the processing option value Manual Table Conversions 13 23 Upgrading from 8 11 SP1 or Below Upgrading from 8 11 SP1 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R8901301D To convert Activities Prior to running this To populate new and F01301 Activity Header from 8 11 SP1 post upgrade UBE all users of activity system should already have universal time time zone and daylight savings rule set in their user profiles The processing option on this job prompts the user to enter the maximum number of occurrences for never en
11. Errors Setup issues Indicates setup issues To verify that your setup is correct you should Verify access authority to the source and target Object Librarian a Check the JDE LOG for insert or delete errors on the F986 tables Versions List Success Indicates the number of copies successfully added or updated Specification Merge totals indicate the number of added replaced and merged objects PO Change Warning Indicates the processing options format for a ZJDE version has changed Review and update options on these versions Errors Indicates the number of errors that occurred during the merge Check the JDE LOG for more complete messages dealing with F983051 or F98306 Central Objects No Action Taken This category is applicable for ZJDE versions It shows that the version data was transferred but that no specification merges occurred Warnings and Errors Indicates that details for warnings and errors occured You can locate these in the detailed fourth section of the report Not Processed Indicates that the merge did not finish Evaluate the errors and rerun the merge using a Restart version number In Process Indicates a fatal error occurred in the merge business function before completing the object Evaluate and fix the error conditions before restarting the merge The third section summarizes the merge statuses of each object in one line per object with these col
12. 19 4 Entering Plan Location Information To enter plan location information E Custom Installation Plan Location Revisions Biel r3 amp ile Edit Preferences Window Help l x lt S x amp K ju k i 3 OC Cane bie fl inks w Displ OLE 8 Internet 2 Calendar Location aurora Calcula Work Center Description aurora ATL g Internal Mail D External WET Location Code ATL Internet Y Create Shortcut Parent Location D Send Shortcut 1 When you are prompted to enter new location information click OK to enter a new location 2 On Location Revisions complete these fields Field Description Location Enter the location to which this plan applies The location could be a city company headquarters or a division of a company Description Enter a description of the location name Location Code For a remote location enter a 3 character alphanumeric identification code This 3 character code is used as a prefix for the environments of the remote location and a suffix is attached for replicated data sources For example you might use DAL if the location were Dallas Texas In that case the prototype environment would be named DALPY910 and the business data data source would be named Business Data CRPDAL Parent Location Enter the parent location to which this remote location is attached 3 Click OK Creating a Remote Installation P
13. 20 10 5 Verifying the System Data Source To verify the System data source 20 18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up Environments a Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions oix File Edit Preferences Form Window Help l x v x R gt Ore ca Ole e Links w Advan 3 OLE Internet Data Source Name System 910 Data Source Use oe Local Data Source Data Source Type ji DB2 UDB on 08 400 JDBNET Data Source Data Class E System Platform fas4oo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name DS2 SGUMSDE ODBC SGUMSDE OLEDB Oracle DB2 UDB Access Logical Library Name evar 0 ODBC Data Source Name System 910 1 On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the settings for the System data source 2 Click OK The Environment Selection screen appears See Also For more information about System data source fields or fields for other data sources mentioned in this process refer to Chapter 19 Understanding Data Source Charts 20 11 Setting Up Environments By default Release 9 1 configures your system using values for typical environments Depending on the options chosen when you set up your plan Release 9 1 displays one or more of the following parameters which you can customize in these tasks a Environments a Data load options a Advanced parameters m Languages You can customize any of these parameters by
14. H i ok Cae be UN Links w Advan S OLE 8 Internet be2UbB Access moman Library Name evma1 0 ODBC Data Source Name Ente 910 Server Map SQUMSDE ODBC SAUMSDE OLEDE Oracle 2 On Data Source Revisions On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the Server Map data source 3 Click OK 5 4 7 Entering HTML Web Server Information Note For Release 9 1 the current terminology and that used in this guide is to refer to the machine running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Java Application Server JAS as the HTML Web Server Functionally these terms are all synonymous However this guide only uses the terms JAS or Java Server when explicitly labeled as such by the software Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 25 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Caution The HTML Web Server is mandatory for the majority of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications because the end user applications are only accessible through a web interface To enter HTML Web Server information G HTML Application Server ioj x A plan must be associated with an HTML server If you would like to define an HTML server press OK To select an existing HTML server press select Select x Cancel 1 On the HTML Application Server dialog click OK to continue entering HTML Web Server information or click Select to select an existing HTML Web Serv
15. Open the Object Configuration Manager OCM 1 2 Find each of the following UBEs and make sure each is mapped locally and is active R9621 R9622 R98825C and R98825D Building and Testing Packages 14 3 Reviewing Pre Package Build Issues 14 4 3 Verifying the Server Side Settings To verify the jde ini settings on the Enterprise Server 1 Open the jde ini on the Enterprise Server 2 Verify that the BuildArea setting in the BSFN BUILD section points to the PACKAGES directory on the Enterprise Server Verify that the following LinkFlags settings are correct a Ensure that the path to the system bin32 directory on the Enterprise Server is valid a Ensure that LinkFlags references the path where Release 9 1 is installed 14 4 4 Configuring the Enterprise Server for Simultaneous Builds To ensure that simultaneous builds run properly on your Enterprise Server 1 Open the jde ini on the Enterprise Server 2 Inthe BSFN BUILD section change the SimultaneousBuilds setting to 5 or less the default is zero which enables unlimited builds 14 4 5 Adding a Security Override for Running Package Build If you have secured your EnterpriseOne libraries the user running package build must sign on as a user who has rights to create tables in the Central Objects library If you have Security Server turned on set up a security override for the EnterpriseOne user so that when they connect to the data source they connect as
16. a Y Working With Installation Workbench 6 47 Understanding Table Conversions Indicates the TC Engine created the table with only Unique indexes and Primary key and returned as successful For TCs that have run where the Y was specified you will see the Build Indexes messages This is not usually true for ALTER as the TC Engine does not recreate the table for ALTER a N Indicates the TC Engine completed successfully as it normally does which includes the index build 7 Review the Table Conversion Merge log P984052 If the TC ran with value set to Y the Conversion Merge log P984052 includes the Build Indexes messages as shown in the example below P984052 Table Conversion Merge Log d Bile Edt Breferences Row Window Help P links w view DoLE Binternet amp x j Ee Find Del Close Seg New Dis Abo From To Start Date A i Start Date B po Start Time F Start Time Foo Deb Error Deizi TCPlan STGACL STGACL 3 3 21 20 15 32 1 321 20 115 32 2 ALTER STGACL STGACL 3 3921 20 15 30 3 00000 ALTER Conversion Finished Nor Conversion Finished Nor 115 29 3 MERGE V89 Conversion Finished Nor 3 21 20 15 01 1 ALTER 8 Review the R984052 report that runs at end of TC Workbench Each TC that ran with Y will have the Build Indexes message text as shown in the example below P R984052_XJDE0001
17. 1 On Remote Location Packages click the OK button Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 29 Remote Location Packages Custom Installation Plan Select Remote Location Packages oi x g J File Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help 18 x Aa Pe a RE ee Links i ate Gown Fie Goce Get New De a Se Oe Slane Plan Name MOTE Location iror 2 On Remote Location Packages click the Select button to choose the highlighted package 19 30 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Remote Location Packages E Custom Installation Plan Select Remote Location Packages O09 x File Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help le x A x 3S fF oe Select Find Close Seq New Dis Abo Links w Select 3 OLE 3 Internet Plan Name JREMOTE Location moe Pristine full package A Selected Deselect Select record Row 1 wA 3 On Remote Location Packages verify that Selected is displayed in the Selected column 4 Click the Close button Dio ation 2 5 x Would you like to add another Location You may have more than one location thatis separated by a WAN Ifyou would like to define an additional location press Yes You can define additional locations at a later time Other wise press No to continue 5 On Location click the No button to finalize the plan Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 31 Finalizing the Installation Plan a Information
18. From lt deployment server name gt lt release gt client To lt 32 bit Oracle Client Install Dir gt network admin 3 5 2 EnterpriseOne Application P96717 Best practices in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne environments are to never directly modify an EnterpriseOne database outside of EnterpriseOne You should always use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne application P96717 to perform the following Oracle database actions Import Tablespace Working with the Deployment Server 3 11 Local Oracle Enterprise Edition OEE Considerations Export Tablespace a Create Tablespace Drop Tablespace 3 5 3 Best Practices for OEE Performance You should always verify that your Deployment Server machine meets the MTRs refer to Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications The local Oracle database performs best on hard drives that are not fragmented or full Additionally the following table lists some guidelines for minimum configurations Specification Recommendation RAM 2 GB minimum Page File Size Minimum setting should be two times the amount of memory Disk Space Usage Oracle database engine requires approximately 1 7 GB of disk space JD Edwards EnterpriseOne specifications require approximately 1 7 GB of disk space When fully loaded best performance is obtained if the hard drive on the Deployment Server machine has at least 20 free space Local Database Name Ensure that any reference
19. Requirements Purpose Notes R8991300 To upgrade Scheduler Job Master when upgrading from Xe ERP8 This conversion must Run from the be run before the JDEPLAN F0092 series of environment conversions is complete That series includes R89959212 R89959211 and R8995921 The conversion reads over the F91300 table row by row Except for the Scheduler record it fetches the user group out of F0092 based on the user id stored in SCHUSER in F91300 The user group from F0092 is then stored in SCHROLE It is important that customers designate the Properties of the table conversion to input the source environment for example DV7333 and the target environment for example DV910 so that the records are properly located and updated If you do not check the Properties box in the Table Conversion Prompting screen the UBE is submitted with whatever has been previously designated in the options if anything Also because no PDF is created you should check the TC log in the Print Queue directory to determine if there were errors or any problems during the execution R8991320 To upgrade Job Schedule when upgrading from Xe ERP8 This conversion must Run from the be run before the JDEPLAN F0092 series of environment conversions is complete That series includes R89959212 R89959211 and R8995921 The conversion reads over the F91320 table row by row It fetches the user group out of F0092
20. SAVF X OPTION N d After the restore is done drop the temporary table from PRODCTL 6 17 Understanding Obsolete Tables This section discusses these tables that were obsoleted in Release 8 9 at either system code 88 or 89 a Section 6 17 1 System Code 88 Obsolete Tables a Section 6 17 2 System Code 89 Obsoleted Tables 6 17 1 System Code 88 Obsolete Tables The following lists obsolete tables which may be deleted from an environment after the table conversion for that environment has completed successfully Note You will not have all of the below obsolete tables F00001 F0004SL F0004HI FOOO4LI FO004LS F0004S F00053 FOO05LS F000531 F000532 FOOO5HI FOOOSLI F0005S F0017 FOO05SL F00165X F00165XJ F0016D F00171 F0040 F00172 F00173 F0018VI F0031 F00530 F009109 F00530E F00530P F00825 F0090 F0101D1 F03465 F0101QA EW Working With Installation Workbench 6 51 Understanding Obsolete Tables F0101QAA F0114W F01800 F03B01 F03C04 F03B15P FO3BUI06 FO3C02 F03C03 F03C05 F03C15 F03C11 F03C12 F03C13 F03C14 F03C16 F06400 F03CUI01 F04516 F04550 F04552SB F06403 F07402 F06406 F06410 F06445 F07401 F07403 F07409 F07404 F07405 F07406 F07408 F07410 F07416 F07411 F07412 F07413 F07414 F07417 F07422 F07418 F07419 F07420 F07421 F07423 F07431 F07424 F07425 F07426 F07429 F07432 F07441 F07434 F07435 6 52 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrad
21. Section 3 2 Planning for IBM i Integration Section 3 3 Installing Microsoft Windows Visual Studio Section 3 4 Understanding the Deployment Server Section 3 5 Local Oracle Enterprise Edition OEE Considerations Section 3 6 Obtaining and Preparing the Deployment Server Install Image Section 3 7 Working with JDBC Drivers on the Deployment Server Section 3 8 Installing the Deployment Server Section 3 9 Adding Additional Environments Rerunning the Deployment Server Installer Section 3 10 Downloading and Installing the Latest Software Section 3 11 Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation 3 1 Using IXS Integrated xSeries Server for Deployment This section describes the unique installation of the Microsoft Windows operating system if the Deployment Server is an integrated part of the IBM i After verifying the hardware and software required for the Deployment Server on My Oracle Support requirements are the same as for an external Deployment Server use this section for an overview of the Integrated xSeries Server installation The actual step by step instructions are found on the IBM IBM i Information Center web site see below With this choice the IBM i system arrives with the integrated Deployment Server in a non configured state The integrated server is one of these two types Integrated xSeries Server for IBM i IXS This server is essentially a Personal Computer PC on a card It contai
22. The Machine Server Types form appears 20 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering HTML Web Server Information 20 8 Entering HTML Web Server Information To enter HTML Web Server information a HTML Application Server Pafe x A plan must be associated with an HTML server If you would like to define an HTML server press OK To select an existing HTML server press select Select xX Cancel 1 On the HTML Application Server dialog click OK to continue entering HTML Web Server information or click Select to select an existing HTML Web Server a Typical Installation Plan HTML Server Revisions File Edit Preferences Form Window Help 18 x ov x amp og ju k j q q OK Gan De abe w Window 3 OLE 8 Internet Machine Usage o HTML Application Server Location Denver Machine Name DEVNTA Primary User soe Description ATL Web Server iseries Release E91 0 Host Type fi 0 ASi400 Woretation Deployment Enterpriee ata P crystal ee Primary HTML Server fi Protocol http Server URL fwanoracle com Http Port feo Paih Code Default Login fiderservlethtml login Installation Path Deployment Server Name Tanic m a 2 On HTML Server Revisions complete these fields i Field Description Machine Usage The default value of 30 indicates that this is a HTML Web Server Machine Name Enter the name of your
23. ce 2 Click OK 3 On Data Source Revisions verify the data source for your Business Data Be sure this data source points either to the existing production data source you want to upgrade or to a copy of it Note Business Data data sources are specific to the environment and pathcode 4 When you ran Copy Plan some fields were changed to reflect the previous release values Change the following fields Field Description Data Source Type Enter I for IBM i Access IBM i Database Name Type the name of the data source such as Business Data TEST in the Database Name field 5 Click OK 20 26 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up Environment Data Sources 20 12 3 Setting Up the Data Source for Central Objects You should change the data source if Central Objects are not on an IBM i machine To set up the data source for central objects custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions Eifl File Edit Preferences Form Window Help l x x Hed ae ine Links w Advan BJOLE internet B Data Source Name Central Objects Dv910 Aname Bata Source Use DB Local Data Source Data Source Type fi DB2 UDB on osv4a0 F JDBNET Data Source Poni Data Glage pa Central Objects Platform es400 1BMAS 400 CISC Database Server Name DS2 SQUMEDE ODBC S0LMEDE OLEDE orade D2005 Access o Library Name conva 0 ODBC Data Source
24. utilizes the grower weigh tag functionality value for the country of origin for the lot Manual Table Conversions 13 29 Processing Options for R31P40039 Upgrading from 9 0 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R8976A08 This process copies The process has tobe This UBE has tobe In case the country codes current Country of executed only when executed as a Post in UDC 41 L9 are not the Origin data atItem Lot the customer is using Install from any 9 1 same than UDC 00 CN level used by Argentina Argentina prior releases to 9 1 the user has to define the Localization field Localization and or higher releases mapping between values LRP9 of F4108 tothe selling Imported using the special handling new ORIG field into Items by Sales Order code of UDC 41 L9 That table F4108 module means special handling code of UDC 41 L9 should contains the corresponding country code of UDC 00 CN Execute R8976A08 selecting the correct Lots from F4108 by user data selection For a given record the value into ORIG field of F4108 has to contain the same country than the value of LRP9 field RI5SQAQ To convert old saved This is to be run if Enhanced Query uses User can use the PO queries to new you use Saved Query a different format Template DISSQAOPO to enhanced queries To verify please check if you have records in F98950 table with field UOTY SQ than Saved Query to store the queries Th
25. 910 Merge Log Contains temporary message logging for Planner 910 METGES System Local F98800D Control Tables Process Master Contains multiple language information for Alternative Description the F98800 table F98800T Control Tables Process Master Categorizes Composer processes Supplemental Information F98810D Control Tables Activity Master Contains multiple language information for Alternative Description the F98810 table F98810 Control Tables Activity Master Contains workflow activity information F98811 Control Tables Activity Specifications Contains workflow activity specifications stored as event rules F98830 Control Tables Process Activity Contains workflow activity relationships Associations F98840 Control Tables Organizational Structure Contains the defining data for organizational Master models F98845 Control Tables Organizational Structure Contains the data that ties workflows to Rule organizational models F98860 Control Tables Process Instance Contains the instances of workflow processes F98865 Control Tables Activity Instance Contains the instances of workflow activities within processes F98881 System 910 Specification Merge Contains logging information generated from i Logging the Specification Merge for upgrade update System Local and the Specification Merge and Object Librarian Merge reports F9889 System 910 Deployment Location Lists records for each tier with system and S Master help information This table
26. A O o NI Oy o Tip Do not let the MSDE part of the program name mislead you This program was originally created when EnterpriseOne supported Microsoft s MSDE database It was not renamed when support for OFE was added Be sure the E1Local database is selected Enter the system user s old password in this case enter admin without the quotes in the field Change from password Under To password click on Encrypted E1 Password Click OK Click OK Watch the status bar at the bottom of the dialog for informational messages If changing the password fails attempt to stop and restart the database services OracleServiceEILOCAL and OracleE1LocalTNSListener and then retry ReconfigureMSDE exe 3 11 5 10 Decrypting the Password of the Local Oracle Database To decrypt the system account password 1 O SB Ae SF Pp g Locate this program lt El_install_dir gt system bin32 ReconfigureMSDE exe Right click on ReconfigureMSDE exe and select Run as administrator Tip Do not let the MSDE part of the program name mislead you This program was originally created when EnterpriseOne supported Microsoft s MSDE database It was not renamed when support for OEE was added Be sure the E1Local database is selected Under Change from password click on Encrypted E1 Password Enter the system user s new password in the field To password Reenter the new password and click OK Click OK Watch
27. Abo fea Links w Displ S OLE S Internet Calendar System User Calcula Work Center Data Source DEFAULT g Internal GELI g External Mail Passward ee Internet g Create Shortcut Password Verify fm g Send Shortcut Display all errors currently logged 2 On System User Revisions complete the following fields System User JDE Data Source DEFAULT Password Enter a valid password for your installation Password Verify Enter the same password that you entered in the password field 3 Click OK 4 Click Find to verify the new record was added 12 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up Signon Security PS8OWSEC Work With User Security Q File Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help y A t amp x 3 amp all Select Find Add Copy Del Close Seq New Dis Abo Links User S OLE 8 intemet User ID Role JDE Data Source Business Data AP HP jdeowudb Business Data AP NT jdeowudb Business Data AP RS jdeowudb Business Data AP SN jdeowudb Business Data OWSARSYS JDEOWSAR Business Data OWSARSYSDNT Business Data Prd733u Control Tables OWSARSYS DENNF1 12 B9 SYS9 TC Test Sandbox DB2 400 Te Test Sandbox Oracle TC Test Sandbox SQL 5 On P98OWSEC Work With User Security complete the following field a User ID Role JDE 6 Click Fin
28. After unzipping all DVDs you should have a structure that looks like this c DepSvr Disk1 DeploymentServer Install META INF Misc stage InstallManager exe InstallManager htm InstallManager ico ONEWORLD ICO OracleLogo gif README TXT Caution The directories contained on the Disk2 Disk3 Disk4 Disk5 and Disk6 images are all at the same hierarchal level as the Disk1 DeploymentServer directory When your unzip operation is complete all the files must be in the same structure as the Disk1 DeploymentServer directory You should not have either a Disk2 Disk3 Disk4 Disk5 or Disk6 directory 3 7 Working with JDBC Drivers on the Deployment Server The Deployment Server requires database specific JDBC drivers for several purposes as described below This section describes a Section 3 7 1 Obtaining the JDBC Drivers a Section 3 7 2 Copying the JDBC Drivers to the Deployment Server 3 7 1 Obtaining the JDBC Drivers Based on the database being used on your JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Enterprise Server you should obtain the required java based JDBC driver files from your database vendor Access the current Minimum Technical Requirement MTR listing from My Oracle Support for the proper JDBC driver files to obtain For help with locating MTRs refer to Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications Place the driver files in the location specified in the section of this guid
29. DEdwardsE910 database Oracle Cy Gi Gr Gr Er Gi Q Cr Gy Gr G G sy Gj Ci Q ey Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Directory Structures 23 1 Deployment Server Directory Structure Q DEdwardsE910 database SQL DEdwardsE910 database UDB DEdwardsE910 diagnostics DEdwardsE910 diagnostics config DEdwardsE910 diagnostics config registration DEdwardsE910 path_code DEdwardsE910 path_code bin32 DEdwardsE910 path_code include DEdwardsE910 path_code ini DEdwardsE910 path_code ini sbf DEdwardsE910 path_code java DEdwardsE910 path_code java sbfjars DEdwardsE910 path_code 1ib32 DEdwardsE910 path_code make DEdwardsE910 path_code obj DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE DATA DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE DATACOMP DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA bin32 DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA include DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA java DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA java sbfjars DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA 11ib32 DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA make DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA obj DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA res DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA res actionbmps DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA res AVI Files DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA res FormLines Cj Gy G ey G Ry Gy Ep ys Sey ee i Cy Cy Cy O G
30. Database Server Name DS2 Default Sizing SGUMSDE ODBC SQUMSDE OLEDB Oracle DBZ UDB Recess Logical Library Name foror 0 ODBC Data Source Name Object Librarian 910 1 On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the settings for the Object Librarian data source 2 Click OK 5 4 9 4 Verifying the OWJRNL Data Source To verify the OWJRNL data source 5 32 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade ustom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions Bel d File Edit Preferences Form Window Help l x x aL K ad Links w Advan S OLE B internet j Data Source Name fowRN emen Data Source Use oS Local Data Source Data Source Type DB2 UDB on 05 400 F JDBNET Data Source 8 Data Class is Local Platform jso IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name fent6 SQUMSDE ODBC SGUMSDE OLEDE Oracle DB2 UDB Access Logical Library Name JOWIRNL ODBC Data Source Name JOWIRNL 2255 1 On Data Source Setup verify the accuracy of the OWJRNL data source 2 Click OK 5 4 9 5 Verifying the System Data Source To verify the System data source b ustom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions File Edit Preferences Form Window Help 8 x fhe Ok Len Blew AbD Links w Advan 3 OLE 3 Internet Data Source Name System 910 Data Source Use oe Local Data Sou
31. S OLE S Internet Data Source Name System 900 Data Source Use DB Local Data Source Data Source Type m ORACLE I7 JDBNET Data Source Ss Data Class System Platform JuNux Linux Database Server Name forcivmadb USSEMEDE ODBC SALMEDEOLED pezos De2UDE Acre 4 p ca Object Owner ID Database Name TNS ae 225 4 2 Click the OK button to verify your data source connection information to the System data source on the remote machine 5 50 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 6 Working With Installation Workbench This section discusses Section 6 1 Understanding Workbench Components Section 6 2 Verifying OCM Mappings Section 6 3 Adding an Entry to the Remote Database Directory Section 6 4 Verifying the Language Code Character Set Section 6 5 Working with Unattended Workbench Mode Section 6 6 Solution Explorer Section 6 7 Changing the Status of the Control Table Workbench Tasks Section 6 8 Verify and Update P9PEMOQUE Settings Section 6 9 Starting Installation Workbench Section 6 10 Working With Initial Tasks Workbench Section 6 11 Configuring Your Locations Section 6 12 Configuring Your Data Sources Section 6 13 Configuring Your Environments Section 6 14 Using Machine Workbench Section 6 15 Understanding Control Table Merges Section 6 16 Understanding Table Conversions Section 6 17 Understanding Obsolete Tables Section 6
32. Share name ROOT Description Access Read Write E m Maximum number of users No maximum Maximum users 0 2147483647 Path name Cancel Help 8 Navigate from File New File and complete these fields Share Name Enter this value ROOT a Description Enter the Root directory in IFS a Access Use the pulldown to choose Read Write 9 On IBM i NetServer File Share Properties lt machine_name gt click OK 2 16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Verifying Software and Hardware Requirements Ao iSeries NetServer Dnitsas3 o X File view Help mial DIO iSeries NetServer Dnitsas3 Shared Obj Share shy Shared Objects sAVQDIRSRY 42 QDIRSRY SCQIBM P a ROOT amp Sessions 10 On IBM i NetServer File Share Properties right click on Root and go to properties and make sure that Access is set to Read Write Note The default value is Read only 11 Click OK to save the Read Write setting 2 8 2 3 Starting the EDRSQL Service Tip Alternatively instead of using IBM i Navigator as detailed in this procedure you can logon to a TN5250 session as QSECOFR and invoke this command STRTCPSVR SERVER EDRSQL Before You Begin the Upgrade 2 17 Verifying the Disk Space Requirements Denges Ontsas1 Ontsas Oratses3 Base Oper store Work Management Configuration and Servic Network TCP IP Configurator
33. Table Conversion Workbench Runs the table conversions that convert the technical and application tables to the new format forRelease 9 1 It then updates the F98405 table to indicate completion and writes a conversion log record to the F984052 table Control Table Workbench Runs the batch applications for the planned merges that update the data dictionary user defined codes UDCs Solution Explorer user overrides tables and other control tables It then updates the F98405 table to indicate completion and writes a conversion log record to the F984052 table Also runs the batch application for the planned control table merges to update language files Also runs the batch applications for the planned merges to update the data dictionary It then updates the F98405 table to indicate completion and writes a conversion log record Specification Table Merge Workbench Runs the batch applications that merge custom modifications into the new specification tables It then updates the F98405 table to indicate completion and writes a conversion log record The Object Librarian and Versions List merges are now a part of the specification merge Package Workbench Transfers the F9603 and F9631 tables from the Planner data source to the System 910 data source It then updates the F98404 table to indicate completion See Also Chapter 24 Major Technical Tables in this guide for more information about individual tables and their
34. That is if N is the number of concurrent jobs in the TC Workbench then the data files and transaction log should be as large as the N largest tables combined including all indexes For DB2 400 databases ensure that a Your IBM i machine is running the supported OS version and latest database PTFs as detailed in the MTRs for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Refer to Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications a You do not enable journaling during the conversion a Your Deployment Server is running with the latest iSeries Access PTF 2 5 Checking Modification and Merge Flags This task ensures that your modifications are carried forward to the new release Before you upgrade perform the steps to review or set the modification flags on the Object Librarian records for all modified objects Caution Do not run the Specification merges until you check the flags for all pathcodes containing modified objects To check modification and merge flags 1 Logon to the workstation or to the deployment environment on the Deployment Server 2 On the menu GH9611 select Specification Merge Selection Before You Begin the Upgrade 2 5 Changing the Journal Specification Merge Selection Work with Merge Selections File Edit Preferences Row Window Help vy amp x G amp x Sees Win Gita Ger here Bee MP eee Bets iee Disabl rae Path Code P7333 OOO
35. The new value is saved 10 After you finish setting the Environment Variables repeat this task for User Variables starting from Step 5 in this task Performing Post Upgrade Tasks 11 7 Configuring JD Edwards EnterpriseOne for Use with Vertex Quantum Tax Applications 11 Click OK and reboot the server The new path takes effect 11 4 2 Configuring the Release 9 1 Database Connections for Vertex Quantum Tax Applications To configure Release 9 1 database connections to use the Vertex Quantum applications 1 Inthe Fast Path field enter G731 to access Vertex Quantum Tax Processing The Vertex Quantum Tax Processing panel appears 2 Highlight and right click the Database Connections P7308 program A context menu appears 3 On the context menu select Prompt for Values The Processing Options dialog appears 4 On Processing Options click the Quantum tab and enter the following information Option 1 Enter which Vertex Quantum applications are installed Value Action blank Install both Vertex Quantum tax applications 1 Install the Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax application 2 Install the Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax application Option 2 Enter location information for the databases Value Action blank Define databases for both Vertex Quantum tax applications in the same location 1 Define databases for the Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax and Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax
36. An installer can connect to the JDEdwards E910 shared drive on your Deployment Server from Microsoft Windows Explorer To use a shared drive 1 Double click Instal1Manager exe to start the Release 9 1 installation manager The InstallManager exe file is located in this folder OneWorld Client Install On JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 Installation Manager click Workstation Install On Client Workstation Setup click Next If you do not have the latest version of Microsoft Internet Explorer the Release 9 1 Client Workstation Setup Third Party Application form appears The option to install Internet Explorer is selected To install this application click Next If you do not want to install these applications at this time clear the option for one or both of them and click Next If the latest version of Internet Explorer are already installed the Third Party Application form is not displayed On Client Workstation Setup Package Selection select the package you want to install and click Next Tip Click the Filters ON button to narrow the displayed list of available packages This can help you find the package you want Notice that a short description of each package appears below the list On Client Workstation Setup Type complete these fields 8 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding User Profiles and Languages Field Description Select Setup Type Select Development or
37. Destination Enter or select a name for the installation and the full path where you want to install the product Name JDE_PPack910_HOME Ly Path Z JDEdwardsPPackiE91 0 Y Browse cD E r C3 9 On Specify Home Details complete these fields Name Enter a unique name for the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack installation For example JDE_PPack910_HOME By default the installer populates the values on this screen with _1 suffix The _1 suffix can be removed if desired The actual value between Name and Path need not be consistent It is only used by the Oracle Universal Installer If desired change the install location from the c drive During the installation process itself only a small amount of disk space is required on the Microsoft Windows machine for the Oracle Inventory for this install and a few temporary text files like jde ini a Path Enter the drive and directory where you want the files installed on your Enterprise Server For example 4 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i Z JDEdwardsPPack E910 10 Click the Next button If you chose the Typical installation type the Available Products screen will not display you can skip to the Step 12 If you chose the Custom installation type the Oracle Universal Installer displays a list of available JD Edwards EnterpriseOne product components as show
38. E910 system resource 910 system Classes samples Gp 910 system includev unicode E910 system locale iconv 910 system locale uconvtab Gp E910 system locale xml E910 system resource cidfont E910 system resource cmap Gp E910 system resource encoding E910 system resource font E910 system resource iccprofile a E910 system resource truetype n E910 system resource font pfm aA A T a E A E O E DM DF ODF OD OD OD TD OD TD TD DD DT DD OD T 23 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 24 Major Technical Tables This chapter lists the major technical tables in the Release 9 1 data sources This chapter does not list any Release 9 1 application tables All technical media storage objects GTxxx are listed at the end of this chart Many tables exist in multiple data sources Some tables exist in data sources not noted here Note The Local pathcode data source refers only to local databases that are path code specific In the chart below Local pathcode could represent more than one data source depending on the number of path codes you use Pathcode is one or more of the following path codes PY910 DV910 PS910 PD910 DEP910 Note The Local data source refers only to the local database on the Deployment Server which is used by the planner environment Specific tables in the list below refl
39. Enter the Environment for the database to be created Leave this field blank Enter the Data Source for the database to be created Leave this field blank Enter a 1 to load Production Data or a 2 to load Demonstration Data Enter 2 The default is 1 If this report is called from another process the system passes in this flag Enter the source Data Source for Loading of Data Enter OneWorld Local If this report is called from another process the system passes in this flag Enter the Source Environment for the database to be copied from Leave this field blank If this report is called from another process the system passes in this flag Working with Reports 25 3 Environment Database Creation Report R98403 The Update Tab contains the following options Option Value Enter a 1 for Proof Mode or a 2 to create the Enter 2 Environment Database The default is Proof Mode Enter a A to recreate existing tables in data sources that Leave this field blank alovgattomatic table creation The default is not to recreate tables Enter a 1 to only copy tables that exist in the source data Leave this field blank source Enter a Y to add records without clearing the target Leave this field blank table This is used for language tables The default is to clear the target table The Print Tab contains these options Option Value Enter a 1 to only print exceptions Lea
40. EnterpriseOne structures 2 7 5 2 Backing Up the Enterprise Server Prior to beginning the upgrade you should back up the complete directory structure for the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne base installation To back up your IBM i based Enterprise Server 1 Save all data libraries that contain JD Edwards EnterpriseOne tables using the SAVLIB command 2 Save all JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system libraries using the SAVLIB command 3 Save the specifications for all pathcodes using the SAV command 2 7 5 3 Backing Up the Oracle Databases To back up your Oracle databases 1 Fully export all instances one at a time 2 Perform a cold back up of the complete Oracle database 2 7 6 Working with Purge Tables These tables have changed format from Release 9 1 a F31115 a F31125 a 311225 The upgrade process will drop and recreate these tables These are Purge tables and the upgrade process does not preserve the data in purge tables 2 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Verifying Software and Hardware Requirements 2 7 7 Working with Accounts Payable Processing If you are upgrading you must use the Work with Payment Groups application P04571 to reset or finish write and update all accounts payable processing The Financials department or financials consultant can assist you with this task Note Failure to accomplish this task causes data corruption in accounts payable processing files To
41. Gy JDEdwardsE910 Sol DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE910 Solu DEdwardsE910 Solu DEdwardsE910 Solu jocumentation DEdwardsE910 Sol DEdwardsE910 Sol DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl nterview Questions_files tionExp1l tionExpl tionExp1l tionExp1 tionExpl 10 SolutionExp1 tionExpl tionExpl tionExpl u tionExpl Lu lutionExpl lu lu lu DEdwardsE910 Solu DEdwardsE910 Solu DEdwardsE910 Solu DEdwardsE910 Solu eport Script_files DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl ayments Script_files DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl eceivables Script_files DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl nd Report Questions_files DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl ayments Questions_files DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl eceivables Questions_file DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl DEdwardsE910 SolutionExpl ti_cnf DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 LU LU LU LU LU LU 10 SolutionExp1 10 SolutionExp1 10 SolutionExp1 10 system 10 system bin32 DEdwardsE910 system bin32 DEdwardsE910 system Class DEdwardsE910 system Class orer orer orer orer Concept To Opportunity Concept To Opportunity CustomWorks Concept To Opportunity CustomWorks Object Model orer orer orer orer Consumption To Reorder Demand To Available Demand To Available MakeProduct Demand To Available MakeProduct Ma
42. If you enter invalid information into a tab field a stop sign symbol appears next to the tab name such as Deployment Server For more information about the error click the stop sign icon in the bottom right hand corner of the form 5 Click OK Tip If you enter invalid information into a tab field a stop sign symbol appears next to the tab name such as Deployment Server For more information about the error click the stop sign icon in the bottom right hand corner of the form Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 7 Entering Enterprise Server Information a Deployment Server Piel x Would you like to add another Deployment Server In order to distribute client installation load more than one deployment server can be defined for a location If you would like to define an additional deployment server press Yes Other wise press No to continue X No 6 To continue with Remote Installation Planner setup click No 19 6 Entering Enterprise Server Information Note During the definition of the Enterprise Server a port number must be defined While Enterprise Servers running the same release can use the same port number an Enterprise Server running two different versions of software must use two different port numbers a Enterprise Server iof Xx Aplan must be associated with an enterprise server Ifyou would like to define an enterprise server press OK To select an existing ent
43. Note Installation Workbench for the Pristine Environment must be completed before proceeding with following steps Continue upgrading your desired environments 5 1 5 Running Table Conversions Locally The functionality to run the Table Conversions locally on the Deployment Server is still available and works much as it did in previous releases Run Table Conversions on the Enterprise Server in order to minimize Upgrade time Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 3 Working with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Software Requirements If you choose to run your Table Conversions locally instead of on the Enterprise Server some steps in the Mandatory Pre Upgrade Procedure must still be completed before running the Installation Workbench These are a Installing latest Tools Release Loading latest Planner Update These steps are described in the Section 5 1 4 Mandatory Pre Upgrade Process Upgrading the Pristine Environment 5 1 6 Deferring Index Builds Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 Beginning with JD Edwards Tool Release 9 1 Update 2 if you want to defer index builds during the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne upgrade process refer to the Chapter of this guide entitled Chapter 5 Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade in the section of that chapter entitled Section 6 16 5 Deferring Index Builds During Table Conversion Workbench Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 5 2 Working with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
44. Refer to the individual applications to set up and use multiple languages 1 6 2 Database Character Set and Code Page Considerations Data within a database is defined by a set of parameters Each character within the database is identified by a specific language preference code value A collection of characters within a defined database is called a character set or code page A character set or code page setting is a scheme for encoding character data Every character is defined by a unique hexadecimal value These values can change between databases and languages Every language is represented by at least one character set Some character sets may contain multiple languages For example the Western European character set contains all characters common to the Western European languages Aa Zz and all special characters unique to specific languages such as and Asian character sets are specific to one language The software uses code page conversions to control the consistent or desired display of data A code page conversion adjusts the hexadecimal values of different characters so that the appearance of text on the desktop is the same with different code pages When installing or upgrading the database set up the code page for the language before loading your language specifics for Release 9 1 See Also Section 1 6 3 1 Single Byte and Double Byte Considerations to determine the LocalCodeSet and code page settings for you
45. Remote Access Serv 1 29 of 29 objects Qs Trous nas Nore Wet song Ropeed T System Debug Rogees Management Contra Rated Tiun Ropeed cmon Rogged Fe ASP Tome st Rated To Triggmred Cache Manager Stopped forte sated Tuo Raed Troe Roped Remote Execution Roped A Rated Tmt Rated Started Rated BRAOUS Network Access Server Webfscing server Gatxa vysto deasg server Mansgenert Contra Oatalinks Fie Server CIM AST Tomcat server Triggered coche manager rP vo Po Remote execion sup Tot HTTP adraristration IEM Cirectory Server for Garies LDAP 1 On IBM i Navigator while still on Network Servers TCP IP right click on EDRSQL choose Properties 2 Cancel Help to enable this setting Start when TCP IP is started On Setting Up AS 400 TCP IP ServicesEDRSQL Properties click in the checkbox 2 9 Verifying the Disk Space Requirements The amount of disk space you need for Release 9 1 software on the Deployment Server and Enterprise Server depends on many variables according to platform and database For the Deployment Server all disk space must be available on one drive except if you 2 18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Applying Microsoft Product Updates use the Remote Share option With the Remote Share option there must be enough room on one remote share for all the path codes For Enterprise Server installation multiple foundations during the install are not supp
46. The user to whom an email is sent once a package is deployed The default for Primary User is JDE 3 On the Data tab complete the following field 20 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering Shared Data Source Information Field Description Data Source Type Choose the type of data source For example a I IBMi 4 Click OK 5 To add another Data Server click Yes and repeat steps 1 through 4 to define another Data Server 6 On Data Source click OK to continue entering unique shared data source information or click Take Defaults to select the default data for the shared data sources 7 On Location select Yes to add another location or click No to continue with Installation Planner 20 10 Entering Shared Data Source Information This section discusses m Section 20 10 1 Specifying Custom or Default Shared Data Source Setup Information m Section 20 10 2 Verifying the Data Source for Data Dictionary Section 20 10 3 Verifying the Object Librarian Data Source a Section 20 10 4 Verifying the OWJRNL Data Source a Section 20 10 5 Verifying the System Data Source 20 10 1 Specifying Custom or Default Shared Data Source Setup Information When you are prompted to enter the data source information for the shared data sources to use the Release 9 1 data sources click Take Defaults or click OK to specifically enter the data source information See Also For more info
47. This section discusses Section 14 4 1 Verifying Available Space in DBMS 14 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Reviewing Pre Package Build Issues Section 14 4 2 Section 14 4 3 Section 14 4 4 Section 14 4 5 Section 14 4 6 Verifying Specific UBEs are Mapped Locally Verifying the Server Side Settings Configuring the Enterprise Server for Simultaneous Builds Adding a Security Override for Running Package Build Verifying UNICODE Settings When Upgrading From Xe 14 4 1 Verifying Available Space in DBMS Package Deployment will copy the Central Objects tables in your server database to a new set of Metadata Specifications tables in the same database Verify there is enough free disk space for this extra copy Note the space used by your Central Objects tables and their indexes The new set of Metadata Specifications tables will use additional space approximately the same size for a full package as your current Central Objects tables plus indexes Those tables are F98306 F98710 F98711 F98712 F98713 F98720 F98740 F98741 F98743 F98745 F98750 F98751 F98752 F98753 F98760 F98761 F98762 If you do not have enough free space to accommodate these tables you must free up some disk space or drop the metadata specifications tables for old packages no longer in use 14 4 2 Verifying Specific UBEs are Mapped Locally To verify that specific UBEs are mapped locally
48. Understanding Table Conversions a Custom Installation Plan Advanced Parameters Ei fal File Edit preferences Form Window Help a1 x an te Links T Optio S OLE S Internet Plan Name PD910UPG Library List Name PD910 E910 Production Environment Previous Environment PD812 E812 Production Environment Object Configuration Manager V Recreate Object Mappings Table Specification Control Table Merges JV Table Conversions C None I Specification Merges Upgrade Merges TC Properties Logic Data Source Table Conversion Throttle 6 16 3 4 Configuring Queues The job queues GH9013 are implemented in the queue kernel During the Initial Tasks Workbench the Release Master copies the default queue set up during the plan to the Enterprise Server job queue table On your IBM i make sure you set up QBATCH to match the TC Throttle you set in the plan You must also select a Queue Type of iSeries and use IBM i tools to configure the queue CHGJOBQE 6 16 3 5 Starting Table Conversions To start Table Conversions run Installation Workbench If you are in Unattended Mode a task break is displayed before Table Conversion Workbench reminding you to set up your Enterprise Server If you press Stop on the task break you will need to press the Convert All exit to start the conversions When running conversions on the Deployment Server the R98405 program is l
49. Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 9 Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options W Processing Options xi Default Mode Status Change Completion Replication 4 gt After defining a plan there are several processes which can be run For each of the processes enter one of the following values O Do not automatically run 1 Prompt to be run 2 Run automatically Finalize Plan The default for this process is 2 e to run automatically a Validate Plan The default for this process is 2 e to run automatically e Help x Cancel 2 On the Completion tab complete the fields using these values After defining the plan the options on this tab specify which processes are run one of the following values Value Description 0 Do not run automatically 1 Prompt to be run 2 Run automatically a Finalize Plan Enter the default option 2 to run automatically a Validate Plan Enter the default option 2 to run automatically 5 3 3 6 Specifying Replication Options To specify replication options 1 Select the Replication tab 5 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options W Processing Options Ea Status Change Completion Replication Packages 4 gt Enter one of the following values for each remote location option O Do not use and do not prompt H Prompt for op
50. a Location and size changes for controls Sequence changes for tabs or columns Custom forms on existing JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications are not preserved A set of visual merge tools have been provided to assist in retrofitting custom modifications 1 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding the Upgrade Process Refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Development Tools Form Design Aid Guide for more information on Visual Merge Tools and FDA Compare 1 2 1 2 Report Rules These rules apply to report specifications that were created using Report Design Aid all are batch merges An upgrade preserves these changes New reports a New elements to existing JD Edwards EnterpriseOne reports including Constants a Alpha variables a Numeric variables a Data variables a Runtime variables Database variables a Dictionary variables Any style changes such as fonts and colors a Location and size changes for objects a Data dictionary overrides Custom sections in existing JD Edwards EnterpriseOne reports are not preserved 1 2 1 3 Application Text Changes An upgrade does not automatically preserve overrides done in Form Design Aid or Interactive Vocabulary Overrides They must be retrofit using FDA Visual Merge 1 2 1 4 UBE Text Changes An upgrade automatically preserves overrides done in Report Design Aid or Batch Vocabulary Overrides 1 2 1 5 Table Specification Rule
51. a Prototype PY910 a Pristine PS910 Development DV910 a Production PD910 a HTML Web Server J 1 5 2 Planner Environment JDEPLAN The software installation and upgrade process includes a planning stage called the planner environment Using this approach you can define the main components of your software configuration without affecting the production environment Every environment must have an associated pathcode and a set of OCM mappings The planner environment uses a planner pathcode which is shipped with the software and a set of OCM mappings which point to a planner database All pathcodes share a complete set of runtime central objects on the Deployment Server 1 5 2 1 Planner Pathcode Release 9 1 provides a full set of runtime objects which are used during the installation process The software stores these objects on the Deployment Server in the planner directory The planner pathcode contains the only complete set of runtime central objects on the Deployment Server which are shared by all pathcodes The planner pathcode includes preloaded packages used during the update specification merge process A package indicates the necessary objects for a workstation a point in time snapshot of the central objects on the Deployment Server and where the installation program finds them 1 5 2 2 Planner Database All information created and updated during the planning stage is saved in these Oracle tablespaces JDE
52. are commercial computer software pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation of the programs including any operating system integrated software any programs installed on the hardware and or documentation shall be subject to license terms and license restrictions applicable to the programs No other rights are granted to the U S Government This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications that may create a risk of personal injury If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure its safe use Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International Inc AMD Opteron the AMD logo and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or
53. m Section 6 5 2 Setting a Task Break in Unattended Workbench Mode 6 5 1 Selecting Attended or Unattended Workbench Mode The workbenches can be run manually attended workbench mode or automatically unattended workbench mode When running Workbench in unattended mode start Installation Workbench as described below and then the status of each workbench is displayed as the workbench begins Unattended workbench is the default value In unattended workbench if an error is encountered in any of the individual workbenches the process stops After fixing the error unattended workbench resumes where it left off To choose attended workbench mode 1 Open the System Installation Tools menu GH961 2 Right click on Installation Workbench 3 Select Prompt For and then Values The Processing Options form appears 4 Inthe appropriate field enter 1 for unattended workbench mode or 0 zero for attended workbench mode The default value is 1 unattended 5 Click OK Work with Installation Plan appears 6 5 2 Setting a Task Break in Unattended Workbench Mode In unattended workbench you can set task breaks before or after any of the individual workbenches You can use the task break to verify successful completion of a workbench or for other tasks For example set a task break after Table Conversion Workbench to verify that all table conversions completed successfully An automatic task break occurs after Control Table Workbench p
54. r G Q Ep Cr Gy O Gy i DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA res Icons DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA res images DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA res treebmps DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA source DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA spec DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA spec runtimeCache DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA work DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA work sbf DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA work sbf oas DEdwardsE910 path_code PACKAGE path_codeFA work sbf oas META INF DEdwardsE910 path_code res DEdwardsE910 path_code res actionbmps DEdwardsE910 path_code res AVI Files DEdwardsE910 path_code res FormLines DEdwardsE910 path_code res Icons DEdwardsE910 path_code res images DEdwardsE910 path_code res treebmps DEdwardsE910 path_code source DEdwardsE910 path_code spec DEdwardsE910 path_code spec runtimeCache DEdwardsE910 path_code work DEdwardsE910 path_code work sbf DEdwardsE910 path_code work sbf oas DEdwardsE910 path_code work sbf oas META INF Cy iy Cy Ey ey Q Q ally a Cy Cy G G Gy G Cy icy Gy Gy G ee es Q Q Note In the preceding paths the path_code portion is DV910 PD910 PS910 or PY910 23 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Deployment Server Directory Structure Note The sub structure as this parent directory PACKAGE path_co
55. v8941018 Note By default all values for the Defer Index column are set to N do not defer index build 4 Change the value in the Defer Index column to Y for any TC for which you do not want to build indexes during the Table Conversion Workbench 5 Click the Save button 6 Run the Upgrade plan to execute the Table Conversion Workbench that includes your specified Defer Index settings If the TC Workbench does not complete successfully you will see that the Error Text History Status field is updated with the below value for any table that was marked as Defer Index Build Indexes Below is an example TC Workbench where the Defer Index value was set pP9840TC Standalone Table Conversion Workbench J Ele Edt Preferences Form Row Window Help x E a D w amp 3 eosa ANAP Na Con DBS AB inks w Conve OLE Bjinternet Plan Name cone Concurrent Indexes New Status eo Asynch R Run TC on Deployment Server Max Concurrent I Tracing On r Mode i Be Installed Lacan 13003 60 instalted R893003F xJOE0001 139 138 Bui Indexes Pes Faon feo installed MERGE V894101B 157 0 Detail F091 60 Installed FALTER 201 0 Foso1 60 installed MERGE vegosora 402 0 Build indexes j FO1131M 60 Installed ALTER j aj oj i Build Indexes be j i For the above TC Workbench results screen the values of the Defer Index column are
56. 11 Adding Entries to the System Reply List Section 4 3 12 Rebuilding Cross Reference Tables on the IBM i 4 3 1 Understanding the Prerequisites Verify this list of prerequisites is met prior to installing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack on your IBM i based Enterprise Server Refer to the Language Process Overview for the National Language Support tables and other information related to multilingual installations Install the requisite IBM i upgrades Verify that you have met the hardware and software requirements for the Release 9 1 release you are installing See Release 9 1 Hardware and Software Requirements If you prefer to perform the configuration tasks in this chapter set up TCP IP and IBM i Access in a language other than the language for which the IBM i is currently configured change the value for the code character set ID For example to perform these configuration tasks in English set the code character set ID to 37 After completing these configuration tasks reset the code character set ID to its original value 4 3 2 Understanding Security for the Platform Pack Installer The following is a list of security actions performed by the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Installer 1 2 3 4 Recreates the ONEWORLD job description Creates the user profiles for JOE and ONEWORLD each with user class PGMR Grants the JDE user rights to the ONEWORLD user profile Grant rights to QRECOVERY library for users J
57. 16 5 Using JD Edwards Compare and Merge Tools 16 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 17 Troubleshooting This chapter discusses a Section 17 1 Using the PORTTEST Checklist m Section 17 2 Resolving Data Errors a Section 17 3 Planner Update Special Instructions a Section 17 4 Resolving Errors Due to Lack of ALLOBJ and JOBCTL Authority 17 1 Using the PORTTEST Checklist If the PORTTEST program fails to run use this checklist to diagnose the problem before calling Global Customer Support Please have the answers to these questions as well as copies of error messages your Enterprise Server and any error logs such as JDE log or JDE_xx log PORTTEST may fail if replication security server or transaction processing have been installed incorrectly If problems occur after the installation of one or more of these services check the setup of those services for incorrect parameters Additionally if PORTTEST reports warnings that indicate data dictionary or company constants are invalid it may be because the F0010 table is empty As is true with the full JD Edwards EnterpriseOne installation this is a normal condition in Pristine and Production environments General Issues Yes No Is the user logged on with administrator privileges Is the JDENET Service starting with a network domain user Is the JDENET Service account included in the local administrator group Are al
58. 18 Understanding Specification Table Merges Section 6 19 Using the Package Workbench Section 6 20 Using Remote Location Workbench Section 6 21 Finishing Installation Workbench 6 1 Understanding Workbench Components After planning the Release 9 1 upgrade using Installation Planner you should run the plan using Installation Workbench The logic of this program runs specific workbench programs according to the plan you created Working With Installation Workbench 6 1 Understanding Workbench Components For example if you are upgrading and not installing when performing a data only upgrade you do not incorporate the specification merges into your plan therefore the Specification Table Merge Workbench is not displayed Installation Workbench can be run in attended mode or unattended mode In attended mode you start each workbench after the previous workbench completes In unattended mode the default value each workbench runs without user intervention You can set task breaks before or after any specific workbench to stop the process at any point If using unattended mode you must check that each task ran successfully This section describes Section 6 1 1 Verifying the Network Share on the Deployment Server Section 6 1 2 Loading Data Demo Data and Production Data a Section 6 1 3 Creating the Job Queue m Section 6 1 4 Deferring Indexes for Table Conversion Workbench Tools Release 9 1 Update 2
59. 1og file in the printqueue directory a The table conversions shown below are cumulative for whatever previous version you are upgrading from the conversions shown in the table are carried out plus conversions shown in all subsequent tables For example if you are upgrading from OneWorld version B73 3 the conversions shown in the first table occur plus those shown in the subsequent tables Note The table F76B0411 is not shipped in Xe base If you did not apply the localization ASU which contained the table you will see a status of TC Inp Spec Tbl Mismatch next to this TC This is normal 6 16 4 3 Understanding Table Format Verification The best way to verify table formats is to run R9698711 version XJDE0001 Audit results of TC Workbench to make sure all tables in correct format Change Environment name to your upgraded environment This UBE lists all of the tables that differ from the specifications Before You Begin Before you run the report you should add Data Selection with these values Data Selection g Yy X OK Can Enter condition by selecting from the options provided in each cell of the template below You may either use the mouse or type the initial characters to select an option Operator Lett onerand Comparison Right operand where BC Product Code F9860 SY is not equal to 656 89 Jand BC Data Class F9860 CLDF is equalto BT jAnd BC Object Type F9860 FUNO is equal t
60. 2 On Data Server Revisions complete these fields Field Description Machine Usage The default value of 25 indicates that this is a Database Server Machine Name Enter the name of the Database Server where your central objects reside If you are using the IBM i to store your central objects enter the name of this server The name is case sensitive should not exceed 15 characters and should not contain any special characters Description Enter a description of the Database Server machine Release Enter the release number you are installing for example E910 Host Type Select the type of Database Server that you are adding to the plan Values are a 10 IBMi 25 Sun Solaris a 30 RS 6000 a 35 Linux a 50 Microsoft Windows Intel a 80 Client Microsoft Windows a 90 Client Microsoft Windows Location The Installation Planner populates this field by default based on previous selections Primary User The user to whom an email is sent once a package is deployed The default for Primary User is JDE 3 On the Data tab complete the following field Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 29 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Field Description Data Source Type Choose the type of data source For example a I IBMi 4 Click OK 5 To add another Data Server click Yes and repeat steps 1 through 4 to define another Data Server 6 On Data Sour
61. 4 Verifying Custom Changes in Master Control Tables To verify custom changes in master control tables 1 Verify that the previous release s master control tables for the data dictionary reside in a relational database accessed by the Data Dictionary data source a F9200 a F9202 a F9203 a F9207 a F9210 a F9211 a F9212 a GT92002 F00165 Verify that the previous release s master control tables for menus reside in a relational database accessed by the Control Tables Production data source for production Control Tables CRP for PY environments or Control Tables Test for the development environment a 9100 a 9101 a F9102 Before You Begin the Upgrade 2 9 Refreshing and Verifying Data a F9105D a F9106D 3 Verify that the B73 3 x or B9 master control tables for user defined codes reside in a relational database accessed by the Control Tables Production data source for production Control Tables CRP for PY environments or Control Tables Test for the development environment 2 7 5 Backing Up the Servers and Databases This section discusses Section 2 7 5 1 Backing up the Deployment Server Section 2 7 5 2 Backing Up the Enterprise Server a Section 2 7 5 3 Backing Up the Oracle Databases 2 7 5 1 Backing up the Deployment Server The Deployment Server must be completely backed up because some JD Edwards EnterpriseOne objects exist in directories other than normal JD Edwards
62. Choose your region OS 400 version and language This web site provides the installation configuration operational and general use information for the IXS and IXA features This topic is also available as a printable PDF file Locate the documentation searching for Windows Server It is advisable to read through the entire Microsoft Windows server on IBM i topic especially the Pre installation Checklist as you will need to be familiar with most of these points concerning the Integration software hardware and set up process 3 2 Planning for IBM i Integration The steps in this section correspond to those in the topic Plan for IBM i Integration for Microsoft Windows Server installation for Microsoft Windows 2000 or Microsoft Windows 2003 Server These are the main basis of the installation with helpful hints highlighted 1 Microsoft Windows Server Installation Advisor This step consists of answering configuration questions either via the worksheet or on the web site using the interactive wizard After you answer the questions to the Microsoft Windows Server installation advisor it displays the Planning Worksheet which provides a summary of the values that were specified on the previous panels of the advisor An example is shown below Field Description Network server description Name AS4IXS1 Description Deployment Microsoft Windows 2000 Lin06 1 6 GHz 1 GB memory Hardware type 2892 Resource name 1in06 Micros
63. Creation Version fuDE0033 iC Express Install Source Environment DEPLAN Planner Business Data Local C Source Data Source 323s best Note The data load radio buttons on this form are no longer applicable as of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 because data is automatically loaded by the Platform Pack Installer For additional details refer to Section 6 1 2 Loading Data Demo Data and Production Data 20 11 3 Verifying Advanced Parameters If you turned off Default Advanced Parameters on the Environment selection form the Advanced Parameters form appears To verify advanced parameters 20 22 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up Environments a Custom Installation Plan Advanced Parameters ital File Edit Preferences Form Window Help LZ V e OK Can Dis Abo z Links w Optio 481 x OLE Internet j V Upgrade Environment Plan Name PROD Library List Name Previous Environment PD910 PD900 UCTION E910 Production Environment E900 Production Environment 1 Object Configuration Manager IV Recreate Object Mappings L lable Specticaon ee ed Control Table Merges _ wal V Table Conversions r None IV Specification Merges Upgrade Merges CTC Propels n n Logic Data Source Table Conv
64. Database setup and management Enterprise platforms and operating systems JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Foundation Guide JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Configurable Network Computing Implementation Guide JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools System Administration Guide JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Server and Workstation Administration Guide JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Security Administration Guide At a minimum review these guides before beginning In addition it is recommended to complete the database product courses that your database vendors provide 1 2 Understanding the Upgrade Process This documentation explains the process used to upgrade Release 9 1 software using the upgrade process which consists of these steps Install the Deployment Server see Concurrent Installation below for concurrent operations Install the Platform Pack see Concurrent Installation below for concurrent operations Set up the installation plan by running Installation Planner Run the Installation Workbench Install the HTML Web Server 1 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding the Upgrade Process Note A JD Edwards EnterpriseOne HTML Web Server is mandatory to run web enabled JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications which includes all end user applications and selected tools applications This guide only describes the definition of the HTML Web Server in r
65. Displays the default value of 15 to indicate that this is a Deployment Server Machine Name Enter the name of your Deployment Server The name is case sensitive should not exceed 15 characters and should not contain any special characters Description Enter a description of the machine name This name includes the location with which this Deployment Server is associated and whether or not it is the primary server Release Enter the Release 9 1 release number that you are installing or use the visual assist button to choose one from the list For example E910 is the current release Host Type Displays the default value of 50 to indicate that the server type is an Intel NT Location Displays the default location chosen for this plan Primary User Enter the user to whom email is sent when a package is deployed The default for Primary User is JDE 3 On the Deployment tab complete these fields Field Description Primary Deployment Server Enter the hierarchy of the servers Type 0 zero if a primary Deployment Server for the location exists and this is a secondary server Type 1 if this is the primary Deployment Server for the location Server Share Path 4 Click OK Enter the server share path where you installedRelease 9 1 on your Deployment Server Make sure that this path is specific to your version of the release For example for Release 9 1 the path ends with E910 Tip
66. Enter 2 Environment Database The default is Proof Mode Enter a A to recreate existing tables in data sources that Leave this field blank allow aut mitie tableicreatiori The default is not to recreate tables Enter a 1 to only copy tables that exist in the source data Leave this field blank cores The default is to copy all tables Enter a Y to add records without clearing the target Enter N table to indicate you do not want to add records without clearing the target table This is used for language tables The default is to clear the target table The Print Tab contains this option Option Enter a 1 to only print exceptions Value Leave this field blank The default is to print all lines The Licensing Tab contains these options Option Value Enter a Y to create all tables or an N to create licensed Leave this field blank ners The default is to create all tables Enter a Y to print all tables in the report or an N to print Leave this field blank licensed tables only The default is to print all tables 25 3 1 3 Version XJDE0024 for Running Pristine Data The Environment Tab contains these options Option Value Enter the Environment for the database to be created Leave this field blank Enter the Data Source for the database to be created Leave this field blank Enter a 1 to load Production Data or a 2 to load Enter 2 Demonstration Data The default is to load prod
67. File Edit Prefererces Form Window Help S x amp amp OK Can Dis AB ines w Deplo S OLE B Internet 18 x Plan Information Name jurara SOS Description Upgrade Installation Plan Status pooo In Planning Install Type Insiall Upgrade C Sotware Update WEES Release From Release B7333 Al To Release E910 r Table Conversion Properties Run TC on Deployment Sever I Tracing Po sf 1 On Installation Planner complete the following fields Field Description Name Enter the name of your plan Description Enter the description of your plan Status Select 10 This is the default value Install Type Select Upgrade If the Installation Planner detects registry settings indicating a previous installation of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has been installed on this Deployment Server it automatically changes the Install Type to Upgrade You can also manually change the Install Type to Upgrade If the previous installation of the Deployment Server is on a different machine or if this installation is on a remote Deployment Server the Install Type will be set to Install In either of these cases you must manually change the Install Type to Upgrade and the Installation Planner will prompt you for the data source information in a subsequent screen From Release Enter the number of the r
68. HTML Web Server The name is case sensitive should not exceed 15 characters and should not contain any special characters Description Enter a description of the HTML Web Server machine Release Enter E910 to indicate the release number that you are installing Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 11 Entering HTML Web Server Information Field Description Host Type The default value of 50 specifies the server type as Intel NT Select the correct server type Location The location chosen for this plan appears in this field by default Primary User The user to whom an email is sent when a package is deployed The default for Primary User is listed in the jde ini 3 On the HTML tab complete these fields Field Description Primary HTML Server When the system code generates an email message with a web shortcut pointing to a form the web shortcut generated points to the Primary HTML Web Server Only one of all the HTML Web Servers defined in installation planner can be defined as primary 1 Protocol This is the protocol used by the HTML Web Server Valid values are http or https Server URL This is the Domain Name System DNS host name of the HTML Web Server For example www oracle com HTTP Port This is the port number the HTML Web Server is listening to For HTTP the typical port number is 80 For HTTPS the typical port number is 443 Note You ca
69. IXS card and instructing you to continue at the Microsoft Windows server console if the hardware is not attached in advance you will have to vary off the IXS and repeat this step Copy the resulting command containing your choices onto your green screen similar to this one INSWNTSVR NWSD your server name INSTYPE FULL RSRCNAME your communication line DMNROLE SERVER WNTVER WIN2000 TCPPORTCFG 1 10 230 14 90 255 255 255 0 10 224 1 124 EVTLOG ALL SVRSTGSIZE xxx yyyy CVINTFS YES TOWRKGRP workgroup RSTDDEVRSC NONE TEXT Deployment Win2k lin06 1 6 GHz 1 GB memory where xxx is the size of your installation source drive and yyyy is the size of your Microsoft Windows C drive Be sure to put the first Microsoft Windows install CD into your IBM i CD ROM drive and hit Enter This command loads Microsoft Windows and creates your C and D drives out of IBM i disk a C drive for boot and Microsoft Windows system drive and a D drive for Microsoft Windows installation source drive 3 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Planning for IBM i Integration Note The green screen will remain input inhibited until the completion indicator is shown and responded to at the Microsoft Windows server console Now move to the Microsoft Windows screen 4 Continue the Microsoft Windows 2000 or Microsoft Windows 2003 Server Installation from the Microsoft Windows server console Thi
70. Installation Problems Section 3 11 5 7 Runtime Problems Section 3 11 5 8 Administering the Local Oracle Database Using SQL Plus Section 3 11 5 9 Encrypting the Password of the Local Oracle Database Section 3 11 5 10 Decrypting the Password of the Local Oracle Database Section 3 11 5 11 Import and Export Tablespaces to the Local Oracle Database Section 3 11 5 12 Updating the InstallManager htm File Section 3 11 5 13 Deployment inf and lt Package_name gt inf 3 42 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation 3 11 5 1 File Locations This section discusses the location for these critical files a Section 3 11 5 1 1 Oracle Installation Directory Section 3 11 5 1 2 OEE Logs a Section 3 11 5 1 3 tnsnames ora 3 11 5 1 1 Oracle Installation Directory Deployment Server The default installation location of the local Oracle database on the Deployment Server is C Oracle ElLocal Note This location can be changed at installation time Client The default installation location of the local Oracle database on the Web Development Client also called the Administration client or fat client or workstation is C Oracle ElLocal Note This location can be changed at installation time 3 11 5 1 2 OEE Logs The following table lists the locations of the various log files Log File Location Import for Planner lt El_install_
71. JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server see the section in this guide entitled Section 3 8 4 Understanding Destination Paths Each Oracle product that is installed on a machine has what is termed an Oracle Home path This path contains all the files for each Oracle product This path has a user specified name as well Working with the Deployment Server 3 29 Installing the Deployment Server On Specify Home Details complete these fields Field Description Name Enter a name for the Oracle Home for the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server For example JDE_DEP910_HOME Path The path you enter here is for the Oracle Home path where the E1 Deployment Server will be installed For example the path might be C JDEdwards E910 Do not specify the same Oracle Home name or path into which you installed the local database however you can specify a path that is a subdirectory of the database s Parent Oracle Home For local installation you must use the default value For remote installation this value must be the letter designation of the mapped drive For additional details refer to the section of this chapter entitled Section 3 8 4 Understanding Destination Paths 10 Select the Next button Tip If you chose Typical installation on the preceding screen Select Installation Type you can skip directly to Step 16 located later in this task to complete the Deployment Server installation If you ch
72. JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Enterprise Server 1 To determine the number of prestart jobs that are available and have been submitted for program QZDASOINIT enter this command DSPACTPJ QUSRWRK QSYS QZDASOINIT Information about the number of your system s prestart jobs prestart jobs submitted and program start requests appears The number of prestart jobs depends on the number of concurrent and active ODBC user connections This change is iterative as users or applications are added or removed If you do not have enough prestart jobs your system could be slow to make connections If connections fail they could be successful with the second attempt If too many prestart jobs are waiting the system will end some of them automatically Also the system initiates prestart jobs as additional ones are submitted Note Troubleshooting To determine the number of prestart jobs you should set up be aware that each OneWorld user typically uses three to five ODBC connections Each ODBC connection uses one QZDASOINIT program Therefore the initial value for QZDASOINIT could be set to four times the number of expected concurrent connected users The current maximum number of prestart jobs is 9 999 If more jobs are needed they will be created as necessary To see the current settings enter this command DSPSBSD QUSRWRK Working with the Platform Pack on the IBMi 4 5 Configuring the Enterprise Server Prior to Installing the
73. JoELCMast Calcula Work Job Queue ACTIVE Center A Internal ET Tl Default Queue Job Queue Status g 2 Queue Type o2 AS 400 Queue External ET Maximum Batch Jobs Internet Port Number Q Create Shortcut 2 i Il 5 On Job Queue Revisions add a queue by completing these fields Field Description Host Enter the Enterprise Server name Job Queue Enter the Job Queue name I ACTIVE Default Queue Turn off this option by clicking the radio button 6 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Adding an Entry to the Remote Database Directory Field Description Job Queue Status Enter 01 Queue Type Enter 02 Maximum Batch Jobs Enter a value that equals the number of processors on the Enterprise Server machine Port Number Enter 6016 6 1 4 Deferring Indexes for Table Conversion Workbench Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 Beginning with Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 if you wish to delay building indexes during the Table Conversion Workbench you must set that attribute in the Table Conversion Plan before running the Installation Workbench For implementation details refer to Section 6 16 5 Deferring Index Builds During Table Conversion Workbench Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 6 2 Verifying OCM Mappings If you are upgrading from Xe or ERP8 before running the Workbench ensure that the OCM mappings for any previous environments in your plan are
74. Language Process Overview in this chapter Assess the network a Back up the Deployment Server Back up the existing language package directory for language clients only a Back up the Enterprise Server 1 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Environments Overview Back up the databases Prepare the prototype environment Prepare the development environment Check media object queues Check modification and merge flags Prepare environments for upgrade Refresh the business data optional Refresh the control tables Verify custom changes in master control tables Verify third party hardware and software Verify that the Deployment Server hardware and software meet minimum technical requirements Verify that the Enterprise Server hardware and software meet minimum technical requirements Verify that the workstation hardware and software meet minimum technical requirements Verify that HTML Web Server hardware and software meet minimum technical requirements Verify that the Deployment Server disk space meets minimum technical requirements Verify that the Enterprise Server disk space meets minimum technical requirements 1 5 Environments Overview The HTML Web Server J environments have the same mappings as the regular environments with the exception of logic all of which is mapped to run on the Enterprise Server Each environment shipped with Release 9 1 has a specific use T
75. Languages 8 On Select Installation Type choose your installation type Typical Choose this setup type if you wish to complete the Platform Pack installation with no further specifications This installation option is recommended for most users and includes the required JD Edwards EnterpriseOne files for the Prototype and Pristine environments Custom This mode is recommended for experienced users choose this setup type if you wish to complete the Platform Pack installation by specifying the installation of a subset of pre defined environments Custom In most cases this is the mode you should choose for Upgrades This mode is recommended for experienced users choose this setup type if you wish to complete the Platform Pack installation by specifying the installation of a subset of pre defined environments Tip If you choose Custom installation continue with the steps below in this task which immediately follow Typical Working with the Platform Pack on the IBMi 4 13 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i Choose this setup type if you wish to complete the Platform Pack installation with no further specifications This installation option includes the required JD Edwards EnterpriseOne files for the Prototype and Pristine environments a Click the Next button 4 Oracle Universal Installer Specify Home Details lel Ea ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Specify Home Details
76. Merge ccccccsssssssesssssesesescsessesescsessseseecsesessseseeceeesees 9 4 9 1 9 Working with Workflow Merge ccccsscecsccsssesesescscseeesescsesesesesescscssssseecscsessseseecseenen 9 5 9 2 Working with Specification Merges ssesssesissssssissessestesressesnttinnisnesnentinnisntsneeneesesnenneenees 9 5 9 3 Working with Object Librarian Merge cccccccccsssesesesescsssesesescsesesesescscssseseecscsessenseecseesens 9 6 9 4 Working with Versions List Merge cccccsssesssssssssesesesesesesesescscsssesesescscssssseecsesessenseeseeesens 9 7 9 5 Working with Central Objects Merge cccccessesesesssssssesesessesesescsessesesescsssssesesescssseseecseesens 9 7 9 6 Working with Update Language Text Merge cccccecssssssssesssesessnssesescesseeescsesseeecseees 9 7 Understanding Media Object Queues 10 1 OV CLVICW E E E ees eel E E O E TE 10 1 10 2 Modifying Media Object Queues ss ssssssssssssssssssisssssissesstssssninsinstestnntesiestentnsnesieniesressesnes 10 1 10 3 Specifying the Help Location Used by the Web Client and Development Client 10 3 Performing Post Upgrade Tasks 11 1 Setting Up Microsoft Windows Security on Release 9 1 Directories ss ss1ss1ss1ss11s11 11 1 11 1 1 Setting Security on the Pathcode Directory ccccccccse sec cesses cscseseseececsseneeeeeeses 11 2 11 1 2 Setting Security on the Database Directory c cece eee ee ceeeeeeeeeeeceseeeneteneneneees 11 2 1
77. Name Central Objects DY910 1 On Data Source Revisions verify the information for your Central Objects data source Verify that your Central Objects data source is Central Objects lt Path Code gt 2 Click OK advanced Set Up Iof x Vo xX Rins vo Ok iea De abe w Displ B OLE 8 Internet M Clustered V LOB Data Type Support V Unicode M AS 400 BLOB Support J Use Decimal Shift M XML Formatted Workflow V Use Julian Dates v Supporter Locking Updates J OCM Data Source M Use Table Owner Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 27 Setting Up Environment Data Sources 3 On Advanced Set Up because the central objects data source must be Unicode verify the Unicode setting is checked For IBM i ensure the AS 400 BLOB Support setting is checked 20 12 4 Setting Up the Data Source for Control Tables To set up the data source for control tables a Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions Ble Preferences Form Window Help la x vy xee OK Can Dis Abo inks w Advan S OLE a Internet Data Source Name Data Source Use Control Tables Test pe Local Data Source Library Name ODBC Data Source Name Data Source Type ji DB2 UDB on 05 400 M JDBNET Data Source Data Class i Control Tables Platform Jasaoo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name ps2 SaUMSDE ODBC SaUMeDEGLEDE Gracie m
78. Name Blank Library List Name Blank Database Name list includes possible Language databases JDELanguage_F910 Server Name Local Platform LOCAL Use Table Owner Blank Use Julian Dates Blank Use Decimal Shift Blank Support for Updates Blank OCM Data Source Blank IBM i BLOB Support Blank This chart lists the characteristics of the Local data source which applies to the Oracle tablespace on the Deployment Server Field Valid Value for Oracle Data Source Name list includes possible sources Local JDELocal DV910 JDELocal PS910 JDELocal PD910 JDELocal PY910 Data Source Use DB Data Source Type N Object Owner ID list includes possible owner dbo IDs Library Name Blank Library List Name Blank 26 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide OWJRNL Field Valid Value for Oracle Database Name list includes possible JDELocal databases JDEPlan910 JDECTL910 JDEDD910 JDESY910 JDEVL910 JDEOL910 JDEData910 Server Name Local Platform LOCAL Use Table Owner Selected Use Julian Dates Selected Use Decimal Shift Selected Support for Updates Selected OCM Data Source Blank LOB Data Source Blank 26 9 OWJRNL This chart lists the characteristics of the Journal data source Field Valid Value for Client Access Data Source Name list includes possible OWJRNL sources Data Source Use DB Data Source T
79. OBNM equal to JEDOCGT this conversion changes the Object Name to GT0911A and modifies the Generic Text Key TXKY to match GT0911A s structure R89060117A To populate F060117A None Transfers any values The original F060117 table when upgrading from that were stored in contains a field to store the XE ERP 8 0 and this the F060117 table to Alien Registration Number job has not been run the replacement field ALRN However this field previously in an ESU ALRN15 in the is not long enough to store FO60117A an Admissions Number which is an acceptable value for this field The F060117A tag table was created with an appropriate length field ALRN15 that replaces the one in the original table R89060117 To populate Employee None This TC populates Prior to 8 9 the F060117 table Master Tag Tables the F060117 record was treated as a tag to when upgrading from for every existing F060116 in that it may or XE ERP 8 0 F060116 record may not have a corresponding record in F060117 if a record existed in F060116 After 8 9 the application was changed so that if there was no F060117 record an error would be issued This TC populates the F060117 record for every F060116 record so that the application will not error automatically Manual Table Conversions 13 9 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R890912 To format OBJ and F0912 R8909
80. OK Tip If you enter invalid information into a tab field a stop sign symbol appears next to the tab name such as Deployment Server For more information about the error click the stop sign icon in the bottom right hand corner of the form Release 9 1 asks if you want to add another Deployment Server 5 To add another Deployment Server click Yes and repeat steps 1 through 3 6 To continue with Installation Planner setup click No 5 4 5 Entering Enterprise Server Information Note During the definition of the Enterprise Server a port number must be defined While Enterprise Servers running the same release can use the same port number an Enterprise Server running two different versions of software must use two different port numbers To enter Enterprise Server information a Enterprise Server Oy x A plan must be associated with an enterprise server If you would like to define an enterprise server press OK To select an existing enterprise server press select x Cancel 1 On Enterprise Server click OK to define a new Enterprise Server or click Select to choose from a list of existing Enterprise Servers Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 21 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Custom Installation Plan Machine Search Paper Ele Edit Preferences Window Help 18 x Y amp x 2 EA a Lik 3 3 baea Find Clona Bon New bie Links w D
81. Pack installation The Platform pack install uses a prestart job in the QUSRWRK subsystem program QZRCSRVS which does Restores This job runs at priority 20 In order to reduce the performance impact of this job you can change its run priority during the install To change the run priority of the install job running in the QUSRWRK subsystem and optimize machine resources 1 Enter this command WRKACTJOB SBS QUSRWRK 2 Look for the job running program QZRCSRVS type option 5 next to it and press Enter If there is more than one job running QZRCSRVS the one using the most machine resources is most likely the one running the Platform Pack Installer You can also check the job logs to find jobs unique to the Platform Pack Installer Examples of such jobs are restores and CHGOBJOWN 4 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Configuring the Enterprise Server Prior to Installing the Platform Pack 3 4 For the job you selected in the previous step enter option 40 change job press Enter Enter 51 as the Run Priority and press Enter 4 3 8 Cleaning Up From Prior Installations If you have previously run the Platform Pack installer on your IBM i machine prior to re running it you must ensure that all QACX files are cleared from this folder tmp 4 3 9 Testing Long File Names on the IBM i Before running Installation Workbench you may need to rebuild the cross reference table This table enables t
82. Parameters se ssssssssssteesisrissesisiesessesssesees 20 21 20 11 3 Verifying Advanced Parameters 0 ss ceseseesecscseseseecesesseesesesssssseeseseeeeeeees 20 22 xiii 21 22 23 24 25 xiv 20 11 4 Selecting Languages isp ea penaa a Ae dase ESEE EA AN E E ER EAEE 20 24 20 12 Setting Up Environment Data Sources ssesessessesesresesssessessssessssesesneneenentenenienenieneneenene 20 25 20 12 1 Selecting an Environment Data Source Setup Option ss ss ssssssesisrisrisssessestesreseess 20 25 20 12 2 Setting Up the Data Source for Business Data ccccccc cee eens ceeeeeeeeeneeenenenenes 20 25 20 12 3 Setting Up the Data Source for Central Objects c cece ceeeeeeeteneneneees 20 27 20 12 4 Setting Up the Data Source for Control Tables 0 0c cece ceeeeeeeeseneneneees 20 28 20 12 5 Verifying the Data Source for Versions ss ss ssssssissessertersisressessetinsisneneenienesressee 20 29 20 13 Finalizing the Installation Plan cccesccccescessesteteteseseeseeseeceesenesesesnenesesescenesesssnaaneness 20 29 20 14 Concluding the Validation Planner Report cccccseseeseseseseneneseseseseseseseseseseseseseees 20 30 20 15 Configuring Additional Servers oo eee csesseseseessesesesesensesesesessesesesesesseseseeeee 20 30 Creating a Language Only Installation Plan 21 1 Understanding Language Only Installation Plans c cccceccecee eee e eee ceceeeeeneneneeees 21 1 21 2 Reviewing
83. Production objects You should only select the Development option if you intend to develop Release 9 1 applications Note Select the Development option only if you intend to develop JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications Install Path Select the drive and directory in which to install the package For example this is the typical path for Release 9 1 c E910 6 To install the package click Finish InstallManager shows the status of the installation process through a series of forms The Congratulations form indicates that the installation finished successfully InstallManager creates a Release 9 1 shortcut in the Programs folder of your Start menu and on your desktop 7 Reboot if necessary Caution The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Development Client installation process verifies that several of the system DLL files are current If they are not current you receive a message to reboot your system When you reboot the system updates the DLL files in your Microsoft Windows directories 8 3 3 Understanding Third Party Products A local Oracle Enterprise Edition OEE is required for Release 9 1 Development Clients The OUI installer for the Development Client installs OEE and the Development client separately Refer to the Development Client Installation Guide The use of Microsoft Internet Explorer is optional Adobe Acrobat Reader 6 0 or greater is strongly recommended to view reports online Neither the browse
84. Program Termination jt400 jar and or utill jar Missing 4 23 Business Data or Control Tables Already Exist ccccccesesesseesesseseseseecenesesesnenenenens 4 24 Business Data or Control Tables Do Not Exist ccccceessessseesseseeseeeeesceeeeecaeeeeeeeeneenees 4 24 Rerunning the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer 00 0 0 ccc 4 25 Enterprise Server pianina iea aaan e oaee ae aE Ea E EEn aeaea Oaea SEA cdbostasaaeseaies 4 26 Database Server t coin cnr hedraeth ot ech tn Sn ee t e ee 4 26 4 8 4 9 Installing the Latest Tools Release and Latest Tools Release Patch to the Enterprise Server 4 26 Working with Database Security iscsressiiscsiian n eens e e 4 27 5 Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 1 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 5 1 6 5 2 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 5 3 3 5 3 3 1 5 3 3 2 5 3 3 3 5 3 3 4 5 3 3 5 5 3 3 6 5 4 5 4 1 5 4 2 5 4 3 5 4 4 5 4 5 5 4 6 5 4 7 5 4 8 5 4 9 5 4 9 1 5 4 9 2 5 4 9 3 5 4 9 4 5 4 9 5 5 4 10 5 4 10 1 5 4 10 2 5 4 10 3 5 4 10 4 5 4 11 5 4 11 1 5 4 11 2 5 4 11 3 Understanding the Planner Process for Upgrade cccccceccssssesesnsteeseeseseseseenenesesesnsnenenees 5 1 Dropping SOL Packages issii eciistis ninsi iaaiiai basic ies eaea ataei i a ue deter cveds 5 2 Defining the SQL Package Creation Location ccccecccseeeecscseetesescsceseececessneneseeeeeeens 5 2 Assumptions about Mandatory Pre Upgrade Process cccccsssesssteteeecesese
85. Prompt EI Ed The plan has been finalized Press OK to continue 6 On the Information Prompt that indicates Installation Planner has concluded click OK to exit the message box and initiate the Planner Validation Report Ifthe processing option default was selected Planner Validation Report automatically prompts you to run this report a Ifthe processing option default was not selected click Validate on the tree view of your plan to initiate the Planner Validation Report 19 16 Finalizing the Installation Plan Installation Planner finalizes your installation plan automatically The Information Prompt message appears to let you know that the installation plan is finalized When the plan is finalized a The status is set to 20 This value means that several adjustments to OCM mappings and tables were made according to your plan The following tables are now updated Release Master table F00945 Path Code Master table F00942 Create OCM F986101 Package Plan table F98404 Machine Detail table F9651 Table Conversion Scheduler F98405 Language table F984031 if you are installing an alternate language 19 17 Concluding the Planner Validation Report To conclude the planner validation report 19 32 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Concluding the Planner Validation Report Typical Installation Plan Report Output Destination Mel la x Y x Rg OK Can Dis Ab
86. Requirements for a Language Installation ccccc cee cece ceeeeeneteeeeeees 21 1 21 3 Installing Languages on the Deployment Server ccccc cece ee eeeeeeeeceeeceseneeesenenenenes 21 2 21 4 Running Installation Planner cece ceccccsesesesescsesesesesescsesesescsesesesesescsssnseecsescsssnseecses 21 5 21 4 1 Accessing Installation Planner ccccecssssesesescsesssesescsesesesescseseseseecscssseseececsessenseecsses 21 5 21 4 2 Entering Information into Installation Planner cccccccccccse sess cceeeceeseseeeseeeeees 21 6 21 4 3 Selecting Custom or Default Parameters ccccceececcccsesesescscscsesesescscsesesesescseseseeceees 21 6 21 4 4 Selecting an ENvirOnMent iisisti ihsani asa aae iae a iaa eai adia 21 7 21 5 Selecting aan iage vai ccscudec tasscececvitescbtcsetenscgeesvedesstssehedpantlevecsdssdrettesestulavcdedctssuts doce cerns 21 8 21 6 Running Installation Workbench oo eects eee es ceseseescscsesesescsesesesesescscsssesesescssanseecsees 21 9 21 7 Verifying Enterprise Server Requirements 0 cccccssesessscsesesescscsesesesesescseseseecsesssnseeceees 21 9 21 8 Verifying Workstation Requirements 0 ccccceseeseeessssseseseseesseseseseseesesesesceeseseeeees 21 10 21 9 Completing the Language Installation eee cecsessesesesceseeseseeeseseeseseeseseseee 21 10 21 10 Building and Deploying Alternate Language Packages cccceesesesessesseteseseneneeseees 21 10 FTP on the IBM i 22 1
87. SQLPlus the command to sign into a database is SQLPlus exe lt user gt lt password gt ElLocal For example if the tablespace JDESY910 exists in the E1Local database use the following to sign in SQLPlus exe JDESY910 JDESY910 E1Local 3 11 5 9 Encrypting the Password of the Local Oracle Database JD Edwards EnterpriseOne connects to the local Oracle database E1Local through the system account using an encrypted password Some of the administrative database scripts on the Deployment Server decrypt this password before submitting database commands Upon exit such programs subsequently then re encrypt the password If one of these scripts fails to complete for example it is killed or it otherwise dies before it can encrypt the password again EnterpriseOne will not be able to connect to the database You can determine if this is the case by attempting to sign into the local Oracle database using this command SQLPlus exe system admin E1Local where admin is the default password that the scripts use If you can sign in the password must still be decrypted You must re encrypt the system account password using the following steps for EnterpriseOne to operate correctly 1 Locate this program lt El_install_dir gt system bin32 ReconfigureMSDE exe 2 Right click on ReconfigureMSDE exe and select Run as administrator Working with the Deployment Server 3 47 Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation
88. Section 3 5 4 Microsoft Windows Internet Protocol Version 4 IPv4 Working with the Deployment Server 3 9 Local Oracle Enterprise Edition OEE Considerations 3 5 1 32 Bit Oracle Database Client Required for both 32 bit and 64 bit versions of OEE If you installed OEE on a 64 bit version of Microsoft Windows you must also install a 32 bit version of the Oracle database client and then copy your tnsnames ora file to a subdirectory under the database client installation directory Caution Because the Deployment Server installer must have access to a local OEE database you must install the 32 bit database client prior to installing the Deployment Server To install a 32 bit Oracle database client 1 Download the 32 bit Oracle 11g database client from the Oracle Software Delivery Cloud located at this link http edelivery oracle com 2 Install the database client 3 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Local Oracle Enterprise Edition OEE Considerations Caution PATH environment variable If you installed the 64 bit Oracle database the installer placed the path to the database for example c Oracle Ellocal bin at the start of the Windows PATH environment variable Then when you installed the 32 bit Oracle database client the installer placed the path to the database client for example c Oracle product 11 2 0 client_1 bin at the start of the Windows PATH environment vari
89. Setting Security on the Data Dictionary Directory This table lists the settings to set security on the data dictionary directory User Type Permissions JDE Change Production users No Access Development users No Access CNC administrators and application leads Change 11 1 4 Setting Security on the Helps Directory This table lists the settings to set security on the Helps directory User Type Permissions JDE Change Production users Read Only Development users Read Only CNC administrators and application leads Read Only 11 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up Microsoft Windows Security on Release 9 1 Directories 11 1 5 Setting Security on the Media Object Directory This table lists the settings to set security on the media object literal name is mediaobj directory User Type Permissions JDE Change Production users Read Only Development users Read Only CNC administrators and application leads Change 11 1 6 Setting Security on the Planner Directory This table lists the settings to set security on the planner directory User Type Permissions JDE Change Production users No Access Development users No Access CNC administrators and application leads No Access 11 1 7 Setting Security on the Print Queue Directory This table lists the settings to set security on the print queue literal name is printqueue directory User T
90. Setting up FIP ori th IBM iosi teega Weenasist e A loner ctvel lowes aE EES 22 1 22 2 Starting the FIP Servers ieat ae ea Eai e irede eaae a seetand 22 2 22 3 Copying assembly dat to the IBM i IFS Directory optional s sssssesssssssrssssssestesstersts 22 2 Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Directory Structures 23 1 Deployment Server Directory Structure ssss ssisssesseriestestsssesiertestisresnentestisnesnesrenreseenes 23 1 23 2 Language Directory Structure ionii i a agaa aeaa 23 12 23 37 IBMi Libraries dinna e a Sis a a a ee 23 12 23 4 Workstation General Directory Structure sssssessesssesissisrerrserisisstsnentiesissesnsesinniesessnen 23 13 Major Technical Tables Working with Reports 25 1 Installation Planner Validation Report R9840B s sssssssessssessssrsssississessessessesnessenreesesses 25 2 25 1 1 Setting Processing OpHons keea aara asst eaa o TE E E R eTa L AER ARER ai 25 2 25 1 2 How to Read the Repofto isani ussuhausi aae i aea epiti 25 2 25 2 Table and Index Creation R98407 creirai isese girian ea in EA EENE EENE ANEA 25 3 25 3 Environment Database Creation Report R98403 s sssssssssssissesssssirsississssssesinsiesessnesses 25 3 26 27 25 3 1 Setting Processing OP onS nisinsin iei aaar iin eaaa a aae ia rianan 25 3 25 3 1 1 Version XJDE0001 for Installations and Upgrades ss ssssssssississiesessesieseeesess 25 3 25 3 1 2 Version XJDE0004 for Updates sires
91. Software Requirements The goal of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 Installation is to include the most current tools releases and updates at the time the installation image is mastered However subsequent to that time it is possible that critical fixes may become necessary and available You should check Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications to verify if any such JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 Installation fixes are required 5 3 Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options Processing options control how Installation Planner responds as you set up plans and options you see as you work through the custom planner If processing options are not set up correctly you will not see the appropriate options as you work through the planner You set up these processing options to control replication functions and business functions mapping You should review the default processing options for the Installation Planner application prerequisite to create the plan First time users can set up the processing options to step through the planner with informational messages If you do not want to see these messages you can turn them off 5 3 1 Assumptions About Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options This table lists the assumptions about reviewing the processing options for the installation planner Personnel Installer Logon Status On the Deployment Server logged on as user J
92. TC populates the F08773A tag table with the MSEB value from the processing option value selected The tag table F08773A was added with the MSEB column to allow managers to signoff on the final performance appraisal on behalf of the employee A value of 1 means Yes managers can approve or contest the final appraisal on the employee s behalf A value of 0 means No employees access the appraisal system through Employee Self Service and approve or contest the appraisal themselves Manual Table Conversions 13 19 Upgrading from 8 11 or Below Upgrading from 8 11 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R89087711A XJDE0001 To populate F087711A Current when upgrading from 8 11 or below The Processing Option of this job sets the value for the new field MSEB in the table F087711A This TC populates the F087711A tag table with the MSEB value from the processing option value selected The tag table F087711A was added with the MSEB column to allow managers to sign off on the final performance appraisal on behalf of the employee A value of 1 means Yes managers can approve or contest the final appraisal on the employee s behalf A value of 0 means No employees access the appraisal system through Employee Self Service and approve or contest the appraisal themselves R89087711A XJDE0002 To populate F087711A Historic when upgrading fro
93. The Language Selection form appears 21 5 Selecting a Language To select a language 21 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Verifying Enterprise Server Requirements Select Deselect 1 On Language Selection to set up a language for the selected environment choose the appropriate language 2 From the Row menu click Select 3 Repeat the above steps until all your languages have been selected 4 Click OK 21 6 Running Installation Workbench After you create the language only plan you must run it through a series of workbenches in order to load the language tables to the appropriate data sources The language installation process is the same for every database To run the Installation Workbench 1 Go to Chapter 6 Working With Installation Workbench 2 Complete the procedures for Control Table Workbench and Specification Table Merge Workbenches The control tables data dictionary and central objects will be loaded by the Control Table Workbench and the Specification Table Merge Workbench 21 7 Verifying Enterprise Server Requirements To verify Enterprise Server requirements 1 Verify that the Enterprise Server hardware and software meet all requirements Creating a Language Only Installation Plan 21 9 Verifying Workstation Requirements Verify that the Enterprise Server disk space meets all requirements Verify that the jde ini settings for local code set and c
94. This information is needed for establishing Release 9 1 database connectivity 11 4 1 Adding Vertex Quantum Directory Information to the Microsoft Windows Server Path To add the Vertex Quantum application directory information to the Microsoft Windows server path 1 2 3 4 5 D Edit System Variable From the Microsoft Windows Enterprise Server access the Control Panel On Control Panel click the System icon In System select the Advanced tab On the Advanced tab click the Environment Variables button In the System Variables window scroll down until the keyword Path appears in the Variable column Click Edit to display the current path in the Variable Value field Search the current path as shown in the Value field for the Vertex Quantum application directory If the directory does not appear you must add it to the path as described in the following step If the directory appears in the path skip to step 9 in this task Variable name Path Variable value x WertexDirectoryPath vertex utils Place the cursor in the Value field and use the right arrow to scroll to the end of the field and enter this path x vertexDirectoryPath vertex utils where x vertexDirectoryPath is the drive and path for the directory in which the Vertex Quantum applications are stored Note You might need to include a semicolon to separate this entry from previous entries Click Set
95. Waiting i R98405A_XJDE0001_42_P DEVNTA Waiting R98405A_XJDE0001_44_P DEVNTA Server Manager can be used to monitor processes and queues and view jde log jdedebug log and jde ini Platform specific utilities such as WRKACTJOB can also be used to monitor the conversions Database Specific Queries that query unconverted tables temp tables converted tables and database system tables can be helpful in monitoring conversions 6 16 3 7 Working With Table Conversion Log Files The log files are stored in these specific locations a The jde_ProcessId log and jdedebug_ProcessId log are stored in while the conversion is running Working With Installation Workbench 6 33 Understanding Table Conversions Once the conversion has finished the logs are moved to and renamed to these names R98405A_XJDE0001_EnterpriseOne_Job_Number_PDF jde log R98405A_ XJDE0001_EnterpriseOne_Job_Number_PDF jdedebug log The JDE_IBM i_Job_Number LOG and JDEDEBUG_IBM i_Job Number LOG are stored in E910 The conversion logs are stored in the Printqueue directory The log will be named one of the following Report_Version_Ddate_Ttime_Jjob_number 1log Table_ALTERTABLE_Ddate_Ttime_Jjob_number log Table _MERGETABLE Ddate_Ttime_Jjob_number log The directory for the printqueue is E910SYS PrintQueue INI Settings DEBUG Turn off jdedebug log set to FILE to turn on
96. Workbench For example if upgrading from Xe or ERP8 F42199 F49219 F42119 F43199 F43121 F4101 F4102 F311 F0618 You are planning to do a Unicode conversion directly after the Upgrade and before you return the system to the end users The Unicode conversion recreates all indexes in any case When you mark a table with the Defer Index flag the TC Engine creates the primary key and any other unique keys on that table before marking the conversion as complete In almost all cases there is only one unique key on the tables and that is the primary key However there are a few tables with more than 1 unique key for example F0902 has 4 unique keys while F4101 has 3 unique keys Caution The absence of non unique keys will not stop EnterpriseOne from working but will have a severe impact resulting in poor performance If you choose to defer index builds you are responsible for creating the missing indexes once the Workbench is complete To use the Defer Index Build functionality you must have the latest Planner Update and JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 or higher on both Deployment Server and Enterprise Server The Planner Update must be applied to the Pristine path code PS910 and an update package must be built and deployed to PS910 Working With Installation Workbench 6 45 Understanding Table Conversions To use the Defer Index Build functionality 1 Run t
97. Workbench 6 59 Understanding Specification Table Merges F4611TPU F7460 F750401A 6 18 Understanding Specification Table Merges Specification Table Merge Workbench runs the batch applications that merge custom modifications into the new specification tables It then updates the Table Conversion Scheduler table F98405 to indicate completion and writes a conversion log record The Object Librarian and Versions List merges are now a part of the specification merge For all users the Specification Merge merges data in the following order a Object Librarian m Versions Specifications For users installing an alternate language the Specification Merge Workbench merges the central objects and language text from the previous release into the new central objects database The central objects tables contain the alternate language records needed for displaying text in the selected language Language enabled tables include the Processing Option Text table F98306 the Report Design Aid Text Information table F98760 and the Forms Design Aid Text Information table F98750 Depending on the environment choices made during the English installation you might have several sets of central objects for example one set for each environment loaded during the English language installation This section discusses a Section 6 18 1 Merging Specification Tables a Section 6 18 2 Restarting the Specification Merge 6 18 1 Merging Specif
98. a Internet Data Source Name Business Data TEST Data Source Use oe Local Data Source Data Source Type fi DB2 UDB on 05 400 JD JDBNET Data Source Data Class E Business Data Platform fas4o0 IBM AS 400 CISC Database Database Server Name DS2 Sizing Befauli Sizing SGUMSDE ODBC SQUMSDE OLEDE Oracle DBZ UDB Access Logical Library Name TESTDTA ODBC Data Source Name Business Data TEST ah 1 From the Form menu click Advanced 5 40 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Custom Installation Plan Advanced Parameters ra laj x Fie Edit Preferences Form Window Help la x vy x eR OK Can Dis Abo Optional Tables Links w Optio S OLE S Internet Plan Name TYPICAL Typical Installation Plan Library List Name PD910 B9 Production Environment m Object Configuration Manager IV Recreate Object Mappings 223 2 On Advanced Parameters verify the UNICODE flag is off If your Business Data was not set to Unicode in a previous release and the data source had not yet been converted to Unicode the Unicode flag must match the contents of the data source 3 Click OK 4 On Data Source Revisions verify the data source for your Business Data Be sure this data source points either to the existing production data source you want to upgrade or to a copy of it N
99. a default value for this field but you can change it 3 Click OK A message box appears prompting you to enter custom data sources or take the default data sources Proceed to Section 20 10 Entering Shared Data Source Information 20 7 2 Entering Enterprise Server Data Source Information After specifying Enterprise Server information enter the data source information for the Enterprise Server you will use in this plan The server data source holds the system configuration files that enable the server to run UBEs This section discusses a Section 20 7 2 1 Specifying Custom or Default Data Source Information a Section 20 7 2 2 Verifying Custom Server Map Data Source Information Section 20 7 2 3 Adding another Enterprise Server 20 7 2 1 Specifying Custom or Default Data Source Information You are prompted to enter custom data sources or take the default data sources for the Enterprise Server you just added Choose one of the following options a To enter custom data sources click OK Skip to Section 20 7 2 2 Verifying Custom Server Map Data Source Information a To accept default data sources click Take Defaults This option limits your customization choices 20 7 2 2 Verifying Custom Server Map Data Source Information To verify custom Server Map data source information Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 9 Specifying an Enterprise Server a Custom Installation Plan Data Source
100. a conversion reset the status of the conversion in Table Conversion Planner from 35 45 or 50 to 30 If a conversion is still running when workbench is restarted leave its status at 45 6 16 3 10 Troubleshooting Table Conversions If Table Conversion Workbench fails to submit a conversion to the server such as services are not running it sets the conversion status to 50 and it does not submit any more conversions 6 16 3 10 1 Enabling the Print UBE Job Log When you are upgrading the Print UBE job log on your IBM i Enterprise Server can help you debug any potential Table Conversion problems For example if you are trying to insert alpha data into a Working With Installation Workbench 6 35 Understanding Table Conversions numeric column your Table Conversion will fail and you can only isolate the problem by analyzing the Print UBE job log By default the Platform Pack installer configures these jde ini settings on your Enterprise Server which enable the Print UBE job log AS400 PrintUBEJoblog TRUE PrintUBEJoblogOnError TRUE Note You can set these values to FALSE once you have completed your upgrade 6 16 3 10 2 General Problems This section describes these general problems a TC Has No Saved Input Table Specs TC Input Table Does Not Exist Unable to Submit TC to Server a Unknown Table Conversion Error Unknown Error TC Input Checking Conversion Program Failed a Conversion Has Unproc
101. aaa ae be eed Alana ds 26 6 206 9 lt OWJRN aran eon n te edie ii ee ee a Alita inh r EiS 26 7 2A N LO ES ES AE A TE o EEE E E E EE A A E E EE 26 8 26 VT SY SCCM oiar a a EEE ELE EEEE EE R AEN EE EEEE O SEE EE EE 26 8 20 12 VerslOns esis soyen a E he beets Rese Nee E S 26 9 Deinstalling the Software 27 1 Understanding the Deinstallation sissies siii esei niire 27 1 XV 27 2 27 3 27 4 27 5 27 6 27 7 Deinstalling the Software from the Workstations ccccssesesssesssesescscseseesescseseseeesees 27 2 Deinstalling the Local OEE from the Deployment Server ccccceeeetesceceesesesneneeeeees 27 2 Manual Cleanup of a Deinstalled Oracle Database on the Deployment Servet 27 2 Using the OUI Installer to Deinstall JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from the Deployment Server 27 4 Dropping DB2 400 Libraries 0 c ccc ccceccccsesesescscsesesesescsssesescecssseseseecscssssseecscsessenseeceees 27 8 Deinstalling the Platform Pack cccccsssecsscsssesesescsesssesesescsesesescsesesesesescssseaeseseseseseseeesees 27 8 A Understanding IBM i Databases xvi Preface Welcome to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Release 9 1 Upgrade Guide Note This Upgrade Guide has been updated for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 For details on documentation updates refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Net Change Guide Audience This guide is intended for system administ
102. accept the default local value or enter a mapped network drive The installer provides a default value which is your Oracle Home path For example C JDEdwards E910 If you prefer to install JD EnterpriseOne Files to a remote Deployment Server you can specify a mapped drive For example Z For more on the proper use of mapped drives and network drives refer to the following Caution 3 32 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Installing the Deployment Server Caution You cannot enter a network path such as machine_name network_share If you enter a network path instead of a mapped drive the installer will give an error When you click Browse to select the drive if the mapped remote drive is not listed perform these steps 1 Start a Command Prompt session by right clicking and selecting Run as Administrator This command prompt opens on the Microsoft 2008 Server with Administrator cmd in the header 2 Inthe command window type this command net use z lt MachineName gt lt SharedPath gt where z is the drive on which you mapped drive exists 13 Select the Next button Oracle Universal Installer Choose E1iLocal User Password opx ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Choose E1Local User Password Secure password to be used for E1Local Database Users Enter Password p Confirm Password p Note This option allows you to specify a unique secure password to be u
103. as supplied from the jde ini Logical Machine Name Displays this information by default when the host type is entered The name is case sensitive should not exceed 15 characters and should not contain any special characters Database Type Enter the value for your database I DB2 400 Server Map Data Source Whenever you enter a host type the Installation Planner populates this field with a default value machinename 910 Server Map where machinename is the name of your machine Installation Path Verify that the default value is the installation directory path to which you want to install Release 9 1 on the Enterprise Server Make sure the value is specific to your version of the release For example for Release 9 1 the default path is JDEdwards PPack E910SYS This is the system library Caution You must change the value that defaults into the Installation Path field as shown in the screen capture above Deployment Server Name Using the visual assist button choose the name of the Deployment Server to which this Enterprise Server is attached A Deployment Server name appears in this field by default but it can be changed if necessary Note If you change the port number to a value other than 6016 you must also change this setting to be synchronous between both the jde ini on the Enterprise Server and workstation 4 Click OK 5 4 6 Enter Data Source Information for S
104. as the only merge or conversion that needs to be run in order for Production to be successfully prepared However if you decide not to copy the control tables from the PY to the PD then you will have to rerun the control table merge Note You cannot use the procedures in this section if you need to bring any additional object specification changes This is a distinguishing factor between a complete system upgrade and an update the to the production environment upgrade Upgrading the Production Environment 15 1 General Checklist and Considerations For Release 9 1 on the Deployment Server Security Server should be turned off during the workbench The may be security issues if you are using Signon Security during the workbench There may be password issues when there is not a database sign in as JDE with password JDE During both the Upgrade and the Update of the production environment the workbench begins with the Initial Tasks The initial tasks runs four reports explained below However since these reports have been previously run during the initial upgrade the Batch Application will run but do not copy over any data by default Alternatives to the way these run by default are discussed below the Batch explanations Normally after you have upgraded all other environments you upgrade the live production environment This chapter explains how to upgrade the production environment with a minimum amount of production down
105. as written In addition all of the commands described illustrate the recommended directory structure If your machine s directory structure is different modify the commands to match your directory structure Italic type style designates variables used in the guide For example for the variable deployment_server in a command substitute the actual name of your Deployment Server Also the names of other JD Edwards EnterpriseOne guides are in italic type style For example JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide Courier font indicates explicit file names commands or other information that must be typed into the system For example a common file name used by JD Edwards EnterpriseOne is an initialization file called the jde ini 1 4 Working With the Customer Checklist The Release 9 1 support structure consists of components such as databases operating systems and hardware To upgrade Release 9 1 successfully set up the support structure before starting the installation process The tasks in this section are designed to prepare the customer s system for the installation process Some of the tasks such as checking that the appropriate hardware and software are available can take some time to complete Other tasks are quick and easy This checklist helps to organize the required upgrade preparation a Review Section 1 5 Environments Overview a If the installation involves a secondary language review Section 1 6
106. based on the user id stored in SCHUSER in F91320 The user group from F0092 is then stored in SCHROLE Manual Table Conversions 13 13 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R89959212 This UBE populates Only required ifthe The UBEuseseach The 8 9 release introduces the F0092 User customer is Role from the UDC Roles If upgrading froma Profiles table and the upgrading from a H95 RL the role is release prior to 8 9 you F00926 Role release prior to 8 9 stored in the data must run a sequence of Descriptions from the tfapplicable t vo r item column KYin UBEs to convert Groups as Roles and Descriptions PpP aes the F0005 table The listed in the F0092 table to that may have been upgrade this UBE UBE populates the Roles This creates a aay 3 should be run as the popu ai previously set up in first in this 3 part UGRP field in the sequence number for each the UDC H95 RL P F0092 table with this role and inserts role This UDC was used si baits Role It also relationships based upon for Phase I and is now R89959212 populates the F00926 users group records in the being removed R89959211 table with the Role F0092 table If you are Description running ERP 8 9 or later and R8995921 previously in the wish to upgrade you do not DL01 and DL02 columns of the F0005 table the values in these columns are concatenated and inserted into the F00926 table
107. code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 05 in the supplier recovery orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 ECO Order Type value 01 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 01 in the Engineering Change engineering change orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is Orders 01 Order Type value 02 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 02 in the Engineering Change engineering change orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is Orders 01 Order Type value 03 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 03 in the Engineering Change engineering change orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is Orders 01 Order Type value 04 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 04 in the Engineering Change engineering change orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is Orders 01 Order Type value 05 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 05 in the Engineering Change engineering change orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is Orders 01 ECO Request Order Type value 01 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 01 in the Engineering Change engineering change request orders If no v
108. column ROLEDESC If the insert to the F0092 table is successful the F0005D table is then fetched upon to retrieve all of the possible language descriptions for the Role Descriptions Those as well are populated in the F00926 table Each Domestic Language Record in the F00926 table contains a Sequence Number When running this UBE the sequence numbers begin at 500 and increase by 5 need to run these UBEs as the F0092 F00926 and F95921 tables already contain the necessary records 13 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R89959211 This TC takes all Only required if the The UBE retrieves Refer to Notes in R89959212 current Groups inthe customer is each Group from the above UGRP field in the upgrading from a F0092 table It F0092 table and addsa_ release prior to 8 9 populates the USER Description record for If leabiet field in the F00926 them in the F00926 appacan t0 Your table with this Role table The Role is the upgrade this UBE It also populates the hould be run as the pop i Group name Ex S mgs F00926 table with P second in this 3 part ne OWTOOL the the Role Description description is also the a alas which is also the Group Name as a R89959212 Group value from description is R89959211 the F0092 table This required A sequence value is inserted into
109. configurations are set up after the upgrade process finishes You should add any new environments to these users as needed See Also a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools System Administration Guide for more detailed information about setting up group profiles and how to use them as well as for information about defining user display preferences 8 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 9 Performing Merges This chapter discusses a Section 9 1 Working with Control Table Merges a Section 9 2 Working with Specification Merges Except where noted in the text the information in this chapter applies to upgrade and cumulative update customers only You can run any of the merges in two ways a Proof mode creates merge reports but does not update control tables Use proof mode to examine the changes that are reported without updating your tables Update mode creates merge reports and updates items in the control tables Tip Check each merge as it finishes to make sure it completed successfully Also save your logs in case you have to troubleshoot problems See Also Chapter 24 Major Technical Tables for more information on individual tables 9 1 Working with Control Table Merges This section describes Section 9 1 1 Working with Customer Base Merges Section 9 1 2 Working with Language Specific Table Merges a Section 9 1 3 Working with Data Dictionary Merge a Section 9 1 4 Work with Solut
110. correct From B9 onwards JD Edwards EnterpriseOne on IBM i systems use LOBs instead of BLOBs When you created your upgrade plan and copied the data sources and OCM from your previous System data source the Planner flagged all the regular data sources as LOB data sources However any existing data_source_name DNT data sources were not flagged and remain as BLOB data sources When you finalize the plan it automatically deactivateds all data_source_name DNT OCM mappings for the previous environments in your plan and activated the non DNT data sources instead When you created your upgrade plan and copied the data sources and OCM from your previous System data source the Planner flagged all the regular data sources as LOB data sources However any existing data_source_ name DNT data sources were not flagged and remain as BLOB data sources When you finalize the plan it automatically deactivateds all data_source_name DNT OCM mappings for the previous environments in your plan and activated the non DNT data sources instead As a result prior to running the Workbench you should verify the accuracy of the OCM mappings after you run the Planner Ensure that no data_source_name DNT mappings are active for the previous environment s in this plan Examples of data_source_name DNT mappings are Table DNT Data Source F98811 Control Tables data_source_name DNT F9060 System release_number DNT F983051 Versions data_sou
111. define a deployment server press OK To select an existing deployment server press select x Cancel 1 On Deployment Server click OK to define a new Deployment Server or click Select to choose from a list of existing Deployment Servers D Custom Installation Plan Machine Search miel gi File Edit Preferences Window Help l x A ieee al aie Select Find Close Seg New Dis Abo Location Denver Machine Usage fie toemon S Me Desen Denver DENMLSAN133 EXE Deployment Server If you choose Select you are presented with the Machine Search table from which you can make your selection Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 19 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Custom Installation Plan Deployment Server Revisions Ple Edt Preferences Form Window Heb E aey PSr JEN Qk Gan Dis Abo Machine Name Description Release Primary Deployment Server Server Share Path 7 ox BB inks MoE BYinternet fe Deployment Server o ease pero tits Primary User JDE Deployment Seve SSS feo Po Intel NT I 2 On Deployment Server Revisions complete or verify these fields Field Description Machine Usage Displays the value 15 by default to indicate that this is a Deployment Server Machine Name Displays the name of the Deployment Server appears by default The name is case sensitive should not exceed 15 character
112. depending on the language used as listed in this table DB2 400 for IBM i Tier Language CCSID 1 English 37 1 French 37 1 German 37 1 Italian 37 1 Spanish 37 1 Portuguese 37 1 Japanese 939 2 Danish 37 2 Dutch 37 2 Finnish 37 2 Norwegian 37 2 Swedish 37 2 Korean 933 2 Traditional Chinese 937 2 Simplified Chinese 935 3 Arabic N A 3 Czech 870 3 Hungarian 870 3 Polish 870 3 Greek 875 3 Russian 1025 Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 19 Language Process Overview DB2 400 for IBM i Tier Language CCSID 3 Turkish 1026 1 6 2 2 2 Workstations and Deployment Server Code page settings for individual languages are specified in Microsoft Windows System locale Verify that the Deployment Server code page is set correctly prior to upgrade 1 6 3 National Language Support National Language Support NLS is a set of common standards that enable data to be entered displayed stored retrieved and printed in multiple languages in different databases and on different platforms NLS is information that requires the set up of code pages and the JDE INI jde ini for the Enterprise Server and JDE INI for the web development workstations By using NLS standards JD Edwards EnterpriseOne maintains consistent data within all databases and hardware platforms The same database can store alternate language text relying on NLS standards to manage t
113. example you must set this parameter to PASS for the IBM network Printer 4317 See the printer s user manual for additional information 7 5 Creating the Job Queue To create the job queue 1 2 Log on to the IBM i as the QSECOFR Enter this command GO JDEOW A980WMNU From the menu select this option 11 Create Job Queue To determine the unused sequence number enter this command DSPSBSD SBSD QBATCH Select the option for Job Queue Entries and then record an unused sequence number 7 6 Working with OCM Generation This section discusses Section 7 6 1 Understanding OCM Mappings Section 7 6 2 Understanding Data Source Setup Section 7 6 3 Understanding OCM Creation Section 7 6 4 Understanding OCM Customization Working With the Enterprise Server 7 3 Working with OCM Generation 7 6 1 Understanding OCM Mappings JD Edwards EnterpriseOne does not ship Object Configuration Manager OCM records for standard environments in Release 9 1 They are generated when you finalize an installation plan OCM is created based on the Data Class for data sources and for a table or GT object The Data Class is stored on the Data Sources By Environment F98511 Data Source Master F98611 and Object Librarian Master F9860 tables 7 6 2 Understanding Data Source Setup Before OCM can be created you must configure your data sources Data source configuration and prompting is driven by the data in the F98511 ta
114. file For example on an IXS Server with 512 MB of RAM you should plan for a paging file size of 768 MB when considering how large to make the system drive When applications are installed on the server many of them install some of their files on the system c drive so you should plan for this requirement When you install a Microsoft Windows Server service pack you have the option of saving the files that are replaced in case you need to uninstall the service pack Therefore if you choose the uninstall option you may require up to 100 MB of additional free space on the system drive Future versions of Microsoft Windows Server may require additional free space on the c drive to plan for an upgrade of the existing installation Tip The recommended configuration is Microsoft Windows 2000 Server c drive 1 250 MB 1 5 times installed memory Applications for example Microsoft Visual C OEE etc Microsoft Windows Server 2003 c drive 1 500 MB 1 5 times installed memory Applications for example Microsoft Visual C OEE etc Installation source files represent the d drive on the Microsoft Windows Server This drive also contains the files supplied by IBM as part of the integration for Microsoft Windows Server The d drive only needs to be large enough to accommodate the Microsoft Windows Server installation source files client side integration software and any future updates to the integrati
115. help information F98710 Central Objects Table Header Holds table specific information for tables Specifications created in TDA BOBSPEC F98711 Central Objects Table Columns Holds all column information for the table in Specifications TDA DDCLMN F98712 Central Objects Primary Index Header TDA Information pertaining to the primary Specifications index F98713 Central Objects Primary Index Detail TDA All fields that make up the primary Specifications index F98720 Central Objects Business View Holds all business view specific information Specifications Specifications from BDA F98740 Central Objects Event Rules Link Stores header file for event rules Specifications F98741 Central Objects Event Rules Specification Contains actual event rules detail for a form Specifications F98743 Central Objects Data Structure Templates Contains one record for each template for Specifications example Data Structure for Business Function F98744 Central Objects Media Object Contains media object text for tools Specifications F98745 Central Objects Smart Field Named Contains smart field named mappings Specifications Mappings F98750 Central Objects FDA Text Information Contains form design text for all languages for Specifications any generated application F98751 Central Objects FDA Specification Contains specifications for an application Specifications Information F98752 Central Objects FDA SVR Header Contains summary information about
116. i This chapter provides instructions on setting up FTP on your IBM i Enterprise Server for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Using FTP is an alternate method to transfer the unwrapped jar file from a Microsoft Windows machine to the IBM i machine This chapter includes the following tasks Section 22 1 Setting up FTP on the IBM i a Section 22 2 Starting the FTP Server a Section 22 3 Copying assembly dat to the IBM i IFS Directory optional 22 1 Setting up FTP on the IBM i AS 400 Operations Navigator File Edit View Options Help P gt r 0 minutes old Environment My 4S 400 Connections Jded2 TCP IP Denas9 mlab jdedwards com Server Name Status Description Idec WoBOOTPIDHCP Relay Agent Stopped Bootp relay agent Jded WoBOoTP Stopped Bootp Jded2 Fooom Stopped DDM Basic Operations FEDHCP Stopped DHCP eo Work Management Ta RouteD Stopped RouteD p gt Configuration and Service FERC Stopped RPC F oe Wo TFTP Stopped Trivial FTP a 23 Pame Accoss Services am shi Network file KP 7 i im Servers D AS 400 NetServer Starte 45 400 Support for Windc Ti FINETO Stopped INETD Client Access FWEDRSOL Started Extended Dynamic Remot DNS fo Management Central Started Management Central g windows Administration zi Bomen cri konnad D btoke mln Tomor F ig
117. in data sources and ini files refer to the local database name in the exact mixed case which is E1Local Failure to use the exact mixed case will lead to decreased performance of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne on the Deployment Server 3 5 4 Microsoft Windows Internet Protocol Version 4 IPv4 The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server requires Microsoft Windows Internet Protocol Version 4 IPv4 for connectivity It cannot function using IPv6 If your Deployment Server is not working as expected use this procedure to determine if the problem is due to your Windows machine using IPv6 and if so to remedy 1 After installing the local Oracle database use a text editor to open the 1log xm1 file which is typically located in this directory C Oracle diag tnslsnr MACHINE NAME listener alert 2 Examine the contents of the log xml file for indicators that the machine is using IPv6 addresses IPv6 addresses can be distinguished by alphanumeric digits separated by colons rather than periods as in IPv4 addresses One example is if you see host_addr 1 gt This indicates an IPv6 address which in this case is the machine s local loopback address whose equivalent IPv4 address is 127 0 0 1 Another example that indicates the use of IPv6 is if this string exists host_addr fe80 7045 1laba cb6d 1b50 13 3 If you see references to IPv6 addresses in the logs after installing the Oracle local database then you ma
118. indexes that will be converted in table conversion workbench or in post workbench conversions The R98407 program creates a log of the actions it will perform against the database The log table is the F984072 table When the R98407 program is rerun it creates any items that are not at successful status and prints all items on the report 25 3 Environment Database Creation Report R98403 Release 9 1 creates an Environment Database Creation report for each environment that is part of your plan For each environment you can choose to load either production or demonstration data Users performing installations and upgrades should run version XJDE0001 Users performing cumulative updates should run version XJDE0004 Upgrade users should run XJDE0005 because the update process updates only generic text When running against pristine data these users should run version XJDE0024 The environment database creation copies the System data source previous release to the System 910 data source The System data source is release specific The report is read and errors are processed in the same way as they are for the regular Environment Database Creation 25 3 1 Setting Processing Options These processing options are the typical processing options for each version of the Environment Database Creation report 25 3 1 1 Version XJDE0001 for Installations and Upgrades The Environment Tab contains these options Option Values
119. installer will not continue Note The installer validates the location If the mapping to the remote location is not valid the installer cannot continue Likewise the directory specified in Step 1 must exist on the remote machine or else the installer cannot continue 3 8 7 2 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer Use the procedure in this section to install the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server 1 Log on to the Deployment Server as a user with Administrator rights Caution Ensure that the Administrator account name that you use does not contain any special characters such as ampersands asterisks or underscores 2 Locate the disk 1 which is either a physical disc or disc image directory for the Deployment Server installation DVD Working with the Deployment Server 3 25 Installing the Deployment Server Tip Refer to the preceding Tip Installation Methods for a list of various installation methods Caution Microsoft Windows 2008 For Windows 2008 if you are using a physical DVD and the installation starts automatically you must cancel this process and start the installation manually Caution Microsoft Windows 2008 On the Microsoft Windows 2008 platform you must right click on the executable and select Run as Administrator from the drop down You must right click on the executable and select Run as Administrator from the drop dow
120. installing any JD Edwards EnterpriseOne component on multiple IBM i machines for example if you are installing multiple logic servers you must run the Platform Pack installer from a different Microsoft Windows machine for each separate machine you install Otherwise the installer detects that some components for example Foundation for a logic server have already been installed and by design ignores subsequent requests to install the same component regardless of whether the installation is intended for a different target machine 4 5 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i The user profile you specify during the Platform Pack install must not be limited by network security Most of the Platform Pack install is done through commands and JAVA code that uses TCP IP to send work between various OS 400 service jobs To find out whether there are network security limitations in place 1 Enter the WRKREGINF command 2 Page down to the QIBM_QZ entries which are for the IBM i Access Host Servers 3 Use Option 8 on any of these to see if an exit program is in place In addition a Platform Pack installer failure can occur if any of the RSTxxx commands have been changed from the IBM defaults relative to the environments in which they can run To run the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i Enterprise Server 1 Log on to the Microsoft Windows machine where you will be r
121. is the Enterprise Server name and MFG ABC COM is the domain name The combined 4 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Configuring the Enterprise Server Prior to Installing the Platform Pack Enterprise Server name and local domain name represent the location of the Enterprise Server on the network Note Network Considerations To avoid problems when applications running on separate machines need to communicate with applications running on other machines on the same network make sure that each machine name host name has a single unique dot decimal address For example SYS1 could have a dot decimal address of for instance 140 252 13 33 but you could not assign any other address to it To verify that the local domain and Enterprise Server names represent the correct location of the IBM i choose Change Local Domain and Host Names from the Work With TCP IP Host Table Entries form Verify that the Local Domain Name and Local Host Name fields match the combined hostname domainname network address Following the example in this task the local domain name would be MFG ABC COM and the local host name would be sys1 4 3 5 Setting up IBM i Access on your Enterprise Server The IBM i Access terminal emulation program enables workstations to communicate with IBM i servers This task describes the procedure to set up the component of IBM i Access that runs on the IBM i server To set up IBM i Access on your
122. is used only for stem Local E multitier deployment F98891 System 910 Deployment Location Lists records with packages and help S Path Code information This table is used only for ystem Local B multitier deployment F98892 System 910 Package Deployment Lists scheduling information for a multitier S Scheduling environment stem Local F98950 Central Objects User Overrides table Contains application version information Specifications application version and user who entered it System Local F98980 System 910 Font Override by Lists languages with information on System Local Language corresponding display fonts F98BLOB System 910 DB2 BLOB Support Major Technical Tables 24 11 Table Data Source Description Purpose F98CONST System 910 Table of Constants Lists constants for report design aid and form g design aid ystem Local F98DRENV System 910 Data Replication Determines which path codes to update for System Planner Environment Mapping data dictionary replication table F98DRLOG System 910 Data Replication Change Contains one record for each replicated Serret Ma Log change The table information is stored as a P BLOB System Planner F98DRPCN System 910 Data Replication Pending Contains one record for each replicated change S Change Notifications for each subscriber Records are deleted as erver Map p Sa subscribers are notified System Planner F9
123. jdedebug log Output NONE Turn on jde log set to 0 to turn off jde log LogErrors 1 Do not send logging info to client set to 1 to send logging info to client not recommended ClientLog 0 JJDENET Tum off JDENET tracing Set to 1 to turn on JDENET tracing netTrace 0 TCENGINE Turn on minimal table conversion tracing Set to 0 to turn off tracing not recommended Set to 10 for maximum tracing useful for troubleshooting TraceLevel 1 Note There is a possibility that there may be invalid errors in the JDE log You can ignore any error along the lines that read No rounding record found in table tablename datasource where tablename is the name of the table and datasource is the name of the datasource Tip You can run the TC verification report prior to running spec merge to ensure tables are in the correct format Refer to Section 25 8 4 Compare Tables and Indexes Against Central Objects or TAM Specifications R9698711 in the chapter entitled Chapter 25 Working with Reports 6 34 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions 6 16 3 8 Stopping Table Conversions To stop table conversions 1 Close Workbench 2 On the Deployment Server open Task Manager press Ctl Alt Del and choose Task Manager 3 On the Applications tab select Installation Workbench and click End Task 4 Locate waiting jobs from Submitted Reports GH9011 by enterin
124. legal For example LETTER LEGAL and A4 Paper Width Define the width of the paper for this paper type This value is in the unit of measure specified by Unit of Measure Paper Height Define the height of the paper for this paper type This value is in the unit of measure specified by Unit of Measure Unit of Measure Enter a user defined code 00 UM to define the quantity in which to express an inventory item For example CS case or BX box Form specific information indicates the unit of measure in which the paper height and width are entered For example IN Inches and MM Millimeters Columns Per Page Define the number of columns per page For example 80 or 132 Characters Per Inch CPI Define the horizontal printing density in characters per inch You should only define values that are supported by your printer Line Per Page Define the number of lines per page For example 60 or 66 Line Per Inch LPI Define the line spacing in lines per inch You should only define values that are supported by your printer Values are 4 IBM 5219 5224 5225 and 3287 printers only 6 IBM 5224 printer only 8 IBM 5224 printer only 9 IBM 5225 printer only Note The standard computer print is 6 LPI and 10 CPI If you are printing on 8 1 2 inch x 11 inch paper typically you would specify 8 LPI and 15 CPI Maximum Number of Output Tray Define the maximum number of paper
125. location chosen for this plan appears by default Primary User The user to whom an email is sent when a package is deployed The default value for Primary User is JDE Note The case of machine name must also match the network ID for that machine 2 Continuing on Enterprise Server Revisions select the Enterprise tab and complete or verify these fields Field Description Port Number The port number value 6016 for this Enterprise Server appears by default from the jde ini 19 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Enter Data Source Information for Server Map Field Description Logical Machine Name The Installation Planner detects and provides a default value based on the current machine name on which the program is running The name is case sensitive should not exceed 15 characters and should not contain any special characters Database Type Enter the value for your database I DB2 400 Server Map Data Source Whenever you enter a host type the Installation Planner populates this field with a default value machinename 910 Server Map where machinename is the name of your machine Installation Path Verify that the default value is the installation directory path to which you want to install Release 9 1 on the Enterprise Server Make sure the value is specific to your version of the release For example for Release 9 1 the default path is JDEdwards P
126. log states Completed Successful or Completed with Errors If the table conversion finishes with errors review the entire table conversion log for specific error messages and then review the JDE LOG and JOEDEBUG LOG for more specific messages about the failure If the table conversion log states that the table conversion finished successfully review the table being converted in the data source that it is mapped to for the new release The following task shows what to verify for each table being converted 6 16 4 3 1 Verifying Table Formats To verify table formats 1 Verify table conversions that have a conversion sequence number of 99 or below by reviewing the pdf and 1log files generated to the printqueue directory These conversions also can be verified by reviewing the log for R8998504 6 42 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions Verify conversions with a conversion sequence number of 100 or above and process type 5 by reviewing the log file generated in the printqueue directory The following illustration shows the last few lines of a sample log file for the R8903B20 report TCEngine Level 1 D E910 system TCEngine tcinit c 1581 Format F03B20 contains 55 column s TCEngine Level 1 D JDEdwards E910 system TCEngine tcinit c 1581 TCEngine Level 1 D JDEdwards E910 system TCEngine tcinit c 1581 Format F03B20 contains 61 colum s TCEngine Level 1 D JDEdwards E910 s
127. mode to make sure the data selection and processing options are set correctly To refresh the business data 1 From the System Administration Tools menu GH9011 select Batch Versions In the Batch Application field enter R98403 Click Find Run your version the one that is similar to XJDE0021 On the Processing Options Environment tab verify the processing options Click OK J O 7 FPF Y D After running the batch application in proof mode run in update mode to recreate the existing tables Because User Defined Code UDC and menu merges are customer based copy them from the production environment to the PY environment If upgrading the development environment consider refreshing the development environment control tables from production environment to test the software Before You Begin the Upgrade 2 7 Refreshing and Verifying Data Before running Installation Workbench to upgrade the prototype or development environment copy the current production environment control tables Control Tables Production to the Control Tables Test or Control Tables CRP data source depending on the environment to upgrade This makes sure that your master control tables are used when the upgrade merges run during Installation Workbench 2 7 2 Deleting SQL Packages On the IBM i you must delete existing SQL packages You must do this before signing onto the software on the Deployment Server Use these steps to delete the exi
128. must remain whatever value you specified at the time of installation Optionally you can choose to install EnterpriseOne E1 Files to a remote machine as the Deployment Server If you do so the installer creates a unique planner client on the local machine that contains only the Planner pathcode You should only set up one planner client machine to do the Deployment Server jobs such as applying software updates running installation plan and so on Using a Remote Machine as the Deployment Server If you intend to use a remote machine as the Deployment Server prior to running the Deployment Server installer you must first map a network drive using this procedure 1 On the remote Deployment Server create a folder as the target location in which the installer will place the EnterpriseOne E1 files For example E JDEdwards E910 2 Using the example above share the target folder E910 with full permissions Caution Because the Deployment Server installer must be run as an Administrator you must also map a network drive as an Administrator Start a Command Prompt as Administrator and map a network drive on the local machine to the remote Deployment Server machine For example map zZ to Remote_Deployment_Server_Machine_name E910 E Administrator CAwindows system32 cmd exe C gt net use z MachineName E910_ Tip You can verify that the drive is being mapped as an Administr
129. next section in this guide entitled Section 3 8 7 Understanding the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer 3 8 6 Examine the Local Database Installer Logs Even though the screen indicates that the installation was successful you should perform the following checks to verify that the database truly installed correctly 1 Examine the log file The log file is in this folder C Program Files Oracle Inventory logs The log file name is named installActionsyyyy mm dd_hh mm ssAM PM log where the syntax is yyyy is the year 3 22 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Installing the Deployment Server mmis the month ddis the day of the month hhis the hour mmis the minutes ss is the seconds AM PMis either AM or PM For additional details on log file names and location refer to the section of this chapter entitled Section 3 11 2 OEE Installer Logs 2 Verify that the OEE services exist and are running a From the Microsoft Windows Control Panel navigate to Administrative Tools gt Services b In the list of Services look for these services OracleE1LocalTNSListener OracleServiceEILOCAL c If either of the above services is missing it indicates that there was a problem in completing all the installation and configuration steps You should examine the logs specified in the table in the section of this guide entitled Section 3 11 2 OEE Install
130. planner pathcode and databases on the local machine You will be given an option to install other components on a remote share EnterpriseOne Files The selection for EnterpriseOne Files includes mandatory system files If you do not select this component you cannot select any other environment components Likewise if you re run the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer to add an environment it will check to ensure that these files are already installed and you will not be given an option to install the environment on a machine drive or directory that is different from that which contains the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne files Development Environment Prototype Environment Pristine Environment Production Environment Tip You can use the Select All button to select all components Working with the Deployment Server 3 31 Installing the Deployment Server Wi Oracle Universal Installer Specify EnterpriseOne Files Location ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Specify EnterpriseOne Files Location EnterpriseOne Files and Pathcode s Location To override the default ORACLE_HOME path enter the mapped network drive Location CAJDEdwardsiE910 Browse Note The default location for EnterpriseOne shared files is the ORACLE_HOME path To override this location enter the mapped network drive Z Make sure you have write permission on that drive aa D Co 12 On Specify EnterpriseOne Files Location you can
131. prestart jobs by issuing these commands ENDPJ SBS QSERVER ENDPJ SBS QUSRWRK PGM ENDPJ SBS QUSRWRK PGM PGM PGM PGM PGM QSYS QZDAINIT OPTION IMMED QSYS QZDASOINIT OPTION IMMED QSYS QZDASSINIT OPTION IMMED QSYS QZDAINIT QSYS QZDASOINIT QSYS QZDASSINIT STRPJ SBS QSERVER STRPJ SBS QUSRWRK STRPJ SBS QUSRWRK Note Users will not be able to use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne while you are running these commands 6 4 Verifying the Language Code Character Set Note This step is only required if your Business Data and Control Tables are non Unicode For example if you are upgrading from JD Edwards Xe To verify that the code character set ID for your preferred language is set 1 OP oe iN On the IBM i enter this command WRKUSRPRF JDE Choose option 2 to edit Press F10 to verify and edit all fields Scroll to the character set ID CCSID Change the setting to your preferred language character set For example CCSID 37 English language For more information refer to Code Page Settings 6 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Working with Unattended Workbench Mode This setting will be returned to its original value before you start Release 9 1 on your Enterprise Server 6 5 Working with Unattended Workbench Mode This section discusses a Section 6 5 1 Selecting Attended or Unattended Workbench Mode
132. primary key 8 9 or below F3201 and writes it to field of Configurator Bucket 2 of Next F3201 Master File will Numbers System 32 now be retrieved from Next Number instead of using the seed record in F3201 Configurator Master Table 13 4 Upgrading from 8 10 or Below This section contains a list of all the Table Conversions required when upgrading from 8 10 or below Upgrading from 8 10 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R8901151 To move Email Address Four processing This conversion The UBE prints out a pdf from F0111 to F01151 Options exist for this moves Email listing the records when upgrading from conversion addresses from the processed and displays 8 10 or below 1 Run in Proof or Who s Who table how the F01151 columns Final Mode F0111 to the were updated i Electronic Address 2 Do you want to table F01151 If this reset the remark field is not run Email in F0101 to blank or addresses will not be not accessible 3 Enter the default value of the Email Hierarchy field 4 Process all records or only records with an associated User ID R891755B To convert F1755 for Three Processing To convert the Case when upgrading from 8 10 or below Options exist for this TC 1 Enter the time zone of the system date and time 2 Enter the daylight savings rule of the system date and time 3 Do you want to update the work order table with the case num
133. program When JD Edwards EnterpriseOne installs the documentation files it creates an entry in the Media Object Queue table that associates the Queue Name called ActivEraData with a generic path to the documentation For Solution Explorer to link each HTML file with the correct task you must open this program and change the server name for the directory path associated with the Queue Name ActivEraData The directory path has this structure Server_Name E910 SolutionExplorder Data where Server_Name is the name of your Deployment Server 11 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up Solution Explorer When the queue name ActivEraData is correctly mapped to the main HTML documentation directory Solution Explorer locates and displays the associated documentation when a user accesses a Task Location or Task View Location For example if a task named JDE001234 exists the path to the HTML file of the summary document for the task is Server_Name PY910 SolutionExplorer Data JDE001234 summary html where Server_Name is the name of the Deployment Server For more information on setting up the documentation path refer to Section 10 2 Modifying Media Object Queues 11 3 2 Setting Up the Home Page for Solution Explorer The home page is generally the first screen a user sees when logging on to Solution Explorer This screen can be used to display information that is relevant to end users in the enterpris
134. retrofit the object modifications check out the modified objects To check out objects see JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Object Management Workbench for the Web Guide http docs oracle com cd E24705_01 doc 91 e24255 toc htm Retrofitting Custom Modifications 16 1 Using JD Edwards Compare and Merge Tools Use the ER Compare utility to compare the upgraded version of the object on the client machine to a version of the object as it was before the upgrade This tool enables the direct copy of event rules from the original specifications to the upgraded specifications See the section of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Software Updates Guide entitled JD Edwards EnterpriseOne ER Compare for more information about this procedure http docs oracle com cd E24705_01 doc 91 e24260 compare_ tools htm BABDEDHF Use the other design tools described in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Development Tools Guides to retrofit other modified components of objects Use ER Compare to show the difference in named event rule NER business function source codes Redo any custom event rules for Do Initialize events because they have been removed from the UBE event list When you have tested and retrofitted the modifications check them back in and rebuild the package Test and fix the modifications and then rebuild and re deploy the corrected package Repeat this step until all the modifications are functioning properly 16 3 Us
135. running until there are no more TCs to run and there are no more TCs ina running status The inner loop runs through the F98405 table looking for all TCs at a status less than 60 As it reads each new record it then checks to see if there are any TCs waiting at status 35 for dependencies It first tries to run those checks again if their dependencies are satisfied before trying to run the new TC that it just read The Technical TCs those that are at conversion sequence lt 100 run one at a time For TCs above sequence 100 Convert All uses the maximum batch jobs specified in the Plan 4 by default meaning it submits up to that number of TCs at once You control how many are actually running at any time by your queue set up by using the P986130 program The default setup is four 4 batch jobs at once Selecting Convert All submits 4 then loops waiting for a job to end and submits the next job If you set your queue to a number larger than 4 only 4 are submitted at a time For each TC it tries to submit it first checks whether that TC has dependencies and checks the status of those dependencies If any of the dependencies is still running status 45 this TC is changed to status 35 waiting for dependencies The Convert Selected option can be used to submit several TCs at once and keeps looping till they are submitted It does not keep looping till they have run Press Find to see if they are done The P98413 program monitors and updat
136. server map data sources on these servers Filter Available Enterprise Servers Machine Key fi Find Port Number fo 5 Selected Enterprise Servers E JOEP Port 6015 amp Available Enterprise Servers z amp 4 gt This screen shows a list of enterprise servers that allows you to select to which enterprise servers you want to copy the package path codes 8 On Copy Environments Machines highlight the desired machine from the node that lists Available Enterprise Servers and click the Right Arrow icon to add the machine to the node that lists Selected Enterprise Servers Caution You must select at least one Enterprise Server before clicking Next the P98400 application will not allow you to proceed until a machine is selected To do so click on an Enterprise Server located in the left field of the Filter Available Enterprise Servers section below the field Port Number and then click the Right Arrow icon to move it to the right field under the node Selected Enterprise Servers 15 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 Note The process submits a UBE to each selected server The source path code and package must exist on the selected servers 9 Click Next a Environment Copy Environment Director Revisions g File Edit Preferences Form Window Help ever amp o aA amp 2 Select Fin
137. source The Enterprise Server is mapped to the table in the system data source The job queues can be viewed by logging into the DEP9 environment and opening the Job Queues application This table resides in the System Local and System 910 data sources Working With Installation Workbench 6 39 Understanding Table Conversions 6 16 4 Verifying the Table Conversion Process To verify that the table conversion process completed successfully a Section 6 16 4 1 Understanding Table Conversion Dependencies Section 6 16 4 2 Verifying Table Conversions a Section 6 16 4 3 Understanding Table Format Verification Section 6 16 4 4 Rerunning Table Conversion Programs See Also JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Programmers Guide for a more thorough understanding of the table conversions performed during the upgrade process For each Table Conversion that runs locally you will see error messages in jde 1log similar to the following a TAMInitX path jdeblc xdb Error opening index file path jdeblc xdb The system cannot find the path specified WinErrNum 3 The path name will vary by environment and release where references to TAM are only applicable to releases prior to Release 8 12 at which point TAM is superceded by Metadata a 2248 2420 Thu Dec 26 11 18 36 326 ODBC_U1 C823 ODB0000154 SOLPrepare failed Table FO0926 ODBC DSN JDE_DEV a 2248 2420 Thu Dec 26 11 18 36 326 JOBODBC C2695 ODB0000027 JOBODBC_ DescribeTab
138. that someone set by running ReconfigureMSDE If the password was decrypted with ReconfigureMSDE you should re encrypt it using ReconfigureMSDE exe Refer to to the section of this guide entitled Section 3 11 5 9 Encrypting the Password of the Local Oracle Database 3 11 5 7 3 tnsnames ora When the Deployment Server installer installs the local Oracle database E1Local the bin directory is added to the start of the Windows PATH If you have both the local Oracle database and the Oracle client installed for example if you are connecting to an Oracle database on a machine other than the Deployment Server the local Oracle database version of the executables and tnsnames ora are used In order to maintain functionality of the Oracle client you should add the remote database server tnsnames entries into the tnsnames ora used by E1Local which is located in this directory lt OEE_installation_path gt network admin By default the lt OEE_installation_path gt is C Oracle E1Local but the actual value is specified during OEE installation 3 11 5 8 Administering the Local Oracle Database Using SQL Plus The command prompt program SQLPlus exe and GUI program SQL Developer are provided with the installation of the local Oracle database using the Deployment Server installer You can use either tool to access the local Oracle database where both the user and default password are the same as the tablespace name If using
139. the translated text in processing options POTEXT will be corrupted Building server packages that include languages other than English requires that the LocalCodeSet value of the Release 9 1 client matches the LocalCodeSet value of the jde ini on the Enterprise Server If the LocalCodeSet value on the local client differs from the one specified on the Enterprise Server the server package build fails and errors are logged in the jde 1log on the Enterprise Server 14 6 2 Package Deployment Considerations A translated package cannot be deployed to a workstation if the appropriate character set is not installed on that workstation For example if creating a package containing Japanese text the workstation must be loaded with Japanese Microsoft Windows to view the Japanese data correctly Caution To transfer translated objects to a server complete the server package installation procedures Define each object you have modified for languages Therefore track the objects you changed to include them in a package Note To move all objects call Global Customer Support for assistance See Also JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide for more information about transferring objects to the server 14 7 Assembling a Package that Contains Published Business Services To assemble a Business Services package 1 Navigate to the processing options for Package Assembly from to the Package and Depl
140. the Prototype Environment cccccecececceeeseecscseseseececeeseseecesessssnesesesesenesesesenees 2 2 2 3 Preparing the Development Environment c cccccccc cece ce csceeeeeeececeeseenesesesseesesesenenees 2 3 2 4 Preparing the DB2 400 Database for Table Conversions cccccseccsseseseenetesesestetetesceenens 2 4 2 5 Checking Modification and Merge Flags c cccccccssesesescscseesescscseseseececsssnsnscecsesssnsnesesenens 2 5 2 6 Changing the Journali sissien ete setie bacnn Secchon EOR ER oleae ese Gece 2 6 2 7 Refreshing and Verifying Datta siiin nienia a iesiti viado aeei bas eiiiai 2 7 2 7 1 Refreshing the Business Data sosescerinisrdiieieiiie aa e 2 7 2 7 2 Deleting SQL Packa g sin er s lecteasees teuesaveds a a a E a a e E a couse 2 8 2 7 3 Refreshing the Control Tables cccccscssssssesessscsesssesesescsssesescsesesesesescsesssesesescsssnseeceees 2 8 2 7 4 Verifying Custom Changes in Master Control Tables 0 0 ccccsccseseesseseseeneneneseees 2 9 2 7 5 Backing Up the Servers and Databases cccccsessessessssetescecsesescsnansneneseeseneseseseenenens 2 10 2 7 5 1 Backing up the Deployment Server cccccccececccesesesesceseseseecscssseseececsesnsnseeceees 2 10 2 7 5 2 Backing Up the Enterprise Server cccceccceseseseceesesescscscsesesescscsssesesescsssnseecsees 2 10 2 7 5 3 Backing Up the Oracle Databases 0 0 0 0 ccc cece tees ceneeeneseneseneeeeeseneeseenes 2 10 2 7 6 Working with Purge Tables
141. the default location c Oracle If the default location is used the database will then reside in this directory instead of a user specific directory c Oracle E1lLocal The argument installation_directory is optional it represents the path where the local database will be installed Do not include E1Local as part of this path If this argument is not provided you will be prompted for the path as shown below Working with the Deployment Server 3 21 Installing the Deployment Server Oracle Base Directory ORACLE JD EDWARDS ENTERPRISEONE Enter the path where you want to install the local Oracle database This is the path where E1Local will reside Do NOT include E1Local at the end Path c Oracle Browse 7 If you specified the i switch but did not provide the installation_directory argument you will see the above screen On the screen entitled Oracle Base Directory in the Path field enter or browse to the directory into which you want to install the local Oracle database For example c Oracle Note This installation process can take quite some time Upon completion a local database called E1Local will exist in the specified directory Using the example above the database would be installed in this directory c Oracle E1lLocal Caution You must reboot your machine before continuing with the installation of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server as described in the
142. the remaining forms The Installation Planner processing options also affect which choices you are given while setting up your plan For a complete description of the processing options refer to Section 5 3 Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options Caution To use Installation Planner remove machines from an existing installation plan see Section 5 5 Deleting Machines from an Installation Plan This chapter contains the following topics Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 1 Understanding the Planner Process for Upgrades Section 5 1 1 Dropping SQL Packages a Section 5 1 2 Defining the SQL Package Creation Location a Section 5 1 3 Assumptions about Mandatory Pre Upgrade Process a Section 5 1 4 Mandatory Pre Upgrade Process Upgrading the Pristine Environment a Section 5 1 5 Running Table Conversions Locally a Section 5 1 6 Deferring Index Builds Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 5 1 1 Dropping SQL Packages When upgrading with IBM i data sources the SQL packages must be dropped before starting the planner The IBM i caches the table layout in the SQL package and does not look at what the current table layout is If the SQL packages are not dropped errors may occur in tables with changed formats To drop SQL packages 1 Ensure that JD Edwards EnterpriseOne is shut down or make sure that you have not attached to the IBM i yet 2 On the IBM i for each Bus
143. the status bar at the bottom of the dialog for informational messages If changing the password fails attempt to stop and restart the database services OracleServiceEILOCAL and OracleE1LocalTNSListener and then retry ReconfigureMSDE exe Caution If you manually decrypt the system account password ensure that you re encrypt the password before attempting to run JD Edwards EnterpriseOne If the password is not encrypted JD Edwards EnterpriseOne will fail because it cannot access the local Oracle database 3 48 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation 3 11 5 11 Import and Export Tablespaces to the Local Oracle Database You can use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne application P96717 to import and export tablespaces except the Planner To import or export the Planner tablespaces you must use scripts that are delivered with the installation of the Deployment Server The scripts are located in this directory For Planner Databases A El_install_dir gt planner data For local metadata repository database for example specs and serialized objects A El_install_dir gt planner spec This section discusses a Section 3 11 5 11 1 Import Tablespace Script attach_planner bat a Section 3 11 5 11 2 Export Tablespace Script detach_planner bat 3 11 5 11 1 Import Tablespace Script attach_planner bat To use the import tablespace script 1 Navigat
144. the table is effectively mapped to the default data source If a record is found and that record is set as the default mapping data source F98511 SPDFLTMAP a mapping with object name DEFAULT is created otherwise the actual object name is used Mappings are not created for tables in the Planner and Internal data classes 7 6 3 2 Understanding Logic Data Sources The OCM generation algorithm for UBEs and BSFNs are identical to each other but the output depends on whether the default mapping is LOCAL or an Enterprise Server The following table shows the default mappings for UBE and BSFN objects Base Environment HTML Web Server Environment UBE or BSFN DV910 PS910 PD910 PY910 JDV910 JPS910 JPD910 JPY910 UBE Enterprise Server Enterprise Server BSFN LOCAL Enterprise Server The algorithm is If the default is LOCAL a default mapping to LOCAL is created Server mappings are created for any object whose Location labeled Business Function Location for BSFNs and Process Location for UBEs in Object Management Workbench OMW is Server Only F9860 SIBFLOCN 3 a If the default is Enterprise Server a default mapping to the Enterprise Server is created LOCAL mappings are created for any object whose Location labeled Business Function Location for BSFNs and Process Location for UBEs in OMW is Client Only F9860 SIBFLOCN 1 7 6 4 Understanding OCM Customization This section discusses a Section 7 6 4 1 Understandi
145. tives 5 34 Selecting an Environment oo sececseeecsceesesesescscssssseececscsssesnecscesenseeseeeees 5 35 Specifying Environment Data Load Parameters 00 0 eee eseeeeeeee ee eeeeeeees 5 36 Verifying Advanced Parameters cccccccsseseccsssesesesescscsesesescscscseesscscssensnesesssees 5 37 Selecting Languages Optional c cccccesesseseseececeneseeceesesesesnseseseeceeessseananeneneees 5 39 Setting Up Environment Data Sources ccccceccseteseseseeeeescscsesescsescseseseseseseseseeesesees 5 39 Selecting an Environment Data Source Setup Option cceeeeeeeeees 5 40 Setting Up the Data Source for Business Data cccccccsesescstetetescecesesesnsteeneees 5 40 Setting Up the Data Source for Central Objects 0 0 0 0 eeeeeeeees 5 42 vii 5 4 11 4 Setting Up the Data Source for Control Tables 0 cccccseeeccscseesesesceeeeceees 5 43 5 4 11 5 Verifying the Data Dictionary Data Source occ ee ceeeee cece ceeeeeneneseneeenes 5 44 5 4 11 6 Verifying the Data Source for Versions cccccccsseseseesesenesesescseseseecseseseseseecses 5 45 5 4 12 Adding a Remote Locations c cstosstesscscosscvcssttavessies oei ea ee ae anai aara E EERE a Eai 5 45 5 4 13 Finalizing the Installation Plan cc ccc eee cece eeee ce ceeeeeeeeecesesessneneseseseneneseneseneees 5 46 5 4 14 Concluding the Validation Planner Report 0 0 0 cece cece cece ceeeeeesnececseeeeneneneeeees 5 47 5 4 15 Resetting the jde ini Prior to Running Table Conversions
146. to Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications Also refer to the appropriate Microsoft documents for installation information a The names of the Deployment Server Enterprise Server and the Development Client cannot exceed 15 characters in length a IPv4 Requirement The Development Client requires Microsoft Windows IPv4 for connectivity It cannot function with IPv6 Refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Development Client Installation Guide details Note You must have full administrator privileges to install Release 9 1 on the Microsoft Windows 7 based Development Clients For details refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Development Client Installation and Configuration Guide on the Oracle Technology Network OTN During Development Client installation connectivity is required for a Read write access to this client install directory on the primary Deployment Server in the base location oneworld Read access to the subdirectories located under this directory pathcode package For example deployment_server_name E910 PD910 package a Read write access to this directory on the primary Deployment Server client For example deployment_server_name E910 client a Refer to the Deployment Server Reference Guide in Setting Up a Development Client Installer on the Deployment Server for these topics 8 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Working With Developmen
147. to explain why no action was taken These warnings are normal and you can ignore them The most common reasons for the warnings are because the source and target data sources are the same or the table was created by a previously installed environment When the source and target are the same the report lists the following warnings Source data source warning Target data source warning Source Same as Target Existing table This commonly occurs when the copied from data source is the same as the target data source where the table is mapped and often occurs for the following tables UDC tables Menu tables F0004 and F0005 F0082 F00821 F0083 and F0084 If you load multiple environments that share the same mappings for example DV910 and TS910 the first environment loaded DV910 in this case lists the tables with a Success status The second environment TS910 lists any tables already created during the first environment load with a status of No Action and a target data source warning of Existing Table The No Action status and Existing Table warning for the second TS910 environment are normal You can verify that any table with a target data source warning of Existing Table has been created successfully by verifying it was created while loading a previous environment 25 4 Data Dictionary Specification Merge Report and Data Dictionary Text Merge Report R98722C and R98722T Note These reports are only for custome
148. trays available on the printer you are setting up Output Tray Name Define the output tray for a given batch print job 7 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up a Printer on the Enterprise Server 7 7 2 Defining a Default Printer To define a default printer 1 On the Printers menu GH9013 select the Printers P98616 program 2 On the Printers form click Define Default Printer The Work With Default Printers form appears 3 Click Add Printers Default Printer Revisions ioj x a File Edit Preferences Window Help lej x epg es E Can Dis Abo Links w Displ S OLE Internet Users may add several default printers for a valid user host name and environment combination Only one record can be active at one time If users choose LOCAL as the host name it will be converted to VWinClient User Group fruBLic al Report Name FALL Version Name Environment JADEVCLA Printer Name Host Name Object Status Ina Not Active 253 4 On Default Printer Revisions complete these fields and then click OK Field Description User Group Click the visual assist to select either a particular user for this printer or to select an entire group Report Name Click the visual assist to select a specific report to print Enter ALL for all reports Version Name Click the visual assist to select a specific report to
149. turning off the default option on the Environment Selection form As you move through the plan Release 9 1 displays a customization form for each parameter that you turn off Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 19 Setting Up Environments b Custom Installation Plan Environment Selection 1 On Environment Selection clear the options for those parameters that you want to customize Note The parameters that are available vary depending on the options that you selected at the beginning of the planning process 2 Click OK Note If you selected the default option for all parameters skip to Section 20 12 Setting Up Environment Data Sources Use the following tasks to customize each of the parameters listed above Release 9 1 displays customization forms only for those parameters for which were cleared of the default options Skip the tasks for those parameters that were selected 3 Continue with the following relevant tasks a Section 20 11 1 Selecting an Environment Section 20 11 2 Specifying Environment Data Load Parameters a Section 20 11 3 Verifying Advanced Parameters a Section 20 11 4 Selecting Languages 20 20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up Environments 20 11 1 Selecting an Environment The Select Environment form appears Environments prefixed with J are required for the HTML Web Server To select a
150. unique data source information or click Take Defaults to select the default data For purposes of this procedure to setup a Remote Installation Plan the Skip option is assumed 2 Click OK 19 10 Replicating Information to Remote Locations The options on this form determine whether the software will configure data sources and mappings for the remote location Ongoing replication must be implemented using third party software To replicate information to remote locations 19 16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Replicating Information to Remote Locations Fie aA inke r OK ban bi ane Links w Displ S OLE a Internet Calendar i Data Load k r Shared Data Sources for Location Aurora Calcula IV Replicate System Tables Selectthis checkbox to replicate all tables within the System data source Anew data source will be created for the Work remote location and the mappings for the remote environment will be activated to point to the new System data source Center A Internal ion Mail IV Replicate Data Dictionary Tables ie Select this checkbox to replicate all tables within the Data Dictionary data source Anew data source will be created for Gamal the remote location and the mappings for the remote environment will be activated to point to the new Data Dictionary Mail data source Internet 2 Create Shortcut 2 Send Replication must be implement
151. upgrade It compares database indexes versus Release 9 1 index specifications in F98712 and F98713 If you run the program in Update mode it recreates incorrect indexes 25 10 Pathcode Copy R9800942 Environment Workbench runs the R9800942 program for each custom environment whose path code is to be copied from an existing path code It copies the directory structure of the existing path code on the Deployment Server It also copies package inf and records in the package definition tables F9603 F9631 F96021 and F96215 replacing the path code names in those items 25 16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 26 Understanding Data Source Charts This chapter discusses these data sources a Section 26 1 Business Data a Section 26 2 Central Objects a Section 26 3 Control Tables a Section 26 4 Data Dictionary a Section 26 8 Local m Section 26 5 Logic a Section 26 6 Object Librarian a Section 26 7 Language Section 26 8 Local a Section 26 9 OWJRNL Section 26 10 Server Map a Section 26 11 System a Section 26 12 Versions 26 1 Business Data This chart lists the characteristics of the Business Data data source Field Valid Value for Client Access Data Source Name list includes possible sources Business Data PROD Business Data CRP Business Data TEST Business Data PS910 Data Source Use DB Data Source Type I Object Own
152. user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 02 in the Service Orders service orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 03 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 03 in the Service Orders service orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 04 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 04 in the Service Orders service orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 05 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 05 in the Service Orders service orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Warranty Claim Order Type value 01 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 01 in the Warranty Claim Orders warranty claim orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 02 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 02 in the Warranty Claim Orders warranty claim orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 03 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 03 in the Warranty Claim Orders warranty claim orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Manual Table Conversions 13 31 Processing Options for R31
153. uses Chapter 18 Performing a Data Only Upgrade for more information about data only upgrades 6 1 1 Verifying the Network Share on the Deployment Server When you created the plan this network share was created depsvrname E910 where depsvrname is the name of your Deployment Server Because several of the Workbenches update files through the network share these workbenches will fail if the share is not writeable Sometimes the security settings on your Deployment Server will prevent the Planner from creating the share as a writeable share Use this procedure to ensure that the share is writeable before proceeding Working With Installation Workbench 6 3 Understanding Workbench Components _ On the Deployment Server navigate to Start My Computer Manage Open Shared Folders Open Shares Right click on E910 and select Properties and then Share Permissions Select properties then select Share Permissions eo a FP YY FN Make sure that Everyone is set to Full Control Change Read permissions Note Even after the Workbenches are complete you will still need these settings on the Deployment Server s share in order to successfully perform client installs 6 1 2 Loading Data Demo Data and Production Data While previous versions of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne used Workbench components to load data for Release 9 1 the Platform Pack Installer loads appropriate data into specific environmen
154. valid environments for your installation check the Default Environments box Otherwise uncheck the Default Environments box to select individual environments Calcula Work Center g Internal ET g External Mail Internet g Create Shortcut g Send Shortcut On Environment Selection with the Default Environments checkbox selected click l the OK button Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 21 Setting Up Environments gt Custom Installation Plan Select Environments OF Xx File Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help le x Y A amp x J GY A Links 3 7 Select Find Add Copy Close Seq New Des Dis nks REP B OLE 8 interet Plan Name JREMOTE Remote Plan Select Deselect Data Sources Data Load Advanced langi OCh Row 1 w 2 On Select Environments double click on an Environment to select it 3 Click the Close button 19 22 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up Environments a Custom Installation Plan Control System Replication File Edit Preferences Window Help Y x R R Links i 7 7 Oe Cane bles Ab Displ S OLE S Internet a Z Data Load Calendar ATLPS910 Environment Data Sources for Location Aurora Calcula V Replicate Control Tables Selectthis checkbox to replicate all tables within the Control Tables data source Anew data source will be c
155. was successful Please remember You can find the log of this install at C Program Files x86 Oracle inventorylogs installActions201 1 08 05_10 34 56AM log CEED D acm 3 36 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Downloading and Installing the Latest Software 18 When the installation of the database finishes the End of Installation screen is displayed Caution Examine the Installer Logs Even though the screen indicates that the installation was successful you should you should always check the logs before you attempt to run the Deployment Server The file is named log txt and is located in the Deployment Server installation directory For example C Program Files x86 Oracle Inventory logs InstallActions installActionsyyyy mm dd_hh mm ssPM log For additional details on log file names and location refer to the section of this chapter entitled Section 3 11 2 OEE Installer Logs 19 On End of Installation select the Exit button 3 9 Adding Additional Environments Rerunning the Deployment Server Installer Caution If you want to add an additional environment that you did not install when you first ran the Deployment Server Installer you must re run the installer from the original disk image You cannot re run the installer using the OUI based installer You can only use the installer located accessed by Start gt All Programs gt Oracle JOE_DEP910_HOME gt Orac
156. with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne A R and G L systems Attachments entered for voucher G L distribution records were written to F00165 with Object Name OBNM equal to JEDTLGT Instead these should have been written with Object Name equal to GT0911A For each record in F00165 with Object Name OBNM equal to JEDTLGT this conversion changes the Object Name to GT0911A and modifies the Generic Text Key TXKY to match the structure of GT0911A 13 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R8900165JB To convert JEDOCGT This is to be run after After running this This process converts all to GT0911 when the F00165 table has job existing Media journal entry document upgrading from been successfully Objects attachments level attachment records in XE ERP 8 0 upgraded in the for Journal Entry the F00165 table to be automatic Upgrade document levels are coexistent with JD Edwards Plan Requires accessible from the World and with JD Edwards objects F00165 Account Ledger EnterpriseOne A R and Convert JEDOCGT to Inquiry form G L systems Attachments GTO911A P09200 entered for journal entry W09200A document levels were written to F00165 with Object Name OBNM equal to JEDOCGT Instead these should have been written with Object Name equal to GTO0911A For each record in F00165 with Object Name
157. your existing environments Data Sources Advanced Click OK to copy from the data source below and continue with the plan Existing records will not be replaced Click Cancel to skip the copy and continue with the plan Click the Advanced form exitto customize the data copy Previous System Data Source System B7333 ol as 4 This form imports information from your previous system data source The previous system data source you are upgrading from should be prepopulated Use the Data Sources form exit to verify the data source is set up correctly 5 If this is correct click OK and proceed to step 9 For more control over the process click the Advanced form exit and continue with the next step This screen sets up to copy information from the previous system data source into planner while providing some default information for the user It is also used for spec merge and table conversions to provide access to the previous environments Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 15 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 8 3 System E910 System E910 System E910 System E910 System E910 System E910 System E910 Note The Release Master checkbox may not be selected but the release master has already been copied at this point in the process 6 Select the objects to be copied from the previous release then specify the da
158. 0 le swd oui core 11 2 0 2 0 1 le swd oui core 11 2 0 2 0 1 DataFiles Install s le jdk 1 6 Install s Install s Install s le swd jre Install s le swd opa le swd opa le swd opa Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s Install s 23 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Dialogs Dialogs elDialogs Dialogs elDialogs 10 2 0 1 0 Dialogs elDialogs 10 2 0 1 0 1 Dialogs standardDialogs Dialogs standardDialogs 10 2 Dialogs standardDialogs 10 2 tage Disk1 tage Disk1 stage tage ext tage ext jlib tage ext lib tage globalvariables tage Queries tage Queries areasQueries tage Queries areasQueries 10 2 0 1 0 tage tage tage tage tage tage tage tage Queries dbQueries tage Queries dbQueries 10 1 0 2 0 tage Queries fileQueries 10 1 0 3 0 tage Queries areasQueries 10 2 0 1 0 1 Jdk 1 6 0 21 51 1 jre 1 5 0 11 0 jre 1 5 0 11 0 1 oui 11 2 0 2 0 oui 11 2 0 2 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 tage Queries dbQueries 10 1 0 2 0 1 tage Queries elDBQueries tage Queries elFileQueries tage Queries elFileQueries 10 2 0 3 0
159. 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com el features 1 0 0 0 0 resources JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 foundation JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 foundation 1 0 0 0 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1l foundation 1 0 0 0 0 resources Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Directory Structures 23 3 Deployment Server Directory Structure jdk jJdk 1 6 0 21 51 jdk 1 6 0 21 51 resources swd opatch swd opatch 11 2 0 0 2 swd opatch 11 2 0 0 2 resources swd oui swd oui 11 2 0 2 0 swd oui 11 2 0 2 0 resources swd oui core swd oui core 11 2 0 2 0 swd oui core 11 2 0 2 0 resources oracl oracl oracl oracl oracl oracl oracl oracl oracl oracl oracl oracl 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 tory Components21 tory Components21 tory Components21 tory Components21 tory Components21 tory Components21 tory Compon
160. 0FA or DV910PA The system administrator is required to build and test packages at the server level An installer may complete the process for the workstations These processes can take several hours depending on the scope of your business The procedures take place on Building and Testing Packages 14 1 Obtaining the JDK JRE the Deployment Server in the deployment environment as user JDE Release 9 1 installation must be completed on the Enterprise Server before building and testing packages The time required to build packages to the workstation varies depending on the database being used The package build and assembly process includes many critical tasks that must be successfully completed to install the packages correctly This section includes a list of known issues associated with the package build assembly and deployment process and gives instructions for avoiding them Before building a package review these instructions to successfully complete this process See Also Package Build in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide for information about how to build and deploy packages JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Development Standards for Business Function Programming Guide for information on how to convert business functions to support Unicode text strings 14 2 Obtaining the JDK JRE You must have a specific JOK JRE on the Deployment Server in order to build packages You can obtain the requisite JOK J
161. 1 1 3 Setting Security on the Data Dictionary Directory cc ccc cee eee cece nets eeeees 11 2 11 1 4 Setting Security on the Helps Directory ccccc ce cececcsesesescscseseeseecscseseseececsesssnseeceees 11 2 11 1 5 Setting Security on the Media Object Directory s ssssssesessssssrsiesissiessesresisresesssesees 11 3 11 1 6 Setting Security on the Planner Directory occ sec ceeeeececseseseececscsssnseeesees 11 3 11 1 7 Setting Security on the Print Queue Directory ou eee eerste ce ceeeeeneneneneeeees 11 3 11 1 8 Setting Security on the System Directory ccc cece ceseeseecscsesnseeceesesneeseecses 11 3 11 2 Using the Adobe SVG Viewer on Web Clients ccccccccsesesecscsesesesescscseseseecseseseseseecsees 11 4 11 3 Setting Up Solution Explorer sismes gi e rsa a E iraa PEN e SEES deaa 11 4 11 3 1 Setting Up Solution Explorer HTML Documentation Path eee 11 4 11 3 2 Setting Up the Home Page for Solution Explorer ssssssssssssessssssesisessssssrsinsresesssesens 11 5 12 13 14 11 4 Configuring JD Edwards EnterpriseOne for Use with Vertex Quantum Tax Applications 11 6 11 4 1 Adding Vertex Quantum Directory Information to the Microsoft Windows Server Path 11 7 11 4 2 Configuring the Release 9 1 Database Connections for Vertex Quantum Tax Applications 11 8 11 4 3 Mapping Objects to the Enterprise Server ccc ccc ee eeeeeeeeeeteseeesenetesseneeees 11 10 11 4 4 Testing the Vertex Quantum Connection fr
162. 12 and Programs and In JD Edwards World SUB in F0912 when R890912 XJDE0001 applications application P0912 Recurring upgrading from are required The requiring accessto Journal Entry stored data XE ERP 8 0 data stored in F0912 RJFROM and for object and sub in from a prior release RJTHRU will not separate fields In is required Suspend perform properly if EnterpriseOne RJFROM activity during the the data has not and RJTHRU are used to conversion been concatenated store a combined object and sub The table conversion concatenates OBJF and FSUB to form RJFROM and OBJT and SUBT to form RJTHRU This prevents the trouble of combining object and sub every time the fields are read and displayed The table conversion retrieves the account separator from the General Accounting Constants for use when combining the two fields R891201A To update WOYN in Run after the table Work Orders cannot Logic was added to F1201 when conversions have be created against reference the Work Order upgrading from completed any equipment Allowed Flag WOYN XE ERP 8 0 to create record that does not located in the F1201 table Work Orders against have this flag turned This flag indicates whether equipment records on a piece of equipment is allowed to have a Work Order entered against it Previously WOYN existed in F1201 but was not referenced in the Work Order creation logic R8948SINVF To convert INVF to None This job should be The Data Item is modified U
163. 12611 08 05_1 34 56AM Please wait After the OUI installer is launched the command window is closed and the Welcome screen is displayed Working with the Deployment Server 3 27 Installing the Deployment Server Oracle Universal Installer Welcome s of x ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Welcome The Oracle Universal Installer guides you through the installation and configuration of your Oracle products Click Installed Products to see all installed products Deinstall Products J About Oracle Universal Installer aan p C 6 On Welcome select the Next button 4 Oracle Universal Installer Select Installation Type ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Select Installation Type EnterpriseOne Deployment Server 9 1 0 0 0 What type of installation do you want Typical OKB Typical Install installs deployment client Planner prototype pristine environments and EnterpriseOne Files on the local machine This is for a general user Custom Custom Install lets you choose the specific environments you want to install on the deployment server The deployment client Planner always installs on the local machine You can choose to install EnterpriseOne Files and Environments on a remote machine If so you must setup the remote shared path first using mapped drives This is for an expert user only _ Product Languages k Cx 3 28 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgr
164. 5 Path Code Master table F00942 Package Plan table F98404 Machine Detail table F9651 Language table F984031 if you are installing an alternate language 2 Click OK to exit the concluding message box and initiate the Planner Validation Report f processing option default was chosen Planner Validation Report automatically prompts you to run this report f processing option default was not chosen on the tree view of your plan click Validate to initiate the Planner Validation Report 5 46 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 4 14 Concluding the Validation Planner Report To conclude the validation planner report 1 On Report Output Destination choose On Screen or To Printer and click OK 2 Review the report to confirm that all records were validated 3 After reviewing the report on the Batch Versions form click Close For more information about Section 25 1 Installation Planner Validation Report R9840B refer to Chapter 25 Working with Reports 4 On Work with Installation Plans click Expand to review the plan you created See Also A separate chapter in this guide entitled Chapter 19 Creating a Remote Installation Plan A separate chapter in this guide entitled Chapter 20 Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration A separate chapter in this guide entitled Chapter 21 Creating a Language Only Installation P
165. 76A8121 F76A07 F76A31 F76A40 F76A8120 F76A8122 F76A9003 F76A8123 F76A8124 F76A8125 F76A9002 F76A9004 F76AUI25 F76A91 F76A92 F76A94 F76AUI15 F76AUI87 Working With Installation Workbench 6 55 Understanding Obsolete Tables F76CT1 F76AUI94 F76AUI95 F76B126 F76C4001 F76CI2 F76CUI02 F76CI3 F46CT1 F76CT2 F76CUI01 F76CUIO3 F76H0904 F76H0301 F76H0401 F76H0402 F76H0903 F76H0905 F80004 F76H0906 F80001 F80002 F80003 F80005 F8009E10 F800110 F800130 F800140 F8009E00 F8009E20 F800910 F800900 F8009005 F800901 F8009015 F800920 F8011 F800930 F800940 F80100 F80101 F80111 F801610 F80151 F80160 F801600 F8016005 F801620 F80300 F801630 F80170 F80171 F80200 F804110 F8043005 6 56 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Obsolete Tables F804210 F8042105 F804220 F804300 F804301 F804305 F804302 F8043025 F804303 F804304 F804810 F8399 F809E00S F81A13 F81A14 F81A15 F8800 F8916V F8916 F8916L F8916RS F89165 F8916V2 F8926RS F8916X F8916Y F8916Z F8926 F8926Y F9002HI F8926Z F89500 F89500G F89601 F9002LI F91013 F9002LS F9002S F9002SL F9066 F95000 F9752 F95020 F950900 F95100 F9751 F9753 F98612 F9754 F98SYSGR F98311 F98500 F986120 F98768 F98614 Working With Installation Workbench 6 57 Understanding Obsolete Tables F98701 F98744 F98751A F98790 F99FSAR3 F98FLATM F99FCOEX F99FSAR1 F99FSAR2 F99FST02 FD3N015 F99F9911 F99WFMS
166. 8DRPUB System 910 Data Replication Lists definitions of published objects Publisher System Planner F98DRSUB System 910 Data Replication Defines each subscriber Subscribers System Planner F98EVDTL System 910 Event Detail file Filters events displayed in Form Design Aid FDA or Universal Batch Engine UBE System Local desi esign F98EVHDR System 910 Event Header file Stores event description and event ID This table is used for all event rules System Local F98MOQU System 910 Media Object Queues Contains path codes to locations of E S multimedia objects ystem Local F98OWSEC System 910 Release 9 1 Security Contains the security tables that store the Gussie Local Release 9 1 user name and password for y obtaining database user and password for certain data sources F98TMPL System 910 Templates System Local F98VAR System 910 Table of Variables Contains commonly used event rule variables System Local GT92002 Data Dictionary Data Dictionary Glossary Contains column in data dictionary with Information descriptions of data dictionary items GT9860A Object Librarian Object Librarian Generic Contains notes for objects in the Object Text Structure Librarian GT9862A Object Librarian Business Function Notes Contains notes for business functions GT98DSA Object Librarian Data Structure Notes Contains notes for data structures Structure and Item GT98DSB Object Librarian Data Structure Notes Contains notes for data str
167. 9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 JDEdwardsE91 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld Install Stage Actions ntw32F 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld nstall Stage Components com 10 OneWorld Clien nstall Stage Components com 10 OneWorld Clien Install Stage Components com 10 OneWorld Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clie
168. 91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 webclient JDEdwardsE910 inven webclient WEB INF DEdwardsE910 inventory Temp1 webclient WEB INF classes DEdwardsE910 jdk DEdwardsE910 jdk bin DEdwardsE910 jdk include DEdwardsE910 jdk include win32 Q tory Queries21 tory Scripts tory Scripts ext tory Scripts ext jlib tory Scripts ext lib tory Templates tory Templates OPa tory Templates oui tory Templates oui tory Templates sys tory Templates sys tory Templates sys tory Templates sys tory Templates sys tory Templates sys tory Templates sys Cj r Ej ey Gq tch Q y bin tem tem OC4d tem OC4d tem OC4d tem OC4d tem OC4d tem OC4d aq Q 2ee 2ee 2ee 2ee 2ee j j j j j q home home applications home applications webclient home applications webclient Q Q ear ear E amp tory Templates system 0C4J j2ee home applications webclient ear tem OC4d ear Q tes sys j2ee home applications webclient aq Q Gy 23 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Deployment Server Directory Structure JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 J
169. A new foreign A new foreign amount Foreign Amount when conversions have amount field field GLACR is added to upgrading from 8 10 or completed GLACR is added to the Account Ledger table below the Account Ledger so all of the currency table The TC will information is available in populate the new one F0911 record and the foreign amount field extra CA record is no based on the existing longer needed The CA ledger records system continues to write the CA ledger records during this first phase R890911PCA To populate F0911P Run after the table A new foreign A new foreign amount Foreign Amount when conversions have amount field field GLACR is added to upgrading from 8 10 or completed GLACR is added to the Account Ledger Purge below the Account Ledger table so all of the currency Purge table The TC will populate the new foreign amount field based on the existing CA ledger records information is available in one F0911 record and the extra CA record is no longer needed The system continues to write the CA ledger records during this first phase 13 5 Upgrading from 8 11 or Below This section contains a list of all the Table Conversions required when upgrading from 13 18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 8 11 or below Upgrading from 8 11 or Below Upgrading from 8 11 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R8908771A To populate F08771A The Processing This T
170. Block Profile F40G65 Farming Operation Header F31B70 Vessel Assignment Table R48S84A When upgrading from Run this batch This batch An Ending Effective Date 8 11 SP1 or 8 12 and application after the application will has been added to the you have existing Pool 48584 table has been update the ending F48S84 table This job Grouping Code records converted date if applicable on should be run to ensure in the F48S84 table records in the Pool Grouping Code Table F48S84 there is no overlapping pool grouping code records If there is a pool grouping code with different begin dates the batch application R48S84A will update the ending date of the earlier record with an ending date one day prior to the begin date of the next record Note This Post Install UBE is only needed when upgrading from 8 11 SP1 and 8 12 Manual Table Conversions 13 27 Upgrading from 9 0 or Below 13 8 Upgrading from 9 0 or Below This section contains a list of all the Table Conversions required when upgrading from 9 0 or below Upgrading from 9 0 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R43S001 When upgrading from 435001 UDC This TC will populate If ESU was installed in 9 0 or below and ESU 43S AL the F43S001 table From Release then this has not already been with the list of conversion does not need installed in prior supported alerts from to be run again release the UDC 43S 1 AL R41B100 T
171. C populates The tag table F08771A when upgrading from Option of this job sets the F08771A tag table was added with the MSEB 8 11 or below the value for the new withthe MSEB value column to allow field MSEB in the table F08771A from the processing option value selected managers to signoff on the final performance appraisal on behalf of the employee A value of 1 means Yes managers can approve or contest the final appraisal on the employee s behalf A value of 0 means No employees access the appraisal system through Employee Self Service and approve or contest the appraisal themselves R8908772A To populate F08772A when upgrading from 8 11 or below The Processing Option of this job sets the value for the new field MSEB in the table F08772A This TC populates the F08772A tag table with the MSEB value from the processing option value selected The tag table F08772A was added with the MSEB column to allow managers to signoff on the final performance appraisal on behalf of the employee A value of 1 means Yes managers can approve or contest the final appraisal on the employee s behalf A value of 0 means No employees access the appraisal system through Employee Self Service and approve or contest the appraisal themselves R8908773A To populate F08773A when upgrading from 8 11 or below The Processing Option of this job sets the value for the new field MSEB in the table F08773A This
172. CPYENV_ES900CLM ESS00CL XXS00CLM ES9O0CLMIXXS00CLM TESSO0CLM XXS00CLM TES900CLM XXSO0CLM ES900CLM XXS00CLM ES900CLM IXXS00CLM JESSO0CLM XXG00CLM TESS00CLM XXSO0CLM JESSO0CLIA XXG00CLM JESS00CLA XxSO0CLM JESSO0CLA XXGO0CLM TESS00CLM XxS00CLM 88 88 88 8 8 8888 Rls TFgg7a TRNMLCLPKG lFoaet F661 Foes ISRVRDIR TPATHOIR TSVRMETADAT TRNMLCLPKG F9651 TFaa6tot Trasen Conversion Finished Nor 3102008 10 48 14 3102008 10 52 11 Conversion Finished Nor 302008 10 52 11 37102008 1062 44 Conversion Finished Noe ar102008 10 62 44 31072008 10 64 30 Conversion Fietshed Nor 3 1412008 10 69 69 31420081110234 Conversion Finished Nor aitar2008 110234 S472009 11 0330 Conversion Finished Nor 2 14 2008 11 03 38 31472008 1141 00 Conversion Finished Noe 31142008 11 41 00 3714 2008 11 41 06 Conversion Fished Nor 3102008 11 4110 142008 11 4106 Conversion Finished Nor AN a2008 12 33 31 214 2008 12 41 17 Conversion Finished Noe A102008 12 41 18 214 2008 12 42 23 Conversion Finished Noe 32142008 12 4223 214 2008 12 4501 R98S4005 Conversion Finished Nor 2 14 2008 12 4501 214 200812 55 42 8989450 Conversion Finished Nor 2 14 2008 1265 42 314 200812 55 52 NG800253 Conversion Fieashed Nor 3142008125552 14 2008 1255 53 R98403 R938403 R984035 A9894005 Treeeess 5953450 nosooss3 R9894003 Ro800342 Ro894005 01 NINN NR NM MR MR RN om 8 Nf 15 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applicatio
173. Code Master table F00942 a Package Plan table F98404 a Machine Detail table F9651 Language table F984031 if you are installing an alternate language To finalize the installation plan 1 Click OK to exit the concluding message box and initiate the Planner Validation Report a If you chose the default processing option Planner Validation Report automatically prompts you to run this report a If you did not choose the default processing option on the tree view of your plan click Validate to initiate the Planner Validation Report 20 14 Concluding the Validation Planner Report To conclude the validation planner report 1 2 3 On Report Output Destination choose On Screen or To Printer and then click OK Review the report to confirm that all records were validated After reviewing the report on the Batch Versions form click Close For more information about Section 25 1 Installation Planner Validation Report R9840B refer to Section 25 Working with Reports On Work With Installation Plans click Expand to review the plan that you created Run Installation Workbench for this installation plan For more information about Installation Workbench refer to Chapter 6 Working With Installation Workbench 20 15 Configuring Additional Servers To configure any additional servers that you have added 1 2 Create server map Library SVM910 on additional Enterprise Servers After configuring y
174. Code Merge R9600042 a Solution Explorer Merge R9690002 a Favorites Merge R96911002 a Report Director Templates Merge R96914002 a Tips of the Day Merge R96915002 1 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding the Upgrade Process a Table conversions You can convert all tables for which JD Edwards EnterpriseOne has made database changes including technical specification and vertical tables Specification table merges You can use the upgrade process to merge custom modifications with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications A single batch application merges changes to these objects a Tables a Business views a Data structures only new are added a Interactive applications no changes are merge just new objects are added Batch applications a Business functions only new are added See Modifications Rules in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide for information about changes that merge or overlay former data a Package Workbench You use Installation Planner to perform on environment level operations that deal primarily with processing activity on the Enterprise Server platforms You use it to set up user profiles and workstation installations after installing the Enterprise Server 1 2 5 Understanding Installation Workbench Installation Workbench runs the plan created during Installation Planner It functions as a central point for all the process
175. D Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Release 9 1 Using Server Manager install the latest update service pack to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Release that is required to support JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Release 9 1 For example if you are upgrading from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 8 10 to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 you should install the most current service pack or update for Tools Release 9 1 where service packs and updates are cumulative and includes the base release Install the latest planner update For example if you are upgrading from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 8 9 to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 you should install the most recent Release 9 1 planner update Before You Begin the Upgrade 2 1 Preparing the Prototype Environment O gt N D g Run the Installation Planner Run the Installation Workbench Build packages Run post upgrade manual table conversions Apply all ESUs from the update center to get fix current 10 Use Visual compare to retrofit custom objects By following this procedure you are assured of saving time and avoiding extra work associated with retrofitting and retesting custom code in the future Before you begin the upgrade you must prepare your current development production and prototype environments and back up your Deployment Server Enterprise Servers and databases You must complete these preparatory tasks before the upgrade team arrives
176. DE INIjde ini on your Enterprise Server to add this section and setting MAITLMERGE FileLocation location where location is a temporary location that you specify for the CRM related mail merge files that are generated on your Enterprise Server for example TEMP 11 6 Enabling Verity Enhanced Search Capability If you are using the enhanced search capabilty with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne you must download and install the Verity Software from the Oracle Software Cloud Web site at this link http edelivery oracle com 11 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Working with SETOWAUT 11 7 Working with the Data Dictionary This chapter describes a scenario where you might be modifying your data dictionary on a machine other than your IBM i based Enterprise Server or if you are modifying your Data Dictionary and not planning on building a package to reflect those changes In such cases you need to use this mechanism to move the chances to your Enterprise Server Additionally you might find this procedure useful for performance reasons if you do not want your Enterprise Server to JITI data dictionary specifications in real time This process is also useful to move generated serialized objects required for web enabled applications from the Microsoft Windows web development workstation on which they were generated to the Enterprise Server 11 7 1 Recreating Replicated Data Dictionary Files To recrea
177. DE with the database password for user JDE in the Planner environment Prerequisites The Deployment Server must be installed Concurrent Tasks The Platform Pack installer can be running 5 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options 5 3 2 Accessing Processing Options To access processing options you must first log on to Release 9 1 and specify your installation plan type 1 2 3 Log on to Release 9 1 as user JDE with the database password for user JDE Access the planner environment JDEPLAN From the System Installation Tools menu GH961 right click either Typical Installation Plan or Custom Installation Plan Choose Prompt for Values The Processing Options form appears 5 3 3 Choosing Processing Option Values Once you have accessed processing options perform the following tasks to choose the processing option values Section 5 3 3 1 Specifying the Prompt Mode Section 5 3 3 2 Specifying the Process Mode Section 5 3 3 3 Specifying the Default Mode Section 5 3 3 4 Verifying Status Change Values Have Not Changed Section 5 3 3 5 Specifying Plan Completion Processes Section 5 3 3 6 Specifying Replication Options 5 3 3 1 Specifying the Prompt Mode To specify the prompt mode 1 Select the Prompt Mode tab Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 5 Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options W
178. DEO002 UPDATE normal processing ZJDEO003 UPGRADE restart ZJDE0004 UPDATE restart U U ZJDE0005 PGRADE reprint ZJDE0006 PDATE reprint ZJDE0007 Internet Code Change Merge 25 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Object Specification Merge Report R98700 25 8 2 How to Read the Report This report is designed to help you review the objects that will be merged If the report shows any objects that you do not want to be merged you can change the modification flag and the merge option so that the modification will not be merged into the new release Similarly you can verify that all modifications you want to be merged into the new release are flagged appropriately Two sets of headings appear on this report one for the modified object and a subheading for the modified components of that object Object headings Description Obj Type Type of object For example APPL for application or BSFN for business function Object Name Alphanumeric identifier for the object Member Description Brief description of the object Syst Code Product code the object belongs to Location The machine the object is on which is typically the Deployment Server Path Code Path code in the previous release that the object belongs to Mod Flag Whether the object has been changed C Mrg Opt Whether the object will be merged 1 is yes 0 is no Date Modified Last d
179. DEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j O jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk j 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 0 jdk 1 re re bin re bin client re bin new_plugin re bin server re lib re lib applet re lib audio re lib cmm re lib deploy re lib deploy jqs re lib deploy jqs ff re lib deploy jqs ff chrome re lib deploy jqs f chrome content re lib deploy jqs ie re lib ext re lib fonts re lib i386 re lib im re lib images re lib images cursors
180. Data Dictionary Compare Report If you have made custom modifications to business data these reports can help you verify that your modifications were carried forward to the new release You can use these tools anytime you want to compare items between two environments See Also a The section entitled Application Configuration Analyzer in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Software Updates Guide http docs oracle com cd E24705_01 doc 91 e24260 compare_ tools htm BABEHIBI 16 3 2 Using the Customization Object Analyzer Release 9 1 Update 2 If you are on an older release of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne you need to identify customizations in order to determine the impact and level of effort to retrofit the customizations into the newer release of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne This utility helps to identify the customizations in order to determine the impact and level of effort to retrofit the customizations into the newer release of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne A review of this information prior to performing modifications within the software will allow for a smoother and more predictable upgrade of the EnterpriseOne software The Customization Object Analyzer is comprised of a UBE that loads a table and UBEs that read from that table to create either a summary or detailed report The UBEs are a R9840DL Object Dataload This UBE loads the F98881CU table in a parent child hierarchy of object changes with a list of all JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
181. Description Default Login Defines how shortcuts to a web form are generated by the system code Values are either a reserved value or an explicit servlet name Reserved values are Standard The URL generated will point to a servlet on the Primary HTML Web Server a Redirector The URL generated will point to redirector in the Primary HTML Web Server and redirector will point to a servlet on another HTML Web Server for load balancing The servlet name to use is generated by the system a Explicit Servlet Name The user can specify an explicit servlet name in this field In this case the redirector functionality cannot be used The URL generated will point to the specified servlet in the Primary HTML Web Server Usage of Explicit servlet name is for backward compatibility only You should not use it unless you have a direct need Installation Path Enter the installation directory path to which you are installing Release 9 1 on your HTML Web Server Make sure this is specific to your version of the release and also the platform and application server on which your HTML Web Server is running For default paths refer to the applicable platform and application server dependent version of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne HTML Web Server Reference Guide WebLogic for Windows WebLogic for UNIX WebSphere for Windows WebSphere for UNIX WebSphere for IBM i Otherwise you must obtain this value from the HTML Web Server machi
182. Do you really want to exit 20 On Exit click the Yes button 4 22 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Troubleshooting the IBM i Platform Pack Installation 4 6 Troubleshooting the IBM i Platform Pack Installation This section discusses these potential error or warning conditions and their probable causes and resolutions when running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer a Section 4 6 1 Invalid User or Password Section 4 6 2 Abnormal Program Termination jt400 jar and or utill jar Missing a Section 4 6 3 Business Data or Control Tables Already Exist a Section 4 6 4 Business Data or Control Tables Do Not Exist 4 6 1 Invalid User or Password If you enter an invalid user or password you will see the following screen pop up multiple times At this point you should start the Windows Task Manager find the OUI process javaw exe and end it Then start the installer again Signon to the S or QSECOFR DAAMU V Save password OK Cancel 4 6 2 Abnormal Program Termination jt400 jar and or utill jar Missing If you receive the following message it indicates that you have failed to correctly copy the 3t400 jar and util400 jar into the stage ext jlib directory To remedy you must copy these files to the appropriate directory exit from the installer and restart the installer W Abnormal Program Termination xi Abnormal program termination An internal er
183. EPM EPM Summary Orders summary orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Manual Table Conversions 13 33 Upgrading E1PAGE from Release 9 0 to Release 9 1 13 10 Upgrading E1PAGE from Release 9 0 to Release 9 1 These section describes these tasks to upgrade E1PAGE from Release 9 0 to Release 9 1 a Section 13 10 1 Upgrading E1PAGE Using R98E1UGC Section 13 10 2 Upgrading F952400 Objects Using P98E1UGC Section 13 10 3 Working With Upgrade UGC Objects Using W98E1UGCA a Section 13 10 4 Working With Detail Upgrade Using W98E1UGCB 13 10 1 Upgrading E1PAGE Using R98E1UGC To upgrade your E1PAGE you should execute the R98E1UGC post upgrade This function of this UBE is to move data from previous release to the upgraded release for F952400 table The list of affected tables affected includes a F952411 This is the history table for the record moved F982400 This table tracks the record as LCM process F982402 and F982405 These tables track the upgrade process This section describes these tasks m Section 13 10 1 1 Processing Options a Section 13 10 1 2 Logic Flow 13 10 1 1 Processing Options Below is a list of the required processing options and an example of each From Environment For example DV900 From Release For example E900 a To Environment For example DV910 To Release For example E910 a Object Type For example ELPAGE Below is a list of th
184. ET Data Source Data Class E Business Data Platform fas4o0 IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name DS2 uli Sizing SQUMSDE ODBC SQUMSDE OLEDE Oracle DBZ UDB Access Logical Library Name TESTDTA ODBC Data Source Name Business Data TEST 1 From the Form menu click Advanced Verify the UNICODE flag is off If your Business Data was not set to Unicode in a previous release and the data source had not yet been converted to Unicode the Unicode flag must match the contents of the data source Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 25 Setting Up Environment Data Sources L 1 p Custom Installation Plan Advanced Parameters File Edit Preferences Form Window Help 18 x Y x amp Wi Links w Optio OLE Internet OK Can Dis Abo F nE athe j a V Upgrade Environment Plan Name PRODUCTION Library List Name P0910 E910 Production Environment Previous Environment PD900 E900 Production Environment Object Configuration Manager c a JV Recreate Object Mappings Table Specification r Control Table Merges _ ___ ioe M Table Conversions C None fe V Specification Merges Upgrade Merges c TC Properties o a Logic Data Source DENUDBSN1 Table Conversion Throttle a PESSE SS S R EE ANER EA N at oS eat ES ai
185. Enterprise Server enter these command GO JDEOW A9 80WMNU On the A98O0WMNU menu select selection 4 to run PORTTEST This program initializes a user and an environment The program selects records from the F0902 table which appear as messages on your screen If messages indicating your selections do not appear review the jde log file You should log on Working With the Enterprise Server 7 1 Starting Network Services on the Enterprise Server to each environment that you installed using JDE as the user and JDE as the password Note If you are running PORTTEST prior to running Table Conversions it will fail half way through because the F0009 and F0010 are not in the correct format Tip If PORTTEST fails to run refer to Section 17 1 Using the PORTTEST Checklist for diagnostic assistance 7 2 Starting Network Services on the Enterprise Server To start the network services on the Enterprise Server 1 2 Log on to the IBM i Enterprise Server as ONEWORLD or other Release 9 1 user On Current 9 0 Versions select the version of Release 9 1 that you just installed and press Enter The first time you start the IBM i Enterprise Server enter these commands and options GO JDEOW A9 80WMNU select selection 6 to end JDE Server select selection 7 to clear the IPC To start the Enterprise Server use these options select selection 5 to start the JDE Server select selection 8 to display active jo
186. F3283 for the the records If there are 8 11 or below entire table any problems the records shall be listed on the report These problematic records can be re run using R893283L UBE which uses data selection Run the records that had issues If problems persist these records may need to be manually removed from the database and re added R893283L To fix CTKID in select R893283F F3283 records when upgrading from 8 11 or below This TC cleans up the data in F3283 for select records Run this TC only if there were problematic records reported in R893283F R893215F To fix CFGSID in F32xx None when upgrading from 8 11 or below This TC cleans up the data in F3215 F3211 F32119 F32159 and F41021 for the entire table This report should fix all the records If there are any problems the records shall be listed on the report These problematic records can be re run using R893215L UBE which uses data selection Run the records that had issues If problems persist these records may need to be manually removed from the database and re added R893215L To fix CFGSID in select R893215F F32xx records when upgrading from 8 11 or This TC cleans up the data in F3215 F3211 F32119 F32159 and Run this TC only if there were problematic records reported in R893215F below F41021 for select records R099102 To populate the new Run after the table The Repost on menu Debit fields AND01 14 De
187. G F99WFSYS FD3N010 FD3N017 FD3N025A FD3N018 FD3N020 FD3N021 FD3N025 FD3N026 FD3N056 FD3N030 FD3N040 FD3N050 FD3N055 FD3N120L FD3N901 FD3N120P FD3N120T FD3N120W FD3N120X FD3N902 FD3N913 FD3N903 FD3N904 FD3N910 FD3N911 FD3N915 JDECODE 6 17 2 System Code 89 Obsoleted Tables For system code 89 there are two types of obsoleted tables a Business Data tables that JD Edwards EnterpriseOne no longer uses but are required to access the data within for the upgrade It is recommended to back these up somewhere until they re satisfied everything runs as should be New temporary tables that are used by TCs After the TC runs successfully these can be deleted They are not full tables just a couple of columns used for performance with millions of rows These are Note You will not have all of the below obsolete tables 6 58 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Obsolete Tables F00151 F05290T F06116T F06116TZ F0618TA F063951T F0901T F0911T F0911Z1T F0917S F186407D F186407T F32U1002 F3214 F3294 F3294Z F32941 F32942 F32943 F32944 F32945 F3295 F3296 F3296T F32961 F329611 F4009T F4100T F41001T F4101TT F4102TT F31172TE F4072TEM F41021A F40344A F42005A F42140A F42150A F42160A F31172TE F42199A F4311TA F43199A F43121TA F4211A F4211B F4074TEM F4094TEM F42119A F42119B F4600T F4600TPU F46011T F46091T F4611T Working With Installation
188. Instructions htm where download_directory is the directory where you downloaded the Planner Update Caution Every time you apply a new Planner Update you must run both of these SpecialiInstrs bat a R98403XB XJDE0002 Working with the Deployment Server 3 39 Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation 3 11 Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation This section discusses a Section 3 11 2 OEE Installer Logs Section 3 11 3 Configuration Files a Section 3 11 4 Path Code Master F98611 a Section 3 11 5 Oracle Enterprise Edition 3 11 1 Verify Local Planner Tablespaces are Not Attached If you are re installing your Deployment Server you must ensure that the local Planner tablespaces OEE are not attached To detach the tablespaces run these batch files jdedwards e910 planner data detach_planner bat jdedwards e910 planner data detach_metadata bat 3 11 2 OEE Installer Logs This section lists the log files for installations on the Deployment Server x jdedebug log Note The location is defined by this jde ini setting DEBUG DebugFile d jdedebug log m x jde log Note The location is defined by this jde ini setting DEBUG JobFile D jde log m C ReconfigureMSDE log m InstallLogs attach_plannerdata log a InstallLogs attach_plannerspec log a InstallLogs Configurexxxspec log Where xxx denotes that there are several of these l
189. JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Applications Release 9 1 and Tools Release 9 1 x for IBMi with DB2 400 E23322 17 August 2014 ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Applications Release 9 1 and Tools Release 9 1 x for IBMi with DB2 400 E23322 17 Copyright 2011 2014 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing If this is software or related documentation that is delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U S Government the following notice is applicable U S GOVERNMENT END USERS Oracle programs including any operating system integrated software any programs installed on the hardware and or documentation delivered to U S Government end users
190. JDE reports and confirm that all configuration statuses indicate Success 6 14 Using Machine Workbench Machine Workbench copies the F9650 and F9651 table from the Planner data source to the System 910 data source It then updates the F98402 table to indicate completion and uses the environment information to populate the F986101 and F98611 tables in the Server Map data source Note Only valid environments data sources and server map tables are created Working With Installation Workbench 6 21 Understanding Control Table Merges a Installation Workbench Machine Workbench i File Edit Preferences Form Window Help x Jj E Ww 2 e o B 2 Links Bow f lees seq New Prev Next Con Dis Abo V Previo B OLE 8 internet Plan Name UPGDV910 Upgrade Plan for DV910 New Status 60 Al Host Host rea et DENITSD21 0 PRIMARY DEP SRV Finalized 84 jas Es Finalized 6016 PRIMARY ENT SRV f Finalized 1 On Machine Workbench review each server and its associated parameters for the correct values 2 Select Configure from the Form menu When the system has configured your servers it changes the detail status to 60 and Status Description changes from Validated to Installed 6 15 Understanding Control Table Merges Control Table Workbench runs the batch applications for the planned merges that update the data dictionary user defined codes UDCs Solution Explorer and other c
191. JOLE 8 Internet Plan Name uPGovs1 0 Upgrade Plan for DV910 New Plan Status feo Det Status Sts Description Copy Tables from XJDE0051 70 Duplicate Co Copy Tables from R98403 XJDE0020 i Duplicate Convers B9 Copy Tables from R96983051 XJDE0001 i Copy Tables from R98403 XJDE0023 0 Duplicate Conversi B9 Copy Tables from R98403 XJDE0123 0 Duplicate Conversi B9 Create Copy System Tables B9800400 Finalized Row 1 DC You might want to change the status of one or more of the initial workbench tasks To change the status of a task use the following procedure 1 Enter GH961 in the Fast Path field to open the System Installation Tools menu 2 Double click Custom Installation Plan 3 On Work with Installation Plans select your installation plan 4 Select Expand on the Row menu The plan components including the initial tasks appear 5 Select the task whose status you want to change 6 On the Row menu click Disable Enable or Complete see the table below The task status changes Disable Displays a status of 70 to indicate the task is incomplete and will not be rerun a Enable Displays a status of 10 to indicate the task will be rerun a Complete Displays a status of 60 to indicate the task is complete and will not be rerun 6 18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Configuring Your Data Sources 6 11 Configuring Your Locations Location Workbench copies all locations that are defin
192. K 5 To add another HTML Web Server click Yes and repeat steps 1 through 4 to define another HTML Web Server 5 4 8 Entering Data Server Information E Data Server fel x If your database resides on a seperate server press OK to define your data server To select an existing data server press select Ifyou do notwantto define a data server press skip Select Skip xX Cancel 1 On Data Server choose one of these options a OK If your database resides on a separate server choose click OK to continue entering unique Data Server information Select Click this option to select an existing Data Server m Skip Click this option if you do not want to define a Data Server Continue with the Planner using the environment selection in step 6 of this task 5 28 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade a Custom Installation Plan Data Server Revisions oix File Edit Preferences Form Window Help la x Y x eR OK Can Dis Abo Machine Usage s Data Server Location Denver Machine Name DS6 Primary User JDE Description Data Server iSeries Release Jest 0 une w Window 9 OLE Internet Host Type fi 0 AS 400 Workstation Deployment Enterprise i HTML Crystal IGE Data Source Type l DB2 UDB on 08 400 ONAM e Paih Code Foundai nc eee
193. Mode s sssssssssssissesssssiesiesessesseeseeseesresnesneneeseess 6 11 Selecting Attended or Unattended Workbench Mode ss ssssssssssssssissssssesississesssesees 6 11 Setting a Task Break in Unattended Workbench Mode ccccceccsseeeee teense 6 11 Sol tior Explorer neies ars piaraan AE E a E a e EE aeaa S 6 12 Changing the Status of the Control Table Workbench Tasks s ssssssssssissrssestesressesses 6 12 Verify and Update PP8SMOQUE Settings 0 0 cee ccssssessesesesesssesescsesssesesescsesesesesescsessseecsees 6 13 Starting Installation Workbench eee cs eseseseececeseeseeeesesessssesesesesssseeesesesesesesees 6 13 Working With Initial Tasks Workbench ccccccccsesececeseeeescscsesesesescsesesesescsesesseeseecsees 6 15 Using Initial Tasks Workbench tssirini tintiret 6 15 Changing the Status of Initial Tasks Workbench cccccecccscesesesesteteesceeesesesnenanenens 6 17 Configuring Your LOcaHONS isis tccssstestscesstosscestsceevscessiotosteveciseoseceessshovesesse istovedeevdsraisesesdsiace 6 19 Configuring Your Data SOULCES cccccceseccccsesesesescscsesesesescscsesesescsesesesesescsesssesesesesessseseees 6 19 Configuring Your Environments ccccccccsssseses cs ceseeecscscseseseececssseseseecsssssseseceseesneseseeenes 6 20 Using Machine Workbench sssini erini idea i ni siaina ai 6 21 Understanding Control Table Merges snssesssesssssssrissstertessntrttssntettssntentesnsestesnteentente
194. NAL PGM object has been replaced with the new one in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 2 7 Refreshing and Verifying Data Before running Installation Workbench you have the option to refresh the business data for the environment being upgraded with a current set of Production data Having a recent copy of the data makes testing table conversions and the new release more effective For example when you upgrade the development environment refresh Business Data TEST and when you upgrade the PY environment refresh Business Data CRP The source can be any data set you choose but you should use a current copy of your production data When table conversions run during Installation Workbench this data is converted to the new Release 9 1 formats as required By using a copy of your production data you ensure a successful upgrade of your live production data later This section discusses a Section 2 7 1 Refreshing the Business Data a Section 2 7 2 Deleting SQL Packages a Section 2 7 3 Refreshing the Control Tables Section 2 7 4 Verifying Custom Changes in Master Control Tables Section 2 7 5 Backing Up the Servers and Databases Section 2 7 6 Working with Purge Tables a Section 2 7 7 Working with Accounts Payable Processing 2 7 1 Refreshing the Business Data To copy your business data you must add a version of R98403 that is similar to XJDE0021 from a B73 3 x or B9 workstation and then run it in proof
195. Number is added to R8995921 the F00926 table the F00926 record as column ROLEDESC well This sequence Each Domestic number begins at 1000 Language Record in and increments by 5 the F00926 table with each record contains a Sequence written Number When running this UBE the sequence numbers begin at 1500 and increase by 5 R8995921 This TC takes all Only required if the The UBE retrieves Refer to Notes in R89959212 current User Profiles customer is each User Record above records in the F0092 upgrading from a from the F0092 User table and inserts a release prior to 8 9 Profiles table It User Role If applicableto vo t populates the Relationship Record pp de thi OE following output based on the upgrade tus fields F0092 USER and F0092 UGRP tables The record that is added to the F95921 table contains the User Role formerly the Group for this user in the F0092 table Effective and Expiration Dates Some of these values are based upon the values in the processing option should be run as the third in this 3 part sequence R89959212 R89959211 R8995921 Values in the records inserted into the F95921 table are based upon those inserted into the processing option at submission time F95921 RLFRROLE F0092 USERF95921 RLTOROLE F0092 UGRPF95921 RLEFFDATE PO EffectiveDateF95921 RLEXPIRDATE PO ExpirationDateF9592 1 RLFUROLE1 PO cIncludedInAllF9592 1 RLROLETYP 0 And Audit Info The F95921 ta
196. OBJ QFPNWSSTG AS4IXS1 DTACPR YES Note It is a good idea to increase the size of your application event file on the Deployment Server such as increasing from 512 KB to 2 MB before beginning the deployment process to prevent it from filling up and halting the job 3 3 Installing Microsoft Windows Visual Studio Before running the Deployment Server Installation install the Visual Studio 2008 SP1 RunTime Refer to Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications in this guide The Visual Studio 2008 RunTime is available from the Microsoft Download Center Download and install one of the following Microsoft Visual C 2008 SP1 Redistributable Package x86 32 bit vcredist_x86 exe Microsoft Visual C 2008 SP1 Redistributable Package x64 64 bit vcredist_x64 exe Note Choose the 32 bit or the 64 bit installer that is appropriate for the Microsoft Windows platform on which the OUI Installation for Deployment Server will be run 3 4 Understanding the Deployment Server The Deployment Server for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne must reside on an Intel Pentium based computer running Microsoft Windows The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne software installation and upgrade programs enable you to create and maintain installation plans and deploy Release 9 1 to the Enterprise Servers and workstations Beginning with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Release 9 1 the Deployment Server installati
197. OE and ONEWORLD so that they can create SQL Packages in there for UBEs and CALLOBJ kernels If the PSFT user profile exists for each environment that you are upgrading uses GRTOBJAUT to grant authority for all tables in business data and control tables for JDE 4 3 3 Setting the System Values Because the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer cannot run with the default QJOBMSGQFL system value you may need to change it To verify the existing QIOBMSGOFL system value and change if necessary 1 Enter this command Working with the Platform Pack on the IBMi 4 3 Configuring the Enterprise Server Prior to Installing the Platform Pack WRKSYSVAL QJOBMSGQFL Enter option 5 If the value displayed is NOWRAP you must change it to WRAP or PRTWRAP Be sure to note the existing value so you can reset it after you complete the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack installation To allow the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne services to run you must change the value for QUSEADPAUT to NONE before installing the Enterprise Services Then once the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack installation is complete you can change this value back to its original setting To set the system values 1 Enter this command WRKSYSVAL QUSEADPAUT Enter option 5 If the value displayed is anything other than NONE you must change from that value to NONE Be sure and note the existing value so you can reset it after you comple
198. One Applications Upgrade Guide Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i Note This selection includes system files You must choose this feature for all initial installations of the Enterprise Server If you do not select this feature the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer automatically selects it for installation a ES Production a ES Prototype a ES Development a ES Pristine Note For Upgrades you should always select the Pristine environment Otherwise Table Conversions may not process correctly 11 After you have verified your selection of components click the Next button 4 Oracle Universal Installer Would you like to Install or Upgrade EnterpriseOne ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Would you like to Install or Upgrade EnterpriseOne Ifyou are planning to upgrade EnterpriseOne please backup your databases and files install Install ErterpriseOne C Upgrade Upgrade EnterpriseOne D C Working with the Platform Pack on the IBM i 4 17 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i wt Oracle Universal Installer Would you like to Install or Upgrade EnterpriseOne ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Would you like to Install or Upgrade EnterpriseOne Ifyou are planning to upgrade EnterpriseOne please backup your databases and files c Install Install EnterpriseOne Upgrade Upgrade Enterpr
199. P40039 Processing Options for R31P40039 Order Type value 04 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 04 in the Warranty Claim Orders warranty claim orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 05 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 05 in the Warranty Claim Orders warranty claim orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Supplier Recovery Order Type value 01 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 01 in the Supplier Recovery Orders supplier recovery orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 02 for Supplier Recovery Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 02 in the supplier recovery orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 03 for Supplier Recovery Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 03 in the supplier recovery orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 04 for Supplier Recovery Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 04 in the supplier recovery orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 05 for Supplier Recovery Orders The user defined
200. Pack E910SYS This is the system library Caution You must change the value that defaults into the Installation Path field as shown in the screen capture above Deployment Server Name Using the visual assist button choose the name of the Deployment Server to which this Enterprise Server is attached A Deployment Server name appears in this field by default but it can be changed if necessary Note If you change the port number to a value other than 6016 you must also change this setting in both the Enterprise Server and workstation JDE INIjde ini 3 Click OK 19 7 Enter Data Source Information for Server Map To enter information for the Server Map data source p Data Source Biel x Ifyou are using JDEdwards standards you can take the defaults Otherwise press OK to define datasource information Take Defaults X Cancel 1 On Data Source click OK to continue entering unique data source information Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 11 Entering HTML Web Server Information a Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions Bel es File Edit Preferences Form Window Help l x vy x R amp R OK Can Dis Abo a Data Source Name Ente 910 Server Map piana Data Source Use pe Lapel DERE SIT a Data Source Type fi DB2 UDB on 08 400 F JDBNET Data Source Pon Data Class ff Host Server Map Platform fasaoo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name Ent
201. Paths sssessesessessessssssessissessirsissesssesiesiesiesnnssesiesiesressesees 3 18 3 8 5 Using InstallManager to Install a Local Database on the Deployment Serverv 3 18 3 8 5 1 Using InstallManager to Install a Local Database in the Default Location 3 19 3 8 5 2 Running OEESetup to Install a Local Database in a Directory Other Than the Default Location 3 20 3 8 6 Examine the Local Database Installer Logs 0 cccccscssssesecceeteescscseseeceesssnsneeeeeees 3 22 3 8 7 Understanding the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer 3 23 3 8 7 1 Understanding EnterpriseOne Files Location ccccccccscesesecscseeseeceeesneceeeees 3 23 3 8 7 2 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer 3 25 3 9 Adding Additional Environments Rerunning the Deployment Server Installer 3 37 3 10 Downloading and Installing the Latest Software eee eeeeee te teeeeeeeeeneseeeneees 3 37 3 10 1 Installing the Latest Tools Release and Latest Tools Release Patch to the Deployment Server 3 38 3 10 2 Installing the Latest Planner Update and Running the Special Instructions 3 38 3 11 Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation cccccceccceeee cece eseeeeecsceeeneteeeeees 3 40 3 11 1 Verify Local Planner Tablespaces are Not Attached cccccccccce ee eceeeeteeeeeees 3 40 3 11 2 OEE Installer Logs accsiscvescb assistant snscotevelsisteteves bativereutet intel bees E ad p
202. Plan910 JDECTL910 JDEDD910 JDSYS910 JDEVL910 JDEOL910 1 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Environments Overview JDEData910 When using the planner environment to change your configuration a Planner database tables are updated with the change a A plan is defined and run to move the change to the production environment When using the deployment or production environment to change your configuration after finishing the process a Production environment tables in the System pathcode are updated in real time a Planner database tables are not updated For the deployment and production environments OCM and data source information comes from the planner database You should use the production environment system technical tables to make changes to environments pathcodes packages and OCM 1 5 3 Pristine Environment PS910 Use the pristine environment P5910 to test pristine un customized objects with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne demonstration data or for training classes The pristine environment is also used to run Table Conversion processes during an upgrade This environment is required to compare modified objects to pristine objects When encountering a software problem that JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Global Support cannot duplicate they will ask you to sign on to the pristine environment to duplicate the problem Routinely either monthly or quarterly refresh the data for this environm
203. Planner for an Upgrade On Environment Selection turn off the options for those parameters that you want to customize Note The parameters that display might vary depending on which options you chose at the beginning of the planning process Click OK Note If you checked the default option for all parameters skip to Section 5 4 11 Setting Up Environment Data Sources Use the following tasks to customize each of the parameters listed above Release 9 1 displays customization forms only for those parameters for which were turned off the default options Skip the tasks for those parameters that were left turned on Continue with the following relevant tasks Section 5 4 10 1 Selecting an Environment Section 5 4 10 2 Specifying Environment Data Load Parameters m Section 5 4 10 3 Verifying Advanced Parameters a Section 5 4 10 4 Selecting Languages optional 5 4 10 1 Selecting an Environment The Select Environment form appears Note Environments prefixed with Jxx are required for the HTML Web Server Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 35 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade p Custom Installation Plan Select Environments File Edt preferences Form Row Window Help a amp A ju p Select Find Add Copy Close Seq New Des Dis Links w REP S OLE internet Plan Name INSTALL Install Plan Select Desel
204. Platform Pack 3 Choose option 10 and then choose option 5 for program OSYS QZDASOINIT 4 To access the form on which you can change the number of prestart jobs enter this command and press F4 to prompt CHGPJE 5 Change the number of prestart jobs as needed and then press Enter 6 Restart the QUSRWRK subsystem for your changes to take effect 4 3 6 Starting the Remote Database TCP IP Service Optional If your installation will have separate IBM i machines for the Enterprise Server and the Data Server you will need to start the remote database TCP IP service on the Enterprise Server To start the remote database TCP IP service 1 Enter this command STRTCPSVR SERVER EDRSQL 2 In order to change the attribute of this server to autostart when TCPIP starts you will need to use IBM i Navigator from a Microsoft Windows client 1 Open the node for your IBM i machine Open the Network node Open the Servers node Double click on TCPIP gt N A list of TCPIP servers is displayed in the right hand pane 5 Right click on EDRSQL select Properties and enable the option Start when TCP IP Starts Tip You can also start and stop this server from this screen 4 3 7 Optimizing Machine Resources Ideally you should run the Platform Pack Installer when the machine is not busy However if there are other processes running on the same IBM i as the Installer their performance will be impacted by the Platform
205. Processing Options xi Prompt Mode Process Mode Default Mode Status Ch 4 gt Enter a 0 for Silent Mode This mode will only show the data entry forms Enter a 1 for Additions Prompt Mode This mode will prompt for the addition of multiple servers This is the default mode Enter a 2 for Verbose mode This Mode will direct you through the process with a series of Prompt forms Prompt Mode 2 On the Prompt Mode tab select a prompt mode Value Model Description 0 Silent Installation Planner displays only the data entry forms 1 Additions Prompt Installation Planner prompts you to add servers 2 Verbose Installation Planner directs you through creating a plan with a series of prompting forms 5 3 3 2 Specifying the Process Mode To specify the process mode 1 Select the Process Mode tab 5 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options W Processing Options xi Prompt Mode Process Mode Default Mode Status Ch 4 gt Enter a 1 if you are adding servers to your existing setup This will step through the process of adding different types of servers Deployment Enterprise Data JAS to your existing configuration Enter a D or leave blank if not adding servers to your existing setup This is the default Additional Servers This value must always be a 1 for the Installation process Installation Help x C
206. R8903B11P1 To convert FO3B11 This is to be run after Critical A R features Over a dozen new fields from XE ERP 8 0 the A R ledger has in invoicing will were introduced to the been successfully malfunction if this F03B11 table The standard upgraded in the job is not run table conversion which is automatic Upgrade Plan The basic F03B11 table conversion must have successfully run in your plan prior to running this Post Install job Suspend all Invoicing and Sales Update activity from the time of the upgrade through the successful completion of this job 13 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide run through the Table Conversion Scheduler application P98430 initializes all of the new fields to default or blank values Limitations in the table conversion tool prevent it from calculating values for some of the new fields in the F03B11 table This post install conversion supplements R8903B11 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R890411P1 To convert F0411from This is to be run after Critical A P features New fields have been added XE ERP 8 0 the A P Ledger has in invoicing will to F0411 This updates the been successfully malfunction if this domestic amount to upgraded in the job is not run distribute ATAD foreign automatic Upgrade amount to distribute Plan Suspend all CTAD domestic non Vouchering and rec
207. RE from Sun See Also For the supported version of the JOK JRE refer to Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications in Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne of this guide 14 3 Installing Application Fixes Before you build packages you should install all application fixes relevant to your business Application fixes include maintenance packs ESU bundles and individual fixes You should use Change Assistant to find relevant application fixes for system codes associated with the functionality you are using Change Assistant is a java based tool that centralizes and economizes the process of searching identifying downloading and deploying many types of software fixes such as ESUs and Tools Releases It is available free of charge for maintenance paying customers and can be downloaded from the Update Center Tests conducted in the Oracle labs on EnterpriseOne have shown that the use of this tool results in a significant reduction in elapsed time as well as a considerable reduction in manual steps when compared to current search download and deploy processes For instructions on using Change Assistant refer to Using the Change Assistant in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Software Update Guide 14 4 Reviewing Pre Package Build Issues Check the following items before building packages in order to minimize errors during package builds Perform each of the relevant tasks on the machine where the package will be built
208. Revisions efa File Edit Preferences Form Window Help lej x vy x RE inks w Advan BJOLE internet OK Can Dis Data Source Name Ente 910 Server Map rae Data Source Use oe Local Data Source a Data Source Type ji DB2 UDB on 05 400 JDBNET Data Source Por Data Class z Host Server Map Platform fas4oo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name Ente Fi SGUMSDE ODBC SGUMNSDE OLEDB Oracle DBZ UBB Access Logical Library Name evma1 0 ODBC Data Source Name Ente 910 Server Map 1 On Data Source Revisions verify your Server Map data source information Tip Default data sources are configured as completely as possible However when you run Installation Planner you might need to modify some data source information to reflect your system specific configuration 2 While defining your plan some fields were changed to reflect the previous release values Change the following fields Data Source Type Enter I for IBM i Access Data Library Name Enter SVMrelease whererelease is the release to which you are installing for example E910 3 Click OK 20 7 2 3 Adding another Enterprise Server On the prompt to add another Enterprise Server choose one of the following options a To add another Enterprise Server click Yes Repeat processes starting with Section 20 7 1 Entering Enterprise Server Information a To continue with Installation Planner setup click No
209. Server Configuration tasks Fr Configure 45 400 as DNS server fi Configure system as DHCP server fi Configure system as DNS server fo Configure system as Directory server Configure subsystems for server jabs b Help for related tasks i 12 of 22 objects FTP onthe IBMi 22 1 Starting the FTP Server Use the AS 400 Operations Navigator to open your IBM i machine node and navigate to Network gt Servers gt TCP IP 2 Ifthe DDM server is not already started you can manually start it using the Operations Navigator In the right hand pane of the Operations Navigator in the Server Name column highlight DDM right click and choose Start 3 Configure the FTP server In the right hand pane of the Operations Navigator in the Server Name column highlight the FTP server right click and choose Properties 4 On FTP Properties select the Initial Formats tab 5 With the Initial Formats tab selected ensure the following checkboxes are enabled Checkbox Description File naming format Path Working directory Use user s home directory File listing format UNIX listing format 6 Click OK to save the changes and exit the FTP Properties 22 2 Starting the FTP Server 1 2 Use the AS 400 Operations Navigator to open your IBM i machine node and navigate to Network gt Servers gt TCP IP In the right hand pane of the Operations Navigator highlight FTP right click and choose Start 22 3 Copying asse
210. Status feo Asynch TC Throttle fa Gir I Run TC on Deployment Server I Tracing O racing On eru For tires Installed Table Conversion LOCAL bee l ilnstalled ALTER Table Conversion LOCAL F0010 Installed ALTER Table Conversion LOCAL F409 60 Installed MERGE v894009 lvegsoo9 1 l5 Table Conversion LOCAL F00921 60 Installed R8900921 XJDE0001 iTable Conversion LOCAL FO007 60 installed RE90007C XJDEO001 Table Conversion LOCAL F3009 Installed R893009C XJDE0001 1 5 Table Conversion LOCAL F41001 60 Installed MERGE 18941001 Table Conversion LOCAL F49002 Installed ALTER j1 5 Table Conversion LOCAL F40205 60 Installed R9940205 JDEO001 81 iTable Conversion LOCAL F4322 Installed ALTER 81 Table Conversion LOCAL F986167 60 Installed R89986167A XJDE0001 87 Simple Report LOCAL 1F42199 60 Installed R8942199D XJDE0001 103 lo 5 Table Conversion JDEP F42199 60 Installed R8942199A XJDE0001 104 lo i5 Table Conversion JDEP F42199 60 Installed R8942199B XIDE0001 105 i i i 15 Table Conversion JDEP 1F42199 60 Installed R8942199F XIDEO001 106 jo i5 Table Conversion JDEP F49219 60 Installed ALTER 107 i i iTable Conversion JDEP 55 55 j i i j j 80 80 i i i i j i i i i j ooooo ooo fo oOo oO 8 Row 1 san 2 To override where the Table Conversions will be run click on Run TC o
211. The default value is 0 Proof Mode Option 6 The recommended value is N which copies tables only if they exist in the source Enter Y to copy tables whether or not they exist in the source data source The default value is N Option 7 The recommended value is Y which recreates tables that already exist in the target data source Note If you do not recreate the tables you will end up with a mixture of production and demo data in the tables The default value is N Option 8 The recommended value is N which forces a copy of the data ignoring the CPYD flag Note A value of Y will leave almost all tables empty That is a production data load The default value is N 6 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Workbench Components Field Description Option 9 The recommended value is N which creates the indexes on the tables before copying the data This prevents duplicate rows Note A value of Y copies the data and then create the indexes The default value is N 5 Click OK to accept the values and start the UBE 6 1 3 Creating the Job Queue You may set up the job queues before running the Installation Workbench If you do not Initial Tasks Workbench will create a default entry for QBATCH with a setting of maximum 4 Note For Queue Type 2 the Release 9 1 Job Queue name must match an existing IBM i JOBQ To create the job queue 1 Ent
212. Type i DB2 UDB on 08 400 F JDBNET Data Source Data Class gt Data Dictionary Platform sso IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name DS2 Defan Sizing SQUNEUE ODEO BaLMEDE OLEDE Gracie Bea UDB Aoress ooo Library Name p091 0 ODBC Data Source Name Data Dictionary 910 5 44 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 1 On Data Source Setup verify the accuracy of the Data Dictionary data source The library name in the Library Name field is the Release 9 1 data dictionary library DD910 2 Click OK 5 4 11 6 Verifying the Data Source for Versions To verify the Versions data source a Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions BEI eS File Edit Preferences Form Window Help x 4 x Mu inks van ia Ok eh ble Abo w Advan 8 OLE 3 Internet j Data Source Name versions DY910 aavancen Data Source Use os Local Data Source Data Source Type fi DB2 UDB on 08 400 F JDBNET Data Source Data Class fv Versions Platform fas4oo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name DS2 SOQUMSDE ODBC SGUMSDE OLEDE Oracle DB2 UDB Access Library Name convar 0 ODBC Data Source Name versions DV910 Logical S25 2 1 On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the Versions data source 2 Click OK Note Versions data sources are specific to the pathcode and the Unicode flag o
213. Type value 05 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 05 in the Engineering Change engineering change request orders If no value is entered the default order type Request Orders assigned is 01 Equipment Order Type value 01 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 01 in the Equipment Orders equipment orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 02 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 02 in the Equipment Orders equipment orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 03 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 03 in the Equipment Orders equipment orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 04 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 04 in the Equipment Orders equipment orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 05 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 05 in the Equipment Orders equipment orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 S WM Order Type value 01 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 01 in the Service Orders service orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 02 for The
214. Validate Complete Enable Disable 4 On Work with Installation Plans click Add The Installation Planner form appears 19 3 Entering Information in Installation Planner To enter information in Installation Planner Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 3 Entering Information in Installation Planner p Custom Installation Plan Installation Planner ioj File Edit preferences Form Window Help 18 x Y xk amp OK Can Dis Abo Links w Deplo S OLE S Internet mPlan Information Name REMOTE Description Remote Plan Status fi 0 In Planning m Install Type Install C Upgrade C Software Update ASU ESU m Release To Release Eno oo 1 On Installation Planner complete these fields aE Field Description Name Enter the name of your remote plan Description Enter the description of your remote plan Status Select 10 as the status of your remote plan Install Type Select Install To Release Verify that the release number is E910 2 On Installation Planner click OK Dp Location Mm El Aplan must be associated with a location Ifyou would like to define a new location press OK To select an existing location press select Select xX Cancel 19 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering Plan Location Information 3 On the Location dialog click OK
215. Working With Signon Security For initial installations of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne you must setup system user s using the Work With System Users P980001 program to populate the FY8SOWPU table You must set up system users before you can add and associate a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user to a system user using EnterpriseOne Security P980WSEC Caution If you attempt to add a user with the P98OWSEC program before you add the system user through the P980001 program the system may add an invalid record to the F98OWPU table You might have to delete the invalid record from F98OWPU using the SQL Query tool You must perform security setup signed on to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from a deployed client If you perform the steps signed on to the deployment server you will not be updating the correct security tables for your JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system This chapter contains the following tasks a Section 12 1 Setting Up Signon Security Section 12 2 Enabling Server Side Signon Security m Section 12 3 Enabling Client Side Signon Security a Section 12 4 Setting Up JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Single Sign on 12 1 Setting Up Signon Security To set up signon security 1 On P980001 Work With System Users click Add Working With Signon Security 12 1 Setting Up Signon Security E P980001 System User Revisions E a x File Edit Preferences Window Help 18 x y x amp amp WR Tools OK Can Dis
216. World A7 3 migration Manual Table Conversions 13 11 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R98403A All customers Run after all table Errors due to Copies the data contained in XJDE0001 conversions have missing vital data demo data on the M been completed Do occur if this job is installation image to the ust Run i onthe not alter the Data not run For n customer s database Depl t Selection for this example writing to Byers table conversion Set certain accounts Server processing options to could generate an copy the tables from error Source Environment JDEPLAN to the Target Environment you are upgrading to for example DV9 R9500165 To remove RTF Run after table Rerun if glossary formatting Run if you conversion process items are missing cannot see any Most customers do most likely for customized dictionary not need to run the Korean and Japanese glossaries when UBE Check your glossary items viewing them through customized data the application dictionary glossaries If they appear to have disappeared schedule this UBE to run at a convenient time There is no loss of data Once the UBE has run the glossaries are visible It runs for several hours 13 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job
217. _D120402_T165255122 pdf Adobe Reader Ele Edt yew Window Help Comment Sign XIDEO0 Oracle JD Edwards Plan Name CONC Table Conversion Merge Driver ConversionMerge Type Application Table Eavroumest Previous Object Descnpsos De Propam Name Eavroament Name STGACLS STGACLS F43121 Purchase Order Receiver File ii STGACLS STGACLS F3003 Routing Master File STGACLS STGACLS F3003 Routing Master File STGACLS STGACLS F401 Trem Master STGACLS STGACLS Foon Account Ledger STGACLS STGACLS FO901 Account Master STGACLS STGACLS FONL3IM IDEM Muin Level Message XJDE0001 V894101B VS90901A 888888 Bly 9 It is important to remember that at the complete of the TC Workbench prior to using the tables you must manually create the missing indexes To do so you can use one of the following methods Method One 6 48 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions a Using the the GUI for your database SQL Management StudioOracle Enterprise ManagerDB2 UDB Control CenterSystem i Navigator for IBM i highlight the same table in the Pristine database for example F0911 and generate DDL to a file Edit the SQL statements substituting the tablespace names owners and databaselibrary for your target schema For example replace ps910dta with proddtaPS910DTA with PRODDTA Run the SQL script from your database s GUI Note that you should delete those CREATE INDEX statements t
218. a Message Mie x Before proceeding with the Upgrade you must delete the glbltbl ddtext dddict files from the target path code on the enterprise server PYS10 Failure to do this usually causes data corruption due to customized Display Decimals 6 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Working With Initial Tasks Workbench This message warns that before proceeding with the Upgrade you must delete the glbltbl ddtext and dddict spec files from the target path code on the Enterprise Server Failure to do this usually causes data corruption due to customized Display Decimals At this point you should delete these spec files as instructed and then click the OK button in the Message to continue 6 10 Working With Initial Tasks Workbench Before the workbench is run the F00945 table in the System data source is blank because it is no longer populated when a plan is validated However after you run the Initial Task Workbench several tables in the System data source are populated including the F00945 table The Initial Tasks Workbench form lets you complete the following preliminary tasks before the individual workbenches begin Security copy Media Object Inplace Unicode Conversion applies to upgrades from Xe and ERP 8 0 Data Dictionary Media Object Unicode Conversion applies to upgrades from Xe and ERP 8 0 Copy data dictionary Copy system tables Release Master You can also change the status
219. a Printer on the Enterprise Server Printers Platform Information sy DEVPRN1 4 On Platform Information complete these fields Field Description Platform Type Enter the platform type on which you are installing or use the visual assist button to select a platform type Library Name The physical printer name must be the same as the outqueue name If you use the default QGPL library to store your outqueues you need only enter the outqueue name in this field Valid characters are all alpha A z numeric 0 9 at and underscore _ Ouputqueue Name If your outqueues reside in a library other than the default QGPL library you need to enter the library name and the outqueue name in this field For example QUSRSYS DEVDES3A Valid characters are all alpha A z numeric 0 9 at and underscore _ 5 After you complete the requisite fields click Next to access the Printer Setup form Use this form to set information for the printer such as the printer model physical location of the printer printer definition language PDL and paper types 6 On the General tab complete these fields a Printer Model a Printer Location 7 On the Details tab in the box labeled Printer Definition Language select one of these options 7 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up a Printer on the Enterprise Server a PostScript a PCL a Line Printer a C
220. a Section 14 5 Reviewing Troubleshooting Tips a Section 14 6 Building an Alternate Language Package Section 14 7 Assembling a Package that Contains Published Business Services 14 1 Understanding Packages Building and testing packages provides a method to create a package to define and build a package to deploy packages to both servers and workstations and to troubleshoot the packages These features use a step by step director process and include package assembly package build and package deployment Package build is used to set up a workstation or server with Release 9 1 software Examples scenarios include Setting up anew workstation Deploying custom solutions to all or to selected users Creating a new pathcode for development Deploying a fix Changing the package from a full to a partial package on some workstations There are options to define three different package types to build and define packages with custom solutions and to distribute them through two different deployment options These options are available to a single server to a workstation or user or to selected machines groups or individual users These options can be delivered using just in time or scheduled installation methods You must define build and deploy a custom package in order to include any modifications changed or added business functions or applications into a package for deployment to workstations for example DV91
221. a Start Programs IBM IBM i Integration for Microsoft Windows Server name of your XS server IBM i devices OPTO1 or your optical drive name All Tasks then right click and lock device Be sure to unlock it after use if the IBM i needs it next Rebooting the Deployment Server always unlocks the optical device automatically so be sure to relock it if Deployment Server will use it again after a reboot After completing the above four steps of the Microsoft Windows installation you will need to carve out at least one additional Network Server Storage space from IBM i disk to be used as dedicated Deployment Server disk for Release 9 1 with an assigned drive letter CRTINWSSTG NWSSTG AS41IXS14 NWSSIZE 40000 TEXT Release 9 1 G drive Once the storage spaces are created you can vary the IXS off again in order to link the drives to the Microsoft Windows server After the Release 9 1 drive is linked you will vary the Deployment Server back on and you are ready to proceed with the normal set up of Microsoft Visual C TCP IP FTP etc Working with the Deployment Server 3 7 Installing Microsoft Windows Visual Studio Note It is a good idea to create a SAVF and back up your C drive in case you need to recover the Microsoft Windows operation system quickly CRTSAVF FILE QGPL IXS1CDRIVE Vary off the Deployment Server and then enter these commands SAV DEV QSYS LIB QGPL LIB IXS1CDRIVE FILE
222. a system user IBM i user profile who has update rights to the library Adding a security override must be done by a security administrator To add a security override you must first add a system user for the user profile which has update rights to the library for example the library owner and then add an override for the EnterpriseOne user who will run the package build Refer to the Package Management Guide for further details on setting up security overrides for package build 14 4 6 Verifying UNICODE Settings When Upgrading From Xe If you are upgrading from Xe and you have modified any applications or UBEs with NERs and which are language enabled you must ensure this setting is in your jde ini of the build machine on which you build the NERs and also on the Deployment Server on which you are running the upgrade processes INSTALL Unicode Conversion Codepage code_page_value where code_page_value is a valid value for the code page of the language enabled application with NERs For example for Korean language the value would be INSTALL Unicode Conversion Codepage ksc 5601 14 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Building an Alternate Language Package Note If you are a language customer but have never added NER to your applications then you are not required to have this setting Also note that the LocalCodeSet value is no longer used in releases subsequent to Xe 14 5 Reviewing Tr
223. a table Syst Code Product code Merge Action Indicates the object on target source was added replaced or merged Merge Status Success means that the object and all modified components were merged successfully Warning means that one or more components did not merge correctly Mod Flag Modification flag Date Completed Last date the object was modified Time Updated Last time the object was updated This table describes the column subheadings Object headings Description Description Type of object component such as a template a field or an event rule Status Status of the merge for that particular component Success is denoted by a status of Added or Changed Unsuccessful merges are noted with Failed or Error Description This can be a brief description of the component or in the case of a failure an error message describing the failure Disable and Append indicates event rules which require developer fixes 25 8 3 Errors and How to Resolve Them If an error occurs which stops the merge process there are two ways to recover RESTART or RERUN If the process stops during the Object Librarian merge or the Versions List merge no recovery of specifications is necessary Just rerun the merge after fixing the problem that initially caused the error If the Merge Status column indicates that some items have merged or started merging you must do a RESTART Working with Reports 25 13 Object Specification Me
224. aaea iaat aora at aaraa aai laaiden ananin deii 1 6 1 2 1 8 Rules for Event Rules sisina nunna a a E S N 1 6 1 2 1 9 Data Structure Rules einn ean aa a a E a aA aeons 1 7 1 2 1 10 Business Function Rules ernst ion em nnne oo aa a a rin e a kaia 1 7 1 2 1 11 BATEE AERE A EE asad E O TEREE E O SOE 1 7 1 2 2 Understanding the Deployment Server Installation ccc cece cs eeeeeeeeeeeens 1 7 1 2 3 Understanding the Platform Pack Installation eee ceeeenececeneeeeeneeeeeees 1 7 1 2 4 Understanding the Installation Planner 0 ccccccececcsssesesescseeesescscseseseecsesessenseeeseees 1 8 1 2 5 Understanding Installation Workbench ss sssssssssssessessessississesstssinsinsessrnnieseesresssneesees 1 9 1 2 6 Understanding the Workstation Installation cccccccssescsteteteseeeeteseecenenesesesesneneseeeees 1 9 1 3 Considering Additional Factors ccccccceccccsseseseccssseescscsssesesescscssssseececscssssseesscsssnesesenenes 1 10 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications 1 10 1 3 2 Understanding Machine Names ccccccccccccsecesesccsseeseecsssssnscecessssnesesesssensnesesenenes 1 11 1 3 3 Accessing IBM i Performance Tuning and White Papers eee 1 11 1 3 4 Using JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Support ccc ccc ees cecscseenseececesensneseeeees 1 11 1 3 5 Understanding Documentation Conventions ccccssesecescsceseseeesneeseseeeeseseseenanenens 1 11 1 3 5 1 Documentation Updates cccccccc
225. able When EnterpriseOne runs it looks for database drivers in each directory from start to finish in the PATH The first occurrence of a driver DLL that EnterpriseOne finds will be loaded This means that the path to the 32 bit Oracle database client must come BEFORE the path to the 64 bit Oracle database If you installed the 64 bit database and 32 bit database client in that order the order in the PATH should be correct However if you installed them in the opposite order you need to correct the order in the PATH To reverse the order of the 64 bit database and 32 bit database client paths in the Windows PATH follow these steps 1 From the Start button select Control Panel and then System 2 On the left side of the window that comes up click Advanced system settings Click the Advanced tab Click Environment Variables In the System variables box highlight the variable Path and click Edit In the Variable value field cut the 32 bit database client s path and the following semicolon for example c Oracle product 11 2 0 client_ 1 bin el A Oe 7 Paste the client s path and semicolon at the start of the Path value Click OK 9 Click OK to exit from the Environment Variables window 10 Click OK to exit from the System Properties window 11 Close the Control Panel s System window 3 After you install the Deployment Server you can copy this tnsnames ora file that the installation delivered
226. ables of long more than 10 characters file names to be created on the IBM i Rebuilding the table causes your system to be in a restrictive state Coordinate this activity with the system administrator To test long file names on the IBM i 1 2 Log on to the IBM i as QSECOFR On the command line enter STRSQL This command will start a SQL session on the IBM i To test a long file name enter this SOL statement CREATE TABLE QGPL LONGFILENAME FIELD CHAR 10 where LONGFILENAME is the name of your file Your system is ready if the file is created in the QGPL library You can ignore the journal setting To remove the file that you just created in the QGPL library enter the following SQL statement DROP TABLE QGPL LONGFILENAME Note If you are unable to create the table with a long name likely your system cross reference tables are corrupt You must rebuild them before proceeding Refer to Rebuilding Cross Reference Tables on the IBM i 4 3 10 Checking for Co existence Tables Before running the Table Conversion Workbench you must check whether any of your tables are in Co Existence DDS format If you run Table Conversions against DDS format tables it will lead to data corruption and cause TCs to fail Use this procedure to check for co existence tables 1 2 Log on to the IBMi as QSECOFR On the command line start a SQL session by entering this command STRSQL Run the fo
227. ach valid path code Does the user name match that of a valid Release 9 1 account Remember that the user name is case sensitive Is the password valid for the given Release 9 1 account Does the environment name match a valid Release 9 1 environment Remember that the environment name is case sensitive Does JDENET start and stop properly If you answered no to any of these questions your batch application might not run If you answered yes to all the questions submit a batch application now If your batch application does not run correctly turn on error logging and resubmit the batch This log helps Global Customer Support diagnose the exact problem 17 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Resolving Errors Due to Lack of ALLOBJ and JOBCTL Authority 17 2 Resolving Data Errors If you are receiving data warnings against the F0010 table in the Pristine or Production environments the table might be empty This is how it is delivered You can ignore these warnings load demo data or load your own data 17 3 Planner Update Special Instructions The Electronic Software Update ESU for the Planner Update Special Instructions was created with special features that updates the Planner pathcode on the Deployment Server It includes all fixes for Release 9 1 installation and upgrade process You must run the specialinstrs bat file to copy certain table records from the ESU database to the Planner d
228. ack a Section 4 4 Understanding the Platform Pack Installation on the IBM i a Section 4 5 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i a Section 4 6 Troubleshooting the IBM i Platform Pack Installation a Section 4 7 Rerunning the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer a Section 4 8 Installing the Latest Tools Release and Latest Tools Release Patch to the Enterprise Server a Section 4 9 Working with Database Security 4 1 Understanding the Platform Pack The Platform Pack installs these major components a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Server code JD Edwards EnterpriseOne database tables Note To reinstall any Enterprise Server components refer to Section 4 7 Rerunning the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer This table lists the mandatory and optional components of the Platform Pack installation Server Mandatory Component Optional Components Enterprise Server JD Edwards EnterpriseOne ES Production Foundation ES Prototype ES Development ES Pristine Working with the Platform Pack on the IBMi 4 1 Platform Pack Process Flow Server Mandatory Component Optional Components Database Server System Database Production Databases Prototype Databases Development Databases Pristine Databases 4 2 Platform Pack Process Flow The Platform Pack installation process upgrades Release 9 1 system and path code files The diagram be
229. ade Guide Installing the Deployment Server 7 On Select Installation Type select the appropriate radio button for these installation types a Typical The Typical selection installs environments for Deployment Client Planner prototype pristine and also installs JD Edwards EnterpriseOne files on the local machine This selection is recommended for the general user a Custom The Custom selection lets you choose the specific environments you want to install on the deployment server The deployment client Planner is always installed on the local machine You may choose to install JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Files and environments on a remote machine In that case first you need to setup a mapped drive as described in the section of this guide entitled Section 3 8 7 1 Understanding EnterpriseOne Files Location This selection is only recommended for an expert user 8 After you have selected an installation type select the Next button Oracle Universal Installer Specify Home Details Bei ks ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Specify Home Details Destination Enter or select a name for the installation and the full path where you want to install the product Name JOE_DEP910_HOME td Path C JDEdwardstE910 a ace E a A ee 9 On Specify Home Details you must specify an Oracle Home path and a name for that path Tip For more information about Oracle Homes and recommendations for naming the Oracle Homes for the
230. age with the installation you must load language records into the central objects tables to enable that language The central objects tables contain the alternate language records needed for displaying text in the selected language Language enabled tables include the processing text F98306 report text F98760 and form text F98750 Depending upon the environment choices during the English installation you may have several sets of central objects for example one set for each environment loaded during the English language installation 9 6 Working with Update Language Text Merge This merge is for customers who have an alternate language and are installing a cumulative update release only The Update Language Text Merge program runs automatically during the Specification Table Merge Workbench This program copies text from the language database to the central objects database Any language text records that do not exist are added Records that already exist are updated if the text has changed Custom text in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne objects is preserved if the merge flags are set correctly in Object Librarian This process is called automatically from the Specification Table Merge Workbench or run as a standalone option from R98700 If it is run from the workbench the Language Plan F_ table is used to merge each language data source and environment selected in the plan Performing Merges 9 7 Working with Update Language Text Mer
231. ages Contains one record per user for each Planner 910 authorized package System Local F0093 System 910 Library List Control Contains a list by user of authorized environments Planner 910 System Local F0094 System 910 Library List Master file Contains master file information for an environment Planner 910 System Local F00941 System 910 Environment Detail EO Contains one record per environment with Planner 910 release and path code System Local F00942 System 910 Object Path Master file Contains one record per path code with the Pl 910 data source for the specification files and the Sen server path for the other development objects System Local DLL source headers F00945 System 910 Release Master Contains one record per release with the data source for system tables and the environments Planner 910 server path System Local F00946 System 910 Release Compatibility Contains information used to map major Pl 910 Map release levels to determine forward and ane backward compatibility System Local F00948 System 910 Release Data Source Map Contains information used to map a specific Planner 910 type of data source to a release level such as g Object Librarian data dictionary or versions System Local list data sources F00950 System 910 Security Workbench table Stores security attributes one record for each System Local user or group F00960 System 910 Machine Group Stores a list of all workstations that
232. al workstation JD Edwards EnterpriseOne provides all software with a base language of English The package build process enables the building of packages for multiple languages Multiple languages can be installed using the processes outlined in this guide Language text is accessed by the language preference code settings in the user profile associated with the alternate language installed 1 6 1 1 Base Language Release 9 1 language support works in conjunction with the English base language The base release contains English and must be installed before creating custom modifications to include changes or additions to the translated text All control files must also have an English record prior to adding an alternate language text record 1 6 1 2 Alternate Language Components An alternative language component is not included in this release you must build the language package An alternate language includes major components whereby language text is stored in the Central Objects System Control Table and Data Dictionary data sources The data is loaded to the Deployment Server during the installation and copied to the Central Objects and the other data sources through the language installation process For Release 9 1 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne is shipped with 21 languages Single byte languages run on single byte or double byte operating systems but double byte languages must run on double byte operating systems Instructions in this gu
233. alue is entered the default order type Request Orders assigned is 01 Order Type value 02 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 02 in the Engineering Change engineering change request orders If no value is entered the default order type Request Orders assigned is 01 Order Type value 03 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 03 in the Engineering Change engineering change request orders If no value is entered the default order type Request Orders assigned is 01 Order Type value 04 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 04 in the Engineering Change engineering change request orders If no value is entered the default order type Request Orders assigned is 01 Order Type value 05 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 05 in the Engineering Change engineering change request orders If no value is entered the default order type Request Orders assigned is 01 13 32 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Processing Options for R31P40039 Processing Options for R31P40039 Real Estate Management Order Type value 01 for Real Estate Management Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 01 in the real estate management orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 02 for Real Estate Managem
234. ame of the library where the Vertex Quantum tables are located The location you enter should be the location on the server used for the database when the Vertex applications were installed as previously descripted in this step Server Enter the name of the IBM i machine where the Vertex Quantum tables are located User ID Enter a user ID that can access the database Password Performing Post Upgrade Tasks 11 9 Configuring JD Edwards EnterpriseOne for Use with Vertex Quantum Tax Applications 7 Enter the password for the user ID specified above Click OK The changes do not take effect until you have logged off of your system and logged back on On the Form menu use IBM i Library to specify the Vertex Quantum library that contains the Vertex Quantum APIs For Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax this library is typically called VERQSU For Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax this library is typically called VEROPRT 11 4 3 Mapping Objects to the Enterprise Server Objects that call the Vertex Quantum APIs must execute on the server on which the Vertex Quantum APIs reside Check that the following Release 9 1 objects are configured in the system OCM to execute on the server Do not change the mappings For Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax RO7200 Pre payroll Driver B0700058 For Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax XO0TAX c Tax Calculator B7300002 Validate Quantum GeoCodes B7300004 Retrieve Quantum GeoCod
235. ame of the machine where your database resides Platform IBM i Use Table Owner Blank Use Julian Dates Selected Use Decimal Shift Selected Support for Updates Selected OCM Data Source Blank IBM i BLOB Support Selected 26 6 Object Librarian This chart lists the characteristics of the Object Librarian data source Field Valid Value for Client Access Data Source Name Object Librarian 910 Data Source Use DB Data Source Type I Object Owner ID Blank Library Name OL910 Library List Name RDB name of the IBM i Note To find the IBM i RDB name use the WRKRDBDIRE command Database Name Object Librarian 910 Server Name Name of the machine where your database resides Platform IBM i Use Table Owner Blank Use Julian Dates Selected Use Decimal Shift Selected Support for Updates Selected OCM Data Source Blank IBM i BLOB Support Blank LOB Data Source Selected Understanding Data Source Charts 26 5 Language 26 7 Language This chart lists the characteristics of the Language data source which applies to the Oracle tablespace on the Deployment Server 26 8 Local Field Valid Value for Oracle Data Source Name list includes possible sources Language Language 910 For example French 910 Data Source Use DB Data Source Type N Object Owner ID list includes possible owner Blank IDs Library
236. ameters complete the following fields and turn on the following options Field Description Logic Data Source The server data source where the table conversions will run Table Conversion Throttle The number of table conversions to be run concurrently on the server Note The Table Conversion Workbench checks the maximum jobs for the default job queue for the logic server It will only submit up to the number of maximum jobs on the queue to run at once If the throttle is set higher than the queue it uses the queue maximum number of jobs If the queue is set higher than the throttle it uses the throttle 2 Click OK If you turned off Default Languages on the Select Environments selection form continue with Section 5 4 10 4 Selecting Languages optional 5 38 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade If you are not installing languages Release 9 1 prompts you for data source information Skip to Section 5 4 11 Setting Up Environment Data Sources 5 4 10 4 Selecting Languages optional To select languages Custom Installation Plan Language Selection a a XO Links w select DoLE Bhinternet 1 On Language Selection to set up a language for the selected environment choose the appropriate language 2 From the Row menu click Select 3 Repeat the above steps until all your languages have been selected 4 Clic
237. ample printers user preferences The Table Conversion Schedule is accessed through the Advanced Operations Menu GH9611 6 28 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions D Table Conversion Scheduler Scheduler Revisions 6 16 3 2 Upgrade Plan Definition It is not required to run table conversions on an Enterprise Server The main advantage to doing so is performance If you have a small database you may decide to run them on the Deployment Server by selecting Run TC on Deployment Server when defining your plan The default is to run conversions on the Enterprise Server Working With Installation Workbench 6 29 Understanding Table Conversions b Custom Installation Plan Installation Planner UPGRADE Run Table Conversions on Srvr 6 16 3 3 Select Enterprise Server and Maximum Jobs On Select Environments Advanced Exit After selecting an environment on Select Environments select Advanced on the Form menu to access Advanced Parameters Select the logic data source for the Enterprise Server where table conversions will be run for that environment If you do not follow these steps Installation Planner will select a default Enterprise Server The port number is specified in the Deployment Server JDE INI Also on Advanced Parameters you can override the maximum jobs for the default job queue on the Enterprise Server 6 30 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide
238. an implement custom environment naming standards and ease the creation of environments Typically you will add records to the template for new environments The template can be found by filtering on ENV in the environment field Installation Planner prompts for this set of data sources whenever a new environment is created The first time data sources are configured for a new environment these records are copied and tokens replaced to create records specific to the new environment If you want to add a new data source to a standard JD Edwards EnterpriseOne environment enter the environment name into the filter field and add a record specifically for that environment Records with an environment LOGIC are for logic and server map data sources They are set up when selecting an Enterprise Server 7 6 4 4 Associating Table Data Classes A table is associated with a data class using a field on the Object Librarian table F9860 sicldf Table data classes can be modified two ways a Object Management Workbench GH902 Select the table in the left tree view in OMW and click Design Select the Install Merge Codes tab and modify the data class value Click OK Modifying the data class does not affect existing OCM mappings it is only used when creating mappings for a new environment Table Data Classes This application can be used to modify the data class for several tables at once This should only be used by a JD Edwards Enterpr
239. anced system settings on the left Click Environment Variables near the bottom In the System variables box near the bottom highlight Path and click the Edit button In the Variable value field delete this value c Oracle E1Local bin Be sure to remove the semicolon as well Click OK Remove the ORACLE_HOME Windows environment variable a b 9 Navigate to Control Panel gt System Click Advanced system settings on the left Click Environment Variables near the bottom In the System variables box near the bottom highlight ORACLE_HOME and click Delete Deinstalling the Software 27 3 Using the OUI Installer to Deinstall JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from the Deployment Server e Click OK 27 5 Using the OUI Installer to Deinstall JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from the Deployment Server You can use the OUI installer to deinstall JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from the Deployment Server To deinstall the local database depending on your local database type refer to the preceding sections of this guide entitled Section 27 3 Deinstalling the Local OEE from the Deployment Server To use the OUI installer to deinstall JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from the Deployment Server 1 Log on to the Deployment Server as a user with Administrator rights Caution Ensure that the Administrator account name that you use does not contain any special characters 2 IfJD Edwards EnterpriseOne is running on the Deploymen
240. ancel 2 On the Process Mode tab select the options for the processes that you want to run when you create your plan a Additional Servers Enter 1 to add servers to your existing setup Deployment Server Enterprise Server Database Server HTML Web Server Enter 0 or leave blank for regular plans Caution You should only change this value when running a Server Plan a Installation Enter 1 to run the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne installation automatically 5 3 3 3 Specifying the Default Mode To specify the default mode 1 Select the Default Mode tab Working with the Installation Planner foran Upgrade 5 7 Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options W Processing Options xi Prompt Mode Process Mode Default Mode Status Ch 4 gt Enter one of the following values for each default Options O Do not take defaults and do not prompt 1 Prompt for defaults option at runtime 2 Always take defaults without prompting This is the default Default Data Source Information Default Environments Default Data Load Default Advanced Parameters Default Languages zi Help x Cancel 2 On the Default Mode tab enter these values into the processing option fields Value Description 0 Do not use default values and do not prompt 1 Prompt for default options at run time 2 Default mode Always use defaults without prompting a Default Data Source Information Select whethe
241. anges including a specific language to a local workstation build a package and specify which language or languages to include in that package This action involves the following considerations a Section 14 6 1 Package Build Considerations a Section 14 6 2 Package Deployment Considerations 14 6 1 Package Build Considerations Before beginning to build a language package verify that the language installation is complete To build the language package first define the package Building the package can take several hours depending on the size of the package and the number of languages used This task is completed on the Deployment Server logged on as user JDE in DEP910 Building and Testing Packages 14 5 Assembling a Package that Contains Published Business Services To include language specifications in your package specify the language in the package definition The package build process then uses the language preference code This code is specified as a parameter when building the package It uses the relational database tables to build the form design aid text and report design aid text specifications A language package can be a full update or partial package Caution When building the client package with translated processing option text run the build using Microsoft Windows with the system locale set to the appropriate language If the system locale on the operating system does not match the installed language
242. applications in separate locations 2 Define databases for the Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax and Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax applications in separate locations and the four databases for the Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax application in separate locations Option 3 If processing option 2 is set to 1 or 2 that is if the Vertex databases are in separate locations specify the GeoCode database location information Value Action blank Define the Vertex Quantum Payroll Tax and Sales and Use Tax applications to use the same GeoCode database 1 Define each of the Vertex applications to use a separate copy of the GeoCode database and that the two copies are expected in separate locations 5 Click OK 11 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Configuring JD Edwards EnterpriseOne for Use with Vertex Quantum Tax Applications The Vertex Quantum Database Connection panel is displayed The Database Connection panel contains one or more tabs that correspond to the database connections that must be defined The displayed tabs are determined by the values you entered in the processing options in Step 4 of this task Note The GeoCode database is the only Vertex Quantum database that can be shared between the Vertex Quantum Payroll Tax and Sales and Use Tax applications However all of the Vertex Quantum databases can be installed in the same location or in different locations On
243. are included later in this task In the Default Type column enter the numeral 1 in the row for the paper type you want to use as the default 7 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up a Printer on the Enterprise Server select only one paper type as the default A user can override the default paper type when a batch process is submitted rr Printers Printer Setup iof x Y File Edit Preferences Form Window Help laj x Ez x n n 2g OK Can New Prav Next End Dis Abo Links w New OLE Internet General Choose the printer definition languages PDL trat the printer supports If yo choose the Line Printer opton also enter paper dimensions and linc parameters in the Line Printers box For AS400s choose the type of encoding to use for the printer Click the EBCDIC Encoding option ifthe printer is an EBCDIC line printer m Printer Definition Language Default I PostScript o BL amp P Line Printer I Custom C Double click the row headers to selectthe paper tyres that your printer supports Type 1 in the Default Type column for the paper type you wantto use as the default To Add new paper types from the Form menu chocse New Paper Types Giga Paper Type Printer Paper Width Printer Paper Height fies Type Ba Pap 18 To add a new paper type continue with these steps 19 From the Form menu sele
244. are Properties lt machine_name gt click the Next Start button 2 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Verifying Software and Hardware Requirements iSeries NetServer General Next Start Dnitsas3 Weg IBM iSeries Support for Windows Network Neighborhood Server name QDNITSAS3 Allow iSeries NetServer access using the system name Domain name fi O2F77E Description 057400 Logon server role None X Authentication method Encrypted passwords Reset to Current Cancel Help 3 On IBM i NetServer General Next Start lt machine_name gt click to enable the checkbox for this setting Start when TCP IP is started 4 Click OK to close the General Next Start dialog and then click OK again to close the NetServer Properties dialog 2 8 2 2 Setting Up a Network Share for IBM i Root Use this procedure to set up a network share on your IBM i root 1 Start IBM i Navigator Expand your machine in the tree Drill down into the Network node Drill down into the Servers node Highlight TCP IP In the right hand panel find IBM i NetServer oe apeo N If it has a status of Stopped right click and start it 7 Double click on the started IBM i NetServer Before You Begin the Upgrade 2 15 Verifying Software and Hardware Requirements iSeries NetServer File Share Properties Dnitsas3 2 leg General Text Conversion IBM iSeries Support for Windows Network Neighborhood
245. are run on different machines After verifying the support structure as shown in the section of this guide entitled Section 3 6 Obtaining and Preparing the Deployment Server Install Image you can install the Deployment Server This process installs the Deployment Server from CDs 3 16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Installing the Deployment Server Note You must install the Deployment Server locally you cannot install the Deployment Server from a remote machine However you can choose to install JD Edwards EnterpriseOne files and environments on a remote machine using a mapped drive Prior to installing to a remote machine you must have already setup the drive with network mapping This section describes these topics m Section 3 8 1 Prerequisites a Section 3 8 2 Installation Process Flow Section 3 8 3 Before Launching the Deployment Server Installer a Section 3 8 4 Understanding Destination Paths a Section 3 8 5 Using InstallManager to Install a Local Database on the Deployment Server a Section 3 8 6 Examine the Local Database Installer Logs Section 3 8 7 Understanding the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer 3 8 1 Prerequisites Before you run the installation program shut down all programs running on the Deployment Server that could cause DLL conflicts such as Microsoft SQL Services Internet Explorer Microsoft Word or Adobe Acroba
246. ase Considerations If you want to maintain the recommended parallel environments and if you have sufficient disk space you should keep your complete prior release directory structure intact such as B733 x and B9 To run parallel you must keep at least the CLIENT PLANNER and DATA PLANNER and SPEC pathcode and SYSTEM directory structures Path Code Considerations If you use the JD733x pathcode or any packages associated with it do not delete the JD733x directory structure However if the directory is only a copy of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne pristine objects for a previous release you can delete it See Also Section 2 8 Verifying Software and Hardware Requirements Section 2 9 Verifying the Disk Space Requirements 2 11 Applying Microsoft Product Updates You should apply all the critical updates for Microsoft on your Deployment Server including Visual C Before You Begin the Upgrade 2 19 Applying Microsoft Product Updates Tip If you already have the required components installed you can install Microsoft NET without prompting for the prerequisite installation image by entering this command line x setup setup exe NO_BSLN_CHI ECK where x is the drive on which the NET setup program resides 2 20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 3 Working with the Deployment Server This chapter discusses Section 3 1 Using IXS Integrated xSeries Server for Deployment
247. ase if either of these conditions is true The local Oracle database service OracleServiceEILLOCAL is running a This registry key exists HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Wow6432Node ORACLE KEY_ ElLocal 3 11 5 7 Runtime Problems This section discusses a Section 3 11 5 7 1 Jde log shows ORA 12541 TNS no listener Section 3 11 5 7 2 User gets a pop up window prompting for E1Local DB user and password and Jde log shows OCI0000141 Error ORA 01017 invalid username password logon denied a Section 3 11 5 7 3 tnsnames ora 3 11 5 7 1 Jde log shows ORA 12541 TNS no listener Verify that the Oracle listener service OracleE1LocalTNSListener is running It is possible that the service may not have started due to slow bootup of the machine 3 11 5 7 2 User gets a pop up window prompting for E1Local DB user and password and Jde log shows 0C10000141 Error ORA 01017 invalid username password logon denied Verify that the ElLocal database system account password is valid If the following command executes successfully it means that the password is not encrypted If so you must encrypt the password in order to enable database access SQLPlus exe system admin ElLocal 3 46 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation where admin is the password This password may have been set to admin by one of the EnterpriseOne database scripts or it may be a plain text word
248. at aia 3 40 3 11 3 Configuration Files innit in wanna aii nite Ad AAT ia estate etches 3 41 3 11 4 Path Code Master F98611 se ssesssscssecceseeceeeseseesesessesessecesseseseesessesesneceseesesneceseeseeners 3 42 3 11 5 Oracle Enterprise Edition ersari neri i E E ERE EE E 3 42 3 11 5 1 Ele Eocationsineenenniorane na a a ete e aR 3 43 3 11 5 1 1 Oracle Installation Directory oisinn iiaiai iias eis 3 43 3 11 5 1 2 ORE Log Se sfistcsssebtiays on i aey a A a satay lens E O EEA 3 43 3 11 5 1 3 HHASTNAMICS Orase ii a EE a E EE E EE E E aE 3 43 3 11 5 2 3 11 5 3 3 11 5 4 3 11 5 5 3 11 5 6 3 11 5 7 3 11 5 7 3 11 5 7 3 11 5 7 3 11 5 8 3 11 5 9 3 11 5 1 3 11 5 1 3 11 5 1 3 11 5 1 3 11 5 1 3 11 5 1 Rebooting the Deployment Server ccccc ccc ects ce cee esse cesseenseececeseneneseeeeeses 3 44 EnterpriseOne Access to the Local Oracle Database cccccceeseseeneeeteeeeees 3 44 Process Explorer itis c 2sicceceitiseds coed soe Sha deste n aa Erei 3 44 Verifying the Local Oracle Database Installation cccccc eects eeeeees 3 46 Deployment Server Installation Problem cccee eects ee te ceeeeeeeteneneeeees 3 46 Runtime Problems reee aheso econ sets ch gece opeed cecen ede E A eE EE eat 3 46 1 Jde log shows ORA 12541 TNS no listener eee cseseeseseseseessenees 3 46 2 User gets a pop up window prompting for E1Local DB user and password and Jde log shows OCI0000141 Error ORA 01017 invalid username pass
249. at s the risk 6 Click the Run button to launch the OEESetup exe installer install Manager Security Warning The publisher could not be verified Are you sure you want to run this software Name OC ESetup exe Publisher Unknown Publisher This fle Goes not have a vad digtal signature that verifies ts publisher You should only run software from publishers you trust How can I decide what software to run 7 Ifyou receive an Install Manager Security warning dialog with the message The publisher could not be verified click the Run button to begin the installation of the local database This installation process can take quite some time Upon completion a local database called E1Local will exist Caution You must reboot your machine before continuing with the installation of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server as described in the next section in this guide entitled Section 3 8 7 Understanding the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer 3 8 5 2 Running OEESetup to Install a Local Database in a Directory Other Than the Default Location 1 Obtain the appropriate disk images from Oracle Software Delivery Cloud for the local database you wish to install on your Deployment Server 3 20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Installing the Deployment Server 2 Logon to the Deployment Server as a user with Administrator rights Caution Ensure that the Adm
250. ata Dictionary Data Field Specifications Contains detailed information specifications Data Dic onary Local for each data item This table is accessed y whenever a data item needs to be identified F9211 Data Dictionary Data Dictionary Smart Contains information for Smart Fields Data Dictionary Local Fields F9212 Data Dictionary 910 Smart Field Criteria Data Dictionary Local Setup Rules F96021 System 910 Software Package Build Stores the detail information from the Header definition process of package build F9603 System 910 Software Package Build Stores information from the assembly process Header of package build F96210 System 910 Package Build Validation System Local Tables F96211 System 910 Package Build Validation System Local Detail F96215 System 910 Software Package Build Contains the history record of the F96021 Header History record It stores statuses of the package each Planner 910 a time it is built System Local F9622 System 910 Software Package Build Stores the option information from the Planner 910 Detail definition process of package build Each record is either the name of the specification System Local file the name of a DLL file the name of the compression directory or the name of an object 24 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Table Data Source Description Purpose F96225 System 910 Software Package Build Contains the hist
251. ata Source Blank LOB Data Source Selected IBM i BLOB Support Blank 26 4 Data Dictionary This chart lists the characteristics of the Data Dictionary data source 26 5 Logic Field Client Access Data Source Name Data Dictionary 910 Data Source Use DB Data Source Type I Object Owner ID Blank Library Name DD910 Library List Name RDB name of the IBM i Note To find the IBM i RDB name use the WRKRDBDIRE command Database Name Data Dictionary 910 Server Name Name of the machine where your database resides Platform IBM i Use Table Owner Blank Use Julian Dates Selected Use Decimal Shift Selected Support for Updates Selected OCM Data Source Blank LOB Data Source Selected IBM i BLOB Support Blank This chart lists the characteristics of the Logic data source Field Client Access Data Source Name Name of the machine where your database resides Data Source Use SVR Data Source Type I Object Owner ID Blank Library Name xMAP where x is the release to which you are installing such as 910 26 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Object Librarian Field Client Access Library List Name RDB name of the IBM i Note Ensure the system value for QCCSID is 37 To find the IBM i RDB name use the WRKRDBDIRE command Database Name machinename 910 Server Map Server Name N
252. atabases m bee See ee eee Note If you have environment definitions data source definitions or path code definitions that exist in your System 910 data source but which are not defined on the Deployment Server which you will be using in this process you can check the radio button for Copy Environment Definitions to copy the missing records from System 910 to Planner 910 2 On P989400 Copy Environment Packages click Next 15 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 gt Environment Copy Copy to existing environment mife File Edit Preferences Form 18 x x ae R Rese Prey Next Dis Abo Source Environment Dvat0 Target Environment P0910 Source Path Code ovato Target Path Code P0910 Source Package Dva10FA Target Package PD910FB Links w Prey OLE _ 3 Internet Package Co IT Generate OCM in System Server Map T banioods m Central Objects Copy Metadata Repository V Copy Central Objects J Copy Object Librarian Rename Metadata Repository C Dont copy package Z Copy Versions JV Copy Patkage Headers Detail V Copy ESU History p e K i MV Configure Package Manifest V Copy spec ini package int V Copy Path Code Pkg dir local r Business Data Control Tables Copy Business Data seteneeasenensesoonsnensnsnosonesencecnonsnssencnsnens
253. atabases on the Deployment server 1 On the Deployment server browse to this directory JDEdwards 910 Planner Package JMxxxxxxx Scripts 2 Run the batch file specialInstrs bat Note any success or failure messages that appear in the command window Review the SpecialInstrs 1log file that is created in the same directory for details 17 4 Resolving Errors Due to Lack of ALLOBJ and JOBCTL Authority By default the Installation program grants JOBCTL authority to the ONEWORLD user profile You may have a temporary requirement to grant ALLOBJ authority to ONEWORLD This could be required if ONEWORLD needs to start journaling on a table but does not have OBJMGT rights to that table For example when submitting a UBE to the server for the first time ONEWORLD needs to start journaling on F986111 Symptoms of this problem are errors indicating a transaction was cancelled because a commit cycle could not be start Of the multiple ways to grant the ALLOBJ authority to ONEWORLD the simplest is to give ONEWORLD rights to all tables using the SETOWAUT tool Alternatively you could run the GRTOBJAUT command to give ONEWORLD OBJMGT authority of to all tables in your business data system and server map libraries Note that either method causes locks to be put on tables which could interfere with other users on your system In order to avoid that potential interference caused by locks it may be preferable to temporarily grant ALLOBJ authorit
254. ate Center you can research and download Service Packs Electronic Software Updates ESUs view SARs and objects and documentation If you need further assistance with Release 9 1 upgrade contact Oracle customer support by phone fax or e mail For questions about operating systems databases and other software products contact the appropriate vendor 1 3 5 Understanding Documentation Conventions This section explains these typographic and design conventions used throughout this documentation Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 11 Working With the Customer Checklist a Section 1 3 5 1 Documentation Updates a Section 1 3 5 2 Tips a Section 1 3 5 3 Fonts and Type Styles 1 3 5 1 Documentation Updates The Oracle Technology Network for JD Edwards Documentation always contains the most recent documentation which may include document updates and other information about installing and upgrade JD Edwards EnterpriseOne You can use this link to access the Oracle Technology Network for JD Edwards Documentation http www oracle com technetwork documentation jdedent 098169 html 1 3 5 2 Tips This documentation contains tips containing information that can make the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne setup process easier Tips information is helpful but optional 1 3 5 3 Fonts and Type Styles Special fonts and type styles are used in this guide Nearly all of the commands in this guide are case sensitive Enter them exactly
255. ate the object was changed Component headings Description Object Component Part of the object that was changed or added for example forms and event rules Status Successfully read components will have a status of changed or added If the status is failed the batch application could not read the modified component Description Brief description of the change If the status is failed the description will be a brief explanation of the error These errors usually result from a failure to read the file The report includes the status of the following record types a Package names a Source environments a Target environments a Advanced options The report is broken into four sections a The first section is a cover page which summarizes the processing options used to generate the report a The second section is a list of the completion statuses of these objects as described in this table Working with Reports 25 11 Object Specification Merge Report R98700 Object Status Description Object Librarian Success Indicates the number of objects successfully added or updated System 88 Warning Indicates the system detected custom modifications for an object in a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne product code that does not exist in the new Object Librarian Object Librarian objects were obsoleted by JD Edwards EnterpriseOne so you as the customer need to decide how this affects your procedures
256. ated data dictionary items are stored in specification tables on each workstation These tables are the ddb and xdb versions of the DDDICT and DDTEXT tables that are located in the Spec directory For installations upgrades and cumulative updates that include an alternate language the Data Dictionary Text tables GT92002 F9202 and F9203 must be loaded to display the text from these files in the desired language The data dictionary files add the alternate language on top of the installed English records 9 1 4 Work with Solution Explorer Merge Note This merge is for upgrades and cumulative updates The Solution Explorer Merge R9690002 program updates the customer specific Solution Explorer tables using a combination of information from the new Solution Explorer tables and the change tables in the planner database The merge runs when you run the Installation Workbench The menu tables are F9000 F9001 F9002 F9005 F9006 F9020 F9022 and F9050 Performing Merges 9 3 Working with Control Table Merges For users installing an alternate language the Text Alternate Description table F9002 contains the language records to display Solution Explorer in the desired language This process adds the desired language on top of the already installed English records 9 1 5 Working with UDC Merge Note This merge is for upgrades and cumulative updates The User Defined Codes Merge R9600042 program upda
257. ates the value to 30 characters because that is the restriction in the F98611 table The Platform Pack does not truncate the value when it builds the jde ini for the Enterprise Server Therefore any value greater than 30 characters will result in a mismatch between the jde ini and the F98611 table That is using the previous example the jde ini would have the full length value A23456789012345 910 Server Map which is 32 characters while the F98611 populated by the Planner would have a value of A23456789012345 910 Server M To remedy you could do any one of the following a Manually modify values in table F98611 to match the truncated value in the jde ini file a Ensure that the value is not truncated by limiting the datasource name to 30 characters this would mean limiting the machine name for the Enterprise Server to 13 characters Manually truncate the value in the F98611 table for example A23456789012345 910 Svr Map In any case you must ensure that the values for Server Map datasource names in the F98611 table exactly match those in the jde ini file on the Enterprise Server Description Enter a description of the machine Release Enter the release number to which this plan applies or use the visual assist button to choose one from the list such as E910 Host Type Click the visual assist button and choose the type of Enterprise Server that you are adding to the plan such as IBM i Location Ent
258. ation ES Prototype ES Development ES Pristine Database Server System Database Production Databases Prototype Databases Development Databases Pristine Databases 4 7 1 Enterprise Server If you are rerunning the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer in order to add environments you must specify the same DB2 400 instance as that which you selected for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Foundation during the initial installation of the Platform Pack Note If you are installing any JD Edwards EnterpriseOne component on multiple IBM i machines for example if you are installing multiple logic servers you must run the Platform Pack installer from a different Microsoft Windows machine for each separate machine you install Otherwise the installer detects that some components for example Foundation for a logic server have already been installed and by design ignores subsequent requests to install the same component regardless of whether the installation is intended for a different target machine 4 7 2 Database Server If you are rerunning the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer in order to add databases you must specify the same DB2 400 instance as that which you selected for System Database during the initial installation of the Platform Pack 4 8 Installing the Latest Tools Release and Latest Tools Release Patch to the Enterprise Server Caution The Tools Release level must match what was insta
259. ator by confirming that Administrator is displayed in the title bar of the Command Prompt window The below screen shows a sample of a properly mapped network drive for the remote Deployment Server 3 24 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Installing the Deployment Server Map Network Drive Windows can help you connect to a shared network folder and assign a drive letter to the connection so that you can access the folder using My Computer pace Specify the drive letter for the connection and the folder that you want to connect to Drive y Folder DeploymentServer E910 v Example server share Reconnect at logon Connect using a different user name Sign up for online storage or connect to a network server Note Ina later separate process described in Section 3 8 7 2 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer when you are prompted by the installer for the location of the remote Deployment Server in the location field you can browse to or enter the mapped drive including the drive letter designation Using the above example in Step the value would be the Zz drive Using the above screen shot as an example the value would be the L drive The same installer validates the location that you enter for the remote location If the mapping to the remote location is not valid or the directory specified in Step 1 above does not exist on the remote machine the
260. aunched and runs all conversions producing a report when complete Working With Installation Workbench 6 31 Understanding Table Conversions When running conversions on the Enterprise Server Table Conversion Workbench launches a R98405A program for each conversion including any conversions that run locally This is the UBE that is displayed in Submitted Reports GH9011 When all conversions are complete the R984052 program produces a report 6 16 3 6 Monitoring Table Conversions Table Conversion Workbench implements a throttling mechanism to control conversions If conversions are run on the Deployment Server it launches one conversion at a time If conversions are run on the Enterprise Server it looks up the maximum number of batch jobs in the queue table and submits that many conversions at a time Either way technical conversions are always throttled to 1 The list of submitted conversions can be seen in Table Conversion Planner 1 Go to the System Installation Tools menu GH961 2 Open Typical Installation Plan or Custom Installation Plan 3 Click Find 4 Expand the plan Drill down to Environments Environment Name Table Conversions 5 Highlight the Table Conversions node and click Select 6 Enter 45 into the Detail Status QBE 7 Click Find Custom Installation Plan Table Conversion Planner ife File Edit preferences Form Row Window Help l8j xi A EE xg a Ww Ff e Find Del Can New Gack Ne
261. auses some processes Do not run Installation Workbench from a remote access program that simulates a local connection To start the Installation Workbench 1 On your Deployment Server log in to the Planner environment which is JDEPLAN From the System Installation Tools menu GH961 choose Installation Workbench When this application is run the first time the system downloads all required objects using Just In Time Installation JITI Working With Installation Workbench 6 13 Starting Installation Workbench a Installation Workbench Work with Installation Plan v A x 5 amp e WM i iinks w Disp BOLE sintemet Select Find Close Seg New Dis Abo Plan Status Plan Status a cso nn Jag SU_JaQs Installed UPGDY3910 Plan for DV910 i Installed UPGPS910 Upgrade Plan for PS910 Installed Row 1 q a Ifyou specified attended workbench mode use the following procedures including the Initial Tasks Workbench to complete the workbenches If you specified unattended workbench mode the process begins and all workbenches are completed automatically unless task breaks are set If you did not set any task breaks continue with Chapter 7 Working With the Enterprise Server 3 On Work with Installation Plan double click your plan 4 Ifyou have selected that you want to run Table Conversions on the Enterprise Server the Installation Workbench displays the following message
262. ber of the record being converted 0 Do Not Update 1 Update existing dates and times in F1755 to UTC time To blank out the work order number in F1755 and to populate case number in F4801 Manual Table Conversions 13 17 Upgrading from 8 11 or Below Upgrading from 8 10 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R3210CFGID To convert Config ID None This UBE determines The Configuration ID when upgrading from the highest seed from which is the primary key 8 10 or below F3201 and writes it to field of Configurator Bucket 2 of Next F3201 Master File will Numbers System 32 now be retrieved from Next Number instead of using the seed record in F3201 Configurator Master Table RO1302 To convert F0101 Run this UBE when This UBE strips off If the UDC H951SC Compressed UDC H951SC has special characters values are changed and Description when changed The values from the DC fieldin an address book record is upgrading from 8 10 or shipped with the F0101 as a result of added this will cause below software are changing the UDC inconsistencies in the DC OPR H95 I SC Word fields An example of this pE Qi st lt gt Search Special would be the blank value wate Oe Characters If blank is part of the list the Digger Corporation will be stripped to be DIGGERCORPORATIO N in the DC field else it would be DIGGER CORPORATION R890911CA To populate F0911 Run after the table
263. bit Amounts conversions have G09316 updates the that were formerly AND01 14 in F0902 completed F0902 table with the located in tag table when upgrading from Debit Amounts FO902A were added to the 8 11 or below FO902 Many applications require data for total debits or total credits Prior to the change the data was obtained from the F0911 causing performance issues With this change the data is retrieved from the F0902 resulting in improved performance 13 22 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading from 8 11 SP1 or Below Upgrading from 8 11 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R8900165JC To convert media object None This conversion Prior to 8 11 SP1 Job XJDE0001 data from GT0901 to copies the data in Status Inquiry was using ACCGT for Job Status F00165 for GT0901 to the media object for Inquiry ACCGT so Job Status GT0901 but all of the Inquiry can access other job cost applications the media object were using ACCGT In order to make the media object data consistent across all of job cost Job Status Inquiry was changed to use ACCGT instead of GT0901 You only need to run this conversion if you are using Job Status Inquiry with media object data in GT0901 13 6 Upgrading from 8 11 SP1 or Below This section contains a list of all the Table Conversions required when upgrading from 8 11 SP1 or below Upgrading from 8 11 SP1 or Below
264. ble The first set of data sources to be configured is the Enterprise Server data sources This includes the Server Map data source Also logic data sources are automatically configured without prompting OCM records are not created for the server map data source UBE BSFN RTE and XAPI mappings are created for the logic data sources The next set of data sources to be configured is the shared data sources This includes System Data Dictionary and Object Librarian data sources The first time these data sources are configured the shared data source template F98511 SPLL SHARED is copied and tokens are replaced in the data source name and properties to create the shared data source records F98511 SPLL DEFAULT These defaults are then used to create the data source definition in the F98611 table If record in the F98611 tables already exists the defaults from the F98511 table are overridden by the current definition The user is then optionally prompted to customize the data source The last set of data sources is the environment data sources A set of data sources is configured for each environment This includes Business Data Control Tables Central Objects and Versions The environment data source template F98511 SPLL ENV stores defaults for environment data sources As data sources are configured for an environment these records are copied and tokens are replaced in the data source name and properties to create records for th
265. ble existing maintenance Maintenance schedules in the enhancement the F1207 and updates schedule type PDFG the schedule type field is now utilized on PDFG field witha the Equipment PM 1 for those Schedule F1207 record to schedules thathave identify the type of no service intervals maintenance A value of defined blanks is for Interval Based Maintenance A value of 1 is for Unschedule Maintenance A value of 2 is for Condition Based Maintenance R8912071B To update PDFG in The TC should be run This post installjob As part of the F12071 when over the entire F12071 reads through Condition Based upgrading from 8 9 or table existing model Maintenance below maintenance enhancement the schedules in the schedule type PDFG F12071 and updates field is now utilized on the schedule type the Equipment PM PDFG field witha Schedule Model F12071 1 for those record to identify the type schedules that have no service intervals defined of maintenance A value of blank is for Interval Based Maintenance A value of 1 is for Unscheduled Maintenance A value of 2 is for Condition Based Maintenance 13 16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading from 8 10 or Below Upgrading from 8 9 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R3210CFGID To convert Config ID None This UBE determines The Configuration ID when upgrading from the highest seed from which is the
266. ble is inserted with the information above One Record per user in the F0092 table If the Mode of the version is Final the F0092 UGRP field is left blank for all users in the FO092 table Manual Table Conversions 13 15 Upgrading from 8 9 or Below 13 3 Upgrading from 8 9 or Below This section contains a list of all the Table Conversions required when upgrading from 8 9 or below Upgrading from 8 9 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R48803 Convert Document Before running the Not applicable This is not a Table Type for existing orders UBE see the conversion for converting by running the post Programmer s guide data from prior release install JD Edwards about more This is a post install UBE EnterpriseOne UBE information regarding that needs to be run one R48803 Before running who should run the time to convert Order this UBE see the UBE requirements of Types for existing records Programmer s Guide the UBE and the This conversion is for more information purpose of this UBE necessary because of changes made to Document Types based on EPM requirements The new document type is defined in the processing options For the orders selected in the data selection the document type is converted R891207B To update PDFG in The TC should be run This post installjob As part of the F1207 when upgrading over the entire F1207 reads through Condition Based from 8 9 or below ta
267. bs Verify that the entry NETWORK is running with PGM JDENET N in SELW status 7 3 Stopping Network Services on the Enterprise Server To stop the network services on the Enterprise Server 1 2 Log on to the IBM ias ONEWORLD On the IBM i command line enter this command ENDNET This command ends JDENET from an IBM i display ends the JOENET jobs and cleans up JDENET run time structures On the IBM i command line enter ENDSBS SBS JDE OPTION CNTRLD where is the release to which you are installing for example E910 This command ends the JDE subsystem On the IBM i command line enter WRKACTJOB SBS JDEx where x is the release to which you are installing for example E910 7 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Working with OCM Generation Wait until the JDE subsystem ends before you continue 7 4 Creating an Output Queue for the Default Printer To create an output queue for the default printer 1 Log on to the IBM i as the QSECOFR 2 Enter this command GO JDEOW A9 80WMNU 3 Enter the appropriate selection to create an output queue 4 Complete these fields and press Enter Field Description Outqueue Name The outqueue name for the printer Printer IP Address The network address of your printer Remote Printer Queue You are required to set the remote printer queue parameter RMTPRTQ to something other than and for some printers For
268. cations PS910 Pristine PS910CTL Control Tables and Data Dictionary tables PS910DTA Business Data tables COPS910 Central Objects and Versions tables PS910 Pathcode service programs PS910 Parent package service programs PS910 specfile Pathcode specifications PD910 PRODCTL Control Tables and Data Dictionary tables Production PRODDTA Business Data tables COPD910 Central Objects and Versions tables PD910 Pathcode service programs PD910FA Parent package service programs PD910 specfile Pathcode specifications PY910 CRPCTL Control Tables and Data Dictionary tables Prototype CRPDTA Business Data tables COPY910 Central Objects and Versions tables PY910 Pathcode service programs PY910FA Parent package service programs PY910 specfile Pathcode specifications 23 4 Workstation General Directory Structure After you install Release 9 1 installation on a Workstation you should have the following local directory structure Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Directory Structures 23 13 Workstation General Directory Structure E910 E910 Log a E910 output E910 packages E910 PD910 E910 PrintQueue E910 queues Gp 910 system 910 PD910 bin32 E910 PD910 spec E910 PD910 spec JDE E910 queues control E910 queues outqueue E910 system bin32 E910 system Classes 910 system include Gp 910 system includev 910 system 11b32 E 910 system libv32 E E910 system locale
269. ccsseseseccscsesesescssessseecscssssssesscscssssseececessnsnecesenes 1 12 1 3 5 2 LAPS zest et s i a ea eee it Seabees e bees E E NE aeae oie AO Rie aon etes 1 12 1 3 5 3 Fontsiatid Type Styles rane aea aeae er E aa aa e eea reda aasar 1 12 1 4 Working With the Customer Checklist 0 0ccccccssesessscsssesesescscsesesesescsessseseecsesessseseecseess 1 12 1 5 Environments Overview sienne aces is aa dev deka cdl Dat deen toiae das a i e code cuee tees 1 13 1 5 1 Understanding Environments cccccc cece ceseeseececesessesnesecesessneseseseseseneseseenes 1 13 1 5 2 Planner Environment JDEPLAN ccceeesessssesseseeseseeceseceesecessecessececeecacneseeeececeeseeeaes 1 14 1 5 2 1 Planner PathcOd E e a a A a he as ee 1 14 1 5 2 2 Planner Database inoan ieiet einea dikota eaie tandana ori aia artana ae aitala aiai 1 14 1 5 3 Pristine Environment S aeaa a a a 1 15 1 5 4 Deployment Environment DEP910 ccccc cece ce cseseenecececessnenenessssnesesesseesenees 1 15 1 5 5 Development Environment DV910 oo cece cecseeeeneseseeeneeesesessseseseseneesenees 1 15 1 5 6 Prototype Environment PY910 sicc cciecs ceeteesscediereecesecverdeesuscededevestansedeseseeensveuevtestevess 1 16 1 5 7 Production Environment PD910 oaeaeei ea AEKA SAna EAA NEER E AAA E AAAS 1 16 1 5 8 Additional Considerations iaia naea e t e A ie a 1 16 1 5 8 1 Cluster Software Options sigoni n e e E a iaaea 1 16 1 5 8 2 Web Based Options nieis minne oeae er e oa tia
270. ce click OK to continue entering unique shared data source information or click Take Defaults to select the default data for the shared data sources 7 On Location select Yes to add another location or click No to continue with Installation Planner 5 4 9 Entering Shared Data Source Information To enter or confirm information for data sources that are shared across all of your environments complete the following tasks a Section 5 4 9 1 Specifying Custom or Default Shared Data Source setup information m Section 5 4 9 2 Verifying the Data Source for Data Dictionary Section 5 4 9 3 Verifying the Object Librarian Data Source Section 5 4 9 4 Verifying the OWJRNL Data Source a Section 5 4 9 5 Verifying the System Data Source 5 4 9 1 Specifying Custom or Default Shared Data Source setup information Release 9 1 prompts you for the data source information for the shared data sources Choose one of the following options To use the Release 9 1 data sources click Take Defaults Continue with Section 5 4 10 Setting Up Environments Note This option limits your customization choices a Click OK to enter the data sources Verify the data source information 5 4 9 2 Verifying the Data Source for Data Dictionary To verify the data source for Data Dictionary 5 30 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade a Custom Installatio
271. cept of the work center branch plant R8930006C is responsible for placing each work center into the respective branch plants based on records found in the F3003 table However in the event that the work center is not used in F3003 the branch plant remains blank in the F30006 table R8930006D assigns these work centers with a default branch plant value and selects all records with a Branch Plant of blank and sets the field equal to the default Branch Plant in the processing option Manual Table Conversions 13 5 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R3365 To regenerate the Run the batch Populates the F3303 A new field was introduced Resource Profile in application R3365 to Capacity Resource to the F3303 table A table Capacity Planning populate F3303 Profile table conversion was not created Capacity Resource for this table due to the Profile Make sure complexities of the logic in F4101 F4102 F3002 conversion and the existing F3003 F30006 F3007 solution of running this and F0007 tables batch application to create have converted for the Resource Profile existing data Data for F3460 is already available since the table has not been changed R3380 To convert F3311 Run the batch Populates the F3311 A new field was introduced F3312 F3313 from application R3380 to F3312 and F3313 to the F3311 F3312 and XE ERP 8 0 for populat
272. ces DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Manufacturing DEdwardsE910 mediaobj MISC DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Misc Animations DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Misc Images DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Oleque DEdwardsE910 mediaobj OMW DEdwardsE910 mediaobj SelfService DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Text DEdwardsE910 MISC Gp Oy amp Gay a Ge Gq Cy Cy Cy Cy O Gy ey Cy ey Sp G Sy Sp Oy ty Gy G G E Q G r Ci E C Q JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install install JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install install access JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install install access jdk JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install install access jdk jre JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install install access jdk jre bin JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install install access jdk jre lib JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install install access jdk jre lib ext JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install install resource JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Misc JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Instal1l Misc SBFServer JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Actions JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Actions dbActions 23 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Deployment Server Directory Structure Cy Q u u JDEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE
273. changes the local Oracle database system and sys accounts passwords to that password During the rest of the Installation Workbench and at runtime of the Deployment Server the local Oracle database is accessed via the system account and this generated and encrypted password This table lists the relationship between the local Oracle database accounts and the password Local Oracle Database Account Default Password System Generated and encrypted by the Deployment Server installer Sys Generated and encrypted by the Deployment Server installer JDE JDE Note The default password may be changed by DBA but if Security Server is not used it must match the password of EnterpriseOne user JDE lt tablespace_name gt lt tablespace_name gt For example For example JDESY910 a JDESY910 a JDEOL910 JDEOL910 Note The default password may be changed by DBA This value does not affect the runtime operation of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne because it does not access the local Oracle database in this manner 3 11 5 4 Process Explorer If you cannot delete the directory for the E1Local Oracle Home because a process has it locked you can use Process Explorer to determine which process has it locked and subsequently kill that process To obtain Process Explorer you can download and install a free version at this link http technet microsoft com en us sysinternals To use Process Explorer 3 44 JD Edwards EnterpriseOn
274. ck on it and select Run as Administrator E Oracle Universal Installer Welcome EEr ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Welcome The Oracle Universal Installer guides you through the installation and configuration of your Oracle products Click Installed Products to see all installed products Deinstall Products j About Oracle Universal Installer To Le ED ED 4 On Oracle Universal Installer Welcome click the Deinstall Products button Deinstalling the Software 27 9 Deinstalling the Platform Pack 4 Inventory Ea Contents You have the following Oracle products installed Oracle Homes OraClient11g_home1 JDE_PPack910_HOME ow EnterpriseOne IBM i Platform Pack 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 je EnterpriseOne Database Server 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 E1Local Product OO a ee Location Z JDEdwardsPPackiE91 Ovcom_e1_iSeries910ES f F Show empty homes If you want to remove Oracle software please check the items and click Remove To see the languages installed and other details of a component select the component and then click Details Expand All Collapse All Details Remove Help Save As Close Turn on the check box next to the Oracle Home for the Platform Pack and expand the node to show all installed components For example the Oracle Home might be named JDE_PPack910_Home Note At this step you should select only the Oracle Home that is associated with this parti
275. cle Universal Installer Protoype Environment Warning ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Protoype Environment Warning Attention The installer could not detect the Business Data and the Control Tables for the Prototype Environment Please ensure these libraries are available C Help o Installed Products 4 7 Rerunning the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer You must rerun the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer to support these scenarios a You want to install the Enterprise Server and the Database Server on physically different machines a You want to add an Enterprise Server environment to the Enterprise Server a You want to add a Database Server database to the Database Server a You want to reinstall the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Foundation on the Enterprise Server a You want to reinstall the System Database on the Database Server You should never reinstall any optional components without first uninstalling the components If you select to uninstall the mandatory components you must also select to uninstall or have already uninstalled all related optional components This table lists the mandatory and related optional components Working with the Platform Pack on the IBMi 4 25 Installing the Latest Tools Release and Latest Tools Release Patch to the Enterprise Server Server Mandatory Component Optional Components Enterprise Server JD Edwards EnterpriseOne ES Production Found
276. cs file format and web development language based on XML that enables dynamic creation of high quality graphics with precise structural and visual control It is based on standards defined by the World Wide Web Consortium http www w3 org TR SVG Tip The installation of the SVG viewer may require administrator authority on your client machine 11 3 Setting Up Solution Explorer Solution Explorer is the Microsoft Windows based interface that provides access to Release 9 1 applications role based menus implementation and configuration options documentation and training materials Solution Explorer is a convenient window into Release 9 1 Users can access Solution Explorer to search and navigate quickly through Release 9 1 applications Users also can customize Solution Explorer to create their own tasks and link tasks to other Web based information 11 3 1 Setting Up Solution Explorer HTML Documentation Path When Release 9 1 is installed the system automatically stores HTML documentation hierarchically in folders located in a common documentation directory Using Media Object Queues Solution Explorer locates these files and displays the associated documentation in its own window whenever a user selects a task The file path from Solution Explorer to the HTML documentation files is defined in the F98MOQUE table it must be configured by accessing the corresponding program called the Work with Media Object Queues P98SMOQUE
277. ct New Paper Type The Work With Paper Types form appears 20 Click Add The Paper Type Revisions form appears 21 Complete these fields Paper Type Paper Height Paper Width Unit of Measure The software saves the new paper type 22 Click OK to return to the Work With Paper Types form and then click Close to return to Printer Setup Working With the Enterprise Server 7 11 Setting Up a Printer on the Enterprise Server The new paper type is available in the grid on the Printer Setup form All previous paper type selections are cleared and must be reselected if you want to use them again 23 When finished entering information for the printer on the Printer Setup form click End Release 9 1 saves the new printer setting and returns you to the first form in the Printers application Field Description Platform Type Define the type of physical hardware on which the database resides Server Name Define the computer that receives documents from clients Printer Name Enter a name that refers to a shared resource on a server Each shared directory on a server has a share name which is used by clients to refer to the directory Printer Model Define these attributes for your printer a Printer Model a Printer Location Designates the physical location of the printer a Encoding Paper Type Enter a user defined code H98 PT to define the type of printer paper such as letter or
278. cular OUI That is the Oracle Home name that you select on this screen should match the Oracle Home name that you selected from Start gt Programs 6 Click the Remove button 27 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Deinstalling the Platform Pack Confirmation Enterprise Save Files 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Database Save Files 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 IBM i Platform Pack Setup 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Oracle Universal Installer 11 2 0 2 0 Sun JDK 1 6 0 21 51 Oracle One Off Patch Installer 11 2 0 0 2 Installer SDK Component 11 2 0 2 0 7 On Confirmation verify that you want to deinstall the listed components and their dependent components and if so select the Yes button User Input 8 On User Input you must enter the password for the account you used to run the install For example enter the password for QSECOFR Then click on OK 9 Click the OK button The Remove dialog indicates the progress of the deinstall action Deinstalling the Software 27 11 Deinstalling the Platform Pack Contents You have the following Oracle products installed There are no installed products E Show empty homes If you want to remove Oracle software please check the items and click Remove To see the languages installed and other details of a component select the component and then click Details Expand All Colapse All Details 10 When the deinstallation process complete the Inventory
279. customized objects a RD9840RS Object Customization Summary Report BI Publisher This UBE creates a summary report from the data in the F98881CU table RD9840RD Object Customization Detail Report BI Publisher This UBE creates a detail report from data in the F98881CU table that shows the details of the customizations grouped by various criteria a R9840R Object Customization Summary and Detail Report Standard Version This UBE creates a summary and detail report from the data in the F98881CU table See Also a The section entitled Customization Object Analyzer in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Software Updates Guide http docs oracle com cd E24705_01 doc 91 e24260 compare_ tools htm CHDFHBHB 16 3 3 JD Edwards Visual Compare for UDC Descriptions and Glossary Tool JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Visual Compare for UDC Descriptions and Glossary tool P96472 enables you to review and apply text updates for Data Dictionary glossaries and UDCs You can see a side by side comparison of the new and old text values which enables you to choose whether to accept the changes Retrofitting Custom Modifications 16 3 Using JD Edwards Compare and Merge Tools The Visual Compare for UDC Descriptions and Glossary Tool application P96472 is run from an administrative client workstation within JD Edwards EnterpriseOne and applies the changes to the current environment See Also a The section entitled JD Edwards Visual Compar
280. d 7 Click Add Working With Signon Security 12 3 Setting Up Signon Security Pos0wsec Security Revisions ajoj x File Edit Preferences Form Window Help la x Si AKED ge OK ea Die ARS Links w Securi B OLE S Internet UserID Security History Role User Status Data Source l io System User Enabled Password Eoo ooo C Disabled Allowed Password Attempts Password Change Frequency fo fo Invalid Password Attempts Eb Password Changed fo lt y Daily Password Change Limit Security Changed I Force Immediate Password Change Display all errors currently logged i 8 On Security Revisions complete the following fields a User ID JDE Data Source DEFAULT System User JDE Password Enter a valid password for your installation a User Status Ensure the Enabled radio button is selected a Allowed password attempts Enter a value applicable to your installation a Password change frequency Enter a value applicable to your installation 9 Click OK 10 Click Find to verify that the record was added 12 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Single Sign on 12 2 Enabling Server Side Signon Security Ensure the jde ini on the Enterprise Server has these settings to support signon security SECURITY SecurityServer server_name User JDE Password JDE Default Role ALL Defa
281. d Use Decimal Shift Selected Support for Updates Selected OCM Data Source Blank Understanding Data Source Charts 26 9 Versions Field Valid Value for Client Access IBM i BLOB Support Blank LOB Data Source Selected 26 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 27 Deinstalling the Software This chapter includes these tasks Section 27 1 Understanding the Deinstallation Section 27 2 Deinstalling the Software from the Workstations Section 27 3 Deinstalling the Local OEE from the Deployment Server Section 27 4 Manual Cleanup of a Deinstalled Oracle Database on the Deployment Server Section 27 5 Using the OUI Installer to Deinstall JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from the Deployment Server Section 27 6 Dropping DB2 400 Libraries Section 27 7 Deinstalling the Platform Pack 27 1 Understanding the Deinstallation The installation and upgrade processes do not automatically remove any JD Edwards EnterpriseOne databases You should have a database administrator DBA for your relational database management system RDMS manually remove any unused databases according to the list of databases and associated components which are provided in this document Server The deinstallation program restricts you from deinstalling a mandatory component without also removing all associated optional components that were previously installed The relationship between the mandatory and optional compo
282. d Seg New Back End Dis Sq Environment a Path Code PD910 E910 Production Path Copied From DY910 Path Code Data Central Objects And Versions Selected Deployment Server Directory Selected With Packages Check Out Records Selected ESU History Selected an Path Code Directory on Enterprise Server Selected g Copy Metadata Repository E Configure Manifest S3 Enterprise Servers HE denitsh40 Port 6016 Data Sources F Business Data PROD Ta Central Objects PD910 AR Control Tables Prod AR Versions PD910 il Environment Data E Business Data Not Selected Control Tables Not Selected This screen shows lists all the planned function of the processes of running the business functions and UBEs when you click the End button All UBEs run locally except for the Enterprise Server Path Code copy which is submitted to the Enterprise Server If you selected Generate OCM a business function runs that generates data sources and OCM in Planner 910 and copies them up to System 910 This business function uses the template data source records in F98511 which can be viewed or revised using the Data Source Templates By Environment application on GH9611 The data source template records for the standard environments DV910 PD910 PS910 PY910 are shipped with the Deployment Server install This table lists details of the UBEs that generate the Path Cod
283. de directory contains the same JDEdwards91 10 path_code JDEdwardsE910 E1InstallerLibs JDEdwardsE910 install JDEdwardsE910 inventory JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 elFileActions JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 elFileActions 10 2 0 3 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 elGeneralActions JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 elFileActions 10 2 0 3 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 elPackageActions JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 elPackageActions 10 2 0 3 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 fileActions JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 fileActions 11 2 0 2 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 generalActions JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 generalActions 10 2 0 9 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 ntServicesActions JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 ntServicesActions 10 2 0 6 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 ntw32FoldersActions JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 ntw32FoldersActions 10 2 0 3 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 SpawnActions JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 SpawnActions 10 1 0 3 4 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 w32RegActions JDEdwardsE910 inventory Actions21 w32RegActions 10 2 0 1 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory backup JDEdwardsE910 inventory checkpoints JDEdwardsE910 inventory Clone JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 bpm JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 bpm 1 0 0 0 0 JDEdwa
284. define the location for the Help file that is used by the Web Client on Media Object Queues enter Help in the Name field and click Find Understanding Media Object Queues 10 3 Specifying the Help Location Used by the Web Client and Development Client Home Navigator w Open Applications w Recent Reports w Favorites w Media Object Queue Revisions B X B Tools Queue Name Help Queue Path On Line http www orac k comytec hnetwork doc ume nation ede nt 098 Queue Path Off ine http www orack comytec hnetwork doc ume mtation Wdedent 098 Type 09 PeopieBooks Help Queue On Line Access Type Read Write Off Line Access Type Read Write 3 On Media Object Queue Revisions complete these fields Queue Path On Line Enter this value http www oracle com technetwork documentation jdedent 098169 html a Queue Path Off line Enter the same value as the preceding field which is http www oracle com technetwork documentation jdedent 098169 html Type Enter the value 09 The Type field description changes to PeopleBooks Help Queue 4 Click OK to return to the Work With Media Objects form 5 To define the location for the Help Content Queue that is used by the Development Client on Media Object Queues enter Help Content in the Name field and click Find 10 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Specifying the Help Location Used by the Web Client and Development Client Home Navigator v Open A
285. delog properties and so on Beginning with the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Release 8 97 it is highly recommended that you only access and manage these settings for the supported server types using the Server Manager program For additional details refer to the Server Manager Guide Conventions xviii The following text conventions are used in this document Convention Meaning boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated with an action or terms defined in text or the glossary italic Italic type indicates book titles emphasis or placeholder variables for which you supply particular values monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph URLs code in examples text that appears on the screen or text that you enter 1 Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne This chapter discusses a Section 1 1 Understanding This Guide a Section 1 2 Understanding the Upgrade Process a Section 1 3 Considering Additional Factors a Section 1 4 Working With the Customer Checklist a Section 1 5 Environments Overview a Section 1 6 Language Process Overview 1 1 Understanding This Guide This guide is designed to direct you through a basic JD Edwards EnterpriseOne upgrade It is not a substitute for the database administration manuals provided by your Relational Database Management System RDBMS vendor the network administration manuals provided by your ne
286. der in which you should proceed 1 Install the Deployment Server as described in Section 3 8 Installing the Deployment Server 2 Install the latest Tools Release as described in Section 3 10 1 Installing the Latest Tools Release and Latest Tools Release Patch to the Deployment Server 3 Install the latest Planner Update ESU on the deployment server and run special instructions as described in Section 3 10 2 Installing the Latest Planner Update and Running the Special Instructions 4 Run the Workbench on Pristine environment as described in Chapter 6 Working With Installation Workbench 5 Apply the Planner Update ESU to the Pristine environment 6 Build an Update Package as described in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Package Management Guide 3 5 Local Oracle Enterprise Edition OEE Considerations The Deployment Server installer includes the OEE database version 11gR2 for local use by the Deployment Server The installation includes GUI tools for database administration Caution Because the Deployment Server installer must have access to a local OEE database you must install the 32 bit database client prior to installing the Deployment Server This section discusses these topics a Section 3 5 1 32 Bit Oracle Database Client Required for both 32 bit and 64 bit versions of OEE Section 3 5 2 EnterpriseOne Application P96717 a Section 3 5 3 Best Practices for OEE Performance a
287. ding activities changed fields in F01301 To populate new field in F01331 and create new exclusion records for assignees To write activity details in F01301D For recurring activity with no end date To update F01321 witha calculated end date based on the maximum number of occurrences specified in the Processing Option To update F01321 with the combination of the originator s time zone and daylight saving rules separated by The owner parent record is assigned a new GUID for the group activity ID All assignee s activity records are reassigned the same GUID as the parent owner All Day events and tasks are now stored with time starting 00 00 00 and ending 23 59 59 local time of the orignator s time zone from the user profile F01331 Exclusion The existing exclusion record is updated with the Activity id of the Owner Master record New exclusion records are created for the excluded assignee s series The activity id updated for the new exclusion records is the activity id of the assignee s master record F01321 Recurrence Master For recurring activities that have no end date a finite end date is calculated based on the max number of occurrences specified in the UBE processing option In addition the combination of the activity s originator s time zone and daylight saving rule fields separated by is updated in URCH F01301D Activity Details Physical activity records for ev
288. dir gt planner Data Imp log databases Import for Planner specs lt E1_install_dir gt planner spec Imp log Oracle import log for lt E1l_install_dir gt lt pathcode gt package lt pkg_name gt Spec imp log package specifications and Imp log created during Install and also during Package Workbench Oracle export log for lt El_install_dir gt lt pathcode gt package lt pkg_name gt Spec exp log specifications created and Exp log during Install and also during Package Workbench Local Oracle database C Oracle diag rdbms ellocal ellocal alert runtime Local Oracle database C Oracle diag tnslsnr lt this_machine gt listener alert listener Log for C ReconfigureMSDE log ReconfigureMSDE exe Local Oracle database c Program Files Oracle Inventory logs install logs Log for OEESetup exe c OEEInstall log 3 11 5 1 3 tnsnames ora The tnsnames ora file is located in these directories Oracle E1Local NETWORK ADMIN Working with the Deployment Server 3 43 Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation System 0C4J j2ee home applications webclient ear webclient WEB INF classes 3 11 5 2 Rebooting the Deployment Server You must reboot the Deployment Server after installing or deinstalling the local Oracle database 3 11 5 3 EnterpriseOne Access to the Local Oracle Database The Deployment Server Installation Workbench generates and encrypts a password and then
289. e inks w Advan S OLE s Internet SQUMSDE ODBC SGUMSDE OLEDE Oracle DB2 UDB Access Logical Library Name favwar 0 ODBC Data Source Name Ente 910 Server Map Er 2 On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the Server Map data source 3 Click OK Enterprise Server OF x Would you like to add another Enterprise Server EnterpriseOne processes can be run on multiple enterprise servers Ifyou would like to define an additional enterprise server press Yes Otherwise press No to continue 4 On the Would you like to add another Enterprise Server dialog click the Yes or No button 19 8 Entering HTML Web Server Information Note For Release 9 1 the current terminology and that used in this guide is to refer to the machine running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Java Application Server JAS as the HTML Web Server Functionally these terms are all synonymous However this guide only uses the terms JAS or Java Server when explicitly labeled as such by the software 19 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering HTML Web Server Information Caution The HTML Web Server is mandatory for the majority of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications because the end user applications are only accessible through a web interface To enter HTML Web Server information a JAYA Application Server Oy x
290. e DA2UDE Access Logical fresTcTL Contra Tables Test i 2 1 On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the Control Tables data source Field Description Data Source Name Verify the name of the data source Server Name Verify the name of the Enterprise Server Caution When you defined your plan some fields were changed to reflect the previous release values Verify the value in Data Source Type field is appropriate for your database Enter I for IBM i Access Library Name Enter the name of the library housing your Control Tables for the selected environment ODBC Data Source Name Enter the name of the data source For example Control Tables Test Note Control Tables data sources are specific to the environment and pathcode 2 Click Advanced and verify that UNICODE is off only if the Control Tables are not set to Unicode in a previous release 20 28 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Finalizing the Installation Plan Note If you upgrade from Release 8 9 the Unicode flag is on 3 Click OK 20 12 5 Verifying the Data Source for Versions To verify the data source for versions amp Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions Efel File Edit Preferences Form Window Help l21 x Y x RR OK Can Dis Abo Data Source Name versions DY910 Links w Advan S OLE 8 In
291. e It can be an external Web site an intranet site or even HTML files stored on any server on the network During the installation process a directory called PortalLite is created when the Deployment Server is installed This directory resides in this path x base_installation_directory SolutionExplorer PortalLite where x base_installation_directory is the drive and directory where you installed Release 9 1 on your Deployment Server The PortalLite directory includes a set of HTML files that make up the default Home Page Even though this directory is on the Deployment Server by default the directory could reside anywhere on the network such as on a HTML Web Server or on a local workstation When the Release 9 1 client is installed the system updates the client JDE INI to point to the location of the PortaLite directory For example if the name of the Deployment Server is DepServer1 and the share name is E910 the Explorer section of the JDE INI is updated as follows Explorer ExplorerHomeURL DepServer1 E910 SolutionExplorer portallite index html ExplorerStart INTERNET You can change the above parameters in the JDE INI to display any HTML file or URL as the default Home Page This table describes these parameters Explorer Parameter Description ExplorerHomeURL Defines the URL or filename of the Home Page that is displayed when the user logs on The default value is Depserver1 E910 SolutionExplore
292. e Actions launchPadActions 10 1 0 2 0 1 t Install Stage Actions ntServicesActions t Install Stage Actions ntServicesActions 10 2 0 6 0 t Install Stage Actions ntServicesActions 10 2 0 6 0 1 t Install Stage Actions ntw32FoldersActions t Install Stage Actions ntw32FoldersActions 10 2 0 3 0 oldersActions 10 2 0 3 0 1 t Install Stage Actions rgsActions t Install Stage Actions rgsActions 10 1 0 3 0 t Install Stage Actions rgsActions 10 1 0 3 0 1 t Install Stage Actions SpawnActions t Install Stage Actions SpawnActions 10 1 0 3 4 t Install Stage Actions SpawnActions 10 1 0 3 4 1 t Install Stage Actions unixActions t Install Stage Actions unixActions 10 2 0 3 0 t Install Stage Actions unixActions 10 2 0 3 0 1 t Install Stage Actions w320cxRegActions t Install Stage Actions w320cxRegActions 10 2 0 1 0 t Install Stage Actions w320cxRegActions 10 2 0 1 0 1 t Install Stage Actions w32RegActions t Install Stage Actions w32RegActions 10 2 0 1 0 t Install Stage Actions w32RegActions 10 2 0 1 0 1 t Install Stage Actions wingeneralActions t Install Stage Actions wingeneralActions 10 2 0 1 0 t Install Stage Actions wingeneralActions 10 2 0 1 0 1 t Install Stage Components t Install Stage Components com e1 devclient top e1 devclient top 1 0 0 0 0 e1 devclient top 1 0 0 0 0 1 e1 devclient top 1 0 0 0 0 1 DataFiles Install Stage Components oracle jdk Install Stage Components oracle jdk 1 6 0 21 51 Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOn
293. e Applications Upgrade Guide Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation 3 Process Explorer Sysinternals www sysinternals com File Options Yiew Process Find DLL Help ES oct 40 M Process PID CPU Description n E System Idle Process 0 J Interrupts n a Hardware Interrupts DFCs n a Deferred Procedure Calls E T System 4 amp E smss exe 1240 Windows NT Session Manager E cstss exe 1292 Client Server Runtime Process E a winlogon exe 1324 Windows NT Logon Application 5 services exe 1372 Services and Controller app F svchost exe 1580 Generic Host Process for Win32 Services Pligfksrve exe 2556 igfxsrve Module amp agent exe 4068 InstallShield Update Service Agent svchost exe 1672 Generic Host Process for Win32 Services amp svchost exe 1868 Generic Host Process for Win32 Services Fi wuaucltexe 6032 Windows Update Automatic Updates Description Company Name Version 1 Navigate to Find gt Find Handle or DLL 5 Process Explorer Search Handle or type c oracle e1local Process PID Handle explorer exe 1612 C Oracle E1Local lt Non existent Process gt 6104 C Oracle E1Local 2 Inthe Handle or type field enter the full name of the directory that cannot be deleted For example c oracle ellocal 3 Click the Search button 4 On the search results screen note the PID s Process IDs that are associated with the specified directory 5 Cancel the Pr
294. e Data Upgrading the Production Environment 15 9 Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 Path Code Data UBE Details Control Tables Central Objects and Versions Deployment Server Directory Checkout Records ESU History Path Code Directory on Enterprise Server Copy Metadata Repository Configure Manifest If selected runs R98403 XJDE0022 Runs R98403 XJDE0019 Runs R9800942 This UBE also copies the Package Header Detail records Runs R989861 XJDE0001 Runs R9672 XJDEO001 Submits R9894003 XJDE0001 to the server Runs R9894005 XJDE0001 to copy the metadata repository within Central Objects The local repository is renamed by R9894005 XJDE0002 as the local package directory was copied by R9800942 Runs in UBE R9894005 XJDE0002 to configure the manifest F98770PD910FA in Central Objects and in the target package on the Deployment Server This UBE also configures the spec ini in the target package on the Deployment Server The application writes history records into F984052 To view the history run the Table Conversion Merge Log P984052 on menu GH9611 by filtering on conversion type 95 This screen shows a sample conversion log CPYENV_ 59000LM CPYENV_ 59000LM CPYENY_ES900CLM CPYENY_ES900CLM CPYENV_ES900CLM CPYENY_ES900CLM CPYENV_ES900CLM CPYENY_ES900CLM CPYENV_ES900CLM CPYENV_ESS00CLM CPYENV_ES900CLM ESS00CLM XXS00CLM CPYENV_ES900CLM ES900CLIA XXG00CL
295. e Deployment Server Installation The Deployment Server is the focus of the Release 9 1 upgrade process The upgrade program for the Deployment Server copies the Release 9 1 software from the installation images to the Deployment Server From the Deployment Server the Release 9 1 software is distributed to one or more Enterprise Servers and workstations The Deployment Server installation program updates the Microsoft Windows registry with information about the Release 9 1 installation and languages if applicable 1 2 3 Understanding the Platform Pack Installation Rather than transferring all the software from the Deployment Server the Platform Pack installs the code and database directly to the Enterprise Server This more direct installation method increases performance during this part of the process It is especially beneficial in situations in which the Enterprise Server is connected to the Deployment Server using a wide area network WAN Since the Deployment Server and Platform Pack have separate Installers they can be running concurrently which decreases the overall installation time assuming the Installers are run on different machines Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 7 Understanding the Upgrade Process 1 2 4 Understanding the Installation Planner Installation Planner is an application that runs as a stand alone program on the Deployment Server Installation Planner configures the environments for all machines wi
296. e Directory Structures 23 7 Deployment Server Directory Structure Q q u u u Q I Ey cy Cy Hq Q I Cp Hrg Hq Q I G O G amp G G Ge Gr gy G G ee G G G E ey Gr a ey G ey es ys e Q Gy JDEdwardsE9 JDEdwardsE9 JDEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 nstall DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 nstall DEdwardsE9 nstall DEdwardsE9 nstall DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE91 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld Cl 10 OneWorld Cl Install Stage Components ora 10 OneWorld Cl 10 OneWorld Cl 10 OneWorld Cl 10 OneWorld Cl Stage Componen 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld Stage Componen 10 On
297. e F3311 tables F3313 tables Table Resource Requirement F3312 F3313 Make conversions were not Planning sure F4101 F4102 created for these tables F3002 F3003 F30006 because of the complexities F3007 F0007 F3411 of the logic in conversion and F33133 tables and the existing solution of have converted for existing data Data for F3460 is already available since the table has not been changed running batch applications to create Capacity Message Capacity Peggins and Capacity Load The R3380 or R3382 programs are the existing batch applications User has to select either Resource Requirements Planning R3380 or Rough Cut Capacity Planning Capacity Requirements Planning R3382 depending on whether they are using Resource Requirements Planning RRP or Rough Cut Capacity Planning Capacity Requirements Planning RCCP CRP 13 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R3382 To convert F3311 Run the batch Populates the F3311 A new field was introduced F3312 F3313 from application R3382 to 3312 and 3313 to the F331 F3312 and XE ERP 8 0 for Rough populate F3311 tables F3313 tables Table Cut Capacity F3312 F3313 Make conversions were not Planning Capacity sure F4101 F4102 created for these tables Requirements F3002 F3003 F30006 because of the complexitie
298. e Guide Understanding Obsolete Tables F07437 F07438 F07442 F07448 F07443 F07444 F07445 F07447 F07449 F085541 F07451 F075506 F078332 F078332A F085542 F09U1001 F087710 F08901WF FO911Z3 FO9E111 FO9UI002 F14104 FO9UI003 FO9UIO12 F105503 F12U1001 F14110 F30U1003 F14111 F16U1002 F3003J F3016 F30U1009 F31U1003 F3104 F3112 F31950 F31U1001 F31U1004 F3211Z1 F31U1005 F31UI410 F31U1418 F3211Z F3411Z1 F34A04 F34A00 F34A01 F34A02 F34A03 F34A05 F34W01 F34A06 F34A07 F34A08 Working With Installation Workbench 6 53 Understanding Obsolete Tables F34A09 F34W012 F34W04 F34W02 F34W03 F34W031 F34W032 F34W05 F34W 10 F34W06 F34W07 F34W08 F34W09 F34W11 F34W 142 F34W12 F34W121 F34W13 F34W 141 F34W15 F34W19 F34W 16 F34W17 F34W17B F34W18 F34W20 F34W25 F34W21 F34W22 F34W23 F34W 24 F34W 26 F35UI101J F34W27 F34W28 F34W29 F34W30 F4021W F4311KAY F40336 F40343 P4213 F4215T F485618T F48126 F48098 F48099 F4810 P4811 F489111 F53015 F49090 F49711 F52801 F53001 6 54 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Obsolete Tables F5302 P7302 F53021 F53024 F53034 F55MOIN F74100 F74P04W F74800 F74M0411 F74P0018 F74P03BW F74S0101 F75K0101 F745347 F745349 F74SN34 F75CO1Z1 F75K0201 F76012 F75K0211 F75KUIO1 F760018A F760090A F76031 F7691SSA F7611BA F7618B F7691CBA F7691CSA F76A01 F76A05 F76A02 F76A03 F76A04 F76A0403 F76A06 F
299. e Type I Object Owner ID Blank Library Name SY910 Library List Name RDB name of the IBM i Note To find the IBM i RDB name use the WRKRDBDIRE command DLL Name Blank Database Name list includes possible System 910 databases Server Name Name of the machine where your database resides 26 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Versions Field Valid Value for Client Access Platform IBM i Use Table Owner Blank Use Julian Dates Selected Use Decimal Shift Selected Support for Updates Selected OCM Data Source Selected IBM i BLOB Support Blank LOB Data Source Selected 26 12 Versions This chart lists the characteristics of the Versions data source Field Valid Value for Client Access Data Source Name list includes possible sources Versions PD910 Versions PY910 Versions DV910 Versions PS910 Data Source Use DB Data Source Type I Object Owner ID Blank Library Name list includes possible libraries COPD910 COPY910 CODV910 COPS910 Library List Name RDB name of the IBM i Note To find the IBM i RDB name use the WRKRDBDIRE command DLL Name Blank Database Name list includes possible databases Versions PD910 Versions PY910 Versions DV910 Versions PS910 Server Name Name of the machine where your database resides Platform IBM i Use Table Owner Blank Use Julian Dates Selecte
300. e entitled Section 3 7 2 Copying the JDBC Drivers to the Deployment Server In addition for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 all installations of OEE on the Deployment Server require a driver for local database connectivity on the Deployment Server required to build and deploy ESUs and to perform installations of the Web Development Client workstation You can locate the Oracle database driver in these locations 3 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Installing the Deployment Server a Oracle Enterprise Edition Database on your JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Enterprise or Database Server Your installation of an Oracle 11gR2 database product includes the Oracle JDBC driver s Typically the driver is located in this directory of your Oracle 11gR2 installation jdbc lib a Oracle Technology Network OTN http www oracle com technetwork indexes downloads index html You cannot have multiple Oracle JDBC driver files such as ojdbc5 jar and classes12 jar in the same folder misc or else the drivers will conflict which will cause access failure to the Oracle database on your Enterprise Server The Oracle JOBC driver for example ojdbc5 jar is added to the misc folder by the Deployment Server installer Note You must manually copy the driver files from the installed location to the location specified in the section of this guide entitled Section 3 7 2 Copying the JDBC Drivers to the Deployment S
301. e environment F98511 SPLL Environment Name These defaults are then used to create the data source definition in the F98611 table If records in the F98611 table already exists the defaults from the F98511 table are overridden by the current definition The user is then optionally prompted to customize the data source Given that the standard environments do not always follow the defaults that are specified in the ENV template JD Edwards EnterpriseOne provides preconfigured records for the standard environments Thus the ENV template is only used for custom environments 7 6 3 Understanding OCM Creation After your data sources have been defined and the plan is complete the plan is finalized OCM is created during finalization This section describes a Section 7 6 3 1 Understanding Database Data Sources a Section 7 6 3 2 Understanding Logic Data Sources 7 6 3 1 Understanding Database Data Sources The process finds the data class for each table or GT object in Object Librarian F9860 SICLDF Based on the environment that is being configured and the data class 7 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Working with OCM Generation for the object the data source name is fetched from F98511 If a record is not found it looks for a record for the data class where environment name is DEFAULT to determine whether it should be mapped to a shared data source If a record is not found no mapping is created and
302. e for UDC Descriptions and Glossary Tool in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Software Updates Guide http docs oracle com cd E24705_01 doc 91 e24260 compare_ tools htm BABJCAED 16 3 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne FDA Compare The FDA Compare tool in Oracle s JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Form Design Aid FDA enables you to compare one version of an application to another You can compare them on the application level to determine whether forms have been added deleted or rearranged and whether the properties have changed You also can compare the forms in the applications to each other to see whether controls have been added deleted or rearranged and whether the properties have changed Additionally you can compare two different applications as well This feature is useful when you have made a new application by copying an existing one and then modifying it Then when you upgrade you can not only compare the base application to its new counterpart but also you can compare a custom application While working with the target object you can use all FDA functions except creating new forms While comparing you can change the target object to match the source object If an object exists in the source but not in the target you can copy it to the target If an object exists in both but is different in some way you can merge the specifications from the source to the target to make them identical As a software developer you might use FDA C
303. e in the upgrade the upgrade process uses yours When there is no direct conflict between the two the upgrade process merges the two specifications Replace means the upgrade does not merge your custom modifications into the new release Custom modifications must be redone after the upgrade is completed Customization Considerations If possible transfer all modifications to one pathcode Do this only after testing and approving all modifications or if the modifications are only in development Having only one environment to upgrade significantly shortens the process Refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide for more information about custom modifications and how they are affected by the upgrade process 1 2 1 1 Interactive Application Rules Do not delete controls grid columns or hyperitems on existing software applications instead hide or disable them JD Edwards EnterpriseOne might use these for calculations or as variables Deleting them might disable major functionality Modified JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications are ignored by batch merge All changes must be retrofit via Visual FDA ER Merge An upgrade preserves custom changes to a New applications batch merge a New objects on existing forms using Visual FDA Merge including New hyperitems New controls a New grid columns Any style changes such as fonts and colors a Any code generator overrides a Data dictionary overrides
304. e locations Work Center Q Version fxsDE0043 Edit Version System Version Search System Internal ET o V Load Data Dictionary Tables External Select this checkbox to initially load the replicated Data Dictionary Tables The following version of R98403 will be ET launched to accomplish the task of copying data dictionary tables from base location to remote locations internet Version KIDE0044 Edit Version Dictionar version Search Dictionary g Create Shortcut g2 Send Shortcut 3 On the Data Load tab choose from the following options to copy selected tables to the remote locations Field Description Load System Tables Select this checkbox to initially load the replicated System Tables The following version of R98403 will be launched to accomplish the task of copying system tables from the base location to remote locations Load Data Dictionary Select this checkbox to initially load the replicated Data Dictionary Tables Tables The following version of R98403 will be launched to accomplish the task of copying data dictionary tables from the base location to remote locations Note To edit or change the versions of the R98403 program that copy the control tables constant tables and master tables click the Edit or Search buttons next to their respective versions Note If you have defined multiple locations the system will prompt you to complete s
305. e number of records that failed Copied from Data Source Displays whether the table was copied with data and the data source from which it was copied Status Displays one of the following statuses for the table creation Success Failure or No Action Source DS Warnings Displays any errors or warnings associated with the source data source Target DS Warnings Displays any errors or warnings associated with the target data source 25 3 1 5 Errors and How to Resolve Them A report occasionally lists a status of Failure for tables that are created successfully These failures are generally due to problems creating indices and are not critical for the successful installation of the software During an upgrade or cumulative update you could receive failures for some tables To confirm successful table creation verify that the following tables were created successfully F0007Z1 F00092 F0086 F03B11 F03B14 F03B112 F060116 F06106 F08042 F08330 F0911 F1501B F1721 F1731 F17111 F30006Z1 F3002Z1 F3003Z1 F3460Z1 F39062 P4077 F4106 F4111 Working with Reports 25 7 Data Dictionary Specification Merge Report and Data Dictionary Text Merge Report R98722C and R98722T a F41508 m F4600 a F4812H a F5215 a F7302 a F986113 Reports frequently list a status of No Action for tables the system created successfully This status is accompanied by source and target data source warnings for these tables
306. e optional processing options and an example of each a Job Number For example the default value is UP USER_ID Date and time UP USERDATETIME Report View Mode 13 34 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading E1PAGE from Release 9 0 to Release 9 1 Valid values are 1 View Only Errors 0 View All Records Update Mode Valid values are 1 Proof Mode Edit Mode for ELPAGE 0 Final Mode APPROVE mode 13 10 1 2 Logic Flow Below lists the logic flow for each section of the processing for R98E1UGC Processing Section 1 The logic flow of Processing Section 1 is based on Path Code Master table F00942 with these considerations If ALL is set for all environment in the processing option the UBE processes all environments but only executes one path code The F952400 table is a Central Objects table and should only be mapped by path code If a specific environment is used the UBE can determine the path code The B98E1UGC business function processes all records in F952400 for the specified path code If the target environment F952400 table exists with JDE E1PAGE objects the BSEN will not overwrite those records from those that exist in the source F952400 table Therefore any JDE delivered E1PAGE objects in a previous release are not carried over The BSFN creates records in the F952411 F982403 and F982400 tables In the F982402 table the header information for the Job Number maps back t
307. e or more of the following tabs appears on the Database Connection panel Tab Description All All Vertex Quantum application databases for both applications are located on the same server and in the same location GeoCode The same GeoCode database is used by both applications GeoCode Sales The GeoCode database used by the Sales and Use Tax application is located and Use on this server and location A separate copy of the GeoCode database at another location is used by the Payroll Tax application GeoCode Payroll The GeoCode database used by the Payroll Tax application is located on this server and location A separate copy of the GeoCode database at another location is used by the Sales and Use Tax application Sales and Use The four databases used by the Sales and Use Tax application are located together on this server and location TDM The Test Data Management TDM database used by the Sales and Use Tax application is located on this server and location Register The Register database used by the Sales and Use Tax application is located on this server and location Rate The Rate database used by the Sales and Use Tax application is located on this server and location Payroll The databases used by the Payroll Tax application are located on this server and location 6 On the Database Connection panel select each tab and enter the following information Data Source Enter the n
308. e previous version click Take Defaults The machines that were imported from the previous system data source are entered into the current plan Skip the sections on entering locations Deployment Servers Enterprise Servers and machines or servers and continue with Section 5 4 9 Entering Shared Data Source Information Caution When Choosing Take Defaults In order to ensure the validity of all subsequent plan information it is strongly recommended that even advanced users should not choose this Take Defaults option Instead you should step through plan and verify that the Planner is populating information exactly as you expect to match your requirements a To exit the plan click Cancel 5 4 3 Entering Location Information A location groups related Deployment Servers for use in a multi tier environment To enter location information Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 17 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade a Typical Installation Plan Location Revisions File Edit Preferences Window Help 18 x x amp R i i i oe lean DB Abo Links w Displ S OLE 8 Internet fa Calendar Location DENVER Calcula Work Center p Description Denver Location 2 Internal Mail 2 External ET Location Code Internet g Create Shortcut Parent Location g Send Shortcut Save record H 1 On Location Revisions complete th
309. e provided for the copies in a non standard way For example if you used SAVLIB RSTLIB in order to make your own copies of Central Objects 6 After you have set the Environment Copy options as described in Step 3 click Next If the data source definitions and OCM for the target environment do not exist the application generates data source definitions for Business Data Control Tables Central Objects and Versions for the target environment It assumes that the data will be on the same server as the corresponding data sources for the source environment but you can change this on the Data Source Revisions screens Below is a sample screen for Business Data Z ea e OK Gan Dis Abo Links w Advan OLE dinternet Data Source Name Business Data VO rce Use fos Local Data Source Data Source Type fo ORACLE M JDBNET Data Source Data Cla fe Business Data Platform Loca LocalClient Database Server Name kocan o Object Owner ID Database Name TNS S 7 Following the series of Data Source Revisions screens the next screen Copy Environments Machines Upgrading the Production Environment 15 7 Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 a Machines OE Xx Z xX oe OK Can Back Next Dis Abo Links w Back S OLE S Intemet Select the Enterprise Servers where the new environment will run EnterpriseOne will use this information to populate the
310. e report shows the results for each table conversion and merge Review this report to verify that each table conversion or merge completed normally 25 7 1 How to Read the Report Object headings The following column headings appear in this report Description Environment The new environment being converted or merged to Previous Environment The environment being converted or merged from Obj Name Object Name The name of the table being converted or merged Program Name The identification number of the table conversion or merge program Version The version of the table conversion or merge Status The status of the table creation A successful completion is indicated by Completed Normally 25 8 Object Specification Merge Report R98700 Note This report is used only by upgrade and cumulative update customers The Object Specification Merge report is closely related to the Object Librarian Modification report This report is created during the Specification Table Merge Workbench It shows the results of the merge for each modification and summarizes the activity shown on each Specification Merge Multithread Driver Report R987001 Review this report to verify that all modifications were successfully merged 25 8 1 Processing Options This report has processing options for each of the following versions Version number Version Title ZJDEO001 UPGRADE normal processing ZJ
311. e specific instructions about building and developing packages 2 4 Preparing the DB2 400 Database for Table Conversions The upgrade process requires specific database preparation to account for the various CPU bound and data size requirements It is important to note that during execution of the Table Conversion Workbench you will need sufficient disk space to accommodate two copies of tables being converted To account for this disk space requirement you should identify the four largest tables which you plan to convert determine their current size and multiple that by two For example the following table shows a hypothetical environment where the largest tables are F0911 F42199 F42119 and F41021 Existing Size see Existing Size Largest Tables Note Doubled F0911 120 MB 240 MB 2 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Checking Modification and Merge Flags Existing Size see Existing Size Largest Tables Note Doubled F42199 80 MB 160 MB F42119 90 MB 180 MB F41021 56 MB 112 MB Total Amount of Space Required to Run 692 MB Tables Conversions Note This includes the size of the table and all unique indexes on that table That is if N is the number of concurrent jobs in the TC Workbench then the Temp disk space should be as large as the N largest tables combined including all indexes Note This includes the size of the table and all unique indexes on that table
312. e the jde ini setting on the Enterprise Server that controls where SQL Packages are created The applicable setting is DB SYSTEM SETTINGS sqlPackageLibrary value where value controls the location where JD Edwards EnterpriseOne will place SQL packages on your IBM i based Enterprise Server This is shipped with a value of 2 in order for Table Conversions to work correctly You must change this value to 0 or 1 otherwise you will see a negative performance impact on UBEs Values are listed in this table Value Action 0 Indicates the system to create packages in the library defined in this jde ini section INSTALL DefaultSystem el_system where for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 the default value for e1_system is E910SYS Indicates the system will create packages in QRECOVERY and that UBE packages will be named Rnnnnn Caution You will need to delete any old UBE SQL packages in QRECOVERY Please note that no UBEs can be running on the server while you are deleting these packages Indicates the system will create packages in QRECOVERY and that UBEs are assigned unique names job number For example a UBE name will be in the format T123456 Note You can use this setting for normal daily operations However it will make the startup for your frequently run UBEs a little slower as they will not be able to use existing SQL packages 11 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 12
313. e to 30 characters because that is the restriction in the F98611 table The Platform Pack does not truncate the value when it builds the jde ini for the Enterprise Server Therefore any value greater than 30 characters will result in a mismatch between the jde ini and the F98611 table That is using the previous example the jde ini would have the full length value A23456789012345 910 Server Map which is 32 characters while the F98611 populated by the Planner would have a value of A23456789012345 910 Server M To remedy you could do any one of the following a Manually modify values in table F98611 to match the truncated value in the jde ini file a Ensure that the value is not truncated by limiting the datasource name to 30 characters this would mean limiting the machine name for the Enterprise Server to 13 characters Manually truncate the value in the F98611 table for example A23456789012345 910 Svr Map In any case you must ensure that the values for Server Map datasource names in the F98611 table exactly match those in the jde ini file on the Enterprise Server Description Enter a description for the machine Release Enter the release number to which this plan applies or use the visual assist button to choose one from the list The default value is E910 Host Type Click the visual assist button and choose the type of Enterprise Server you are adding to the plan In this case IBM i Location The
314. e to the directory JDEdwards E910 planner data and run this script TestPlannerDBs bat 2 Edit the attach_planner bat file such that any tablespaces that you do not intend to import are commented out These lines start with call sDATA_PATH IMPORT_TABLESPACE BAT 3 Open a command prompt window by right clicking on a Command Prompt shortcut and selecting Run as administrator 4 Change directory to the location of the batch files 5 Run the batch file to import the tablespace using this syntax attach_planner bat lt Oracle_dir gt lt E1l_install_dir gt where lt Oracle_dir gt is the parent of the E1Local directory For example attach_planner bat c Oracle c JDEdwards E910 Note This import batch file for the local metadata repository is in the spec directory attach_metadata bat 3 11 5 11 2 Export Tablespace Script detach_planner bat To use the export tablespace script 1 Edit the jdedwards E910 planner data detach_planner bat file such that any tablespaces that you do not intend to import are commented out These lines start with call sDATA_PATH EXPORT_TABLESPACE BAT 2 Open a command prompt window by right clicking on a Command Prompt shortcut and selecting Run as administrator 3 Change directory to the location of the batch files Working with the Deployment Server 3 49 Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation 4 Run the batch file to import the tab
315. eWorld Stage Componen 10 OneWorld Stage Componen 10 OneWorld C1 10 OneWorld Cl 10 OneWorld Cl ts ora Clien cl ts ora Cl ts ora cl ts ora 10 OneWorld Cl 10 OneWorld Clien nstall Stage Components ora 10 OneWorld Clien nstall Stage Components ora 10 OneWorld Clien nstall Stage Components ora 10 OneWorld C 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld 10 OneWorld Cl lien lien lien lien lien lien A OO AAA OA OO OA OQ A QO OA GA 10 OneWorld G C GI C C le lien Clien Clien Clien lien lien lien lien lien lien lien lien H H D D lien pa H D B ar As g D n aS o a CR Gh EAE D SCE n E GE CENCE Ch CR a gaa TA a OR e aE E a Ch OCR Gh CR eh Gh et GE eT et CR oth e et T err rc AE E R Ch Qk Ch a E a de et Cr CE oct lien lien lien lien lien lien lien lien Clien Clien Clien Clien ien ien ien ien ien ien ien ien ien ien ien ien ien ien ien tage Components oracle 0 21 51 1 Da tage Componen tage Componen tage Componen taFiles ts oracl ts oracl ts oracl swd swd swd jre 1 5 0 11 0 1 DataFil tage Componen es ts oracle swd opatch tch 11 2 0 0 2 tch 11 2 0 0 2 1 tch 11 2 0 0 2 1 DataFiles tage Components oracle swd tage Components oracle swd tage Components oracle swd tage Components oracle swd oui oui core le swd oui core 11 2 0 2
316. eWorld Client Install Stage Queries unixQueries JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries unixQueries 10 1 0 2 0 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries unixQueries 10 1 0 2 0 1 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries w32RegQueries JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries w32RegQueries 10 2 0 1 0 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries w32RegQueries 10 2 0 1 0 1 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries WindowsGeneralQueries JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries WindowsGeneralQueries 10 2 0 1 0 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries WindowsGeneralQueries 10 2 0 1 0 1 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage shiphomeinfo JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage shiphomeinfo summary JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install ThirdParty JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install ThirdParty BPMBroker JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install ThirdParty ORACLE JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install ThirdParty VSRunTime JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install ThirdParty WebDevFeature JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install ThirdParty WebDevFeature H4A7 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install ThirdParty WebDevFeature OH4A JDEdwardsE910 O0Patch JDEdwardsE910 0Patch crs JDEdwardsE910 0Patch docs JDEdwardsE910 0Patch fmw JDEdwardsE910 O0Patch jlib JDEdwardsE910 O0Patch ocm JDEdwardsE910 O0Patch ocm generic zip JDEdwardsE910 0Patch opatchprereqs JDEdwardsE910 0Patch opatc
317. each Specifications Information application F98753 Central Objects FDA SVR Detail Contains summary information about each Specifications Information form for each application F98760 Central Objects RDA Text Information Holds records that contain the report design Specifications aid text for all languages F98761 Central Objects RDA Specification Info Holds records that contain report design aid Specifications setup information F98762 Central Objects JDEBLC Behavior Contains business function specifications Specifications Information F9882 System 910 Checkout Log table Logs all transactions that take place to objects Planner 910 System Local F98825 System 910 Package Deployment Contains information for deploying client Scheduling packages such as group user ID and package assignment F9883 System 910 Release 9 1 Network Contains information for deploying server Locations table 24 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide packages such as package assignments Table Data Source Description Purpose F9885 System 910 Install Package Header Contains one record per package System Local F9886 System 910 Install Package Detail Contains one record per package per product code or object to be included in the package System Local F9887 System 910 Install Package Build Lists each time the package is built S History ystem Local F9888 System
318. eb Client 1 3 Considering Additional Factors This section discusses a Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications a Section 1 3 2 Understanding Machine Names a Section 1 3 3 Accessing IBM i Performance Tuning and White Papers a Section 1 3 4 Using JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Support a Section 1 3 5 Understanding Documentation Conventions 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications Customers must conform to the supported platforms for the release as detailed in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Minimum Technical Requirements In addition JD Edwards EnterpriseOne may integrate interface or work in conjunction with other Oracle products Refer to the following link for cross reference material in the Program 1 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Considering Additional Factors Documentation for Program prerequisites and version cross reference documents to assure compatibility of various Oracle products http www oracle com corporate contracts index html Access the current Minimum Technical Requirements MTR from My Oracle Support https support oracle com by searching for this document 745831 1 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Minimum Technical Requirements Reference https support oracle com epmos faces DocumentDisplay id 745831 1 1 3 2 Understanding Machine Names Due to underlying requirements in the machine name tables you must ensure tha
319. ect Data Sources Data Load Advanced pees Langu OCh Row 1 1 On Select Environments double click the environment that you want to define 2 Toset up multiple environments choose and define them one at a time Release 9 1 returns to this screen after the following tasks are completed 3 Click the Close button to exit the Select Environments screen 5 4 10 2 Specifying Environment Data Load Parameters If you turned off Default Data Load on the Environment Selection form the Data Load Parameters form appears To specify environment data load parameters 5 36 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Custom Installation Plan Data Load Parameters BE File Edit Preferences Form Window Help x 4 x ff g we OK Can Next Dis Abo Links wheat s OLe B Internet The data load options are used when creating new tables R98407 during an Upgrade The option must be setto Load Production or Load Development in order to populate F9861 and F983051 Version Search C Load Production Data Load DemoData Edit Version Data Load Setup Delete Environment Ps9i0 E910 Pristine Environment Previous Environment ee ed Plan Detail Status m Al In Planning Program Name R298403 Environment Database Creation Version KIDE0033 Express Install Source Environment DEPLAN gannan C Source Data Source Busi
320. ect language information and contain a language preference code that is translated by JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Table Data Source Description Purpose F0004D Control Tables UDC Alternate Contains the User Defined Code UDC key Language language key and text for headers in the F0004 table Provides UDC type descriptions for alternate languages F0005D Control Tables UDC Alternate Contains UDC key language key and text for Language detail in the F0005 table Provides UDC value descriptions for alternate languages F00165 Business Data Data Media Objects storage Stores text OLE references and image Dictionary 910Object Librarian 910 Business Data Local Data Dictionary Local Object Librarian Local references Stores glossary text and media objects for all languages Major Technical Tables 24 1 Table Data Source Description Purpose FO092 System 910 Library List User Contains one record per user with initial menu initial program and whether to enable Planner 910 f ast path System Local F00921 System 910 User Display Preferences Contains one record per user with date format Planner 910 eee DW prefix and language System Local F00922 System 910 User Display Preferences Contains one record per user with workstation Tagfile configuration name This table is used with the Pignners 20 F00050 table System Local F00924 System 910 User Install Pack
321. ection 20 1 Assumptions about Adding a Server to an Existing Installation Plan Section 20 2 Starting Installation Planner Section 20 3 Entering a Plan Description Section 20 4 Entering a Plan Location Section 20 5 Selecting Additional Server Types Section 20 6 Entering Deployment Server Information Section 20 7 Specifying an Enterprise Server Section 20 8 Entering HTML Web Server Information Section 20 9 Entering Data Server Information Section 20 10 Entering Shared Data Source Information Section 20 11 Setting Up Environments Section 20 12 Setting Up Environment Data Sources Section 20 13 Finalizing the Installation Plan Section 20 14 Concluding the Validation Planner Report Section 20 15 Configuring Additional Servers 20 1 Assumptions about Adding a Server to an Existing Installation Plan This table outlines assumptions for adding a server to an existing Installation Plan phase as a whole Personnel Installer Logon Status On the Deployment Server logged on as user JDE with the database password for user JDE in the planner environment Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 1 Starting Installation Planner Personnel Installer Prerequisites Verify that the Deployment Server is installed and theRelease 9 1 directory is shared In order to run EnterpriseOne on an additional server you must deploy JD Edwards EnterpriseOne to the server using either Ser
322. ed in the plan from the F9654 table in the Planner data source to the System 910 data source It also updates the F984021 table Use this procedure when running Workbench in attended mode or if you set a task break before Location Workbench a Installation Workbench Location Workbench BEE File Edit Preferences Form Window Help l x sE E D M e i z B Seq New Prev Next Con Dis Abo ee Sees 3 OLE es B Internet Plan Name UPGDV910 Upgrade Plan for DV910 Plan Status al ol Location Status Plan Name Location Description Description UPGDY910 DENVER DENVER 20 Finalized Row 1 H baa 1 On Location Workbench verify that all of your locations are listed 2 Select Configure from the Form menu Locations are configured and the Data Source Workbench form appears The system updates the Detail Status to 60 and changes the Status Description from Validated to Installed 6 12 Configuring Your Data Sources Data Source Workbench copies all data sources that are defined in the plan from the F98611 table and the F986115 table in your Planner data source to your System 910 data source It also updates the F98401 table to indicate completion Use this procedure when running Workbench in attended mode or if you set a task break before Data Source Workbench 1 On Data Source Workbench verify that all of your data sources are listed as illustrated in this example Working With Installati
323. ed using a third party tool Shortcut 1 On Control System Replication select the Replication Setup tab and select the following options to replicate information to remote locations Field Description Replicate System Tables Select this checkbox to replicate all tables within the System data source A new data source will be created for the remote location and the mappings for the remote environment will be activated to point to the new System data source Replicate Data Dictionary Select this checkbox to replicate all tables within the Data Tables Dictionary data source A new data source will be created for the remote location and the mappings for the remote environment will be activated to point to the new Data Dictionary data source Caution Replication must be implemented using a third party tool 2 Select the Data Load tab Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 17 Replicating Information to Remote Locations a Custom Installation Plan Control System Replication le Edit Preferences Window Help amp elu i r r OK Can Dies Aba Links w Displ OLE 9 Internet 82 aera Replication Setup m Shared Data Sources for Location Aurora Calcula V Load System Tables Select this checkbox to initially load the replicated System Tables The following version of R98403 will be launched to accomplish the task of copying system tables from base location to remot
324. eduler merges and specification merges for upgrades updates and coexistent installations F9843T System 910 F98511 System 910 REP Data Sources by Lists default data sources by environment Environment This table is used during installation Planner 910 F9860 Object Librarian Object Librarian Master Contains one record per object with Object Librarian Local table description and object type F9861 Object Librarian Object Librarian Status Contains one record per object per location Detail per path code Each object has a server Object Librarian Local i 5 ocation plus locations for each person who checks it out to his machine F986101 System 910 Object Configuration Contains all data sources for tables batch Server Ma Master applications and business functions that run P on the server The only data sources not Planner 910 controlled through this file are the system data Systemi Local source in Release Master and the Development y data source in object path master F98611 System 910 Data Source Master Holds data source definitions One record per Sejv Ma data source with type database machine P name and foundation DLL Planner 910 System Local F986110 System 910 Contains one record for each job on the server with status information Server Map Planner 910 System Local F986111 System 910 Job Number Master Contains the next numbers table for server jobs Server Map Planner 910 System Local 24 8 JD Edwa
325. ee O O Note The Secure Password is used for all database users created by the installer The default password is the same as the database user name For example user name JDE password JDE 14 On IBM i Server and User Profile complete these fields a Server Name Enter the name of the IBM i machine a IBM i User Profile Enter QSECOFR or another user on the host that has ALLOBJ SECADM SAVSYS IOSYSCFG JOBCTL rights IBM i Password Enter the password for the User Profile above a Enter Secure Password Working with the Platform Pack on the IBMi 4 19 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i This password allows you to change the password for users created on the IBM i The default creates user profiles with password user for example JDE JDE If this violates the password rules on your IBM i machine supply a secure password that will pass your password rules then change the INI files and change the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne security definitions using JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications P980001 and P98OWSEC before starting services Leaving this as the default password will allow the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne services to be started immediately after the installation Confirm Password Leave this as the default unless the Secure Password has been entered 15 Click the Next button If the installer begins with no errors you can proceed to the Step 16 Otherwise refer to t
326. eeeeeseeaes 25 13 25 8 3 1 Modifying the Merge Status of an Object cece cesses eecessesseneseneneeseees 25 14 25 8 4 Compare Tables and Indexes Against Central Objects or TAM Specifications R9698711 25 14 25 8 5 UDC Merge Report Data Dictionary Merge Report and Menu Merge Report 25 14 25 8 5 1 Setting Processing OptioS sanantonio as i aa are E 25 15 25 8 5 1 1 UDC Merge and Exception Report and Data Dictionary Merge and Exception Report 25 15 25 8 5 1 2 Menu Merge and Exception Report sssssesessnesseseseseenseseseees 25 15 25 8 5 2 How to Read the Report cece cesses irni e e aa 25 15 25 8 5 3 Errors and How to Resolve Them ccccccsssssssssssssssceeceescesseeseceecsecssesaeeneseeseeeees 25 16 25 9 Index Recreation R9698713 eshare et atan eaaa a enaa aab oases 25 16 25 10 Pathcode Copy RIBQQJLZ sisiping ansera aat pa Eas 25 16 Understanding Data Source Charts 26 1 Business Data siisccsiciscwhe sdasncesiiesiaieiseisdendlnwaihouiaslamier A E Rae e 26 1 26 2 Central Objects siioni se i E E E E E EE 26 2 26 3 Control Tables emeente n a sec ea a A R aa a tte ceed et else eee 26 3 20 4 Data Dictionary casi pei gorrina TREE EEE EEEE A EEEE E Rect cate eae 26 4 POD EOP no ene st E ist Sto cites a E E E E E E 26 4 26 6 ObjectLibrari Nisinsin sioni en o a a a a a nia a aS 26 5 26 7 Lang age nenien yenan e ia a ea aas aa Sa aar E suet Aa Daaa ENN 26 6 26 9 LoCall stehseetareeecte a a a Gena E aaia a
327. efault Sizing SQUSSEMSDE ODBC SQUMSDE OLEDB Loaical lt gt DBZ 05 400 DBZ UDB fas Object Owner ID Psat OCTL Database Name TNS cr w w Ces 5 On Data Source Revisions enter the data source name for the Control Tables data source that will be used by the remote location For example Control Tables PS9I10ATL 6 Complete the other fields as applicable for your database and platform 7 Click the OK button 19 28 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Remote Location Packages custom Installation Plan Select Environments Od x File Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help 18 x 4 fh amp x 3 Gf R inks 3 Fr Select Find Add Copy Close Sea New Des Dis adie Bie Buu Plan Name INSTALL Install Plan Select Deselect Description Data Sources Data Load Advanced Row 1 8 On Select Environments click the Close button to exit the form 19 15 Remote Location Packages After you complete the data source setup for the environments you can choose whether to push packages to a remote location a Remote Location Packages et x would you like to push packages to this remote location Atlanta Delivered pre built packages can be pushed from base location to remote location deployment servers Press Yes to view a list of packages Press Take Defaults to push all packages Press No otherwise Take Defaults x No
328. egards to the Installation Planner and the Installation Workbench The installation of the HTML Web Server itself is not covered by this guide Separate guides describe the separate installation process for the HTML Web Server on the supported platforms using Server Manager Topics relating to the HTML Web Server other than installation using Server Manager are covered in platform specific reference guides Such topics include the installation and configuration of the underlying application servers Refer to these Tools Release guides which are available on the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Documentation library This library is located on the Oracle Technology Network which can be accessed at this link http www oracle com technetwork documentation jdedent 0981 69 html Server Manager Guide a HTML Web Server Reference Guide for WebSphere on IBM i a Install the workstations for developers and system administrators Concurrent Installation You can concurrently install the Deployment Server the Platform Pack and the HTML Web Server assuming the installation programs are run on different machines not recommended for VM environments This can decrease the overall time it takes to complete the upgrade Recommended Configurations You can set up your Release 9 1 configuration in many ways You should follow the typical setup and naming conventions whenever possible unless there is a strong business case that supports the need to chan
329. elease For example B7334 New Release Name Enter the name of the new release For example E910 Merge Language Codes Enter N if language codes do not need to be merged 25 8 5 1 2 Menu Merge and Exception Report The Merge tab contains these options Option Value Update Mode Enter 2 The default is update mode Environment Name for the Old Release Enter the name of the old release environment For example PRODB7334 Old Release Name Enter the name of the old release For example E910 New Release Name Enter the name of the new release For example E910 25 8 5 2 How to Read the Report Each report has a cover page that contains a summary of and basic information about your upgrade release information source mappings mappings from replication additional table mappings and the mode in which the report was run The main text of the report indicates the status of Environment and Release Information Source UDC Table Mappings UDC Table Mappings from Replication Additional Table Mappings and Mode If the entire merge is successful a message appears at the end of each report a For the UDC Merge and Exception report UDC Merge process completed successfully with no errors and warnings a For the Data Dictionary Merge report Data dictionary merge process completed successfully with no errors and warnings Working with Reports 25 15 Index Recreation R9698713 a For the Menu M
330. elease you are upgrading from For example enter E910 for Release 9 1 To Release Verify that the release number is E910 the default value Table Conversion Properties Check box to run table conversions on the Deployment Server The default is to run on the Enterprise Server Tracing Turns on debug logging Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 13 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Field Description Include Languages This is an optional selection that is only available if you have previously specified this Custom plan to install languages Select yes if you are installing an alternate language 2 Click OK Note If you are installing the Deployment Server on the same machine as a previous release and the Installation Planner has detected that previous release you can proceed to the next step However if you manually changed the Install Type to Upgrade most likely because the previous release of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne was installed on a different machine or this installation is on a remote Deployment Server you will be presented with the following screen in which you must enter the data source information that will enable the Installation Planner to locate the previous release gt Database Data Sources Data Source Revisions oix File Edit Preferences Form Window Help 181 x vy x amp Links OK Can bis Apo
331. elp in the QBE for Queue Name and verify the two help queues are added 8 Exit Release 9 1 and log back on to enable the changes Understanding Media Object Queues 10 5 Specifying the Help Location Used by the Web Client and Development Client 10 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 11 Performing Post Upgrade Tasks This section contains these tasks Section 11 1 Setting Up Microsoft Windows Security on Release 9 1 Directories Section 11 2 Using the Adobe SVG Viewer on Web Clients Section 11 3 Setting Up Solution Explorer Section 11 4 Configuring JD Edwards EnterpriseOne for Use with Vertex Quantum Tax Applications Section 11 5 Enabling CRM Functionality Section 11 6 Enabling Verity Enhanced Search Capability Section 11 7 Working with the Data Dictionary Section 11 8 Working with SETOWAUT Section 11 9 UBE Performance SQL Package Location 11 1 Setting Up Microsoft Windows Security on Release 9 1 Directories To set up Microsoft Windows security on the Release 9 1 directories and files on your Deployment Server Use these charts to determine what permissions are required for the various types of Release 9 1 users and perform these tasks to set permissions on the Security tab Section 11 1 1 Setting Security on the Pathcode Directory Section 11 1 2 Setting Security on the Database Directory Section 11 1 3 Setting Security on the Data Dictionary Directory Sectio
332. embly dat from Microsoft Windows Explorer results from Step 3 into the command window to append the 1cd command begun in Step 4 and then press Enter to execute the 1cd command Your completed command will look similar to this lcd d disk1 install data E910 3 d45216a0d2 b17cd87deda05 9 1 000 In the command window type this command but do not press Enter cd Note Do not press Enter at this point Continue with the steps below to finish populating the cd command In Microsoft Windows Explorer copy the location of the assembly dat on the Microsoft Windows box from the Address bar and paste the results to append the cd command Your completed command will look similar to this cd address_copied_from_Windows_Explorer In the command window enter this command bin In the command window enter this command put assembly dat Using Microsoft Windows Explorer verify that the size and number of files match in the Microsoft Windows install image and the IBM i install image FTP onthe IBMi 22 3 Copying assembly dat to the IBM i IFS Directory optional 22 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 23 Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Directory Structures The charts in this section illustrate the directory structures for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne on the Deployment Server the Enterprise Server and Workstations You must understand these directory structures to verify that you in
333. ement Workbench and version tables Environment Workbench can run multiple batch applications simultaneously which enables Release 9 1 to load multiple environments at the same time This reduces the amount of time it takes to load environments Use this procedure when running Workbench in attended mode or if a task break is set before Environment Workbench 6 20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Using Machine Workbench Installation Workbench Environment Workbench MEI amp File Edit preferences Form Row Window Help l x J amp w P lins w Previo SJOLE Internet Close Seg New Prev Next Con Dis Abo Plan Name UPGDV910 Upgrade Plan for DV910 New Status m Al Environment Environment Load Tble Spec Previous Environment Status Data Loa Name Description Data Con Mrg Environment Status Description Status 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 J i DEP910 E910 Deploymer Finalized E910 Production Env i i i i 30 Finalized E910 Production Env 1 4 4 4 PD 30 Finalized 253 1 On Environment Workbench review each environment and its associated parameters to make sure the values are correct 2 After you review the environments select Configure 3 When Environment Workbench has completed verify that the status of each environment has been updated to 60 and that the status description has changed from Validated to Installed 4 Using Adobe Acrobat review all X
334. emove any unused libraries listed in the table below JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Component DB2 400 Library Name Foundation SY910 OL910 DD910 SVM910 OWJRNL Production COPD910 PRODDTA PRODCTL Pristine COPS910 PS910DTA PS910CTL Development CODV910 TESTDTA TESTCTL Prototype COPY910 CRPDTA CRPCTL 27 7 Deinstalling the Platform Pack You should always use the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne OUI based installation program to remove JD Edwards EnterpriseOne If you manually remove the software the deinstallation cannot be guaranteed to be complete and as a result subsequent reinstallation of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne may be hindered To run the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i Enterprise Server 1 Log on to the same Microsoft Windows machine where you initially ran the Platform Pack installer for IBM i If you followed the recommendation this will be the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server 2 Locate the directory where you extracted the install images If you followed the recommendation the directory is 27 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Deinstalling the Platform Pack c IBMPPack BY C IBMPPack File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qax QB seach e rowers 5 gt X 4 Hr Address a C IBMPPack Folders 9 IBMPPack 3 In the extracted structure locate the setup exe file under the install subdirectory right cli
335. en a scheduled table conversion program did not complete successfully If you ran the table conversion locally checked the jde 1og and the TC Engine log if it exists If you ran the table conversion on the Enterprise Server check the R98405A log and the TC Engine log on the server Detailed instructions for re running some table conversions are in the online documented entitled JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Programmer s Guide If you cannot locate any special re run instructions for this table conversion use these procedures to resolve 1 Correct the problems that caused the failure 2 Restore tables if necessary 3 Drop the temporary table FTCTEMP if necessary 4 Re run the process Conversion Has Unprocessed Dependencies This error occurs when a conversion program could not be launched because it is dependent on other scheduled conversion programs which did not run to successful completion You must correct the errors for the conversion program on which this conversion is dependent You must either run Convert All or run the dependency Working With Installation Workbench 6 37 Understanding Table Conversions conversion and then run this conversion If you choose Convert All it will automatically retry this table conversion Default Environment Missing on Server This error occurs if your Upgrade Plan indicates to run table conversions on the server and the default environment defined in the server jde ini file has not bee
336. ences Form Window Help al x Z x 2 e Links w Advan BOLE Internet OK Can Dis Abo B a Data Source Name Object Librarian 910 AMENDED Data Source Use 5 Local Data Source vais Data Source Type fi DB2 UDB on 05 400 M JDBNET Data Source Poni Data Class fo Object Librarian Platform fas4oo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name DS2 BGUMBDE ODBC SQUMeDEGLEDE Oracie OB2U0B Access Locical Library Name jors 0 ODBC Data Source Name Object Librarian 910 1 On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the settings for the Object Librarian data source 2 Click OK 20 10 4 Verifying the OWJRNL Data Source To verify the OWJRNL data source Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 17 Entering Shared Data Source Information a Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions Bel File Edit Preferences Form Window Help lj x Y x R e Links f w Advan OLES Internet OK Can Dis Abo B B i Data Source Name JOWURNL ee Data Source Use oe Local Data Source m Data Source Type J DB2 UDB on 05 400 M JDBNET Data Source Poti Data Class fc Local Platform fasaoo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name Ente SGUMEDE ODBC SQUMEDEGLEDB Gracie bea Ube Access oma Library Name JOWIRNL ODBC Data Source Name JOWURNL a533 1 On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the settings for the OWJRNL data source 2 Click OK
337. ench Architecture Section 6 16 3 Configuring Table Conversions to Run on the Enterprise Server Section 6 16 4 Verifying the Table Conversion Process Section 6 16 5 Deferring Index Builds During Table Conversion Workbench Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 6 16 1 Running Table Conversions Note For Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 If you wish to defer index builds you can choose to do so beginning with Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 During your upgrade you may choose to defer index builds for very large tables for tables that are converted several times during the Table Conversion Workbench or if you are planning on a Unicode conversion For details and instructions on deferring index builds refer to the subsection in this guide entitled Section 6 16 5 Deferring Index Builds During Table Conversion Workbench Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 To run table conversions 1 If it is not already open open Installation Workbench double click your plan on Work with Installation Plan and click Next until Table Conversion Workbench appears Working With Installation Workbench 6 25 Understanding Table Conversions E Installation Workbench Table Conversion Workbench er File Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help 18 xj A x J amp Bow amp wR Links w Previo S OLE B Internet Find Close Seq New Prev Net Con Dis Abo Mode Plan Name PD910UPG PD910 Upgrade C Synch New
338. ent Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 02 in the real estate management orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 03 for Real Estate Management Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 03 in the real estate management orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 04 for Real Estate Management Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 04 in the real estate management orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 05 for Real Estate Management Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 05 in the real estate management orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Rate Schedules Order Type value 01 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 01 in the rate Rate Schedule Orders schedule orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 02 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 02 in the rate Rate Schedule Orders schedule orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 03 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 03 i
339. ent from the JOEPLAN environment on the Deployment Server You should apply all software updates ESUs and Service Packs to the Pristine environment 1 5 4 Deployment Environment DEP910 Use the deployment environment to run packages builds on the Deployment Server The deployment environment uses the planner pathcode and has OCM mappings to the production environment system tables and local data Only one deployment environment is required because all environments created by the installation process share common data sources The deployment environment uses system information such as environments packages and user profiles The OCM mappings and data source information are supplied by the planner database 1 5 5 Development Environment DV910 The development environment is for development objects DV910 pathcode Log on to this environment to modify and test objects before transferring them to the prototype environment PY910 pathcode After transferring the objects into PY910 build and install a full or partial prototype package for example PY910FA or PY910PA and then log on to the prototype environment for additional testing The Development environment is delivered with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Demonstration data Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 15 Language Process Overview 1 5 6 Prototype Environment PY910 The prototype environment is the staging environment for production Constants tables and master
340. entation Using the Tools Release documentation install the Tools Release Patch to the Deployment Server Caution You must right click on the executable and select Run as Administrator from the drop down Note If you have ever used the Drag and Drop method of moving between Tools Releases for service packs it is necessary to run the ReconfigureMSDE utility to encrypt the system database user s password Refer to the section of this guide entitled Section 3 11 5 9 Encrypting the Password of the Local Oracle Database 3 10 2 Installing the Latest Planner Update and Running the Special Instructions Caution As part of the local database installation which is bundled with the Deployment Server Installer the password for the system user on the E1Local database is encrypted If you re set this password several JD Edwards EnterpriseOne functions will fail If you should inadvertently reset the password you can encrypt it again to the expected default password Refer to the section of this guide entitled Section 3 11 5 9 Encrypting the Password of the Local Oracle Database To install the latest planner update 1 From My Oracle Support download the latest planner update for your Tools Release to the Deployment Server Run the self extracting executable and follow the on screen instructions to install the planner update on the Deployment Server Caution You must apply the Pla
341. ents21 tory Components21 tory Components21 tory Components21 tory Components21 tory Components21 tory ContentsxM tory ContentsxXM tory Dialogs21 tory Dialogs21 standardDialogs tory Dialogs21 standardDialogs 10 2 0 1 0 tory Queries21 tory Queries21 areasQueries tory Queries21 areasQueries 10 2 0 1 0 tory Queries21 elDBQueries tory Queries21 elDBQueries 10 2 0 3 0 tory Queries21 elFileQueries tory Queries21 elFileQueries 10 2 0 3 0 tory Queries21 elGeneralQueries tory Queries21 elGeneralQueries 10 2 0 3 0 tory Queries21 elPackageQueries tory Queries21 elPackageQueries 10 2 0 3 0 Cy Cy Cy Eye G Ep ey Ch iy Q oo ooooodooo oOo O O Gy Q Li L ConfigXML Gr Cy Cy O Cy G Sy G ey ey E Q DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 Cy ey Gi ey ey eS Q 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven tory Queries2 tory Queries2 tory Queries2 1 fileQueries l fileQueries 10 1 0 3 0 l generalQueries tory Queries21 tory Queries21 tory Queries21 tory Queries21 generalQueries 10 2 0 2 0 w32RegQueries w32RegQueries 10 2 0 1 0 WindowsGeneralQueries 0 inven WindowsGeneralQueries 10 2 0 1 0 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven 0 inven DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE91 DEdwardsE
342. er a Typical Installation Plan HTML Server Revisions Od x File Edit Preferences Form Window Help 18 x Vex ome Y Links E 3 Abo w Window 8 OLE 8 Internet OK Can Dis Machine Usage 30 HTML Application Server Location Pener ERAON Machine Name DEVNTA Primary User JDE vl Description HTMLWebServeriseries Release Eno Host Type po AS 400 Data 3 S Ei Generac Workstation Deployment Enterprise S Crystal CMS Sur Map Primary HTME Sewer fi Protocol http Server URL Juwworaclecom Http Port po Default Login fidelserviethtmitogin Installation Path Deployment Server Name friranic n 2 On HTML Server Revisions complete these fields Field Description Machine Usage The default value of 30 indicates that this is a HTML Web Server Machine Name Enter the name of your HTML Web Server The name is case sensitive should not exceed 15 characters and should not contain any special characters 5 26 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Field Description Description Enter a description of the HTML Web Server machine Release Enter E910 to indicate the release number that you are installing Host Type The default value of 50 specifies the server type as Intel NT Select the correct server type Location The location cho
343. er GH9013 in the Fast Path field and start the Job Queues program P986130 2 Click Add a Job Queues Job Queue Revisions Sel Fie Edit Preferences Window Help la xj Calendar Calcula Work Center H Internal ETI A External ET Internet Q Create Shortcut 2 A ri amp i i i K ea E anG Links w Displ 8 OLE 8 Internet oELcmas1 Job Queue ACTIVE Job Queue Status g Active Queue Type o2 A5 400 Queue T Default Queue Maximum Batch Jobs Port Number 3 On Job Queue Revisions add a queue by completing these fields Working With Installation Workbench 6 7 Understanding Workbench Components Field Description Host Enter the Enterprise Server name Job Queue Ensure that the queue name matches the batch queue name on the IBM i Typically IBM i machines use the batch queue QBATCH as their default Default Queue Turn on this option by clicking the check box Job Queue Status Enter 01 Queue Type Enter 02 Maximum Batch Jobs Enter a value that equals the number of processors on the Enterprise Server machine Port Number Enter 6016 If you receive a Network Failed error you can safely ignore it in this case 4 Add another queue called J ACTIVE a Job Queues Job Queue Revisions Iof x File Edit Preferences Window Help la x x GG R ju k i 7 Me aa ae inks w Displ 9 OLE 8 Internet Calendar
344. er ID Blank Library Name list includes possible libraries PRODDTA TESTDTA CRPDTA PS910DTA Understanding Data Source Charts 26 1 Central Objects Field Valid Value for Client Access Library List Name RDB name of the IBM i Note To find the IBM i RDB name use the WRKRDBDIRE command Database Name list includes possible databases Business Data PROD Business Data TEST Business Data CRPDTA Business Data PS910 Server Name Name of the machine where your database resides Platform IBM i Use Table Owner Blank Use Julian Dates Selected Use Decimal Shift Selected Support for Updates Selected OCM Data Source Blank LOB Data Source Selected IBM i BLOB Support Blank 26 2 Central Objects This chart lists the characteristics of the Central Objects data source Field Client Access Data Source Name list includes possible sources Central Objects PY910 for CRP Central Objects PS910 for Prist Central Objects PD910 for Prod Central Objects DV910 for Dev Data Source Use DB Data Source Type I Object Owner ID Blank Library Name list includes possible libraries COPD910 for Prod COPY910 for CRP COPS910 for Prist CODV910 for Dev Library List Name RDB name of the IBMi Note To find the IBM i RDB name use the WRKRDBDIRE command Database Name list includes possible databases 26 2 JD Edwards E
345. er Information cccccceccccceseseses cesses cscscssseseececsesnsneeeeeees 20 7 20 7 2 Entering Enterprise Server Data Source Information ccccccseccscse see eeeeeeeeeees 20 9 20 7 2 1 Specifying Custom or Default Data Source Information 0c cece 20 9 20 7 2 2 Verifying Custom Server Map Data Source Information ccccecseeeeeees 20 9 20 7 2 3 Adding another Enterprise Server oo ccc ec cceeececeeeeenesecessseneseseeneeseees 20 10 20 8 Entering HTML Web Server Information ce eseseeeeeesesessseneeesesssenesesneseseees 20 11 20 9 Entering Data Server Information cc ccc eee ee ceeeeecseececesesesenetesessseeseneeeeeeeees 20 13 20 10 Entering Shared Data Source Information c ccc cee ceeeceeseeeeeeneseseeseesenenesseeneees 20 15 20 10 1 Specifying Custom or Default Shared Data Source Setup Information 20 15 20 10 2 Verifying the Data Source for Data Dictionary 0 cece eeseeeeeeeeeteneeeeees 20 15 20 10 3 Verifying the Object Librarian Data Source wo cess cesseseseesesesseesesenenseseeees 20 16 20 10 4 Verifying the OWJRNL Data SOULCE ec cece ceeeeeeecesseseenesensseeeeeneseneeeeseees 20 17 20 10 5 Verifying the System Data Source occ eseseesesesssssseeseseesssesesesesssesesesesesesesescsens 20 18 20 11 Setting Up Environments nsr iseenda ienie seei ea s Ea S EES EE S aai 20 19 20 11 1 Selecting an Environment siiret oee Ar EE R eTa EAEE SEEE TR R 20 21 20 11 2 Specifying Environment Data Load
346. er Logs To remedy you will probably need to deinstall the database engine using the steps in the section of this guide entitled Section 27 5 Using the OUI Installer to Deinstall JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from the Deployment Server reboot the Deployment Server machine and then reinstall the OEE database 3 8 7 Understanding the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer A local OEE database engine and a database called E1Local must already exist on this machine If not use the procedures in the preceding section entitled Section 3 8 5 Using InstallManager to Install a Local Database on the Deployment Server This section describes Section 3 8 7 1 Understanding EnterpriseOne Files Location a Section 3 8 7 2 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer 3 8 7 1 Understanding EnterpriseOne Files Location The software component called EnterpriseOne Files is a pre defined grouping of files that can be installed on your local machine or a mapped network drive It includes EnterpriseOne system files and pathcodes for these four 4 environments a Development a Prototype a Pristine a Production By default the installer assumes the local machine is the Deployment Server As such it provides a default value for your Oracle Home path Working with the Deployment Server 3 23 Installing the Deployment Server You cannot change this local path value after the installation is complete it
347. er the default location chosen for this plan Primary User Enter the user to whom email is sent when a package is deployed The default for Primary User is JDE 2 On the Enterprise tab complete these fields Field Description Port Number Displays the default value for this field which is supplied the jde ini Change the port number for this Enterprise Server to a unique value for example 6016 Logical Machine Displays the system supplied default value when you enter the host Name type The name is case sensitive should not exceed 15 characters and should not contain any special characters 20 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Specifying an Enterprise Server Field Description Database Type Enter the type of database that you want to use for data sources on the Enterprise Server Value is lis for IBM i Access Server Map Data Displays the system supplied default value when you enter the host Source type Installation Path Verify that the default value is the installation directory path to which you want to install Release 9 1 on the Enterprise Server Make sure the value is specific to your version of the release For example for Release 9 1 the default path is JDEdwards PPack E910SYS This is the system library Deployment Server Using the visual assist button choose the name of the Deployment Name Server to which this Enterprise Server is attached The system provides
348. erformed in the deployment environment a Section 7 7 1 Adding a New Printer Section 7 7 2 Defining a Default Printer You also can print Release 9 1 reports modify existing printers and delete printers These tasks are described in detail in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools System Administration Guide Refer to that document to learn more about setting up a printer to run from the Release 9 1 Enterprise Server If a printer was installed in your previous release of Release 9 1 you do not need to re install that printer All printer settings are carried forward during the upgrade to this release 7 7 1 Adding a New Printer Release 9 1 provides a Printer Setup director to help you add printers Instructions appear on each form of the director to guide you through the printer addition process This procedure is used in conjunction with the steps that appear on the forms of the Printer Setup director To install your first printer 1 On the Printers menu GH9013 select Printers P98616 The Printers form appears 2 On the Printers form click Add Printer The welcome page for the Printer Setup director appears This page describes the tasks that the director helps you perform 3 Review the welcome page and click Next The Platform Information form appears The platform type may appear by default depending on the operating system on which Release 9 1 is running Working With the Enterprise Server 7 7 Setting Up
349. erge report Menu merge process completed successfully with no errors and warnings Note Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 If you have made custom modifications to your business data you can use the Application Configuration Analyzer to verify that your changes were carried forward to the new release The Application Configuration Analyzer is a set of reports which identify differences for processing options data dictionary DD items and user defined codes UDCs between releases or environments These reports are Versions Compare a User Defined Codes Compare a Data Dictionary Compare See Also a The section entitled Application Configuration Analyzer in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Software Updates Guide 25 8 5 3 Errors and How to Resolve Them If warnings appear in the report the merge finished Check the warning log printed at the end of the report to diagnose any problems that may have occurred Errors appear only when the problem is severe enough to stop processing If the report contains error messages the merge process was not completed Information regarding any errors is also printed in the log at the end of the report This following error message appears if change tables do not have records associated with the From Release and To Release settings DD Merge process terminated Check Error Log 25 9 Index Recreation R9698713 The R9698713 program is run from Batch Versions after an install or
350. erged into the new release Custom or modified tables business functions and applications are also not preserved in this process This section includes these tasks a Section 18 1 Testing Long File Names a Section 18 2 Pre Upgrade Procedures Section 18 3 Installing the Deployment Server a Section 18 4 Planning the Upgrade a Section 18 5 Running Installation Workbench a Section 18 6 Custom Modifications and Packages Section 18 7 Upgrading the Production Environment 18 1 Testing Long File Names Before you run a data only upgrade you must test the cross reference table to ensure that you can create tables with names longer than 10 characters To test the cross reference table follow the procedure described in Section 4 3 9 Testing Long File Names on the IBM i in the Chapter 4 of this guide 18 2 Pre Upgrade Procedures These procedures do not apply to a data only upgrade because control table changes and customizations are not carried forward to the new release Performing a Data Only Upgrade 18 1 Installing the Deployment Server Skip the following steps which are in the Chapter 2 Before You Begin the Upgrade section of this guide a Section 2 3 Preparing the Development Environment a Section 2 5 Checking Modification and Merge Flags a Section 2 7 3 Refreshing the Control Tables Instead of refreshing the existing user defined code and menu tables delete them to ensure that they
351. erprise server press select Select X Cancel On Enterprise Server click the OK button to define a new Enterprise Server or click the Select button to choose an existing Enterprise Server 19 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering Enterprise Server Information Custom Installation Plan Enterprise Server Revisions Ore E Location 1 On Enterprise Server Revisions verify or complete these fields Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 9 Entering Enterprise Server Information Field Description Machine Name The name of the primary Enterprise Server The name is case sensitive and should not contain any special characters Because the machine name is used to create the Server Map datasource name and because the Platform Pack Installer does not restrict you from entering a machine name that results in a datasource name greater than 30 characters if the machine name for the Enterprise Server is longer than 13 characters the resulting datasource name will be longer than the allowed 30 characters For example if your machine name is 15 characters A23456789012345 the base datasource name input into the Planner would be A23456789012345 910 Server Map Note The field in table F98611 is a hard restriction the field only allows 30 characters The actual field size cannot be modified or changed When the Planner runs it truncates the valu
352. erpriseOne IBM i Platform Pack 9 1 Which of these components do you want to install components instants O O OA WJ FI VUUUH VaALaVvase 9 1 D LUUVU ata Development Database 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 DErterpriseOne Enterprise Server 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Installed 9 1 0 0 0 O Enterprise IBM i Foundation 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Installed 9 1 0 0 0 O Pristine Environment 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Installed 9 1 0 0 0 O Prototype Environment 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Installed 9 1 0 0 0 Production Environment 9 1 9 1 0 0 Development Environment 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Expand All Collapse All Select All DeselectAll F Show all components including required dependencies km CD CD On Available Product Components select from these choices JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Database Server a System Database Note This selection includes mandatory system files If you do not select this box the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer will select this component Likewise if you rerun the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer to add an environment it will check to ensure that this component is already installed Also if rerunning you will not be given an option to install the environment in a different ORACLE_HOME a Production Databases a Prototype Databases a Development Databases a Pristine Databases JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Enterprise Server a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Foundation 4 16 JD Edwards Enterprise
353. ersion Throttle L 1 On Advanced Parameters complete the following fields and turn on the following options Field Description Logic Data Source Displays the server data source where the table conversions will run Table Conversion Throttle Displays the number of table conversions to be run concurrently on the server Note The Table Conversion Workbench checks the maximum jobs for the default job queue for the logic server It will only submit up to the number of maximum jobs on the queue to run at once If the throttle is set higher than the queue it uses the queue maximum number of jobs If throttle the queue is set higher than the throttle it uses the 2 Click OK Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 23 Setting Up Environments If you are not installing languages Release 9 1 prompts you for data source information Skip to Section 20 12 Setting Up Environment Data Sources If you turned off Default Languages on the Select Environments selection form continue with Selecting Languages 20 11 4 Selecting Languages To select languages 1 On Language Selection to set up a language for the selected environment choose the appropriate language 2 From the Row menu click Select 3 Repeat the above steps until all your languages have been selected 4 Click OK Tip Customization Considerations I
354. erver 3 7 2 Copying the JDBC Drivers to the Deployment Server Caution This step must be done before starting the installer as one of its first steps the installer attempts to load all jar files needed for the process After you have obtained the JDBC driver s from the database vendor s you should copy the driver file s and if applicable any associated license files in this directory on the Deployment Server x DepSvr Disk1 Misc where x is a drive name and where DepSvr Disk1 Misc is the Deployment Server install image You must supply this directory location and name when you run the Deployment Server Installer 3 8 Installing the Deployment Server Caution Microsoft Windows 2008 If you are running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server on a Microsoft Windows 2008 platform you must be signed onto the machine as administrator Additionally you must run all JD Edwards EnterpriseOne installers and processes as Administrator Due to the security model on Microsoft Windows 2008 failure to run the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne processes as Administrator will likely result in random and unpredictable failures in the processes at run time Working with the Deployment Server 3 15 Installing the Deployment Server Caution Remote Desktop If you are using Remote Desktop to connect to the Deployment Server you must use the admin argument to launch Remote Desktop For examp
355. erver Map To enter data source information for Server Map Data Source Sil xi Ifyou are using JDEdwards standards you can take the defaults Otherwise press OK to define datasource information Take Defaults x Cancel 1 On Data Source you are prompted to enter Data Source Information for the Enterprise Server Choose one of these options 5 24 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade a Click OK to continue entering unique data source information If you choose this option continue with this task a Click Take Defaults to select the default data If you choose this option you can skip to Section Caution When Choosing Take Defaults Caution In order to ensure the validity of all subsequent plan information it is strongly recommended that even advanced users should not choose this Take Defaults option Instead you should step through plan and verify that the Planner is populating information exactly as you expect to match your requirements a Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions File Edit Preferences Form Window Help x a Data Source Name Ems 910 Server Map Aavanced Data Source Use ps Local Data Source Data Source Type J DB2 UDB on 05 400 F JDBNET Data Source Data Class F Host Server Map Platform fasaoo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name Ente Y x
356. erver to store media object queues remember to make the machine available for use daily by Release 9 1 applications Media object queue paths are shipped with generic server names To enable media object queues at the customer site enter the Deployment Server name in the media object queue path See Also Media Objects and Imaging in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools System Administration Guide for more information about the use of media objects 10 2 Modifying Media Object Queues To modify your media object queues Understanding Media Object Queues 10 1 Modifying Media Object Queues 1 Log into Release 9 1 as JDE in the DEP910 environment 2 From System Administration Tools GH9011 select Media Object Queues P98MOQUE 3 To define the location for a new OLE queue click Add 4 Complete these fields a Name Enter a valid value for your queue a Path Generally the queue paths include server_name and queue_name Replace server_name with the name of the Deployment Server or the location of the media object queue A valid queue path for a network location might be server_name E910 queue_name where server_name is your Deployment Server and queue_name is the name of the media object queue When using ComposerCBT the media object queue path does not require or server_name ComposerCBT is shipped with an x for the drive name To enable the Composer CBT queue replace the x with the drive letter that the
357. ervers in IBM i An Implementation Guide for the IBM Integrated xSeries Server for IBM i SG24 6056 December 2000 a Direct Attach xSeries for the IBM IBM i Server A guide to Implementing xSeries Servers in IBM i SG24 6222 00 December 2001 a Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Integration with IBM i SG24 6959 00 December 2003 The Microsoft Windows Integration Home page offers additional information concerning OS 400 hardware specifications etc The total disk used for the Release 9 1 Deployment Server is allocated across at least three Network Server Storage spaces associated with the Integrated xSeries Server 1 Microsoft Windows system files represent the c drive on the Microsoft Windows Server 3 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Using IXS Integrated xSeries Server for Deployment Note Take these considerations into account when estimating the size of the c drive on your Microsoft Windows Server The more memory you have installed on the integrated server hardware the larger you should make the c drive Microsoft Windows Server creates a virtual memory paging file pagefile sys on the system drive Microsoft Windows Server calculates the size of the paging file based on the amount of physical memory RAM installed on the server It is generally recommended that you allocate at least 150 of the installed memory size as additional disk storage on the system drive to accommodate the paging
358. ery instance of a recurring activity rescind in the new activity detail table FO1301D Activity search applications are changed to search over this new table which allows for faster and easier search capabilities 13 24 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading from 8 12 or Below Upgrading from 8 11 SP1 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R4801T1 To populate F4801T1 None This post install UBE from F4801T when will populate table upgrading from 8 11 F4801T1 with data SP1 or below Only from F4801T If there customers that have are records in F4801T data for ETO in F4801 with PRJM project need to run this TC Do number field not run this TC if the populated ESU was applied prior corresponding to upgrade records would be created in F4801T1 The only field that gets populated from F4801T into F4801T1 is DOCO 13 7 Upgrading from 8 12 or Below This section contains a list of all the Table Conversions required when upgrading from 8 12 or below Upgrading from 8 12 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes RO9E115 To update Expense None To reformat the The size of the UDC Code Location UDC Codes values in UDC 09E I EL has been when upgrading from 09E EL increased to 10 characters 8 12 or below This caused the values to be left padded with spaces to make up the difference in size This UBE will remove that left
359. es B7300012 Validate Quantum Software Information B0000182 B0000183 11 4 4 Testing the Vertex Quantum Connection from Release 9 1 Use the following procedures to test the Vertex Quantum connection from Release 9 1 To test the Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax interface 1 Access the Payroll Workbench menu G0O7BUSP11 and select Pay Cycle Workbench The Work with Payroll Cycle Workbench panel appears Specify pre payroll information and submit the pre payroll For information about the Payroll Workbench and submitting pre payroll see Processing Pre Payroll in the Release 9 1 Payroll Implementation Guide If no taxes are being calculated there may be a setup or configuration problem Verify the following to make sure setup is correct UBE R07200 is being executed on the server where the Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax APIs reside a Correct values are assigned to the Data Source Server User ID and Password fields on the Database Connection panel as specified in Configuring the Release 9 1 Database Connections for Vertex Quantum Tax Applications 11 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Enabling CRM Functionality 4 For the Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax interface In the Fast Path field enter P73GEO The Retrieve GeoCode panel appears 5 On the Retrieve GeoCode panel enter CO in the State field and DENVER in the City field and click Find The code 060310140 should appear in the
360. es 16 2 16 3 1 Using the Application Configuration Analyzer Release 9 1 Update 2 16 2 16 3 2 Using the Customization Object Analyzer Release 9 1 Update 2 ccccccceeen 16 3 16 3 3 JD Edwards Visual Compare for UDC Descriptions and Glossary Tool 004 16 3 16 3 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne FDA Compare c cccececec cece sesesseseesesesssessseseseeeenees 16 4 16 3 5 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne ER Compare cesses cssssssesssssssssseesessesssenees 16 4 Troubleshooting 17 1 Using the PORTTEST Checklists ccccctsscetcscsssvanssasesnvenssacecobiveroresesstersnssansbescteesautsestede deste 17 1 17 2 Resolving Data Errors stasies dei ees ati eeet i Sia nesta decanters cists teats 17 3 17 3 Planner Update Special Instructions cceeeecessssessesssessssesesesesssesesescsesesesesescssseseecsees 17 3 17 4 Resolving Errors Due to Lack of ALLOBJ and JOBCTL Authority 17 3 Performing a Data Only Upgrade 18 1 Testing Long File Names tesise ia an ERE cite AEE CRE E 18 1 18 2 Pre Upgrade Procedures orny E e e E a 18 1 18 3 Installing the Deployment Server sssssssssssississsissesssntesresssssestensisnesnstensisnesnteninnienennenneeneet 18 2 18 4 Planning the Upetade assis nuit ani nhai 18 2 18 5 Running Installation Workbench oo cece ees eecesssssesesesesesesesesescsesssesesescsssesesesescseseseecsees 18 3 18 6 Custom Modifications and Packages ccccesescesssssesesesssesssesesescsessesesescssseseecseses
361. es required to install environments Some of the processes that install environments might require procedures to be performed manually However Installation Workbench assures that procedures are performed in the proper order and insulates you as much as possible from platform specific environment setup 1 2 6 Understanding the Workstation Installation The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Development Client also known as a Web Development Client Fat Client Administrative Client Windows client or Workstation contains components that run as standard Microsoft Windows applications for example Active Console Forms Design Aid FDA and Report Design Aid RDA and components that run in a web browser Note This document uses the following terminology when discussing JD Edwards EnterpriseOne clients a Web Client Components that run in a web browser a Development Client Composed of standard Windows components and Web Client Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 9 Considering Additional Factors The Web Client part of the Development Client runs inside an Application Server The supported Application Servers are Oracle Application Server OAS a IBM WebSphere Application Server WAS Express or WebSphere Application Server for Developers The Oracle Application Server is included as part of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system code and is automatically configured to work with the Web Client when you install t
362. es the F98405 table which is maintained locally in JOEPLAN The TCs update the F984052 table which is maintained in System 910 At any point in time there are records in the F98405 table at status 45 for TCs that actually have completed The TC Workbench calls a business function at various points in its loop which compares the F984052 and F98405 table and updates the status in the F98405 to completed 60 or failed 50 If the TC Workbench fails for example you cancel out of it go into the Custom Plan application and drill down into your TCs and press Find This synchronizes the F98405 table with the F984052 table Clicking the Find button on the TC Workbench also synchronizes the F98405 and F984052 tables If the Enterprise Server fails while running the TC Workbench you may have up to 4 jobs at status 45 running even though they may have failed Follow the instructions in the write up on restarting the TC Workbench to get everything back into sync Remember the Find button on the Custom Plans Table Conversions synchronizes the F98405 with F984052 tables If a TC actually fails on the server for example you cancel the job it will never get as far as updating the F984052 table and the process is not able to update the F98405 table correctly Selecting either Convert Selected or Convert All does not re submit anything that is at status 45 When restarting the TC Workbench you need to resolve manually whether any of the jobs at s
363. escsesesesesescscsssesesescsssnseecsees 14 5 14 6 2 Package Deployment Considerations ccccccccceees ee csesesescesecesseeeesesesessseneneseseeens 14 6 14 7 Assembling a Package that Contains Published Business Services 14 6 Upgrading the Production Environment 15 1 Understanding the Upgrade of the Production Environment s sss sssssesssssiesissieseesresees 15 1 15 2 General Checklist and Considerations ccccccesscsscessesssesceseeeeceseeceecseecsecssessecescaecnssessensees 15 2 15 3 Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 oo ee cece te eeeeeees 15 3 15 4 Setting Up an Upgrade Plan for the Production Environment cccccseseceees 15 13 15 5 Taking the Production Environment Offline ccccccseseseesceesesescscseseseecseseseseeeeeseens 15 14 15 6 Running the Installation Plan for the Production Environment ccccceceseeeeseees 15 14 15 7 Testing the Production Package o cccccccssessccsssesesescscsenesesescscsesesesescssseseecscsssnseseececesee 15 15 15 8 Bringing the Production Environment Online 0 cccc cece cece ceeeeeeeeeceneneseseesesens 15 15 Retrofitting Custom Modifications 16 1 OVERVIEW ssri onii dhe GR a ae te eee a aise enna tiie a ae ahead 16 1 16 2 Retrofitting Custom Modifications cccccccccsccsssesesescscsenesesescscsesesesessssssseecscssensneseeeeenes 16 1 16 3 Using JD Edwards Compare and Merge Tools c ccccccsseccccseseseecscseseseseececssensneseeeee
364. ese fields Field Description Location Enter the location to which this plan applies the location can be a city company headquarters or a division of the company Description Enter a description for this location Location Code If this is the base location this field is only available when you are adding the base location If you are editing an existing base location the field is unavailable Parent Location If this is the base location this field is only available when you are adding the base location If you are editing an existing base location the field is unavailable 2 Click OK 5 4 4 Entering Deployment Server Information Once a plan location is specified specify the information for the primary Deployment Server you will use in this plan While Release 9 1 enables more than one Deployment Server to be defined only the primary Deployment Server is defined at this time You can choose a primary Deployment Server from the list of existing servers or you can enter information for a new server 5 18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Note If you installed JD EnterpriseOne Files to a remote Deployment Server you should click the OK button to define a new Deployment Server The deployment server name is the remote machine name by default a Deployment Server lel xi A plan must be associated with a deployment server If you would like to
365. eseees 5 12 Starting Installation Plannel cccccccseseststeseseeseeseeeecenesesesnseneseseecesescsnansnesesesneneneeees 5 12 Entering a Plan Description cccccsesesesceceseseseeneeseseseesesceceenesesesesnenesesceceeesesssnenanenees 5 12 Entering Location Information ccccccccccs ese c cece eeceeeeseececessseesnesessseesseneseceenenes 5 17 Entering Deployment Server Information ccccccccece cece eee ceesceseeseeceseseneteeeneees 5 18 Entering Enterprise Server Information ese cs esses cecscseseseecscsssnsneseesees 5 21 Enter Data Source Information for Server Map cccseeseescesesesesceneseseseenetesescenenens 5 24 Entering HTML Web Server Information c ccccccsessesetesceceesesesnensneseseeeesessseenanenens 5 25 Entering Data Server Information s rsnnenonanei iasan 5 28 Entering Shared Data Source Information cccccccccccsesesecceeeeecscseseseecscsssnsneeeeeees 5 30 Specifying Custom or Default Shared Data Source setup information 5 30 Verifying the Data Source for Data Dictionary ccccce ccc ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeenens 5 30 Verifying the Object Librarian Data Source 00 cece eects teeeeeeeeensneneneees 5 31 Verifying the OWJRNL Data Source oe ceeseseeeesesesesesesessseseseseeneseseees 5 32 Verifying the System Data Source ccccceseececseseesesesesesesesesescseseseecscsssnseeceeeees 5 33 Setting Up Environments ciscsessscecscieesscssivesei sever cedecandeiselalivvedtadsaSer dials E EE
366. esesenens 8 1 8 3 Working With Development Client Installation 0 cccceecececcccssneseeescseseseecsesessseseeeeeeeens 8 3 8 3 1 Creating a Desktop Shortcuts pna api aiaa i a doves EE E a 8 4 8 3 2 Using a Shared Drive ivi scseteia ieee cheb e aa e A 8 4 8 3 3 Understanding Third Party Products s sssssesssesissessessessississisntesinsinsessnnninsienessnsneesees 8 5 8 4 Understanding User Profiles and Languages essessessssessssesrissessessetinsesnesnentenriesesnesneesees 8 5 Performing Merges 9 1 Working with Control Table Merges sssssssssssssssississssrerstssesnsssenrinsesstsnseninsienesntenieneeneeseess 9 1 9 1 1 Working with Customer Base Merges se sesssssseesisrissressesiestesrisresnenrestesnesnestensesnesses 9 2 9 1 2 Working with Language Specific Table Merges ccccsssssessssseseseessseeseseseneeecseseees 9 2 9 1 3 Working with Data Dictionary Merge ss sssssississesssesiestesesstesnestentissesnentennesnesnesneenees 9 2 9 1 4 Work with Solution Explorer Merge s sessessssissessestsssisstsstsssesinsesstsnteninsinsenneenienensessness 9 3 9 1 5 Working with UDC M fgessseteienad eyii S a ia Ei NA 9 4 9 1 6 Working with Favorites Merge ss sssessssisseeseessesieseessnsrestenstsnesnentensinsesnennensienesnenneesees 9 4 9 1 7 Working with Report Director Templates Merge ssssessssessesisssisrissesientesrisnesnenreseess 9 4 9 1 8 Working with Tips of the Day
367. esolution SelectKeyed to F00165T failed Check FO0165T spec and run again Read Failed Media Object data not available The object is missing or corrupted and must in FO0165T blob be added manually Read Failed Cannot allocate memory for Check virtual memory and run again Media Object Blob Read Failed Missing records for BLOB concat The object is missing or corrupted and must Total Read be added manually Cannot allocate memory for Generic Text Check virtual memory and run again Blob Fail to open OLE storage file lt Queue Path gt Make sure the file exists in the path that lt stg file name gt defined in the System 910 FI8SMOQUE table based on lt Queue Path gt and run again 6 16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Working With Initial Tasks Workbench Error Message Resolution OLE storage file might be corrupted lt stg file name gt The object is missing or corrupted and must be added manually OLE substorage file might be corrupted lt stg file name gt The object is missing or corrupted and must be added manually OLE Fail Insufficient memory to create new file lt Queue Path gt lt filename gt Check virtual memory and run again OLE Fail Access Denied cannot create new file lt Queue Path gt lt filename gt Check security setting on OLE queue path folder and run again OLE Fail Program error cannot crea
368. ess 6 22 Language Installationen iinis prea e paa a ra A E ean helene 6 22 Confisuring Conttol Tablesssrsiesiscasieaien e ea a 6 23 Understanding Table Conversions c ccccccccsssseseccceescscscsesesescecssseseseecscssssseeceescsssneseeenes 6 24 Running Table Conversions c ccccecccccessseseccceesescscscssseseecscssseseseecscsssnseesecsssneseseceses 6 25 Table Conversion Workbench Architecture ccccccsecssessssseesceseecseessecsecssecseesseeasensees 6 27 Configuring Table Conversions to Run on the Enterprise Server ccce 6 27 Table Conversion Schedule ses cescesesctevses sete a a 6 28 Upgrade Plan Definitii ta a r aa aa A S Ea 6 29 Select Enterprise Server and Maximum Jobs On Select Environments Advanced Exit 6 30 Config ring Queues r nasrni ae n EE A EARE E E a aA 6 31 Starting Table Conversions s ssessssssssessesssesiesissesstesiesiesesntsnienieniesnnsnenieseeseenses tes 6 31 6 16 3 6 Monitoring Table Conversions ccccceccccsesesescsescesesescscsssesesescssseseecscssensneceeeees 6 32 6 16 3 7 Working With Table Conversion Log Files ccccccecesssesesccceeseecscesenseeeeeeees 6 33 6 16 3 8 Stopping Table Conversions ic ceciiscisecesteccssssctsecossevsutssessenseisteesesesnsvsiscoseeendissencvotbes 6 35 6 16 3 9 Restarting Installation Workbench cece ceeees cece ceeeeeneceseseneseteneeeeeeees 6 35 6 16 3 10 Troubleshooting Table Conversion cccccee eee esse cseeceeeseseseeesenete
369. essed Dependencies a Default Environment Missing on Server Inconsistent Queue Definitions a Invalid TC Max Jobs in Plan a Security Server Turned On a Services Inactive Cannot Run on Server a Submission Problems TC Has No Saved Input Table Specs This error indicates that the table conversion cannot be run from the Table Conversion Workbench because it does not have saved input table specifications To resolve the error you must either fix the table conversion using TC Design Aid or run it from batch versions TC Input Table Does Not Exist This error indicates that the table conversion cannot be run because the input table does not exist This problem can be caused by DBMS or host operating system security issues Use these steps to resolve the issue 1 The table that is being reported as missing is the input table for the specified table conversion Review the description of this table conversion in the online document entitled JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Programmer s Guide Usually the missing table is the based on table in the TC Schedule but in some cases it is not 2 Check the jde 1log and your security setup in the DBMS to determine whether this is a security issue If so take corrective actions 6 36 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions 3 If this is not a security issue you must determine why the table is missing and whether you have a business purpose for this part
370. ete any of the following table conversion records that are in your plan The records listed in your plan will depend on the version of the software from which you are upgrading Some records might be listed multiple times a F89210 a 98710 9210 R8989210 a F98741 R89IDVAR a F9862 a 98740 18 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Custom Modifications and Packages 18 5 Running Installation Workbench F98741 R8998741 F98752 F98753 F98720 F9210 R899210 F98711 F98743 F98762 F98745 F98760 F98750 F98751 F98761 R8998761 F98761 R8998763 F98762 F98950 F9860 F89210 F983051 F98306 Run Installation Planner as you normally would for an upgrade and complete all of these Installation Workbench tasks Section 6 10 Working With Initial Tasks Workbench 18 6 Custom Modifications and Packages Section 6 11 Configuring Your Locations Section 6 12 Configuring Your Data Sources Section 6 13 Configuring Your Environments Section 6 14 Using Machine Workbench Section 6 16 4 Verifying the Table Conversion Process for business data only Section 6 20 Using Remote Location Workbench Do not perform the following chapter if you do not need to distribute customizations Chapter 14 Building and Testing Packages When testing the new release use one of the delivered standard packages because no modifications are carried forward Performing a Data Only U
371. ether or not SAR 5685791 has been applied to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Xe If this SAR has been applied to Xe before upgrading then there is no need for F1216 data conversion because the data has already been corrected when the SAR was applied Otherwise the F1216 data needs to be corrected to fix the data that has been entered from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne before Migrating from JD Edwards World does not require the F1216 data conversion because the data entered from JD Edwards World is in the correct format F1216 table that has been entered using JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Xe The conversion program only modifies data that is stored incorrectly in the table The conversion program reformats data in the F1216 table and corrects the mapping to correct the data that has previously been entered from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Please also refer to the Breaking News message that has been published with regard to these issues and the data conversion for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Xe Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R894801P To convert F4801 Two processing This report mustrun This report consolidates the F4801T F4817 from options exist for this to consolidate the F4801T and F4817 tables XE ERP 8 0 when report F4817 table records properly sets the new working with Convert URCD into the F4801T serialized com
372. ets of the Replication Setup and Data Load screens for each location 4 Click OK 19 18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering Shared Data Source Information 19 11 Entering Shared Data Source Information This section describes entering the shared data source information for the Data Dictionary and System data sources a Data Source fel xi Ifyou are using JDEdwards standards you can take the defaults Otherwise press OK to define datasource information Take Defaults 1 When you are prompted to enter the data source information for the shared data sources to use the Release 9 1 data sources click OK to specify or verify the data source information amp Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions Of as el File Edit Preferences Form Window Help la x Y x R amp R OK Can Dis Abo uins w Advan B OLE 8 Internet Data Source Name Data Dictionary 910ATL Data Source Use oe Local Data Source Data Source Type fo ORACLE 7 JDBNET Data Source Data Class E Data Dictionary Database Platform NTSVR NT Server Sizing Database Server Name DENLCMt 7 Default Sizing SQUSSE MSDE ODBC SQUMSDE OLEDB DBZ O5 400 DBZ UDB Access Logical 4 gt Object Owner ID Database Name TNS 2 On Data Source Revisions enter the data source name for the Data Dictionary data source that will be used by the remote l
373. etween releases F9691410 System Local Change Table Report Stores adds changes deletes to the Report Director Template Director Template Sequence table between Sequence releases F9691420 System Local Change Table Smart Stores adds changes deletes to the Smart Field Activity 24 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Field Activity table between releases Table Data Source Description Purpose F9691430 System Local Change Table Smart Stores adds changes deletes to the Smart Field Criteria Field Criteria table between releases F9746 System Local UDC Merge table Contains the UDC records changed or added from release to release This table is used by the UDC merge program R98741 F960004 Control Tables xxx UDC Type Control Tables Local F960005 Control Tables xxx UDC Codes Control Tables Local F9755 Data Dictionary 910 Data Item Master Changes Contains the data dictionary items changed or Data Dictionary Local by Release added from release to release This table is used by the Data Dictionary merge program R989200P F9757 Data Dictionary 910 Data Item Alpha Lists changes made to alpha descriptions of Data Dictionary Local Description Changes by data items F9203 between releases This table Release is used in the data dictionary merge process F9759 Data Dictionary 910 Error Message Pgm Call Lists changes made to error messages F9207 Data Dictiona
374. evisions oix Fie Edit Preferences Form Window Help v xX OK Can Dis Abo ae Links w Window 9 OLE Internet lel x Machine Usage Machine Name Description Release Host Type s Data Server Location Denver DS6 Primary User JDE Data Server iSeries esto fio ASi400 z Workstation Deployment Map Data Source Type OC p D HTML Enterprise Crysta DB2 UDB on 05 400 2 On Data Server Revisions complete these fields Field Description Machine Usage The default value of 25 indicates that this is a Database Server Machine Name Enter the name of the Database Server where your central objects reside If you are using the IBM i to store your central objects enter the name of this server The name is case sensitive should not exceed 15 characters and should not contain any special characters Description Enter a description of the Database Server machine Release Enter the release number you are installing for example E910 Host Type Select the type of Database Server that you are adding to the plan Values are a 10 IBMi 25 Sun Solaris a 30 RS 6000 a 35 Linux a 50 Microsoft Windows Intel a 80 Client Microsoft Windows a 90 Client Microsoft Windows Location The Installation Planner populates this field by default based on previous selections Primary User
375. f 78 Overall Progress pee A Total Estimated Time Remaining Calculating The Client Workstation Install Progress displays the progress of the language installation Installation Complete s JD Edwards Installation Succeeded _ Thank you for installing ERP Language Install When the installation finishes the Oracle Deployment Server Setup form indicates whether the installation was successful 6 On Installation Complete click OK Note To access more than one language within the same package you need to build a custom package that includes all available languages 21 4 Running Installation Planner Once you have installed languages on the Deployment Server run Installation Planner These tasks highlight the critical language related stages of this operation a Section 21 4 1 Accessing Installation Planner a Section 21 4 2 Entering Information into Installation Planner a Section 21 4 3 Selecting Custom or Default Parameters Section 21 4 4 Selecting an Environment 21 4 1 Accessing Installation Planner For details on accessing the Installation Planner refer to the chapter of this guide entitled Working with the Installation Planner Creating a Language Only Installation Plan 21 5 Running Installation Planner Note If you choose a custom installation plan you can choose which language to install for each environment This section assumes you are defi
376. f the table to be copied For example JOEPLAN Option 2 This field must be blank because this UBE is used to copy a mixture of business data and control tables which are specified to environments not data sources Option 3 Enter the name of the target environment which is the environment to which you wish to copy the table In this case you would specify either the Production or Prototype environments For example PD910 Option 4 This field must be blank because this UBE is used to copy a mixture of business data and control tables which are specified to environments not data sources 3 Click OK to continue specifying processing options Working With Installation Workbench 6 5 Understanding Workbench Components L Processing Options Environments Advanced 5 Enter a 0 for Proof Mode enter a 1 to copy the table The default is Proof Mode 6 Enter a Y to create all selected tables in target data source even if they do not exist in source data source Default is N 7 Enter a Y to re create tables that already exist in the target data source Default is N 8 Enter a Y to copy data based on table CPYD flag in Object Librarian F9860 Default is N 9 Enter a Y to add index es after copy data Default is N x Cancel 4 On Processing Options 5 9 complete these fields Field Description Option 5 The recommended value is 1 which copies the table
377. f you have customizations that you do not want to merge you can prevent individual conversions and merges from running by changing their status or deleting the appropriate records from the plan before you run the Installation Workbench 20 24 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up Environment Data Sources 20 12 Setting Up Environment Data Sources Once the Environments have been set up it is necessary to set up the data sources for those environments If you created a custom environment data source information is generated from the data source template provided with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne See Also To modify this template see the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Configurable Network Computing Implementation Guide 20 12 1 Selecting an Environment Data Source Setup Option When you are prompted to set up data sources for the environment you just configured click OK to manually enter the data sources continue with the following task or click Take Defaults to accept the Release 9 1 default data sources 20 12 2 Setting Up the Data Source for Business Data To set up the data source for business data a Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions OF x File Edit Preferences Form Window Help l x Y xea Li nks E a pier te seers Advan OLE Internet Data Source Name Business Data TEST Data Source Use oe Local Data Source Data Source Type l DB2 UDB on 05 400 M JDBN
378. fault for loading environment data check the Default Data Load box Otherwise uncheck the Default Data Load box to override the deta load options York Center 2 Internal Default Advanced Parameters dail To utilize JD Edwards advanced parameters defaults for upgrade update ard co existent merges check the Default Advanced Parameters box Otherwise uncheck the Default Advanced Parameters box to override the advanced parameters options External Mail To install all valid languages for each selected environment check the Default Languages box Otherwise uncheck the Default Languages boxto select languages ps 1 From Environment Selection all environments and languages are the default values Clear the options for Default Environment and Default Languages if you want to specify which language or languages to install for each environment 21 4 4 Selecting an Environment To select an environment Creating a Language Only Installation Plan 21 7 Selecting a Language tom Installation Plan Select Environments v A amp x IEY A u 5 Select Find Add Copy Close Seq New Des Dis KS Y REP B oLE B intemet Plan Name JANGUAGE ONLY Language only plan Select Deselect Data Sources 910 Production Environment Data Load 910 Pristine Environment Advanced Langu OCM Row 1 GA Choose the environment for which you wish to install a language
379. fault printer to inactive select it select Change Status on the Row menu and then select the new printer as the default 7 8 Enabling Multiple Concurrent Table Conversions If you are planning to run your Table Conversions on the Enterprise Server you must set specific values in the JDE INI jde ini on your Enterprise Server in order to enable multiple Table Conversions to run simultaneously To enable multiple concurrent table conversions 1 Open the JDE INI jde ini on your Enterprise Server using an ASCII editor compatible with the operating system Add or update the following entries and their respective values in the JDEIPC section JDEIPC maxNumberOfResources 2000 maxNumberOfSemaphores 1000 Note The above values are sufficient to run four Table Conversions at once To run more you may need to increase these values The symptom of the values being set too low is that the Table Conversion will fail almost immediately on the server with this error message in its jde log IPC2100004 maxNumberOfResources parameter 2000 exceeded on allocation of IPCData Please increase it in INI If you plan on running more than four concurrent Table Conversions refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools System Administration Guide for details on calculating the correct values for the anticipated workload on your machine 7 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 8 Installing t
380. fields and turn on the following options Field Description Logic Data Source Displays the server data source where the table conversions will run Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 25 Setting Up Data Sources for Environment Field Description Table Conversion Throttle Displays the number of table conversions to be run concurrently on the server Note The Table Conversion Workbench checks the maximum jobs for the default job queue for the logic server It will only submit up to the number of maximum jobs on the queue to run at once If the throttle is set higher than the queue it uses the queue maximum number of jobs If the queue is set higher than the throttle it uses the throttle 2 Click OK If you are not installing languages you are prompted to enter data source information If you turned off Default Languages on the Select Environments selection form continue with the next task 19 14 Setting Up Data Sources for Environment After specifying which tables to replicate you can set up environment data sources Data Source Oy x Ifyou are using JDEdwards standards you can take the defaults Otherwise press OK to define datasource information Take Defaults X Cancel 1 On Data Source click OK 19 26 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up Data Sources for Environment Tools Form Advanced Databa
381. formation Manual Table Conversions 13 3 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R890015B To convert F0015 from This program must Triangulation After running the R891015A XE ERP 8 0 for run after R891015A exchange rates have F0015 F00151 Exchange Triangulation FO015 F00151 values of zero if this Rate table conversion the Exchange Rates Exchange Rate table job is not run triangulation records have conversion has rates that are blank or zero completed This selects records from the successfully and the converted F0015 table where F0015 Currency the calculation method is Exchange Rate table triangulation CLMETH 3 has been upgraded The rates for the successfully in the triangulation records are automatic Upgrade retrieved from the Plan Suspend any corresponding rates in the processes requiring F0015 table for both exchange rates from multiplier CRR and the time of the divisor CRRD rates and upgrade through the updated to the triangulation successful records completion of the job The following objects are required F0015 R891015B R891015B XJDE0001 R891216 To convert F1216 when None This conversion When upgrading from upgrading from program corrects Xe ERP 8 0 the F1216 table XE ERP 8 0 and existing data in the may need a data conversion 13 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide requires special attention for wh
382. g W in Status QBE and clicking Find 5 Highlight any row you wish to delete and click Delete All conversions should now be stopped There are several more steps involved with cleaning up the database and resetting Table Conversion Workbench You may choose to leave one or more table conversions running but close Installation Workbench and restart the remaining conversions See Section 6 16 3 9 Restarting Installation Workbench Note Installation Workbench should not be closed if Table Conversions are running normally Only close it if problems have occurred and conversions need to be restarted 6 16 3 9 Restarting Installation Workbench When you restart Installation Workbench these items create a temporary table in the new format a Temp tables used for in place table conversions a Alter conversions Merge conversions The temporary table is named TableNameTCTEMP If you are restarting a conversion first verify the original table was not dropped then drop the temp table For a Table Conversion the base table must be in the old format For Alter and Merge Conversions no further action is necessary For performance reasons several conversions use their own temporary table that has been defined in the specifications The recovery for each of these may be different Check in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Programmers Guide for individual Table Conversions that may have special re run instructions To rerun
383. g until this batch control number UBE completes successfully R8900165K To change GT0411S This is to be run after After running this This conversion program Key to use KCO when the F00165 table has job existing Media takes records from the upgrading from been successfully Objects Attachments 00165 with object name XE ERP 8 0 and have upgraded in the for Vouchers are OBNM equal to GT0411S not yet taken SAR automatic Upgrade accessible fromthe and ensures that the Generic 5848035 Also this UBE Plan Objects Voucher Entry Text Key TXKY is written is only required for required Change Program P0411 and in the format users using Media GT0411S Key to use Speed Status Change KCO DCT IDOC ISFX Object Attachments KCO not CO P04115S Where records are written for vouchers with TXKY format equal to CO DCT DOC SFX it replaces the generic text key field with KCO instead of CO and preserves the rest of the key R8900165JA To convert F00165 This is to be run after After running this This process converts all JEDTLGT to GT0911A the F00165 table has job existing Media voucher G L distribution when upgrading from been successfully Objects attachments attachment records in the XE ERP 8 0 upgraded in the for voucher G L F00165 table to be coexistent automatic Upgrade Plan Requires objects F00165 Convert JEDTLGT to GTO911A distributions are accessible from the Voucher G L Distribution form P0411 W0411K with JD Edwards World and
384. ge 9 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 10 Understanding Media Object Queues This chapter discusses these topics a Section 10 1 Overview a Section 10 2 Modifying Media Object Queues a Section 10 3 Specifying the Help Location Used by the Web Client and Development Client 10 1 Overview Media objects enable the attachment of information to Release 9 1 applications Media Object Queues enable you to specify the storage location of media objects to be tracked by reference as opposed to physical network location This enables easier administration of media locations Media object queues provide the system administrator the ability to easily manage the storage of media objects and helps in a Release 9 1 configuration Within Release 9 1 set up media object queues in order to use images that are outside the domain of the imaging product for example scanned images Define a media object queue to identify the pointer to the location where the actual image files or Object Linking and Embedding OLE objects reside For OLE objects the name of the queue must be OLEQUE The media object queues must reside on a Microsoft Windows based machine A valid network qualified path must exist for this machine Use the Deployment Server or any other Microsoft Windows based machine If you modify the OLEQUE path make sure to copy the image files and OLE objects to the new location When using the Deployment S
385. ge See Also Typical Customer Configuration in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Configurable Network Computing Implementation Guide for more information about the typical customer configuration provided with Release 9 1 Note JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 does not support coexistence If you have ever had JD Edwards World installed you will need to perform the steps in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Ending Coexistence Guide before starting your Release 9 1 upgrade This section discusses a Section 1 2 1 What an Upgrade Preserves and Replaces a Section 1 2 2 Understanding the Deployment Server Installation a Section 1 2 3 Understanding the Platform Pack Installation Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 3 Understanding the Upgrade Process a Section 1 2 4 Understanding the Installation Planner a Section 1 2 5 Understanding Installation Workbench a Section 1 2 6 Understanding the Workstation Installation 1 2 1 What an Upgrade Preserves and Replaces If custom modifications are required follow the rules listed below to ensure a smooth and predictable upgrade These rules describe which modifications the upgrade process preserves and which modifications the upgrade replaces Preserve means during an upgrade the custom modifications are not lost during the automatic and visual merges of the new applications shipped with the upgrade If there is a direct conflict between your specifications and thos
386. grade Guide Preparing the Development Environment 11 Modify the data selection logic like this where BC Version History F983051 is not equal to XJDE0000 XJDE9999 and BC Version History F983051 is not equal to XJDEAAAA XJDEZZZZ 12 When prompted to enter processing options ensure that they are set at 1 A 1 and 1 as shown on this screen Wi Processing Options Update Options 1 Enter a 0 for Proof Mode or a 1 for Update Mode 2 Enter a A to only add new UBE Version records no records will be replaced 3 Enter a 1 to copy Processing Option Text mz 4 Enter a 0 to copy version specs along with versions data Upgrade or a 1 to copy versions data only Update Help Se Cancel 13 Click OK on printer selection 14 Click OK 15 Build a prototype package This package can be used later to verify that your custom versions were upgraded properly 16 Deploy the prototype package to workstations Run the release you are upgrading from for example B7333 See Also Transferring Objects and Package Build in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide for more specific instructions about building and deploying packages 2 3 Preparing the Development Environment If you do not have a development environment you can skip this procedure Before You Begin the Upgrade 2 3 Preparing the DB2 400 Database for Table Conversions Caution For your init
387. grid 6 If nothing appears in the grid a setup or configuration problem might exist Verify the following to make sure setup is correct a These values are set in the Work with Quantum Constants Revision table accessed by the Constants application P7306 on menu G731 Quantum Active Y Canada Country Code CA Note Changes to the Work with Quantum Constants Revision table do not take effect until you have logged off of your system and logged back on a Required Release 9 1 objects are mapped to the server where the Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax APIs reside Also ensure that correct values are assigned to the Data Source Server User ID and Password fields on the Database Connection panel Instructions for both procedures are specified in this guide in the section entitled Mapping Objects to the Enterprise Server 11 4 4 1 Adding an Entry for a Remote Database Directory for Vertex To add an entry for a remote database directory 1 Log on to the IBM i as QSECOFR 2 On the command line enter WRKRDBDIRE 3 Look for an entry on your IBM i for Remote Location LOCAL This entry must have the same name as your machine 4 If you do not have an entry like this enter 1 in the Option column and enter the machine name in the Relational Database column and press enter In the Remote Location Name or Address enter LOCAL and press Enter If you already have a LOCAL entry and the Relational database name
388. hanges you have made such as added objects and modification flags and changed category codes to the new Object Librarian During a cumulative update the Specification Merge R98700 program adds any Object Librarian changes such as added objects and changed category codes to the existing Object Librarian 9 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Working with Update Language Text Merge 9 4 Working with Versions List Merge Note This merge is for upgrades and cumulative updates only During an upgrade the Versions List merge R98700 program preserves any non XJDE and non ZJDE customer versions version specifications for objects that are valid in the new release and their processing options data This process also preserves the processing options data of ZJDE and ZJDEC version customer versions During a cumulative update the Versions List merge preserves any non XJDE and non ZJDE customer versions version specifications for objects that are valid in the new release It also preserves their processing options data and adds new XJDE and ZJDE versions This process also preserves the processing options data of ZJDE and ZJDEC version customer versions for objects that are changed 9 5 Working with Central Objects Merge Note This merge is for upgrades and cumulative updates only Use this information only if you are installing an alternate language When you load an alternate langu
389. hanging servers Information i If you are changing servers click Add your add a new server Entering Enterprise Server Select the default value and verify the data sources if you are Data Source Information adding a new Enterprise Server into your plan Upgrading the Production Environment 15 13 Taking the Production Environment Offline Task Difference Defining Machine Server Types Keep all of these options turned off These machines are defined in the initial installation plan Entering Shared Data Source Information If you are using recommendations accept the default values otherwise you should modify to fit your specific installation values Setting Up Environments Turn on the options for Default Environments Data Load and Advanced Options Selecting an Environment Select the pathcode that you want installed on the Deployment Server from the Deployment Server disk for missing environments on this form Specifying Environment Data Load Parameters Enable the Load Production Data option and click OK Verifying Advanced Parameters Select the following Upgrade Environment a PD7333 or PD7334 as Previous Environment a Check Table Conversions Clear Specification Merge a Enable Control Table Merge if you need to bring over specific control tables Setting Up Environment Data Sources Click OK for manual set up if you want to set up data sources except fo
390. hat refer to indexes that already exist on the target table The database GUI will tell you which indexes already exist Method Two a Generate the indexes on a trial run with jdedebug turned on and harvest the CREATE INDEX statements from the jdedebug log Use the GUI for your database SQL Management StudioOracle Enterprise ManagerDB2 UDB Control CenterSystem i Navigator for IBM i to run the identified index builds as a sql script Method Three a Run R9698713 and select the tables where you deferred the indexes It will create the indexes one table at a time one index at a time It is possible to run different versions of R9698713 from different 9 1 Admin clients selecting different tables for each version It is not necessary to be signed into the target environment because you can override the environment in the Processing Options Set the value for Processing Option 3 to a value of 2 to generate only missing indexes as shown in the screen below Working With Installation Workbench 6 49 Understanding Table Conversions Options R9698713 creates missing and mismatch indexes for each table identified by data selection 1 Enter the name of the Environment PD910 if the data source is blank all tables for this environment are included in the verification 2 or Enter the name of the Data Source If both environment and data source are provided only the tables which are mapped to this data source f
391. he Custom Plan application on menu GH961 2 Drill down into Upgrade Plan highlight Table Conversions click on Select and go into TC Planner If Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 or higher is not installed on the Deployment Server the Advanced button will be disabled as shown in this example p98407C Table Conversion Planner A E x HREN adan e Find Del Can N ick Neg saye Dis Abo Ue Y Awan DOLE Emtemet Plan Name Concurrent Indexes TC Server Name Max Concurrent STGACLS F4101 SL nstalled Auto Load STG Tinstalled If Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 or higher installed on the Deployment Server the Advanced Button is available as shown in this example D possotc Table Conversion Planner MW 2 3 val Ae Lis w Advan BJOLE Bintemet Plan Name F ONC Concurrent Indexes TC Server Name LOCAL Max Concurrent ODE0OO1 vesio 3 On Table Conversion Planner click on Advanced button As shown in the example below a new column called Defer Index is displayed next to the Dependency Sequence column 6 46 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions p9840TC Table Conversion Planner amp a a Ww e Fl Can New Adv Back Next Saye Dis Links w Advan B OLE intenet Plan Name Ie ONC Concurrent Indexes TC Server Name tocat Max Concurrent R893003F XJDEO001 MERGE
392. he Development Clients for Developers and System Administrators This chapter includes these topics and tasks a Section 8 1 Understanding Development Client Installation a Section 8 2 Preparing for Development Client Installation a Section 8 3 Working With Development Client Installation a Section 8 4 Understanding User Profiles and Languages 8 1 Understanding Development Client Installation Release 9 1 software for Development Clients is first installed on the Deployment Server and then deployed from the Deployment Server to Development Clients for developer and system administrator workstations The Development Clients are Microsoft Windows based machines Refer to the Oracle Certifications for specifically supported versions of Microsoft Windows Note The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne installation delivers pre built packages that are ready for use as delivered In order for the Development Client to reflect the language installed on the Deployment Server you must perform tasks for both the Enterprise Server and Development Clients in addition to the procedures to verify and modify the JDE INI on the Development Clients and the JD E INIjde ini on the Enterprise Server See Also Refer to Section 1 6 L anguage Process Overview for more information about how you enable multilingual installations on Development Clients a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Development Client Installati
393. he Web Client for OAS This version of the Web Client is known by any of the following names a Oracle Containers for Java HTML for Applications a OC4J for H4A or simply a OH4A Although OAS is included with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system code you can choose to use WAS Express or WAS for Developers as the Application Server for the EnterpriseOne Web Client Both products are similar either one may be manually installed before installing the Web Client for WAS Whereas WAS Express requires a licensing fee to IBM WAS for Developers is free The version of the Web Client that is installed on either WAS product is referred to by either of these names HTML for Applications or a H4Ax where the x denotes the version of WAS Express or WAS for Developers currently the supported version is 7 This guide describes how to install Web Clients for both Application Servers OH4A and H4A7 In addition it covers the installation of WAS 7 Express or WAS 7 for Developers The first time setup of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Development Client installer and installation package on an EnterpriseOne Deployment Server is described in a separate guide entitled JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Reference Guide This setup on the Deployment Server must be done before a user can install a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Development Client on a workstation The installation package specifies the components to install and may or may not include the W
394. he following sections explain each environment in more detail Section 1 5 1 Understanding Environments Section 1 5 2 Planner Environment JDEPLAN Section 1 5 3 Pristine Environment PS910 Section 1 5 4 Deployment Environment DEP910 Section 1 5 5 Development Environment DV910 Section 1 5 6 Prototype Environment PY910 Section 1 5 7 Production Environment PD910 Section 1 5 8 Additional Considerations 1 5 1 Understanding Environments The Release 9 1 software includes several environments that represent the typical customer configuration as defined in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Configurable Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 13 Environments Overview Network Computing Implementation Guide These environments are preset to make the installation process as easy as possible This section contains additional information about these environments and their role in the installation and upgrade process Follow the setup recommendations and naming standards described in this guide to minimize confusion when communicating with those outside of your implementation team In addition future upgrades are simpler if you use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne naming conventions If you customize your configurations during the process you should change only the descriptions provided with the typical setup JD Edwards EnterpriseOne provides the following preset environments Deployment DEP910 a Planner JDEPLAN
395. he next section of this guide entilted Section 4 6 Troubleshooting the IBM i Platform Pack Installation If all specified conditions are valid the installer displays the Summary screen Oracle Universal Installer Summary Of x ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Summary EnterpriseOne IBM i Platform Pack 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Global Settings Source Z DownloadsilBMilstageiproducts xml Oracle Home ZAJDEdwardsPPackiE910 JDE_PPack910_HOME Installation Type Typical Product Languages LEnglish Snare Remiirements Disk space available on IBM i 341299 MB Disk space required for install 33826 MB NOTES The Space Requirements in the upper half of the window show the requirements for OUI support files on this Windows machine The Disk Space Requirements n the lower half of the window are the requirements on the IBM i a machine for the Platform Pack being installed tal nue CD C 16 On Summary in the top half of the screen review your selections and in the bottom half of the screen review the NOTES which detail the disk space requirements for OUI support files and also for the Platform Pack being installed on the IBM i machine 4 20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i 17 Click the Install button As the installer runs it displays the Install progress as shown in the following example 4 Oracle Univer
396. he text storage and retrieval JD Edwards EnterpriseOne uses NLS on all supported platforms to interact with any computer system hardware and software within your own environment For the workstation to reflect the language installed on the Deployment Server perform the tasks for both the Enterprise Server and workstations to verify and modify the JDE INI jde ini settings These procedures are described throughout this guide 1 6 3 1 Single Byte and Double Byte Considerations Many single byte languages support either national code pages or multinational code pages The double byte languages support specific individual national code pages by language Single byte character sets use a collection of phonetic characters that require one byte to create a single character Conversely the double byte character sets use ideographic characters and require two bytes to create a single character Single byte languages can generally be run on single byte or double byte systems Double byte languages such as Japanese Chinese and Korean must run on machines configured to support a double byte system For example a double byte SQL Server or Oracle database is required for Chinese and Japanese languages The software can perform a Query By Example QBE on any character However when using a double byte language this process may not necessarily use an understandable collating sequence although it can still use QBE for any double byte co
397. hed to the same event An upgrade replaces modifications to applications reports tables and business functions events that have existing event rules Use the Visual ER tools to restore custom event rules 1 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding the Upgrade Process 1 2 1 9 Data Structure Rules An upgrade preserves all of these custom data structures a Forms a Processing options a Reports a Business functions m Generic text An upgrade replaces all custom modifications to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne data structures No changes to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne structures are preserved 1 2 1 10 Business Function Rules For any newly created custom business functions create a new parent DLL directory to store them An upgrade preserves new custom business function objects including custom BSSV objects An upgrade replaces modifications made to existing business functions and any business functions added to existing business function objects Refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Development Tools APIs and Business Functions Guide 1 2 1 11 Versions For XJDE versions nothing carries forward The user JDE owns specifications and processing option data For ZJDE versions specifications do not carry forward while processing option data changes do carry forward All other custom versions should have processing option data and specifications carried forward 1 2 2 Understanding th
398. heduler records among others that are copied from F9843 to F98405 during Finalize Plan The Workbench uses records in this table which resides in the Planner 910 data source F984052 The History GH9611 application uses this table to store table conversion history A new record is created in this table every time a conversion is launched The R98405A report writes the status for a completed conversion to this table Table Conversion Workbench polls this table for completion status and updates the status in the F98405 table This table resides in the System 910 data source The table is originally mapped to the OneWorld Planner The B7334 data source It is copied to the System 910 data source and remapped during Release Master The table must be in the System data source so conversions on the Enterprise Server can communicate their completion status back to Table Conversion Workbench F986110 The Submitted Reports GH9011 application creates records in this table for conversions that are launched on the server They can be viewed using Submitted Reports This table resides in the Server Map data source F986130 The Job Queues GH9013 application is used to define job queues that can be used by the Installation Planner in the JOEPLAN environment If any queues have been defined they are copied to the system data source during Release Master If no queues have been defined Release Master creates default queues in the system data
399. hen the workbench runs it presents a confirmation window telling you this conversion has already run You should click Cancel to force the process to run the conversion a Control Table Merge If you copied the Control Tables in the Environment Copy application in that application you should modify the Advanced options for your environment to uncheck the Control Table Merges If you already finalized the plan you will need to re finalize the plan for this change to take effect Alternatively you can mark all the Control Table Merges as having run by changing their status to 60 The Upgrade plan will schedule the Table Conversions for your production data Specifications Merge By default the Installation Planner will not schedule a Specifications Merge for your PD Upgrade plan If you are upgrading any other environment and have copied your Central Objects during Environment Copy you should set the status of the Specifications Merge to 60 before running the Workbench a Log all JD Edwards EnterpriseOne users off Ensure that all JD Edwards EnterpriseOne users are logged off when running the Installation Workbench for the production upgrade 15 3 Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 Caution If the target path code directory already exists on the Deployment Server or Enterprise Server for example from a previous attempt to copy to that path code you must remove it before you start the copy process This is neces
400. hprereqs opatch JDEdwardsE910 0Patch opatchprereqs oui JDEdwardsE910 oui JDEdwardsE910 oui bin JDEdwardsE910 oui bin resource JDEdwardsE910 oui instImages JDEdwardsE910 oui jlib JDEdwardsE910 oui jlib lib JDEdwardsE910 oui lib JDEdwardsE910 oui lib win32 JDEdwardsE910 oui schema JDEdwardsE910 package_inf JDEdwardsE910 package_inf Feature_inf JDEdwardsE910 Planner JDEdwardsE910 Planner bin32 JDEdwardsE910 Planner bin32 JDEdwardsE910 Planner data JDEdwardsE910 Planner include JDEdwardsE910 Planner ini Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Directory Structures 23 9 Deployment Server Directory Structure DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 DEdwardsE9 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Cy Cy G Cy Ey G Gh Cy Ep ey Eh cys eC i Q P Gq P Q lanner ini sbf lanner java lanner java sbfjars lanner 1ib32 lanner make lanner obj lanner res lanner res actionbmps lanner res AVI Files lanner res FormLines lanner res Icons lanner res images lanner res treebmps lanner source lanner spec lanner spec runtimeCache lanner work lanner work sbf aq cy ey Q D Cy Cy Gy Q I u u w G w G G a a e o E G Q R Cr Gy Cy Cy Cy Q aq Or G amp cy ea Q
401. ia dae Ens daei 1 16 1 5 9 Release FUStory ennes a a pai 1 16 1 6 Language Process OVELViCW nuns eia nanea a A a aiaa 1 16 1 6 1 Language Architecture sonens iesen de i a a a aie aide ate 1 17 1 6 1 1 B se langte oeieo enea oga Eana ta toate iethete vec iat state ebiaseacetastszettasepdbeetiese 1 17 1 6 1 2 Alternate Language Components ss ssesssesississesrsssirriesessessiriesiesensneniesreseesse tes 1 17 1 6 1 3 Language Preference Codes ccccccec ese ee ceseeesesecesesseesesssseeeessseseeseeseseesesenees 1 18 1 6 2 Database Character Set and Code Page Considerations ccccceeeeeeeeseeeees 1 18 1 6 2 1 WiC Oe kaen a aa e a a bene hava tsetse aiai 1 18 1 6 2 2 Code Page Settings syss a a E a ET 1 19 1 6 2 2 1 DB2 400 Code Page Settings e ss ssesseesissisrissssirisstsrsesississesnenssesienresenseenees 1 19 1 6 2 2 2 Workstations and Deployment Server ccccceccccse tee ceeeeececseeesneneeeeees 1 20 1 6 3 National Language SUpport oo cece eee iniii 1 20 1 6 3 1 Single Byte and Double Byte Considerations ccccceseccsssesesescsceeeeceeeeens 1 20 1 6 3 2 Font Considerations is sciie cccecseticcvescceeiteeidiseeveci aaa A ecech adi a aa a hen ceils 1 21 1 6 3 3 User Display Preferences is scsciessctertievticss sitectaerte stint outssinea aldara tits 1 21 2 Before You Begin the Upgrade 2 1 Preparing to Upgrade to Release 9 1 from Prior Releases c cccccecccseesteteneesestetenesees 2 1 2 2 Preparing
402. ial upgrade do not select the DV910 environment as the target of the upgrade if you are upgrading a copy of your production data The Development DVxxx environment defaults to loading demo data during the upgrade so loading using the upgrade installer would result in a mixture of your data and the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne demo data in some of your tables To make sure you retain all modifications from the previous development environment 1 Make sure that all work in progress is checked into the development pathcode Caution From a development workstation use Object Management Workbench or your own query or report to verify that objects are not checked out Also verify that no objects are checked out to individual workstations Any modifications that are checked out will not be carried forward to the new release 2 Build the development package in preparation for deployment to one or more workstations 3 Deploy the development package to one or more workstations These workstations are used later to help verify that all custom modifications were carried forward to the new release Caution You cannot make any modifications to the environment you are upgrading except changes to custom business functions written in C language and still carry them forward to the next release See Also Transferring Objects and Package Build in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide for mor
403. ication Tables To merge your specification tables 6 60 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Specification Table Merges 5 a W E Links w Previo BJOLE internet Seq New Prev Next Merge Dis Abo Plan Name uPGovs10 Upgrade Plan for DV910 View pdf m l To merge your specification tables 1 On Specification Table Merge Workbench choose Merge All from the Form menu If you are installing an alternate language the Plan Name field on the Specification Table Merge Workbench form will contain the name of your language plan 2 After the merge finishes verify the output of the report that is produced 6 18 2 Restarting the Specification Merge If the Specification Merge stops with a status of 50 before it completes successfully you can restart it from the point at which it stopped If the merge completed successfully you can skip this task and continue with the next task To restart the specification merge 1 Check the Specification Merge status as shown in the Specification Merge Workbench If the status is 50 you can restart the Specification Merge by clicking Merge or Merge All The Specification Merge restarts and processes all non processed objects Before restarting review all objects with merge status of error and follow the procedures in Section 25 8 3 1 Modifying the Merge Status of an Object to reset the merge status using P98700 Working With I
404. icular table conversion to be run Unable to Submit TC to Server This error may occur when you choose to run your TCs on the Enterprise Server but the TC Workbench was unable to submit the TC to the server You should check to ensure the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne services on the Enterprise Server are up and running Also check the logs on the Enterprise Server Unknown Table Conversion Error The error occurs when the table conversion shell UBE R98405A to due to an unknown error If you ran the table conversion locally check the jde 1og and the table conversion log if it exists If you ran the table conversion on the Enterprise Server check the logs on that machine Detailed instructions for re running some table conversions are in the online documented entitled JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Programmer s Guide If you cannot locate any special re run instructions for this table conversion use these procedures to resolve 1 Correct the problems that caused the failure 2 Restore tables if necessary 3 Drop the temporary table FTCTEMP if necessary 4 Re run the process Unknown Error TC Input Checking This error occurs when the Table Conversion Workbench checks the input table against the saved input table specifications in the table conversion and it encounters an unknown error As a result the table conversion was marked as failed Check the jde 1log to diagnose this error Conversion Program Failed This error occurs wh
405. ide explain how to set up these features See Also Package Build in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide for more details on how to build a language package Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 17 Language Process Overview 1 6 1 3 Language Preference Codes The language preference codes are the standard language codes used throughout the software The Language Preference Code field located in the Release 9 1 user profile determines which language is displayed on forms or reports All users are assigned a language preference code within the user profile A blank language preference code specifies the base language of English Alternate language records always have a value in the language preference code The alternate language text tables contain language preference codes The tables contain several records for each item such as a user defined code value as well as possible multiple records for a code value with each code representing a different language If the language preference code does not have a corresponding translated language record the base English record is the default record Certain database tables such as the Business Unit Master AAIs Account Master and Item Master also contain the language preference code in an additional description table This information is not translated in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne demonstration data Release 9 1 applications support the use of languages
406. ific F00165 that match data If the OBNM field of the GT15L101 media any record contains object structure Since GT15L101 the table the F15L101 table conversion is necessary was changed to Although it is not harmful include UKID inthe to run the procedure primary key the anyway you can resulting media determine if the table objects attached to conversion is necessary by the unit master were performing the following also changed to SQL statement with the match this key Asa appropriate syntax result a conversion against the appropriate was written to database re key those media ic oJect count from Sea ea the 00165 where GDOBNM i GT15L101 structure This conversion was If the returned count is required asaresult of greater than zero the changes made to conversion program must support inclusion of be run This count is the multiple leases i e number of records that future leases and are candidates to be speculative leases analyzed by this UBE R891100B When upgrading from Apply ESU for SAR To combine the This table was modified previous releases and 8868437 to add information from to save information that running India R89I100B to the F75I100 and was in the F75I100 table Localizations menu If the ESU has F75I101A into one and F75J101A table Also not been applied and table and add new some new fields were the conversion needs fields for TDS added to this table The to be run you must Certificate conversion program do
407. il area a Installation Workbench Control Table Workbench File Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help x 5 E B wW amp lins 3 E Close Seq New Prev Mex Merge Dis Abo lees OLE B Internet Plan Name JurGove 10 Upgrade Plan for DV910 New Status m Al Finalized R989200P Finalized R9600042 Finalized R96911002 Finalized R96914002 Finalized R96915002 Finalized R9690002 XJDE0001 Environment Table Detail Status Name Name Status Description 200 j i 004 ma Rot 0 If you are installing an alternate language on the Control Table Workbench form the Plan Name field will contain the name of your language plan 2 Ifyou want to do one merge at a time choose the appropriate grid row then click Merge Otherwise choose Merge All from the Form menu For an explanation on merges see Chapter 9 Performing Merges 3 The system displays all control table merges in the detail area Working With Installation Workbench 6 23 Understanding Table Conversions E custom Installation Plan Control Table Planner File Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help a x G Moa M Links w Save BOLE internet Can New Back Nex Save Dis Abo Plan Name Pos10urG PD910 Upgrade 2 Emvrommen PD910 E R9690002 4 Select Merge All from the Form menu 5 When running Installation Workbench in unattended mode a task break automatically occurs after Control Table Wo
408. ils of a component select the component and then click Details Expand All Collapse Ail Details IE 8 When the deinstallation process completes the Inventory is shown again The products you selected for deinstallation should no longer be displayed in the inventory 9 Select the Close button W Oracle Universal Installer Welcome Iof x ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Welcome The Oracle Universal Installer guides you through the installation and configuration of your Oracle products Click Installed Products to see all installed products Deinstall Products J About Oracle Universal Installer C Help installed Products Deinstalling the Software 27 7 Dropping DB2 400 Libraries You are returned to the Oracle Universal Installer Welcome screen 10 On Oracle Universal Installer Welcome select the Cancel button to exit the Oracle Universal Installer 27 6 Dropping DB2 400 Libraries This section lists the DB2 400 libraries that must be manually dropped by a DBA This is the list of libraries that were created by the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 9 0 Installation of the Platform Pack on your Enterprise or Database Server for your JD Edwards EnterpriseOne installation or from a previous JD Edwards EnterpriseOne installation By design these libraries are not automatically removed by the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne deinstallation program You should have a DBA for your RDBMS manually r
409. iness Data and Control Tables library enter the following WRKOBJ OBUJ xx ALL OBUJTYPE SQLPKG where xx is your library or WRKOBJ OBJ ALLUSR ALL OBUTYPE SQLPKG and choose your business data and control table libraries from the list 3 Type a 4 next to each of the packages and press Enter 5 1 2 Defining the SQL Package Creation Location Verify the JDE INI setting on the Enterprise Server that controls where SQL Packages are created The applicable setting is DB SYSTEM SETTINGS sqlPackageLibrary value where value must be set to 2 in order for Table Conversions to work correctly Otherwise you will see Table Conversion failures For an explanation of other values refer to Section 11 9 UBE Performance SQL Package Location in the section of this guide entitled Example 11 Performing Post Upgrade Tasks 5 1 3 Assumptions about Mandatory Pre Upgrade Process This table outlines the assumptions about the mandatory pre upgrade process Personnel Installer Logon Status On the Deployment Server logged on to Release 9 1 as user JDE into either the JOEPLAN or DEP910 environment each step will tell you which environment to use JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding the Planner Process for Upgrades Personnel Installer Prerequisites Verify that the Deployment Server is installed and the latest Tools Release Tools Release Patch and Planner Update have bee
410. ing JD Edwards Compare and Merge Tools The chapter entitled Using JD Edwards Compare and Merge Tools in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Software Updates Guide fully describes all of the tools that have been created to help you compare between releases as well as with environments on the same release See Also JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Software Updates Guide http docs oracle com cd E24705_01 doc 91 e24260 toc htm The following sections in this guide provide a high level description of the compare and merge tools including those that have been added since the base release of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Release 9 1 Section 16 3 1 Using the Application Configuration Analyzer Release 9 1 Update 2 Section 16 3 2 Using the Customization Object Analyzer Release 9 1 Update 2 Section 16 3 3 JD Edwards Visual Compare for UDC Descriptions and Glossary Tool Section 16 3 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne FDA Compare Section 16 3 5 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne ER Compare 16 3 1 Using the Application Configuration Analyzer Release 9 1 Update 2 The Application Configuration Analyzer is a set of reports which identify differences for processing options data dictionary DD items and user defined codes UDCs between releases or environments These reports are Versions Compare Report 16 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Using JD Edwards Compare and Merge Tools a User Defined Codes Compare Report a
411. ing Post Installation Tasks sssssssssssessesssssissesstsssestestessisnesnentessesnesnentennesnesnenrenresresses 13 1 13 2 Upetadirig from XEN ERP 8 0 resinen nran e ae aaant ens e Eaa ee Sae E Y 13 2 13 3 Upgrading from 8 9 or BeloW ss ssesssssessesssssssessisnesnsnrinsessesntsnieninsessnnntenienisnrnntenieneeneene 13 16 13 4 Upgrading from 8 10 or BeloW ssisissesiiisiasis isapan i 13 17 13 5 Upgrading fron 8 11 of Below cscicccies cs tesedestsevesedecesetvaciatvevescteseeesevesssuesebentevvastvesseveeeunets 13 18 13 6 Upgrading from 8 11 SP1 or Below 0 cece cece ceeseseesesesssseesesessseseseseseeseeesees 13 23 13 7 Upgrading from 8 12 or Below ss ceseseesecssssseesesesesssssesesesssssesesesesssssesssesesesesesesens 13 25 13 8 Upgrading from 9 0 or Below ceeeeccessssesecesssssseesssessssseesesssssesesesssesssesesesesssesesescsees 13 28 13 9 Processing Options for R31P40039 00 ccc ceccccseseesescscsesesesescscsesesesescessnsnseecesscsssneseseeeees 13 30 13 10 Upgrading ELPAGE from Release 9 0 to Release 9 1 eee cesesseseeneteseseesesess 13 34 13 10 1 Upgrading EILPAGE Using R98E1UGC cee cence ceneeeneneneseneneneteneseneneees 13 34 13 10 1 1 Processing OpHonssssvacasia sein a crane Minas eee Batten HRS Tee 13 34 13 10 1 2 WSO SIC BLO Wa fcc elects ces cata bends cote ceataes catveanstdestotuaes scotty Cattvsst cs rz ceuthes oo vavac sco sotcs 13 35 13 10 2 Upgrading F952400 Objects Using P98ELUGC oe cece ne ceneesee
412. inistrator account name that you use does not contain any special characters 3 If you have not already done so expand all disk images to be under a common directory called Disk1 on your Deployment Server Tip Refer to the preceding Tip Installation Methods for a list of various installation methods Caution Microsoft Windows 2008 On the Microsoft Windows 2008 platform if you are using a physical DVD and the installation starts automatically you must cancel this process and start the installation manually Caution Microsoft Windows 2008 On the Microsoft Windows 2008 platform you must right click on the executable and select Run as Administrator from the drop down 4 Open a command prompt window Caution Microsoft Windows 2008 On the Microsoft Windows 2008 platform you must right click on the command prompt s executable cmd exe and select Run as Administrator from the drop down 5 From within the command prompt window change directory cd to directory that contains the extracted contents of the Disk1 image For example je DeploymentServer OneWorld Client Instal1l ThirdParty ORACLI 6 Run the following command OEESetup exe i installation_directory where the i switch tells OEESetup exe where to install the local database E1Local If both this switch and the installation_directory argument are omitted the local database will be installed under
413. installed Identification Release 8 9 to scheduled packages System Local F83100 System 910 Data Title Series of definitions of data titles Each row is the definition or specification of the date title System Local Provides soft coded RDA text 24 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Table Data Source Description Purpose F83110 System 910 Column Headings Gives each period number an associated g description Provides soft coded RDA text ystem Local F9100 Control Table Task Master Lists Release 8 9 tasks Solution Explorer only F9101 Control Table Task Relationships Groups tasks listed in the F9100 table in logical parent child tree order ActivEra only F9102 Control Table Task Descriptions Provides descriptions of tasks listed in the F9100 table ActivEra only F9105 Control Table Variant Description Describes the attributes of variants listed in this table A variant performs a series of designated tasks nodes within a tree order defined in the F9101 table ActivEra only F9105D Control Table Alternate Variant Provides translated text for descriptions listed Descriptions in the F9105 table ActivEra only F9106 Control Table Variant Detail Defines which nodes tasks are run within a variant and the names of any tasks dynamically renamed within a variant ActivEra only F9106D Control Table Alternate Variant Detail Provides
414. ion Explorer Merge a Section 9 1 5 Working with UDC Merge m Section 9 1 6 Working with Favorites Merge Section 9 1 7 Working with Report Director Templates Merge Section 9 1 8 Working with Tips of the Day Merge m Section 9 1 9 Working with Workflow Merge The basic structure of Release 9 1 software consists of control tables These tables organize and sequence the information you put into the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne systems In addition these tables determine the types of operations to be performed on the input data For example the data dictionary tables define all specifications for any data item in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne software Performing Merges 9 1 Working with Control Table Merges Control tables differ from transaction tables in the following ways Control tables contain data that is shared between JD Edwards EnterpriseOne and the customer a Transaction tables can be converted but JD Edwards EnterpriseOne data is never merged into them A customer can modify control tables for example changing a menu to better suit business needs Because customers can modify the control tables JD Edwards EnterpriseOne provides a safe mechanism to merge these control tables with the new data that accompanies a new release This protects the customer modified information 9 1 1 Working with Customer Base Merges In a customer base merge a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne change table is merged into the customer cont
415. is NOT the same as your machine name you must remove the entry that you have and add a new entry as above 11 5 Enabling CRM Functionality To enable CRM functionality after the upgrade is complete you must perform these procedures on the CRM Enterprise Server and the CRM client a Section 11 5 1 Enabling CRM on the CRM Mobile Client Performing Post Upgrade Tasks 11 11 Enabling Verity Enhanced Search Capability Section 11 5 2 Enabling CRM on the Enterprise Server 11 5 1 Enabling CRM on the CRM Mobile Client To enable CRM functionality in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne and the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne mobile client make sure that the F99410 table has records that contain the following system codes a SY9IDCA a CRMMSL a SY49 On your Enterprise Server access the P99410 application and complete this procedure to enable CRM functionality 1 On Work with EnterpriseOne System Control click Add 2 On EnterpriseOne System Control Revisions enter each of these system codes one at a time in the Data Item field 90CA This code enables CRM functionality in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne MMSL With SY49 this system code enables CRM functionality in the mobile client a SY49 With CRMMSL this system code enables CRM functionality in the mobile client 3 Click Yes 4 Click OK 5 Repeat these steps to add each system code 11 5 2 Enabling CRM on the Enterprise Server Using an ASCII editor you must modify the J
416. is conversion program provides users a way to convert your old saved queries to the new format that Enhanced Query uses specify any combination of 3 attributes User ID and or Application Name and or Form Name to filter the old queries to be converted to the new format Records in F98950 and F98950D are converted during the process The old SQ records are NOT deleted during the conversion 13 9 Processing Options for R31P40039 This table lists all the processing options required for the R31P40039 program Processing Options for R31P40039 Mode Blank Final can be rerun 1 Proof Does not change anything in the database Manufacturing Order Type value 01 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 01 in the Manufacturing Orders manufacturing orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 02 for Manufacturing Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 02 in the manufacturing orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 03 for Manufacturing Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 03 in the manufacturing orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 04 for Manufacturing Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 04 in the manufac
417. is modified The same object is Merge replaces data Merge replaces data modified structures and structures and applications applications An object is added No action No action Add No action A new object is added Add No action No action No action No action No action No action The same object is Merge No action modified An object is deleted No action No action The report should contain a warning Object Librarian should be updated to product code 88 An object is deleted An object is modified The report should contain The report should contain a warning and the object is a warning and the object is merged not deleted See Also Section 25 8 Object Specification Merge Report R98700 in Chapter 25 Working with Reports in this guide for more information about the reports For users who are upgrading an alternate language the merge copies all text for custom objects For modified JD Edwards EnterpriseOne objects all changed or added text is copied forward to the new release For users who are updating an alternate language the TAM package contains only base text The merge replaces central objects base text with base text from the package Translated text is not removed 9 3 Working with Object Librarian Merge Note This merge is for upgrades and cumulative updates only During an upgrade the Specification Merge R98700 program carries over any previous release Object Librarian c
418. is shown again The products you selected for deinstallation should no longer be displayed in the inventory 11 Select the Close button fa Oracle Universal Installer Welcome ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Welcome The Oracle Universal Installer guides you through the installation and configuration of your Oracle products Click Installed Products to see all installed products Deinstall Products j About Qracle Universal Installer 27 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Deinstalling the Platform Pack You are returned to the Oracle Universal Installer Welcome screen 12 On Oracle Universal Installer Welcome select the Cancel button to exit the Oracle Universal Installer 13 Verify that the installation directory Oracle Home has been deleted If it still exists you can delete it Deinstalling the Software 27 13 Deinstalling the Platform Pack 27 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide A Understanding IBM i Databases This appendix presents a diagram of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne relationships with the IBM i databases CD oeenn reo Standard Environments amp Databases IBM i Development Prototype CRP Production Pristine DV910 PY910 PD910 PS910 Object Specifications z coe Versions Versions DV910 Versions PD910 Versions PS910 TESTCTE CRPCTL PRODCTL PS910CTL Control Tables TEST Control Tables CRP Contro
419. iseOne acm 12 On Would you like to Install or Upgrade EnterpriseOne choose whether you want to install or upgrade JD Edwards EnterpriseOne The list below describes each run mode a Install Install EnterpriseOne This selection installs Central Objects and Business Data Control Tables for the selected environments Note that the installer checks for the existence of the Business Data and Control Tables libraries and will not proceed if any of these libraries already exist DV910 PD910 PyY910 TESTDTA PRODDTA CRPDTA TESTCTL PRODCTL CRPCTL 4 18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i Upgrade Upgrade EnterpriseOne In this mode the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer checks for the existence of the Business Data and Control Tables libraries which are prerequisites to an upgrade of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Caution You should always back up all databases that you want to preserve 13 Click the Next button W Oracle Universal Installer IBM i Server and User Profile ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne IBM i Server and User Profile Enter the IBM i Server information and Secure Password to be used for new database users Server Name Poen tt lt sws C E User Profile fasecorR wt OOOOO S User Password eee S Secure Password C Confirm Password e
420. iseOne administrator Go to GH 9611 and open Table Data Classes Use the QBE to filter the list of tables in the grid Select one or more tables whose data class will be changed Click Select Type in the new data class value and click OK Once these three steps have been taken planner will prompt for the new data source and create OCM mappings for the new data source whenever an environment is added to a plan and the plan is finalized Environment Object Name User Group Data Source ENV1 DEFAULT PUBLIC Business Data ENV1 ENV1 F0094 PUBLIC System 910 ENV1 F9860 PUBLIC Object Librarian 910 ENV1 F9200 PUBLIC Data Dictionary 910 ENV1 F0004 PUBLIC Control Tables ENV1 7 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up a Printer on the Enterprise Server Environment Object Name User Group Data Source ENV1 F983051 PUBLIC Versions PY910 ENV1 GT92002 PUBLIC Data Dictionary 910 ENV1 GT9860A PUBLIC Object Librarian 910 ENV2 DEFAULT PUBLIC Business Data ENV2 ENV2 F0094 PUBLIC System 910 ENV2 F9860 PUBLIC Object Librarian 910 ENV2 F9200 PUBLIC Data Dictionary 910 ENV2 F0004 PUBLIC Control Tables ENV2 ENV2 F983051 PUBLIC Versions DV910 ENV2 GT92002 PUBLIC Data Dictionary 910 ENV2 GT9860A PUBLIC Object Librarian 910 7 7 Setting Up a Printer on the Enterprise Server This section describes these tasks which must be p
421. ispl ae 2 Internet Location Denver Machine Usage rane a elt vod Denver Enterprise S den3k4 Enterpris If you choose Select you are presented with the Machine Search table from which you can make your selection gt Custom Installation Plan Enterprise Server Revisions fel 4 18 x File Edit Preferences Form Window Help x e e OK Can Dis Abo Machine Usage po Enterprise Server Location Dewe Emen Machine Name fet Primary User JDE il Description Enterprise ServeriSeries Generate Release jes0 oe Host Type fio Agi400 Links w Window S OLE S Internet Generate Svr Map Workstation Deployment Data Ain Crystal ome Port Number eoe Logical Machine Name ENTS Database Type l DB2 UDB on 05 400 Server Map Data Source Ent 910 Server Map Installation Path Jesoosys Deployment Server Name friranic ee 2 On Enterprise Server Revisions verify or complete these fields 5 22 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Field Description Machine Name The name of the primary Enterprise Server The name is case sensitive and should not contain any special characters Because the machine name is used to create the Server Map datasource name and because the Platform Pack Installer does not restrict you f
422. it manually from functionality copies the old F751100 Batch Versions records completes the new fields with blank or zero and moves information from F75I101A to F751100 record 13 26 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading from 8 12 or Below Upgrading from 8 12 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R8940G00 To convert all Grower Four processing Display decimal The following DB items Area fields to the Options exist for this changes in the Data were created with varying correct format based on conversion Dictionary are not lengths and no display the new display 1 Data Item Class updated through the decimals In 9 0 they are decimals when i upgrade process A modified to have display upgrading from 8 12or 2 New Data Display new data class is decimals with a length of below Decimals created for the 4 The DD items are 3 Enter 1 to Update grower area fields PLTAREA GRSAREA the Display Decimals GROWERAREA TRTAREA PAREA1 i This post install UBE PAREA2 PAREA3 in the Data Dictionary will update the display decimals 4 Enter 1 to convert specified in the UBE the data and update processing options the tables for the new data class The UBE will also convert the data to the correct format for the new display decimals for the following tables F40G03 Harvest Master F40G0300 Update Harvest Profile F40G02 Block Master F40G0200 Update
423. item run as a post install data selection only for branch records as only if the Country of those items and branches country of origin Origin functionality for which they wish to required is desired after an activate the country of upgrade to 9 1 origin required functionality Users will need to specify proof or final mode and decide whether to activate the country of origin at the item master level The user can also specify a default country of origin value to give to the item branch records R41807 After the country of Should be run after This TC is run once User should restrict any origin required flag has the R41806 the required flag has lots that already have a been activated for the been activated and if country of origin from the first time on an existing this is being run as data selection There is a item branch you will part of the post proof and final mode use this TC to update install process it processing option and all existing lots to the should be run after there is a default value for correct country of the R41806 is run the country of origin for origin the lot R31B8505 This TC will update all Should be run after This TC should be There is a proof and final data currently residing the R41806 and run as a post install mode processing option in the weigh tag master R41807 and only if the client and there is a default file which currently contains lot information to now contain lot and country of origin information
424. itional languages you will perform the procedures after you have executed the initial installation described in this guide For additional details refer to the chapter Chapter 21 Creating a Language Only Installation Plan in this guide 1 16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Language Process Overview This section is provided in this guide for references purposes The language installation process automatically copies the text from a language database to the production Release 9 1 database and merges the alternate language text with the original English base These automated processes are described throughout this guide When installing language for the first time a language only plan may be chosen after completing the initial plan See Also a Section 5 4 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Chapter 21 Creating a Language Only Installation Plan for the tasks that must be completed when choosing to install an alternate language after completing the base installation 1 6 1 Language Architecture The software language architecture incorporates multinational language functionality for international customers The software specifies the language preference for forms and reports For example users who share the same environment may want to view the same text in multiple languages such as French Spanish and English All language text is stored in a central location and deployed to the individu
425. jdbc driver OracleDriver Working with the Deployment Server 3 41 Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation Caution The shipped jdbj ini file in the following folder contains specifications for each database type System 0C4J j2ee home applications webclient ear webclient WEB INF classes You must manually comment out with a semicolon every database driver that you are not using For example if you are connecting to only Oracle databases your file would look like this JDBj JDBC DRIVERS ORACLE oracle jdbc driver OracleDriver AS400 com ibm as400 access AS400JDBCDriver SOLSERVER com microsoft sqlserver jdbc SQLServerDriver UDB COM ibm db2 jdbc app DB2Driver 3 11 4 Path Code Master F98611 The Path Code Master F98611 contains changes to support OFE It contains values for use of EMDBSY column to indicate type of specs and type of local database These values are used by JDB JDBj and Package Build EMDBSY Value Spec Type Local DB Type 0 TAM MSDE 1 XML MSDE 2 TAM SSE 3 XML SSE 5 XML Oracle 3 11 5 Oracle Enterprise Edition This section discusses these topics Section 3 11 5 1 File Locations Section 3 11 5 2 Rebooting the Deployment Server Section 3 11 5 3 EnterpriseOne Access to the Local Oracle Database Section 3 11 5 4 Process Explorer Section 3 11 5 5 Verifying the Local Oracle Database Installation Section 3 11 5 6 Deployment Server
426. k OK Note Customization Considerations If you have customizations that you do not want to merge you can prevent individual conversions and merges from running by changing their status or deleting the appropriate records from the plan before you run the Installation Workbench 5 4 11 Setting Up Environment Data Sources Once the Environments have been set up it is necessary to set up the Data Sources for those Environments If you created a custom environment data source information is generated from the data source template provided by JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 39 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade See Also To modify this template refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Configurable Network Computing Implementation Guide 5 4 11 1 Selecting an Environment Data Source Setup Option On the Installation Planner prompt that enables you to set up data sources for the environment you just configured a Click OK to manually enter the data sources as described in the remaining tasks in this section a Click Take Defaults to accept the Release 9 1 default data sources 5 4 11 2 Setting Up the Data Source for Business Data To set up the Business Data data source gt Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions lft File Edit Preferences Form Window Help 18 x vy x RR Li inks is oh oie cham ean w Advan S OLE
427. k16 windows JDEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm profiler3 lib locale JDEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm profiler3 modules JDEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm profiler3 modules locale rid DEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm profiler3 update_tracking DEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm visualvm DEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm visualvm config DEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm visualvm config Modules DEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm visualvm core DEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm visualvm core locale DEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm visualvm modules DEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm visualvm modules locale DEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm visualvm update_tracking DEdwardsE910 mediaobj DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Composer DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Composer html DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Composer htm1 Images DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Composer Visio DEdwardsE910 mediaobj ComposerCBT DEdwardsE910 mediaobj ComposerCBT Order_to_Cash DEdwardsE910 mediaobj ComposerCBT Procure_to_Pay DEdwardsE910 mediaobj ComposerCBT ShowMe_Eapxxxxx DEdwardsE910 mediaobj ComposerCBT ShowMe_Eapxxxxx graphics DEdwardsE910 mediaobj ComposerCBT ShowMe_Earxxxxx DEdwardsE910 mediaobj ComposerCBT ShowMe_Earxxxxx graphics DEdwardsE910 mediaobj ComposerCBT ShowMe_Ecoxxxxx DEdwardsE910 mediaobj ComposerCBT ShowMe_Ecoxxxxx graphics DEdwardsE910 mediaobj ComposerCBT Standard_Graphics DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Distribution DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Financials DEdwardsE910 mediaobj htmlupload DEdwardsE910 mediaobj Human Resour
428. ke Product orer orer orer orer orer Demand To Available PlanSupplyChain Implementation Approach Manage The Business Manage The Business Activity Scrip Manage The Business Activity Scrip ts ts Account and orer Manage The Business Activity Scripts Process orer Manage The Business Activity Scripts Process tions tions Account terview Ques terview Ques Business In Business In orer orer Manage Manage ne ne orer Manage The Business Interview Questions Process orer Business Interview Questions Process s orer orer orer orer orer orer Manage The Order To Cash Order To Cash _vti_cnf Procure To Pay Procure To Pay _vti_cnf Procure To Pay CRP Scripts procure to pay_files Procure To Pay CRP Scripts procure to pay_files _ orer BM944072060102 orer BM orer JDEXxxxxx PXXXXXXXXXXXX debug es es buildDeployBSSV 23 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Deployment Server Directory Structure JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdward
429. ke are not recognized by InstallManager exe when it reads it Note that the installation path of the Development Client s installer setup exe changed with Tools Release 9 1 This means that you will need to change the path of the Development Client s installer in the InstallManager htm when you first install Tools Release 9 1 onto a Deployment Server that has a tools release prior to 9 1 installed The following is an example of a line in a pre 9 1 InstallManager htm that creates the link to install the Development Client this should be on a single line lt a class sectionItem id LaunchLink link setup exe href InstallManager htm gt EnterpriseOne Client lt a gt The Development Client s installer prior to Tools Release 9 1 is called setup exe It should be in the same directory as InstallManager exe and InstallManager htm The value of the link in the above line should be a path and executable for the installer If a relative path is used for example the path starts with neither a drive letter followed by a colon nor a backslash the path is relative to the location of Instal1lManager exe If no path is given Setup exe and InstallManager exe are in the same directory 3 50 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation Here is an example of a similar line for Tools Release 9 1 this should be on a single line lt a class sectionItem id LaunchLink
430. l mode more than once the data will be incorrect 13 28 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading from 9 0 or Below Upgrading from 9 0 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R8940G34 To populate item and This TC is dependent F40G034 table was This TC is also being harvest pattern upon the ALTER added to support released in an ESU for 9 0 information that was record being crop rotation Users upgrading from previously stored inthe processed functionality in release 9 0 to 9 1 that have Grower Block table successfully for the which item is an taken the ESU will not be F40G02 into the Grower Block table attribute of the required to run the Post Harvest Item Master F40G02 and the harvest rather than of Install table conversion F40G034 ce a ae table the block R8940G34 deletes existing eee Srg A record is inserted records found in F40G034 ree A F40G034 for before creating new will convert the tables into anG to the new 9 1 format ey Grower records so it may be run Harvest record more than once without Then R8940G34 can F40G03 for each errors be run to process the records and populate EA G034 the F40G034 columns will be populated with the Vessel ID from F40G03 and with Short Item Number 2nd Item Number 3rd Item Number and Harvest Pattern from F40G02 R41806 To automatically mark None The TC should be The user should set up all item and
431. l Tables PROD TESTDTA CRPDTA PRODDTA Business Data PROD Business Data TEST Business Data CRP Understanding IBM i Databases A 1 A 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide
432. l the environment variables set Is the C compiler installed with Unicode module Can you query the database on the Enterprise Server Is a PostScript or PCL printer connected to this machine Are the printer drivers for this printer installed Is this printer configured as the default printer Troubleshooting 17 1 Using the PORTTEST Checklist jde ini Issues Yes No Is your jde ini located in the correct directory Does your jde ini have the correct permissions Are the following jde ini parameters set properly Network Queue Settings Default Printer OUTQ your printer UBE If you use PostScript is the correct filter set up DB System Settings Verify all parameters especially the following Default Env your default environment Default Pathcode your default path code Server database server name JDENET serviceNameListen port number serviceNameConnect port number INSTALL E910 your path Communications Issues Yes No Do the workstations and server agree on the IP address of the server Other Issues Yes No Were your server map tables F98611 and F986101 edited properly Run the Verify OCM application and verify Do only host databases exist No entries for batch applications exist Are OneWorld tables accessible to the host Can you query the F0902 table Does PORTTEST run without error for e
433. lan 5 4 15 Resetting the jde ini Prior to Running Table Conversions If you changed the jde ini on the Enterprise Server at the end of upgrading a previous environment you will need to change it back before running the upgrade for this environment Verify this setting DB SYSTEM SETTINGS SQL Package Library 2 If you have any other setting than 2 for the SQL Package Library parameter your Table Conversions will fail 5 4 16 Clearing SQL Packages from QRECOVERY You may have one or more packages Rnnnnn in QRECOVERY if you are upgrading from JD Edwards ERP 8 9 onwards and you were running with this setting DB SYSTEM SETTINGS SQL Package Library 1 If these packages exist in QRECOVERY you could experience problems after the upgrade However the problem will not be apparent during the upgrade because the upgrade installer uses a jde ini with SQL Package Library 2 Note With the setting SQL Package Library 2 the system assigns each job its own unique package for example T123456 which is not based on the UBE name You should delete any old UBE SQL packages in QRECOVERY Note No UBEs can be running on the server while you are deleting these packages Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 47 Deleting Machines from an Installation Plan To delete the packages use this command DLTSQLPKG QRECOVERY R 5 5 Deleting Machines from an Installation Plan As you work thro
434. lan 19 5 Entering Deployment Server Information 19 5 Entering Deployment Server Information Once a plan location is specified complete the information for the Deployment Server You are given the option to enter a new Deployment Server or choose an existing one For most situations you will have a tiered Deployment Server for the remote location To enter Deployment Server information a Deployment Server Ae xi Aplan must be associated with a deployment server If you would like to define a deployment server press OK To select an existing deployment server press select X Cancel 1 At the Installation Planner prompt asking if you want to enter new Deployment Server information click OK to add a Deployment Server Custom Installation Plan Deployment Server Revisions File Edit Preferences Form Window Help laj x 4 x R H ae E E OK Can ble Abo Links w Enviro S OLE a Internet Machine Usage free Deployment Server Location roan an Machine Name DENLCMI6 Primary User JDE Description DeploymentSewer Release Eno Host Type ao Intel NT Workstation Enterprise Data Htmc ere oe Primary Deployment Server Server Share Path 2 On Deployment Server Revisions complete these fields it EE 19 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering Deployment Server Information Field Description Machine Usage
435. lans Installation Planner is a Release 9 1 application that runs on the Deployment Server It is a system administration tool that guides through the process of configuring the machines on which your company will run Release 9 1 To set up Release 9 1 for a remote location create a plan that includes remote locations Complete the tasks in this section after you create and complete a basic installation plan and are ready to add the remote locations to the configuration This section includes information for installing an alternate language Before you begin decide what your replication strategy is for Release 9 1 You can use Installation Workbench to copy the system data dictionary control constant and master tables to your remote location Ongoing replication of the data in these sources must be implemented using third party software as of release 8 9 JD Edwards Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 1 Starting Installation Planner EnterpriseOne no longer has a built in replication engine To use replication for Release 9 1 review the processing options for the Installation Planner to make sure that they are set correctly for replication The information that you provide on the Installation Planner forms such as database type and Enterprise Server type determines the information that the system displays on the remaining forms See Also Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options for more information about how the p
436. lation See Also Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax Administrator s Guide Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax Administrator s Guide Before configuring Release 9 1 for use with Vertex Quantum applications install Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax or both on the Enterprise Server For information about installing the Vertex Quantum applications refer to the Vertex Quantum administration guides listed above When installing the Vertex Quantum applications note the following a Note the directory path on the Enterprise Server for the directory in which the Vertex Quantum applications are stored This information is needed when copying the Vertex libraries into the Release 9 1 directory structure a For Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax you can install the ISAM database version of the Vertex Quantum application or you can use the SQL Server or Oracle database 11 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Configuring JD Edwards EnterpriseOne for Use with Vertex Quantum Tax Applications For Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax you can install the ISAM database version of the Vertex Quantum application or you can use the Oracle database You cannot use SQL Server with Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax When using the Vertex ISAM database note the directory path on the Enterprise Server for the directory or directories in which the Vertex Quantum application databases are created
437. lation Workbench assumes that the database user is JDE and that the password is the same unless it finds this override in the jde ini file on the Deployment Server Once the database passwords have been changed you will need to add this section to the jde ini file DSPWD JDE new_password For example if you changed the password for JDE to alaska5 your section would look like this DSPWD JDE alaska5 Caution The Installation Workbench can only process passwords equal to or less than 10 characters in length Therefore you cannot use passwords greater than 10 characters even if your RDMS allows it After you change the DSPWD section of the jde ini file logon to OneWorld in the JDEPLAN environment on the Deployment Server with the new password in the correct case Caution Whenever you change the password on your database as recommended for security purposes you must also ensure that your security settings in the Enterprise Server jde ini file match that of your database Refer to Chapter 12 Working With Signon Security in this guide for applicable instructions You should secure the jde ini file on the Deployment Server to prevent unauthorized access You should delete the DSPWD section once the install or upgrade is complete Note If you are upgrading from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Releases 8 10 or 8 11 you should consider disabling the legacy user which is PSFT Working
438. ld now have 11 rows in the target data source If the log file says that there were insert failures review the jde log and jdedebug log for more detailed information If the conversion cannot be verified through the above procedures check the table in Section 6 16 4 2 Verifying Table Conversions for more specific verification information Troubleshooting For more information about which tables have been changed or added in the new release see the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Database Changes Guide for the release from which you are upgrading 6 16 4 4 Rerunning Table Conversion Programs To rerun table conversion programs Working With Installation Workbench 6 43 Understanding Table Conversions 1 Technical conversions can be rerun without restoration For process type 5 only when you run a table conversion program from Table Conversion Workbench the following occurs a All table conversions should be rerun through the Table Conversion Workbench If the status of the conversion is 60 you might need to change it back to 30 a The table conversion engine uses the object map to locate the table being converted in both the From and To environments In the upgrade to Release 9 1 most application tables being converted will reside on the same data source on the from and to environments This creates an in place conversion The physical table on the data source should be formatted following the specifications for the previou
439. le C WINDOWS system32 mstsc exe F admin If you do not run Remote Desktop with the admin argument Microsoft Windows blocks several important installer functions although Microsoft Windows reports success to the installer For example some registry entries will be missing and the Share for the Deployment Server will not be correctly created The Oracle Universal Installer OUI process creates temporary files during the install By default these are placed on the c drive of your Windows based Deployment Server You may need a sizable amount of free space on your c drive in order to complete the installation successfully Microsoft Windows 2008 For Microsoft Windows 2008 pay special attention to the various Cautions in the steps in this chapter This table lists the mandatory and optional components of the Deployment Server installation Server Mandatory Component Optional Components Deployment Deployment Client Development environment Server EnterpriseOne Files Prototype environment Pristine environment Production environment The installation process for the Deployment Server performs these functions a Installs the objects from the CDs a Creates the path code directory structures such as P5910 and PD910 based on your selections Updates the Microsoft Windows Registry Note You can run the Deployment Server and the Platform Pack installation concurrently assuming the installation programs
440. le Installation Products gt Universal Installer for deinstalling the Deployment Server To rerun the Deployment Server Installer follow the instructions in the preceding section of this chapter entitled Section 3 8 Installing the Deployment Server 3 10 Downloading and Installing the Latest Software Caution You must start Change Assistant as Administrator Right click on the shortcut and select Run as Administrator from the drop down Before continuing with the upgrade download and install the latest Tools Release Tools Release Patch and Planner Update ESU from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Update Center Note The order in which the following Tools Release and updates are applied is very important Do not deviate from the order described in these procedures This section discusses Section 3 10 1 Installing the Latest Tools Release and Latest Tools Release Patch to the Deployment Server Working with the Deployment Server 3 37 Downloading and Installing the Latest Software Section 3 10 2 Installing the Latest Planner Update and Running the Special Instructions 3 10 1 Installing the Latest Tools Release and Latest Tools Release Patch to the Deployment Server To install the latest tools release and latest tools release patch 1 From the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Update Center home page download the latest Tools Release Patch for example 9 1 1 0 and Tools Release docum
441. le failed Table F00926 The exact syntax varies by database type and environment Because they do not affect the table conversion you can disregard any error messages for these tables a F00921 a 00926 a F98830 a F9100TCTEMP 6 16 4 1 Understanding Table Conversion Dependencies Table conversions with a conversion sequence number of 99 or below are technical table conversions conversions with a sequence number of 100 or above are application business data conversions The sequence numbers are shown in the Conv Seq column Note that application conversions are dependent on technical conversions all technical conversions must complete successfully for application conversions to complete 6 16 4 2 Verifying Table Conversions Before continuing the upgrade process verify that the table conversions ran successfully Run R9698711 from the Deployment Server Verify that the amount of data in the log file and the converted table are the same The report R984052 lists all of the conversions that ran Refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Progammers Guide for information on verifying individual table conversions Note the following information about the table conversions 6 40 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions a Conversion programs listed as Process Type 1 generate a pdf anda 1log file in the printqueue directory a Conversion programs listed as Process Type 5 generate a
442. lease from which you are upgrading restore the table to its original format before running the conversion program again When the table conversion engine runs an in place table conversion the temporary table required for an in place conversion could be created and never dropped In this case rerunning the conversion program fails when creating the temporary table because the table already exists To resolve this drop or rename 6 44 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions the temporary table before rerunning the table conversion The temporary table has the name of the table being converted followed by the initials TC followed by the report name of the conversion program being run The temporary name has the notation TableTCTEMP for example FO3B20TCTEMP 3 When the upgrade is complete and you are satisfied with the results delete all SY 89 tables from their data sources 6 16 5 Deferring Index Builds During Table Conversion Workbench Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 Beginning with Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 before running the Installation Workbench you can mark specific Table Conversions to direct the TC Engine not to build indexes during those conversions You may wish to defer building indexes on such table conversions where The underlying table is very large for example F0911 The underlying table is very large and is converted several times during the Table Conversion
443. lespace using this syntax detach_planner bat lt Oracle_dir gt lt E1l_install_dir gt where lt Oracle_dir gt is the parent of the E1Local directory For example detach_planner bat c Oracle c JDEdwards E910 Note This export batch file for the local metadata repository is in the spec directory detach_metadata bat 3 11 5 12 Updating the InstallManager htm File To install a database or the Development Client onto a Development Client machine the user runs this program lt deployment server name gt lt release gt OneWorld Client Install InstallManager exe This program displays a Graphical User Interface that provides several options for the user to perform The options that Instal1Manager exe displays are read from the file InstallManager htm that resides in the same directory as InstallManager exe The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne administrator can edit this file to rename the options or to add new options Instructions are inside the file Caution Although InstallManager htmis in HTML format it is a restricted HTML that the InstallManager exe can read Some text file editing programs add extraneous HTML tags that InstallManager exe cannot recognize The Microsoft Windows program Notepad exe is an example of a program that is known to not add these extra tags making it safe to use Before you make any changes to the file it is good practice to save a copy in case any changes that you ma
444. link install setup exe href InstallManager htm gt EnterpriseOne Client lt a gt Note the addition of this relative path install With Tools Release 9 1 the Development Client s installer which is also called setup exe is now located in a subdirectory called install under the path where Instal1lManager exe resides 3 11 5 13 Deployment inf and lt Package_name gt inf The following lists specific settings within the Deployment inf and lt Package_ name gt inf for OEE Deployment inf ThirdPartyApps ORACLE ThirdParty ORACLE OEESetup exe lt Package_name gt inf example from a DV910FA inf file Oracle Databases JDELocal_DV910 ORACLE SPEC_DV910FA ORACLE UDELocal_DV910 SourceTableSpace JDELocal Server 127 0 0 1 UserID SYSTEM DataFileDestDir DDV910DATA JDELocal_DV910 dbf DumpFileDestDir DDV910DATA JDELocal_DV910 dmp SPEC_DV910FA SourceTableSpace SPEC_DV910FA Server 127 0 0 1 UserID SYSTEM DataFileDestDir DDV910 Spec SPEC_DV910FA dbf LogFileDestDir DDV910 Spec SPEC_DV910FA dmp Working with the Deployment Server 3 51 Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation 3 52 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 4 Working with the Platform Pack on the IBM i This chapter discusses a Section 4 1 Understanding the Platform Pack a Section 4 2 Platform Pack Process Flow a Section 4 3 Configuring the Enterprise Server Prior to Installing the Platform P
445. lled on the Deployment Server For instructions on installing the tools release refer to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Release 8 98 Installation Guide which is available by platform To install the latest tools release and latest tools release patch 1 From the Update Center home page download the latest Tools Release Patch for example 9 1 A1 and Tools Release documentation 2 Using the Tools Release documentation install the Tools Release Patch to the Enterprise Server 4 26 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Working with Database Security 4 9 Working with Database Security The libraries and tables delivered by the Platform Pack installation are not secured In order to provide sufficient security you should run the tool SETOWAUT which allows you to lock down libraries and IFS directories delivered by the Platform Pack installation You can obtain the latest version of the SETOWAUT tool from the Update Center using the Change Assistant In order to maximize your database security you should change the passwords on all table owners created during the Platform Pack installation these are created with the user and password equal to the same value Such a user and password relationship could expose you to worms and viruses aimed at gaining access to your database Consult with your DBA for advice on changing passwords to meet the security requirements of your database installation The Instal
446. llowing SQL statement substituting in your Control Tables and Business Data library names SELECT TABLE SCHEMA TABLE _NAME TABLE_TYPE FROM SYSTABLES WHERE TABLE _ SCHEMA Working with the Platform Pack on the IBMi 4 7 Understanding the Platform Pack Installation on the IBM i IN PRODCTL PRODDTA AND TABLE_TYPE P where TABLE_TYPE P is DDS World created tables TABLE_TYPE T is SQL EnterpriseOne created tables If there are DDS created tables in these libraries you must follow the additional procedures in the Co Existence Upgrade Guide Doc ID 702770 1 which is located on My Oracle Support at this link https support us oracle com oip faces secure km DocumentDisplay jspx id 702770 1 4 3 11 Adding Entries to the System Reply List To add entries to the System Reply List 1 Verify the existing entries in the Reply List with this command WRKRPYLE 2 Verify that this entry does not exist and that the sequence number 3283 has not been used ADDRPYLE SEQNBR 3283 MSGID CPA32B2 RPY I 3 If the above entry does not exist you can add it using this command ADDRPYLE SEQNBR 3283 MSGID CPA32B2 RPY I 4 3 12 Rebuilding Cross Reference Tables on the IBM i To rebuild cross reference tables on the IBM i 1 Stop all subsystems using this command ENDSBS ALL IMMED 2 After the jobs have successfully stopped run the following command
447. low illustrates the process flow for the Oracle Universal Installer for the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Oracle Universal Installer Typical Install Specify Home Details or JD Edwards Upgrade EnterpriseOne Welcome Available Components IBM i Server and User Install End of Profile progress Installation 4 3 Configuring the Enterprise Server Prior to Installing the Platform Pack Install any IBM i server upgrades that are required to support Release 9 1 Before you install Release 9 1 software on the Microsoft Windows Enterprise Server you must create the Release 9 1 administrator user verify disk space and set up and verify the hosts file This section discusses a Section 4 3 1 Understanding the Prerequisites a Section 4 3 2 Understanding Security for the Platform Pack Installer a Section 4 3 3 Setting the System Values 4 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Configuring the Enterprise Server Prior to Installing the Platform Pack Section 4 3 4 Setting up the TCP IP Protocol for Enterprise Server Section 4 3 5 Setting up IBM i Access on your Enterprise Server Section 4 3 6 Starting the Remote Database TCP IP Service Optional Section 4 3 7 Optimizing Machine Resources Section 4 3 8 Cleaning Up From Prior Installations Section 4 3 9 Testing Long File Names on the IBM i Section 4 3 10 Checking for Co existence Tables Section 4 3
448. loyment Servers at remote locations by launching the multi tier UBE R98825C This workbench is processed only if you opted to install remote locations and chose to load replicated data and push packages 6 62 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Using Remote Location Workbench Use this procedure when running Workbench in attended mode or if a task break is set before Remote Location Workbench 6 20 1 Configuring Remote Locations To configure remote locations Installation Workbench Remote Location Workbench Of p File Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help la x x 2 E oy 2 Links w Previo S OLE 8 Internet Close Seg New Prev Mext Con Dis Ab Plan Name INSTALLTYP Typical install New Status Parent Package Program re iat ackag DENVER PDSOOFA RPP_100 XJDE0001 20 Finalized Repl System SEATTLE DOPD910 RSY_100 XJDE0043 Finalized Repl DD SEATTLE 00PD910 i RDD_100 XJDE0044 Finalized Repl Control SEATTLE 0oJPD910 o RCT_100 XJDE0045 Finalized Repl Control SEATTLE 00PD910 l RCT_100 XJDE0045 Duplicate Conversic Repl Constant SEATTLE 00PD910 RCO100 XJDE0046 Duplicate Conversi Repl Constant SEATTLE 00JPD910 o RCO_100 XJDE0046 Finalized Repl Master SEATTLE 0oJPDa00 RMS_100 XJDE0047 Finalized To configure your remote locations 1 On Remote Location Workbench Release 9 1 displays all remote locati
449. lumn The following table shows the languages that the software supports and the LocalCodeSet values set in the JDE INIjde ini for each platform Language Tier Language Code LocalCodeSet Value 1 English E US_EBCDIC 1 French F US_EBCDIC 1 German G US_EBCDIC 1 20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Language Process Overview Language Tier Language Code LocalCodeSet Value 1 Italian I US_EBCDIC 1 Spanish S US_EBCDIC 1 Portuguese P US_EBCDIC 1 Japanese J JA_EBCDIC 2 Danish DN US_EBCDIC 2 Dutch DU US_EBCDIC 2 Finnish FN US_EBCDIC 2 Norwegian NO US_EBCDIC 2 Swedish W US_EBCDIC 2 Korean KO KO_EBCDIC 2 Traditional CT TC_EBCDIC Chinese 2 Simplified CS SC_EBCDIC Chinese 3 Arabic AR n a 3 C EE_EBCDIC Czech 3 Hungarian HU EE_EBCDIC 3 Polish PO EE_EBCDIC 3 Greek GR GR_EBCDIC 3 Russian RU RS_EBCDIC 3 Turkish TR TK_EBCDIC 1 6 3 2 Font Considerations JD Edwards EnterpriseOne includes standard language fonts in a separate file Some languages such as double byte require special fonts to display and print correctly The software stores the font settings in files according to language Individual users can choose fonts by language for forms grids and reports 1 6 3 3 User Display Preferences User display preferences are individually defined sets of Release 9 1 characteristics that are stored in the user profile The software uses these p
450. m 8 11 or below The Processing Option of this job sets the value for the new field MSEB in the table F087711A This TC populates the F087711A tag table with the MSEB value from the processing option value selected The tag table F087711A was added with the MSEB column to allow managers to sign off on the final performance appraisal on behalf of the employee A value of 1 means Yes managers can approve or contest the final appraisal on the employee s behalf A value of 0 means No employees access the appraisal system through Employee Self Service and approve or contest the appraisal themselves R890411B To generate F76C4011 from F0411 when upgrading from 8 11 or below 13 20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading from 8 11 or Below Upgrading from 8 11 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R8913907A To convert F13907 SWO Run after the table Separate Work Order conversions have field from 8 11 or completed below Any data in the SWO Prior to 8 11 SP1 there field that used tobe a_ was no editing for the Y will be changed to Separate Work Order a 1 Any data in the SWO field in the SWO field that used Associative Service Types to be an N will be P13907 application The changed to a 2 existing application allowed entries of Y N 1 or 2 however the UDC attached to the SWO data dictionary only listed value
451. m O0C4J ant etc tem OC4J7 ant etc checkstyle tem OC4J ant lib tem OC4J bin tem 0C4J diagnostics tem 0C4J diagnostics config tem 0C4J diagnostics lib tem OC4J j2ee tem OC4J j2ee home tem 0C4J j2ee utilities tem OC4J javacache tem O0C4J javacache lib tem OC47 javavm tem OC4J javavm lib tem OC4J jdbc tem OC4J jdbc lib tem OC4J jlib tem OC4J lib tem OC4J7 opmn tem OC4J opmn lib tem O0C4J0 rdbms tem OC4J rdbms jlib tem O0C4J sqlj tem 0C4J sqlj jlib Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Directory Structures 23 11 Language Directory Structure Q DEdwardsE910 system 0C4J toplink DEdwardsE910 system 0C4J toplink jlib DEdwardsE910 system 0C4J webservices DEdwardsE910 system 0C4J webservices lib DEdwardsE910 system 0C4J xqs DEdwardsE910 system 0C4J xqs lib DEdwardsE910 system 0C4J xqs tools DEdwardsE910 system resource DEdwardsE910 system resource cmap DEdwardsE910 system resource truetype DEdwardsE910 systemcomp DEdwardsE910 ThirdParty DEdwardsE910 ThirdParty BPMBroker Cy Cy Cpe Cy Ey ys ey Cy q Q q Q 23 2 Language Directory Structure The following table outlines the Release 9 1 software directory structure for the Release 9 1 language installation image You must understand this directory structure to help you verify that the language was installed correctly Directory Name Definition LANGUAGE Name of language for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne lang
452. mation from previous system data source in order to recognize and upgrade your existing environment If the Installation Planner cannot detect the System data source on this machine and it is an upgrade plan it displays this screen prompting you to enter the information about the previous System data source 5 48 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Verify and Configure Data Source for Previous Release Custom Installation Plan Eile Edit Preferences Form Window Help TAS Source Revisions Efa x amp OK Cal De Aba Links w Advan S OLE 8 Internet Data Source Name Data Source Use DB Local Data Source Data Source Type J JDBNET Data Source Data Class Platform Database Server Name mA Loe oLeDe Oracle oe20oss00 oB2UDB acceale 1 On Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions select the appropriate tab for your previous database and complete the fields to match your previous data source For example if your previous data source was Oracle your previous platform was Linux and your previous EnterpriseOne applications release was 9 0 a properly completed form would look like this Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 49 Verify and Configure Data Source for Previous Release gt Custom Installation Plan x File Edit Preferences Form Window Help Data Source Revisions Efel 4 x ed te DiC cane Diss Links w Advan
453. mbly dat to the IBM i IFS Directory optional If you are not able to copy the install image from your Windows client to your IBM i because the assembly dat file is too large alternatively you can use FTP to transfer that file into the IFS directory On the Microsoft Windows client where you ran the IBM i Wrapper install 1 Start a command window Run cmd then enter this command ftp machine_name where machine_name is the name of your IBM i machine Enter a valid IBM i user and password when prompted to do so To indicate you want to use the IFS instead of the standard file system on the IBM i enter this command cd Note This command specifies you want to put files into the IFS without changing any system settings on your IBM i as would be the case if you entered a quote site namefmt 1 command In Microsoft Windows Explorer drill down to the assembly dat file in your install image on the Microsoft Windows client 22 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Copying assembly dat to the IBM i IFS Directory optional 10 For example the assembly dat file might be in a location similar to this d disk1 install data E910 3f d45216a0d2fb17cd87deda05 9 1 000 In the command window type this command but do not press Enter lcd Note Do not press Enter at this point Continue with the steps below to finish populating the 1cd command Drag the location of the ass
454. mendations about disabling IPv6 question in IPv6 for Microsoft Windows Frequently Asked Questions at this link http technet microsoft com en us network cc987595 aspx 3 6 Obtaining and Preparing the Deployment Server Install Image You install the Deployment Server Install image from DVD images obtained from the Oracle e delivery web site http edelivery oracle com To install from images downloaded from the Oracle e delivery web site 1 Create a parent download directory on a disk with at least 15 GB free space For example c DepSvr Disk1 Download the source DVD images for the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server into the directory you created in Step 1 You must use either the 7 Zip or WinZip program to unzip each of the DVD images into the directory you created in Step 1 to verify successful extraction see Caution below Note During the extraction if you receive a message indicating that META INF MANIFEST MF already exists at the prompt you can choose either Ignore or Replace Working with the Deployment Server 3 13 Working with JDBC Drivers on the Deployment Server Caution You cannot use the built in Microsoft Windows Explorer functionality to extract the zip files otherwise the result is an incomplete install image You must use WinZip or 7Zip n To verify a successful extraction check the file size of SPEC_ MASTER DBF This file should be 1 8 GB
455. n 3 From disk1 execute the InstallManager exe file from the root folder For example Disk1 InstallManager exe 1D Edwards Install Manager Ed ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Install EnterpriseOne Database Engine EnterpriseOne E910 Deployment Server IMPORTANT READ ME FIRST 4 On JD Edwards Install Manager select this link EnterpriseOne E910 Deployment Server 3 26 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Installing the Deployment Server File Download Security Warning Do you want to run or save this file Name OEESetup exe Type Application 1 76MB From E Local_Build E900_12_29_OEFE CD_IMAGES Disk A j While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can D potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not lt tun or save this software What s the risk 5 If you get the above prompt click the Run button to execute the Deployment Server OUI installer which is called by the setup exe program This process opens a Microsoft Windows command window as shown in the below example ON Oracle Universal Installer Fiel x Starting Oracle Universal Installer Checking swap space must be greater than 5006 MB Actual 6865 MB Passed Checking monitor must be configured to display at least 256 colors Higher than 256 Actual 65536 Passed Preparing to launch Oracle Universal Installer from C Users lcmadmin fppData L ocal Temp Oralnstal
456. n Install alternate languages at the same time that you install Release 9 1 or after completing a working upgrade Implement a language only plan only for installations in which a language has not been previously installed It is important that you complete all tasks in this chapter to achieve a successful language installation 21 2 Reviewing Requirements for a Language Installation To review the basic requirements for performing a language installation 1 Review the language installation process The detailed information regarding the language installation process is found in Section 1 6 Language Process Overview Review the disk space requirements Verify that the disk space requirements are available for each language and each environment that you are installing on the deployment and Enterprise Servers Creating a Language Only Installation Plan 21 1 Installing Languages on the Deployment Server 3 Review the directory structure The detailed information about directory structures is found in the Chapter 23 Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Directory Structures chapter of this guide 21 3 Installing Languages on the Deployment Server To install languages on the Deployment Server 1 Obtain the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne language and run the setup exe 4 JD Edwards Installation Manager ORACLE JD EDWARDS ENTERPRISEONE Install EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 French Get more information abo
457. n Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien Clien 10 OneWorld Clien t Install Stage Actions dbActions 10 1 0 2 0 t Install Stage Actions dbActions 10 1 0 2 0 1 t Install Stage Actions elFileActions t Install Stage Actions elFileActions 10 2 0 3 0 t Install Stage Actions elFileActions 10 2 0 3 0 1 t Install Stage Actions elGeneralActions t Install Stage Actions elGeneralActions 10 2 0 3 0 t Install Stage Actions elGeneralActions 10 2 0 3 0 1 t Install Stage Actions elISeriesActions t Install Stage Actions elISeriesActions 10 2 0 3 0 t Install Stage Actions elISeriesActions 10 2 0 3 0 1 t Install Stage Actions elPackageActions t Install Stage Actions elPackageActions 10 2 0 3 0 1 t Install Stage Actions fileActions t Install Stage Actions fileActions 11 2 0 2 0 t Install Stage Actions fileActions 11 2 0 2 0 1 t Install Stage Actions generalActions t Install Stage Actions generalActions 10 2 0 9 0 t Install Stage Actions generalActions 10 2 0 9 0 1 t Install Stage Actions jarActions t Install Stage Actions jarActions 10 2 0 0 0 t Install Stage Actions jarActions 10 2 0 0 0 1 t Install Stage Actions launchPadActions t Install Stage Actions launchPadActions 10 1 0 2 0 t Install Stag
458. n Deployment Server 3 To change how many Table Conversions are submitted simultaneously to the Enterprise Server change the value in TC Throttle This value should match the maximum jobs set up for the QBATCH queue on the Enterprise Server You control how many TCs are actually running at any time by your queue set up by using WRKJOBQE On your IBM i machine make sure JOBQ MAX ACT is set to match the TC Throttle that you choose Tip To set the maximum number of simultaneous jobs submitted refer to Section 6 16 3 3 Select Enterprise Server and Maximum Jobs On Select Environments Advanced Fxit 4 Select Convert All from the Form menu Tip To do one conversion at a time select the appropriate detail records and then select Convert Selected from the Form menu While the conversions run you can track their progress by choosing Table Conversion Merge Log P984052 To do so on the System Installation Tools menu GH961 double click Advanced Operation and then Table Conversion Merge Log The program shows a scrolling list of the conversions that have processed 6 26 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions 6 16 2 Table Conversion Workbench Architecture Select Convert All this is used automatically when running unattended or Convert Selected to run the TC Workbench program P98413 The Convert All selection causes the program to run with two loops The outer loop keeps
459. n 11 1 4 Setting Security on the Helps Directory Section 11 1 5 Setting Security on the Media Object Directory Section 11 1 6 Setting Security on the Planner Directory Section 11 1 7 Setting Security on the Print Queue Directory Section 11 1 8 Setting Security on the System Directory Note Notall directories are available The directory names listed in the table below are subdirectories of the JDEdwards E910 directory structure You can apply the indicated permissions to all subdirectories and files except where noted Performing Post Upgrade Tasks 11 1 Setting Up Microsoft Windows Security on Release 9 1 Directories 11 1 1 Setting Security on the Pathcode Directory This table lists the settings to set security on the pathcode directory User Type Permissions JDE Change all subdirectories except pathcode and package Change Production users Read Only all subdirectories except pathcode and package Change Development users Change all subdirectories except pathcode and package Change CNC administrators and application leads Change all subdirectories except pathcode and package Change 11 1 2 Setting Security on the Database Directory This table lists the settings to set security on the database directory User Type Permissions JDE Change Production users No Access Development users No Access CNC administrators and application leads No Access 11 1 3
460. n Plan Data Source Revisions OY x File Edit Preferences Form Window Help lj x Y x R R OK Can Dis Abo Data Source Name Data Dictionary 910 Links w Advan S OLE 9 Internet Data Source Use pe Local Data Source Data Source Type po DB2 UDB on 08 400 M JDENET Data Source Data Class gt Data Dictionary Platform jasso0 1BMAS 400 CISC Database Server Name ps2 Be2UDB Access koora Library Name Joost 0 ODBC Data Source Name Data Dictionary 910 SAUMSDE ODBC SAUMSDE OLEDB Oracle if 1 On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the settings for the Data Dictionary data source The library name in the Library Name field is the Release 9 1 data dictionary library DD910 2 Click OK 5 4 9 3 Verifying the Object Librarian Data Source To verify the Object Librarian data source Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 31 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions Of File Edit Preferences Form Window Help la x YV x R R OK Can Dis Abo Data Source Name Object Librarian 910 Advanced j Data Source Use ps Local Data Source Data Source Type l DB2 UDB on 05 400 F JDBNET Data Source Pori Data Class f Object Librarian Links w Advan 9 OLE 8 Internet Platform fas4o0 IBM ASI400 CISC
461. n any special characters Description Enter a description of the HTML Web Server machine Release Enter E910 to indicate the release number that you are installing Host Type The default value of 50 specifies the server type as Intel NT Select the correct server type Location The location chosen for this plan appears in this field by default Primary User The user to whom an email is sent when a package is deployed The default for Primary User is listed in the jde ini 3 On the HTML tab complete these fields Field Description Primary HTML Server When the system code generates an email message with a web shortcut pointing to a form the web shortcut generated points to the Primary HTML Web Server Only one of all the HTML Web Servers defined in installation planner can be defined as primary 1 Protocol This is the protocol used by the HTML Web Server Valid values are http or https Server URL This is the Domain Name System DNS host name of the HTML Web Server The syntax is server_name port jde owhtml For example DEVNTA 81 jde owhtml Http Port This is the port number the HTML Web Server is listening to For HTTP the typical port number is 80 For HTTPS the typical port number is 443 However you can choose to implement a HTML Web Server using a different port number 19 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering HTML Web Server Information Field
462. n choose to implement a HTML Web Server using a different port number JDENET Listen Port This is the port on which the JOENET communications protocol communicates with the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Enterprise Server The value is dependent on the release of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne For JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 the value is 6016 Default Login Defines how shortcuts to a web form are generated by the system code Values are either a reserved value or an explicit servlet name Reserved values are Standard The URL generated will point to a servlet on the Primary HTML Web Server Redirector The URL generated will point to redirector in the Primary HTML Web Server and redirector will point to a servlet on another HTML Web Server for load balancing The servlet name to use is generated by the system a Explicit Servlet Name The user can specify an explicit servlet name in this field In this case the redirector functionality cannot be used The URL generated will point to the specified servlet in the Primary HTML Web Server Usage of Explicit servlet name is for backward compatibility only You should not use it unless you have a direct need 20 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering Data Server Information Field Description Installation Path Enter the installation directory path to which you are installing Release 9 1 on your HTML Web Server Make sure thi
463. n environment Custom Installation Plan Select Environments Pile Es Edit preferences Form Row Window Help laj xj S R ue an Gass ne ee ee K Links v REP S OLE internet Select Plan Name INSTALL Install Plan Deselect Data Sources Data Load Advanced Row 1 A he On Select Environments double click the environment that you want to define To set up multiple environments choose and define them one at a time This screen appears after the following tasks are completed 20 11 2 Specifying Environment Data Load Parameters If you cleared Default Data Load on the Environment Selection form the Data Load Parameters form appears To specify environment data load parameters Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 21 Setting Up Environments ustom Installation Plan Data Load Parameters OF x A File Edit Preferences Form Window Help la x Yoox OD ee OK Can Next Dis Abo inks w Next OLE a Internet The data load options are used when creating new tables R98407 during an Upgrade The option must be setto Load Production or Load Development in order to populate F9861 and F983051 Version Search Load Production Data Load DemoData Edit Version m Data Load Setup Delete Environment Paani 910 Pristine Environment Previous Environment Pace erage Plan Detail Status 10 Al In Planning Program Name Rosa Environment Database
464. n in the example below i Oracle Universal Installer Available Product Components lel E3 ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Available Product Components EnterpriseOne IBM i Platform Pack 9 1 The following are components that you can install as part of EnterpriseOne IBM i Platform Pack 9 1 Which of these components do you want to install O BH EnterpriseOne IBM i Platform Pack 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 DEnterpriseOne Database Server 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Installed 9 1 0 0 0 O System Database 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Installed 9 1 0 0 0 OPristine Database 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Installed v 9 1 0 0 0 OPrototype Database 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Installed 9 1 0 0 0 E Production Database 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Development Database 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 AN ErternvriceOne Entornrice Server 91014NNN Inctallad G4 NANNY Expand All Collapse All Select All Deselect All F Show all components including required dependencies Tan le CD CD Tip Use the scroll bar to on the right hand side of the screen to view the complete list of available components This is shown in the following screen sample Working with the Platform Pack on the IBMi 4 15 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i Oracle Universal Installer Available Product Components ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Available Product Components EnterpriseOne IBM i Platform Pack 9 1 The following are components that you can install as part of Ent
465. n installed in that order Verify that the Pristine database is installed and the Pristine Central Objects loaded Concurrent Tasks None 5 1 4 Mandatory Pre Upgrade Process Upgrading the Pristine Environment Due to the hundreds of table conversions which will run during the upgrade process the process has changed to run the table conversions on the server The following process is necessary to run Table Conversions on the server Caution The Pristine PS910 environment must be installed prior to running Table Conversions Each step must be completed and checked off in the exact order listed below Create an Upgrade Plan for the Pristine PS910 environment Follow the steps in the Section 5 4 1 Starting Installation Planner section and create a plan for Pristine only Run the Upgrade Plan just created for the Pristine PS910 environment Note Table Conversions will not run when upgrading the Pristine PS910 environment The following steps may be completed while the Installation Workbench is running the Pristine P5910 upgrade plan Install the latest Tools Release and Tools Release Patch on the Enterprise server the Tools Release level must match what was installed on the Deployment Server Note This step may also be performed while the Installation Workbench is running Ensure that JD Edwards EnterpriseOne services are up and running on the Enterprise server
466. n installed on your server For example JD Edwards EnterpriseOne includes this default setting in the jde ini on your Enterprise Server SERVER ENVIRONMENT MAP JDEPLAN PSnnn where nnn is the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne application release level For example 910 Ensure that the specified environment exists Inconsistent Queue Definitions This error occurs if your Upgrade Plan indicates to run table conversions on the server and the default queue defined in Queue Control Status Master F986130 in JDEPlan does not exist in the Queue Control Status Master on the Enterprise Server To resolve the error condition perform either of these steps 1 Change the default queue defined in the planner environment to match the queue that is defined on the server 2 Signin to the Deployment Environment for example DEP910 or a deployed development client and add a queue definition on the server to match the default queue that is defined in the Planner environment In either case you must run application P986130 to update the table Note This error may also be generated by a failure to open the Queue table in the System datasource Use to the jde 1log to verify if this is the case Invalid TC Max Jobs in Plan This error indicates your plan has specified the maximum table conversion job as 0 while the Table Conversion Workbench is assuming the maximum jobs are set to 4 Security Server Turned On This error indicates you ha
467. n the Advanced Form must be checked 5 4 12 Adding a Remote Location To add remote location Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 45 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade P Location 4 15 x Would you like to add another Location You may have more than one location that is separated by a WAN Ifyou would like to define an additional location press Yes You can define additional locations at a later time Other wise press No to continue Release 9 1 asks if you want to add another remote location 1 On Location choose one of the following options a Click Yes to add a remote location Repeat all processes for adding a location starting with Section 5 4 3 Entering Location Information Refer to the Creating a Remote Installation Plan task in the Installation Planner Utilities section for information about adding remote locations to your plan a Click No to conclude the Installation Plan setup 2 Continue with Section 5 4 13 Finalizing the Installation Plan task 5 4 13 Finalizing the Installation Plan To finish the Installation Plan 1 A message appears to let you know that the installation plan has been finalized When the plan is finalized a The status is set to 20 which signals that several adjustments to tables were made according to your plan a Create the OCM a Modify the ini file a The following tables are upgraded Release Master table F0094
468. n the rate Rate Schedule Orders schedule orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 04 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 04 in the rate Rate Schedule Orders schedule orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 05 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 05 in the rate Rate Schedule Orders schedule orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 EPM Order Summary Order Type value 01 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 01 in the EPM EPM SummaryOrders summary orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 02 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 02 in the EPM EPM Summary Orders summary orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 03 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 03 in the EPM EPM Summary Orders summary orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 04 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 04 in the EPM EPM Summary Orders summary orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Order Type value 05 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 05 in the
469. name and conversion y program one record per printer F986161 System 910 Default Printer table Lists default printer settings by user and System Local environment F986162 System 910 Paper Definition Lists paper sizes defined for each printer one System Local record per printer F986163 System 910 Printer Capability Lists printer capabilities paper orientation ren Local and size type and location of printer for each y printer one record per printer F986164 System 910 Output Conversions Lists printer output conversions defined for each printer one record per printer System Local F986165 System Shared New Default Printer Table Stores the default printer information including the user environment host name printer name and the status F986167 System 910 Printer Security Reserved for future use System Local F9862 Object Librarian Object Librarian Lists one record for each function contained in F Function Detail the source file Object Librarian Local Major Technical Tables 24 9 Table Data Source Description Purpose F9863 Object Librarian Object Librarian Object Contains one record per business function per Relationships related object This table is used when Object Librarian Local ae building business functions F9865 Object Librarian Form Information Contains one record per interactive form Object Librarian Local including online
470. nding Database Data SOULCES sesssseseritsstsrttssttesttsrttsstertiesstentesterttess tet 7 4 7 6 3 2 Understanding Logic Data Sources s ssesssesississesseesississesstssinsiesisteniesienieseeneenees 7 5 7 6 4 Understanding OCM Customization ss ssessesseesissessessestississesreetinsissesntentesieniesesneenees 7 5 7 6 4 1 Understanding Data Classes sssssesssesessesssesirissesssesresientestesnestentessnsnestereeseessentes 7 5 7 6 4 2 Creating a New Data ClasSiiiiiis tirisin tititi aiie a iE ES 7 6 7 6 4 3 Modifying the Data Source Template sss sesssssssesssesissesstsrstersesstsnensseninsresenneesees 7 6 7 6 4 4 Associating Table Data Classes ssssssssssssesesesseseetissessesnentinsissesnssnsesienresenneenees 7 6 7 7 Setting Up a Printer on the Enterprise Server ss ssssseesississsissessestentesressenstesrisnesnesneesees 7 7 7 7 1 Addins a INewe Printer sost aiaee aon ean Teie eea Eet E AA Eoee e E ira TE 7 7 7 7 2 Defining a Default Printer cece cc sioi a ai a i e i i 7 13 7 8 Enabling Multiple Concurrent Table Conversions sse sessssessrseesisrissersserississessereesesses 7 14 8 9 10 11 Installing the Development Clients for Developers and System Administrators 8 1 Understanding Development Client Installation ccccccccesecccccsesesescsceeeecscssensneeeeesens 8 1 8 2 Preparing for Development Client Installation 0 ccccc cece ceeeececseeesnececesenen
471. ne itself or its administrator Deployment Server Name Using the visual assist button choose the name of the Deployment Server to which this HTML Web Server is attached A Deployment Server name appears in this field by default but you can change it if necessary 4 Click OK a JAYA Application Server OF x Would you like to add another JAVAApplication Server To distribute processing and increase performance you can add additional HTML application servers If you would like to define an additional HTML server press Yes Other wise press No to continue X No 5 To add another HTML Web Server click Yes and repeat steps 1 through 4 to define another HTML Web Server Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 15 Entering Data Server Information 19 9 Entering Data Server Information a Data Server lel x If your database resides on a seperate server press OK to define your data server To select an existing data server press select Ifyou do notwantto define a data server press skip Select Skip 1 On Data Server choose one of these options a OK X Cancel If your database resides on a separate server choose click OK to continue entering unique Data Server information a Select Click this option to select an existing Data Server a Skip Click this option if you do not want to define a Data Server a On Data Source click OK to continue entering
472. neneneneeneees 13 35 13 10 3 Working With Upgrade UGC Objects Using W98ELUGCA s ssssssssississsessestereeseess 13 35 13 10 4 Working With Detail Upgrade Using W98ELUGCB eeceeececessssseseseseseneeeeesens 13 36 Building and Testing Packages 14 1 Undlerstandinig Packages rsisi irai a ia araa arpa ara E a E a i 14 1 14 27 Obtaining the JDK J REssis miba a a aii nates 14 2 14 3 Installing Application Fixes isaisa p n a E ei EE T aei 14 2 xi 15 16 17 18 xii 14 4 Reviewing Pre Package Build Issues c cccccccceccscsesesesescscsesescecsssesesescscsssnseecscsesssnseeceees 14 2 14 4 1 Verifying Available Space in DBMS cccccccccceeeeeececeeseseececesensnecesecesesenesenenenenes 14 3 14 4 2 Verifying Specific UBEs are Mapped Locally c cccccccseccscsesesesescscsseececssensneseeeeees 14 3 14 4 3 Verifying the Server Side Settings ccccecscsssssseseseesseesescsessesescscssseseecscsesssnesecees 14 4 14 4 4 Configuring the Enterprise Server for Simultaneous Builds eee 14 4 14 4 5 Adding a Security Override for Running Package Build 0 c eee 14 4 14 4 6 Verifying UNICODE Settings When Upgrading From Xe cccccccccsesesecseneeeeeees 14 4 14 5 Reviewing Troubleshooting Tips ssiiisssnarrspunini nassisti 14 5 14 6 Building an Alternate Language Package cccccsescsssssesssesesescsesesesescscsssesescsesssnseseeceees 14 5 14 6 1 Package Build Considerations 0 ccccecscssssesesccseesesescscseses
473. nents is shown in this table Mandatory Component Optional Components Deployment Server JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Files Production Environment Prototype Environment Development Environment Pristine Environment Enterprise Server JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Foundation ES Production ES Prototype ES Development ES Pristine Deinstalling the Software 27 1 Deinstalling the Software from the Workstations 27 2 Deinstalling the Software from the Workstations You can remove previous JD Edwards EnterpriseOne installations from workstations by running the deinstallation program as described in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Development Client Installation Guide 27 3 Deinstalling the Local OEE from the Deployment Server Note Oracle products use the term deinstall to refer to removing an Oracle product To deinstall the local Oracle database 1 Either export the local database tablespaces or deinstall JD Edwards EnterpriseOne using Start gt Programs gt Oracle lt Home_Name gt gt Oracle Installation Products gt Universal Installer where lt Home_Name gt is the name that you gave the installation of EnterpriseOne on the Deployment Server Locate this file lt Oracle Home gt deinstall deinstall bat Right click on the file that you located in Step 2 and select Run as administrator where lt Oracle_Home gt is the directory where you installed the local Oracle database For example your director
474. ness PRSA sr EEA eee 5 4 10 3 Verifying Advanced Parameters If you turned off Default Advanced Parameters on the Environment selection form the Advanced Parameters form appears To verify advanced parameters Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 37 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Custom Installation Plan Advanced Parameters Pile Es file Edit Preferences Form Window Help 18 x A x P e Links i ok can Die o w Optio BOLE internet M Upgrade Environment Plan Name PRODUCTION Library List Name PD910 E910 Production Environment Previous Environment PD900 E900 Production Environment TE Ee E IV Recreate Object Mappings L Control Table Merges eae Table Specification as j M Table Conversions IV Specification Merges C None Upgrade Merges Ho E E AARE RE ia Fa A I RR EE ET ES n si EAE pa ee prea ANSE ca te aS poe Sat F TC Properties PUNENTE RS E m AEE SENEE OR SNS PAT TLE hee REI EEEE NA NETA E AL AERE rE CA NESE D EE DONT SNE Le eat AIAS EA EEEN EAEE OANEI NEEE NESA CESPA AS Logic Data Source DENUDBSNt Table Conversion Throttle STE TMC tA NSS AIA ERE PAE AS SOTO UES AER AA STR RE IY RRMA ERLE PAR NL NESTE le NT N DNAN a NA ESHA aCe STE RR Ea HE j 229 1 On Advanced Par
475. ney V Copy Path Code Pkg dir server Secovecsassovesoeenssveveussvocavecevevesssaveusesesest 3 On Environment Copy Copy to existing environment complete these fields a Source Environment a Target Environment a Source Package Target Package Note Any environment copy is dependent on the OCM for the target environment If the OCM does not currently exist you can enable the checkbox for Generate OCM in System Server Map to create data sources and OCM for your target environment before doing the copies Upgrading the Production Environment 15 5 Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 Note The Copy Metadata Repository and Rename Metadata Repository options are dependent on certain components having been copied before they are run The package definition records for the target package must exist before the Copy Metadata Repository or Rename Metadata Repository runs It is recommended that you allow the Copy Environment process to copy the path code and package on the Deployment Server because that UBE which runs before the Copy Metadata Repository or Rename Metadata Repository also copies the package records and the package inf The Configure Package Manifest option which is only selectable by running the following step in this procedure is dependent on both local and enterprise package repositories having been created and also depends on the target package defini
476. ng against SQL Server Oracle or DB2 UDB sign on as the data source owner if any of the post installation jobs are TCs which create temp tables Run these post installation UBEs after the automatic table conversion programs have completed successfully See Also JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Programmer s Guide and theJD Edwards EnterpriseOne Database Changes Guide for detailed information on additional information notes and verification procedures regarding the following UBEs Manual Table Conversions 13 1 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 You must use the Fast Path field to navigate to the Post Install Menu GH9619 where you run the UBEs listed in this table Note If you do not use the Fast Path field to navigate to the Post Install Menu GH9619 the menu selections may not display properly All Conversion Programs marked with must be run on the Deployment Server 13 2 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 This section contains a list of all the Table Conversions required when upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R890030B Only if you have taken None To merge the FO031 None the ESU in XE ERP8 0 Bank Transit Master and are using F0031 Tag Table into the Bank Transit Master F0030 Bank Transit Tag Table Master The conversion will copy the data from the bank address number AN8BK in F0031 to the bank address number ANS8BK in F0031
477. ng Data Classes a Section 7 6 4 2 Creating a New Data Class a Section 7 6 4 3 Modifying the Data Source Template a Section 7 6 4 4 Associating Table Data Classes 7 6 4 1 Understanding Data Classes The data class is at the center of automatic OCM generation It categorizes the type of data stored in data sources and tables for example in the Business Data data source the data class is B while in the System data source the data class is S If you want to split business data into multiple data sources you need to create a new data class add a data source to the data source template for that data class so Installation Planner prompts for the data source and assign tables and GT objects to that data class OCM will be created based on this information You should do these steps before creating your plan Working With the Enterprise Server 7 5 Working with OCM Generation 7 6 4 2 Creating a New Data Class You must create a new data class by adding a value to the H96 DU User Defined Code UDC for data sources and H96 CL UDC for table and GT objects 7 6 4 3 Modifying the Data Source Template A data source template defines the set of data sources that will be used by an environment and the default values for the properties of the data source They are stored in the F98511 table The information in this table can be edited using Data Source Templates By Environment GH9611 program By understanding this application you c
478. ning a custom plan 21 4 2 Entering Information into Installation Planner To enter information into the Installation Planner a Custom Installation Plan Installation Planner a 2 Links w Deplo E OLE E Internet lo a on I cols Abo OK Can Dis mPlan Information Name LANGUAGE ONLY Cascade Description language only plan a y Status fo In Planning Tile Horizont Install Type Tile Vertically Install Upgrade C Software Update ASU JESU Contents Release To Release fest 0 Display Errors Next Error About J D Include Languages Edwards aN C Yes Language Oni 225 1 On Installation Planner enter the basic plan information 2 Inthe Include Language area select the Language Only option 21 4 3 Selecting Custom or Default Parameters To select custom or default parameters 21 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running Installation Planner Bim E3 la x Db Coston fasiatoten Fiar Environment Selection ity File Edit Preferences Window Help Y x R OK Can Dis Abo Links Y Disp S internet Default Environments To configure all valid environments for your installation check the Default Environments box Otherwise uncheck the Default Environments boxto select individual environments Calculat I Default Data Load To utilize JD Edwards data load options de
479. nly The default is to create all tables Enter a Y to print all tables in the report or a N to print Leave this field blank licensed tables only The default is to print all tables 25 3 1 4 How to Read the Report Review the reports to make sure the environments were created and configured successfully The report includes a status for each table a Tables that have been created correctly have a status of Success a Tables that had errors have a status of Failure a Tables can have a status of No Action The Environment Database Creation report does not have a cover page The reports list the following properties of each table object created Object headings Description Syst Code System Code Shows the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne product code for the database listed in the Member Description column Object Name Displays the alphanumeric name of the database Memter Description Displays the full name of the database being created Data Source Displays the data source toward which this member points Crt Tbl Create Table Shows whether tables are being created for this database Copy Data Shows whether the table was copied with data 25 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Environment Database Creation Report R98403 Object headings Description Rec Insrt Record Insert Displays the number of records inserted Rec Fail Record Failure Displays th
480. nner Update ESU to the Pristine environment in order to get the latest Table Conversion changes among other important changes You must right click on the executable and select Run as Administrator from the drop down 3 38 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Downloading and Installing the Latest Software el Client Workstation Setup Package Selection Ea This package requires an EnterpriseOne User and password so it can apply the update User ID JDE Password Client Install lt Back Cancel Help 3 You must enter a valid JD Edwards EnterpriseOne user and password to initialize the Planner The shipped values are JDE for the user and JDE for the password Note The above login screen is displayed so the Planner Update can update the metadata specifications on the Deployment Server 4 When the installation finishes view the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Setup form to confirm that the installation was successful Tip If the folder into which you expanded the Planner Update is empty you should run the self extracting executable JMnnnnn exe again When the Welcome screen comes up click on Cancel to quit 5 Follow the steps in the Special Instructions which are contained within an HTML file that is shipped with the Planner Update The special instructions file is in this directory with this file name x download_directory planner_update_id E910Special
481. ns Upgrade Guide Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 10 After the process completes successfully you must deploy the target server package to make it available on the Enterprise Server s Caution OEE Local Database Consideration When copying a package using local Oracle database there are additional DBF files in the target package spec directory For example if copying PY910FULL to PD910FULL these two DBF files would exist PD910 package PD910FULL spec PD910FUL DBF PD910 package PD910FULL spec PY910FULL DBF Before deploying the package you must manually delete the source package DBF file in this example PY910FULL DBF This must be done manually because it is not possible for the R9894005 UBE to delete this file as the database keeps a lock on it until the UBE ends 11 To access the processing options of the Copy Environment Application P989400 from menu GH9611 right click on the application and select Prompt for Values u Processing Options Eg lt New Tab gt Advanced Copy Options Y N 12 In order to activate the Advanced Copy button enter a value of Y in this field Advanced Copy Options Y N Click OK to return to the Environment Copy application and note that a new section with advanced options is available Directory copies Upgrading the Production Environment 15 11 Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 Environment C
482. ns an Intel processor and memory but is diskless With the IXS there is a PC card inside the IBM i system ready to become the Deployment Server Integrated xSeries Adapter for IBM i IXA This adapter consists of two parts 1 An HSL bus adapter with cables ready to be plugged into a supported Netfinity or xSeries Server and Working with the Deployment Server 3 1 Using IXS Integrated xSeries Server for Deployment 2 One of the supported IBM Netfinity or xSeries Servers separately ordered without any disk This integrated server will appear as an HSL attached expansion unit to the IBM i system Neither the internal IXS nor the external IXA contains disk drives OS 400 disk storage will get allocated to either server type The IBM i should have been ordered with enough disk to support the dedicated the Deployment Server The disk can be configured as one or more virtual drives called network storage spaces of varying capacities These virtual drives are allocated within the OS 400 integrated file system The Microsoft Windows software perceives them as physical hard drives The IXS card is the usual choice for the Deployment Server because it meets the MTRs at a lower price than the IXA The rest of this section therefore is based on the IXS There are three IBM redbooks that contain detailed installation and configuration information Refer to this link http www redbooks ibm com Consolidating Microsoft Windows 2000 S
483. nstallation Workbench 6 61 Using the Package Workbench 6 19 Using the Package Workbench Package Workbench transfers the F9603 and F9631 tables from the Planner data source to the System 910 data source It then updates the F98404 table to indicate completion Use this procedure when running Workbench in attended mode or if a task break is set before Package Workbench Refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide for complete information about building and configuring packages a Installation Workbench Package Workbench gi File Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help RS Seq New Prev Next Con Dis Abo inks w Previo S OLE internet J w Plan Name uPGDvet0 Upgrade Plan for DV910 ui Package New Status eo Package Status Description Description PKG_JQ6_PD910 PD910 20 Finalized ESU_JQ8_PD910 PDO10 Finalized Production full package A PD910 Finalized 1 On Package Workbench review your packages 2 Select Configure from the Form menu 6 20 Using Remote Location Workbench Note This workbench only appears when Remote Locations have been set up Remote Location Workbench loads business master and constant control data dictionary and system tables from base location to remote location servers by launching different versions of R98403 XJDE0043 XJDE0044 XJDE0045 XJDE0046 and XJDE0047 It also pushes delivered packages to primary Dep
484. nterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Central Objects PY910 Central Objects PS910 Central Objects PD910 Central Objects DV910 Control Tables Field Client Access Server Name Name of the machine where your database resides Platform IBM i Use Table Owner Blank Use Julian Dates Selected Use Decimal Shift Selected Support for Updates Selected OCM Data Source Blank LOB Data Source Selected IBM i BLOB Support Blank 26 3 Control Tables This chart lists the characteristics of the Control Tables data source Field Client Access Data Source Name list includes possible sources Control Tables Prod Control Tables CRP Control Tables PS910 Control Tables Test Data Source Use DB Data Source Type I Object Owner ID Blank Library Name list includes possible libraries PRODCTL CRPCTL PS910CTL TESTCTL Library List Name RDB name of the IBM i Note To find the IBM i RDB name use the WRKRDBDIRE command Database Name list includes possible databases Control Tables Prod Control Tables CRP Control Tables PS910 Control Tables Test Server Name Name of the machine where your database resides Platform IBM i Use Table Owner Blank Use Julian Dates Selected Use Decimal Shift Selected Support for Updates Selected Understanding Data Source Charts 26 3 Data Dictionary Field Client Access OCM D
485. o Links w Displ S OLE S Internet Tools Era Calendar m Output Stream Access Report Destination Calcula Work Center 2 Internal Mail g eaa C To Printer Mail I OSAlInterface Name Internet go Create C Exportto csv Shortcut g Send Shortcut 2 1 On Report Output Destination select On Screen or To Printer 2 Click OK 3 Review the report to confirm that all records were validated For more information about Section 25 1 Installation Planner Validation Report R9840B refer to Chapter 25 Working with Reports 4 On Work With Installation Plans click Expand to review the plan you created See Also A separate chapter in this guide entitled Chapter 19 Creating a Remote Installation Plan A separate chapter in this guide entitled Chapter 20 Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration A separate chapter in this guide entitled Chapter 21 Creating a Language Only Installation Plan Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 33 Concluding the Planner Validation Report 19 34 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 20 Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration This section contains the procedures for adding additional servers to your configuration Use these procedures only if you have already defined and run your initial installation plan and set up your environments This section discusses S
486. o TELE Operator Left operand Comparison Right Operand Where BC Product Code F9860 isnot equal 55 89 SY to And BC Data Class F9860 is equal to BT CLDF where the first value is a space character that specifies blank B specifies Business Data and T specifies Control Tables And BC Object Type F9860 is equal to TBLE FUNO Working With Installation Workbench 6 41 Understanding Table Conversions W Processing Options el Runtime options Environment for which you want to run the compare Will determine which Central Objects to use and where the tables are OCM Defaults to logon environment Summary Detail 0 List all tables 1 Only list tables in error 2 Ignore missing specification errors 3 Ignore missing table errors determine which data source the table is in Central Objects Data Source Will override the Central Objects Data Source for the specified Environment Should not usually be supplied Enter the type of Specs used to verify tables The default is Local TAM 0 Central Objects RDB 1 Local TAM Table Data Source This overrides OCM Usually you should let OCM Help x Cancel Or look in the table conversion logs that are created in the pathcode printqueue directory Review the table conversion logs JDE LOG and JOEDEBUG LOG to make sure the table conversion program finished successfully The table conversion
487. o O e eae ee O me moia OO a O Name Description Code Flag Type Modified Comment 3 On the Specification Merge Selection form complete these fields Location Enter the name of the Deployment Server that is the check in location for this pathcode Path Code Enter the name of the associated pathcode prototype or development 4 On the QBE line enter C in the Mod Flag field to list the changed objects and then click Find 5 Set the MrgOpt field to 1 for all objects except those you do not want to merge use Enable to carry changed objects and use Disable to not carry changed objects 6 When you finish reviewing or modifying the records click Close Caution To verify the accuracy of included modifications additional queries are strongly recommended to avoid missing any modified objects For example verify that the system code of the objects is 55 to 59 2 6 Changing the Journal JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 uses LOB data in different native LOB data types BLOB CLOB etc The JRN and JRNRCV must have new attributes defined in them to handle the LOB data types where JRN and JRNRCV in the previous release 2 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Refreshing and Verifying Data cannot handle the LOB data types The Platform Pack Installer changes the journal attributes using this command RCVSIZOPT MAXOPT2 After the upgrade process completes ensure the old STRJOUR
488. o edit or change the versions of the R98403 program that copy the control tables constant tables and master tables click the Edit or Search buttons next to their respective versions 19 24 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Verifying Advanced Parameters Note If you have defined multiple locations the system will prompt you to complete sets of the Replication Setup and Data Load screens for each location 7 Click OK 19 13 Verifying Advanced Parameters If you turned off Default Advanced Parameters on the Environment selection form the Advanced Parameters form appears To verify advanced parameters 1 Custom Installation Plan Advanced Parameters fel fee fie Edit Preferences Form Window Help 18 x xX amp Ok can De on w Optio SOLE internet M Upgrade Environment Plan Name PRODUCTION Library List Name PD910 E910 Production Environment Previous Environment PD900 E900 Production Environment potesta cep nuen ippon a EnaTIn TnI nnn En nn REER M Recreate Object Mappings lable Speciicatlon ce contol Table Memes ee al M Table Conversions C None V Specification Merges Upgrade Merges IC Propenies n EE i Logic Data Source DENUDBSN1 Table Conversion Throttle E amn 1 On Advanced Parameters complete these
489. o the upgrade records in F982403 table Processing Section 2 This processing section is based on F982403 table It reports any records that fail to update 13 10 2 Upgrading F952400 Objects Using P98E1UGC You can use P98E1UGC to upgrade F952400 objects Using this program allows users to View records that have been successfully upgraded correctly and also to view any records that have issues View any errors and their suspected reasons Redo the upgrade after the UGC an identified issue has been fixed 13 10 3 Working With Upgrade UGC Objects Using W98E1UGCA You can use W98E1UGCA to view the header information for the UGC by Job Number Manual Table Conversions 13 35 Upgrading E1PAGE from Release 9 0 to Release 9 1 13 10 4 Working With Detail Upgrade Using W98E1UGCB You can use W98E1UGCB to work with detail upgrades Using this program allows users to a View all the records that have been upgraded a View additional detail on the errors After any errors on the objects are fixed the user can select Upgrade from this form This allows the upgrade process to execute without re running the R98E1UGC 13 36 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 14 Building and Testing Packages This section discusses a Section 14 1 Understanding Packages Section 14 2 Obtaining the JOK JRE m Section 14 3 Installing Application Fixes Section 14 4 Reviewing Pre Package Build Issues
490. o update data in Users should verify This report converts The report should be run tables that contain the VCF data item it does not modify the table structure It should be run in Final mode only once It can be run in Proof mode multiple times Proof mode does not perform any updates that this report has not already been run It was required if the user took the ESU for SARs 8567415 Xe 8757032 8 12 or 8820775 9 0 the data in the Volume Correction Factor VCF field of the tables listed below from 4 decimals to 5 decimals Tables containing VCF F38111 Agreements Transaction Ledger F41511 Bulk Product Transaction File F41515 Multi Meter Readings F49211 Sales Order Detail File Tag F49211Z1 Sales Order Detail Tag Unedited F49219 Sales Order Detail Tag History F4963 Load In transit F49631 Load In transit Ledger F49632 Load In transit Left on Board F49299 S O Detail Tag Ledger File in Proof mode first If the processing option to display the records is set to 1 the report will display all the records that will be updated and what the volume correction factor will be updated to If the processing option is not set to display records the total number of records in each table that will be updated is displayed Run the report in Final mode only one time regardless of the value of the processing option to display records If the report is run in Fina
491. ocation For example Data Dictionary 910ATL 3 Complete the other fields as applicable for your database and platform Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 19 Setting Up Environments 4 Click the OK button gt Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions lel Ee as 7 File Edit Preferences Form Window Help lal x vy x R R OK Can Dis Abo Form Data Source Name System 910ATL Advanced Links w Advan B OLE 8 Internet Data Source Use pe Local Data Source Data Source Type jo ee F JDBNET Data Source Data Class E System Database Platform NTSVR NT Server Sizing Database Server Name DENLeM1 7 Default Sizing SQUSSEMSDE ODBC SQUMSDE OLEDB DBZ 05 400 DBZ UDB Access Logical al Object Owner ID Database Name TNS 5 On Data Source Revisions enter the data source name for the System data source that will be used by the remote location For example Data Dictionary 910ATL 6 Complete the other fields as applicable for your database and platform 7 Click the OK button 19 12 Setting Up Environments To set up environments 19 20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up Environments 2 Custom Installation Plan Environment Selection i File Edit Preferences Window Help AEE ATES Links wW Disp S OLE Internet OK Can Dis Abo fra Calendar To configure all
492. ocess Explorer Search window to return to Process Explorer 6 Use Process Explorer to kill the identified process es Working with the Deployment Server 3 45 Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation Note If one or more of the processes is Windows Explorer explorer exe killing it may cause the computer to lock up If that happens you will need to reboot the Deployment Server machine The process Oracle exe is the local Oracle database engine If it has a file locked you can stop the service OracleServiceEILOCAL 7 If one or more of the processes locks a file in the directory you are trying to delete even after rebooting you may have to determine which service is automatically starting that process and change the service to manual startup Then reboot the Deployment Server machine and delete the directory 3 11 5 5 Verifying the Local Oracle Database Installation To verify that the installation of the local Oracle database was successful 1 Inspect the latest logs in these directories lt El_install_dir gt InstallLogs C Program Files Oracle Inventory logs 2 Resolve any issues that are identified in the logs 3 11 5 6 Deployment Server Installation Problems You cannot reinstall the local Oracle database using the Deployment Server installer if there are indications that the local Oracle database already exists The Deployment Server installer will skip the installation of the local Oracle datab
493. ode page values are set for your preferred language These values are found in the National Language Support tables in Section 1 6 Language Process Overview 21 8 Verifying Workstation Requirements To verify workstation requirements 1 2 3 Verify that the workstation hardware and software meet all requirements Install the appropriate language character set to a workstation Complete the step to verify the JDE INI settings on the Deployment Server for Interactive Runtime Install and Network Queues Complete the tasks in Chapter 8 Installing the Development Clients for Developers and System Administrators Verify that the group and user profiles are set up properly 21 9 Completing the Language Installation Once you have verified that the Enterprise Server and workstation hardware and software meet your language install requirements you can complete the installation See the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide for more information about how to transfer language specifications to the Enterprise Server 21 10 Building and Deploying Alternate Language Packages Once you have concluded the installation it is time to build and deploy the alternate language packages See Package Build in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide for the details of including a language or creating language only packages 21 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 22 FTP on the IBM
494. of any of the initial tasks for example if you need to rerun a task You use this procedure if you are running Workbench in attended mode or if you set a task break before Initial Tasks Workbench 6 10 1 Using Initial Tasks Workbench To use Initial Tasks Workbench Working With Installation Workbench 6 15 Working With Initial Tasks Workbench a Installation Workbench Initial Tasks Workbench File Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help B ox 8 ow e Blin 3 5 Find Close Seq New Prev Met Con Dis Abo V Previo B OLE internet Plan Name New Plan Status uPGovs1 0 Upgrade Plan for DV910 feo Copy Tables from Copy Tables from Copy Tables from Copy Tables from Copy Tables from XJDEO051 XJDE0020 XJDE0001 XJDE0023 R98403 XJDE0123 Duplicate Convers B9 Create Copy System Tables B9800400 Finalized B9 Row 1 On Initial Tasks Workbench click the Form menu and select Configure The tasks are performed and the Location Workbench form appears During the Initial Tasks Workbench there are two UBEs scheduled for media object Unicode Conversion if upgrading from ERP 8 0 or earlier a The R8900165 report converts the media objects stored in Business Data a The R8900165U report converts the Data Dictionary media objects The following list of error messages and the corresponding resolutions inspect the jde log for more information Error Message R
495. oft Windows version Microsoft Windows 2000 Language version Primary national language of OS 400 Keyboard layout Default keyboard layout Microsoft Windows source First optical device directory System drive 8000 MB 3 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Planning for IBM i Integration Field Description NTFS Convert system drive to NTFS Installation source drive 500 MB Message logging Do not log messages Event log Log these messages System a Security Application Synchronization Synchronize Microsoft Windows date and time with OS 400 date and time every 30 minutes Propagate domain users Propagate domain users using this server Restricted device resources Do not restrict tape or optical devices Client license type Each computer has a client license Terminal Services Do not install Terminal Services Domain role Server Server domain name Join this workgroup workgroup TCP IP local domain name Use the configured OS 400 local domain name Private LAN For the private LAN between Microsoft Windows and OS 400 use the generated IP addresses TCP IP port Use these TCP IP values for Port 1 IP address 10 230 14 90 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 10 223 1 124 TCP IP name server Use the name servers that are configured for OS 400 Clustering Do not use clustering it is not s
496. ogs which contain logging for predefined package specs For example ConfigureDV910FAspec log m X JDEdwards E910 Detachxxx log Where xxx denotes that there are several of these logs which contain logging for predefined package specs For example DetachDV910FAspec log See Also For OEE specific logs refer to Section 3 11 5 1 2 OEE Logs in this chapter 3 40 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Troubleshooting Deployment Server Installation 3 11 3 Configuration Files Note This section is provided for reference You are not required to manually configure these files because the Deployment Server installer configures the ini files appropriately for the OEE local database The data source definitions for OEE are defined in these configuration files jde ini jdbj ini The following lists some of the settings within the various configuration files that are related to the local database jde ini DB SYSTEM SETTINGS Type E LOBFlag Y DB SYSTEM SETTINGS SECONDARY Type E LOBFlag Y jdbj ini The jdbj ini file specifies location of the tnsnames ora file The jdbj ini file also specifies the JDBC driver for Oracle as ojdbc5 jar which replaces the version classes12 jar used in prior releases of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Q DBj BOOTSTRAP DATA SOURCE databaseType E lob true JDBJ SPEC DATA SOURCE databaseType E lob true JDBj JDBC DRIVERS ORACLE oracle
497. ol Table Workbench 6 7 Changing the Status of the Control Table Workbench Tasks To change the status of a Control Table Workbench task 1 gt BN Enter GH961 in the Fast Path field to open the System Installation Tools menu Double click Custom Installation Plan On Work with Installation Plans select your installation plan On the Row menu click Expand The plan components including the Control Table Merge are displayed Choose the task whose status you want to change On the Row menu click Disable Enable or Complete see the list below The task status changes a Disable Displays a status of 70 to indicate the task is incomplete and will not be rerun Enable Displays a status of 10 to indicate the task will be rerun a Complete 6 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Starting Installation Workbench Displays a status of 60 to indicate the task is complete and will not be rerun 6 8 Verify and Update P98MOQUE Settings To verify and update the P9SMOQUE settings 1 2 3 4 Log into Release 9 1 as JDE in the JOEPLAN environment Enter P98SMOQUE in the Fast Path field Click Find Ensure your P9I8SMOQUE grid lines are set to point to the location of the previous release media objects Click OK 6 9 Starting Installation Workbench Caution Do not lock the Deployment Server during Installation Workbench processes for example with a screen saver password doing so p
498. om Release 9 1 0 0 eens 11 10 11 4 4 1 Adding an Entry for a Remote Database Directory for Vertex 11 11 11 5 Enabling CRM Functionallity ccceeccccesssesesescensesesescsssesesesescsesesesescsessseececscsssnsneseeenes 11 11 11 5 1 Enabling CRM on the CRM Mobile Client ccccccccccsssssetesceceesssestsneteseeceeesesssnenens 11 12 11 5 2 Enabling CRM on the Enterprise Server 0 0 0 0 eee ce sessessesesesesesssesesenenesesees 11 12 11 6 Enabling Verity Enhanced Search Capability eeseesesessssseseseseessseesessneseesesens 11 12 11 7 Working with the Data Dictionary eee ee ceeeeeeesessseseesesesesseseseseseseeesees 11 13 11 7 1 Recreating Replicated Data Dictionary Files ccccc cece eceeeeeeceeeeeeeenseenenes 11 13 14 8 Working with SETOWAUT oeiee i nn nE EE RERE ER E e ie overs edb wtses 11 13 11 9 UBE Performance SQL Package Location sssssssssesissessertistisstsrtssersiesisstsnsesiesiesresnesnes 11 14 Working With Signon Security 12 1 Setting Up Signon Security ienser eih swe eie e e a eaaeo Eaa a aa Wile Mea ees 12 1 12 2 Enabling Server Side Signon Security s se ssssssessessissisissessetinsississsesieninsisntnsteniesisstsnteees 12 5 12 3 Enabling Client Side Signon Security sesssssessssissesssstisissessestersissesssnnterinsesntnntesiesresressentes 12 5 12 4 Setting Up JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Single Sign on ssse sessssesssssiesississssssesieressesseenees 12 5 Manual Table Conversions 13 1 Runn
499. ompare as the final step before checking in the changes to ensure that you made all of the changes you intended to make In this way you can also make sure that you did not move a control or make a property change unintentionally As an administrator you might use FDA Compare to see the changes between a software update and the pristine or current implementation If you have performed a number of customized modifications you can more carefully implement the software changes without fear of ruining the customization See Also a The section entitled JD Edwards FDA Compare in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Software Updates Guide http docs oracle com cd E24705_01 doc 91 e24260 compare_ tools htm BABBFUFF 16 3 5 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne ER Compare JD Edwards ER Compare provides a detailed on screen comparison of event rules You can change the target object your local version within the utility by moving lines directly from the source You can also remove or disable lines In addition to providing an on screen comparison you can select to print a report detailing the changes as well See Also a The section entitled JD Edwards ER Compare in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Software Updates Guide 16 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Using JD Edwards Compare and Merge Tools http docs oracle com cd E24705_01 doc 91 e24260 compare_ tools htm BABJCAED Retrofitting Custom Modifications
500. on 15 3 Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 Section 15 4 Setting Up an Upgrade Plan for the Production Environment m Section 15 5 Taking the Production Environment Offline m Section 15 6 Running the Installation Plan for the Production Environment a Section 15 7 Testing the Production Package a Section 15 8 Bringing the Production Environment Online 15 1 Understanding the Upgrade of the Production Environment Use this procedure after all testing has been successfully completed This procedure brings your live production environment from the previous release to the newly upgraded release which in this document is Release 9 1 In a normal upgrade there is an upgrade environment such as development or CRP PY and then there is the live environment such as production During the first phase of an upgrade all modifications and customizations that are to be kept for the new release are transferred into the upgrade environment The upgrade then converts the central objects with the table conversions and specification merge business data table conversions and control table merges Once this upgrade is successfully tested the production environment is ready to be brought up The new production environment borrows the already successfully merged central objects containing all your mods and customizations and can borrow the successfully merged control tables as well This leaves the business data table conversions
501. on Workbench 6 19 Configuring Your Environments gt Installation Workbench Data Source Workbench g File Edit Preferences Form Window Help 8 x x j F J Ww amp R Links a Close Seq New Prev Mext Con Dis Abo eio BOLE B internet Plan Name UPGDV910 Upgrade Plan for DV910 New Status po Al a Source Status Description Table Bus s Data PROD Finalized Central Objects PD910 Finalized Control Tables Prod Finalized Data Dictionary 910 Finalized DNITHP21 Finalized DNITHP21 910 Server Map Finalized DNITHP21 Logic Finalized DNITHP21 RTE Finalized DNITHP 21 XAPI Finalized LOCAL Finalized Local PD910 Finalized Object Librarian 910 Finalized Row 1 4 2 Select Configure from the Form menu Your data sources are configured and the Environment Workbench form appears When the system has configured your data sources it updates Detail Status to 60 and changes the Status Description from Validated to Installed 6 13 Configuring Your Environments Environment Workbench copies the F0094 F00941 and F00942 tables as well as the F986101 table for each environment from your Planner data source to your System 910 data source It then updates the F98403 table to indicate completion Depending on the plan settings it also runs a batch application to copy new generic text and to create and populate Object Manag
502. on activities in the detail area 2 On the Form menu select Configure to launch the workbench 3 After all remote location activities are complete click Next Working With Installation Workbench 6 63 Finishing Installation Workbench 6 21 Finishing Installation Workbench Note In order to avoid issues with the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Data Dictionary after an Upgrade if you are running Table Conversions on the Enterprise Server the Installation Workbench displays the following Message a Message Mil Es Before using the upgraded environment you must delete the qibltbl ddtext dddict from the target path code on the enterprise server PYS10 Failure to do this usually causes data corruption due to customized Display Decimals This message warns that before using the upgraded environment you must delete the glbltbl ddtext and dddict spec files from the target path code on the Enterprise Server Failure to do this usually causes data corruption due to customized Display Decimals At this point you should delete these spec files as instructed and then click the OK button in the Message to continue To finish the Installation Workbench 1 From Congratulations on the Form menu click Finish 2 From Work with Installation Plans click Close Note Post Install Procedures still need to be completed from a client See Chapter 11 Performing Post Upgrade Tasks 6 64 JD Edwards Enterp
503. on and Configuration Guide JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Package Management Guide 8 2 Preparing for Development To prepare for the installat Client Installation ion of Release 9 1 on Development Clients you must modify the Development Client JDE INI on the Deployment Server and the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system administrator must create a user profile for every user Installing the Development Clients for Developers and System Administrators 8 1 Preparing for Development Client Installation before that user can log on to Release 9 1 You must also copy the configured tnsnames ora from the oracle E1local directory to the client directory on the Deployment Server as specified in the next section of this guide entitled Section 8 3 Working With Development Client Installation Note Refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Development Client Installation and Configuration Guide for additional details on installing the Development Client Prerequisites a Uninstall the previous software version on each Development Client before installing the new version See Chapter 27 Deinstalling the Software for more information about uninstalling previous releases of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Before installing Release 9 1 on a Development Client used for development you must install the Microsoft Visual C Compiler The specific version of the compiler is detailed in the Minimum Technical Requirements MTRs Refer
504. on program is based on the Oracle Universal Installer OUI You can use the OUI to Install the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Client on a local or remote Deployment Server This installation includes attaching and importing the Planner and Workbench tables into the local database on the Deployment Server Also beginning with Release 9 1 only the Oracle Enterprise Edition OEE database is supported as the local database on the Deployment Server 3 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Local Oracle Enterprise Edition OEE Considerations Note The Oracle Universal Installer OUI requires the Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 VS2008SP1 Run Time Refer to the section of this guide entitled Section 3 3 Installing Microsoft Windows Visual Studio A local OEE database must exist before you can run the OUI based Deployment Server installer The JD Edwards program called InstallManager is used to start the installation of the local OEE database No separate end user licensing is required for installation of the local OEE database It should be noted however that the installed OEE database is not fully functional relative to the commercial versions of the Oracle databases that are available For additional considerations refer to Section 3 5 Local Oracle Enterprise Edition OEE Considerations Caution If you are upgrading to JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Release 9 1 this is the or
505. on software provided by service packs Tip The recommended configuration is Microsoft Windows 2000 Server d drive 500 MB Microsoft Windows Server 2003 d drive 800 MB Working with the Deployment Server 3 3 Planning for IBM i Integration 3 Storage space is required for the Release 9 1 code where the total space required depends on the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne files and on the number of pathcodes you install See Before You Begin the Installation or Upgrade of this manual to calculate your Release 9 1 exact requirements for the size of the Deployment Server The first two disk drives Microsoft Windows system and installation source spaces get created and linked to the network server description during the INSWNTSVR command The Release 9 1 drive will need to be created and linked to the network server description after the INSWNTSVR command and Microsoft Windows Server installation completes Keep in mind that the total amount of disk allocated to these network storage spaces is instantly unavailable to the IBM i so you need to size correctly Track disk utilization for the network server storage spaces in WRKDSKSTS or IBM i Navigator both before and after the installation See the redbooks mentioned for additional details on creating and linking storage spaces The instructions for setting up the operating environment for this Deployment Server prior to installing Release 9 1 are in the IBM IBM i Information Center
506. ontrol tables It then updates the Table Conversion Scheduler table F98405 to indicate completion and writes a conversion log record to the Table Conversion History Log table F984052 Note The number of control tables to be merged varies depending on the upgrade being performed Your Control Table Workbench form may list fewer or more tables than shown in the figure above If you used Solution Explorer task tables in a previous release disable R9000C before running the Control Table Workbench 6 15 1 Language Installation This information applies to users installing an alternate language The distributed language tables consist of control tables system tables and data dictionary tables The 6 22 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Control Table Merges UDC tables contain only the desired language text while the Solution Explorer text and data dictionary files add the desired language on top of the already installed English records Control Table Workbench also copies the language text from the Oracle tablespace that contains the language text into the control table database and central object database You use this procedure when running Workbench in attended mode or if a task break is set before Control Table Workbench 6 15 2 Configuring Control Tables To configure your control tables 1 On Control Table Workbench Release 9 1 displays all control table merges in the deta
507. opy Copy to existing environment File Edit Preferences Form lj x x r inks 4 Can Prev Next Dis Abo vw Prev SJOLE S Internet Source Environment Dvat0 Target Environment P0910 Source Path Code Dva10 Target Path Code PD910 Source Package Dva10FA Target Package PD910FB V Generate OCM in System Server Map Peto ST Code Central Objects Copy Metadata Repository ly Copy Contral onjacts C Rename Metadata Repository M Copy Object Librarian Deneupynackage Z Copy Versions M Configure Package Manifest Jv Copy ESU History Directory copies Business Data Control Tables IV Copy Path Code Pkg dir local V Copy Business Data Jv Cony Peo Adri Dti pkg int V Copy Control Tables IV Copy Path Code Pkg dir server For example if you choose to do all the database copies using database system tools you would set the copy options like this 15 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Setting Up an Upgrade Plan for the Production Environment p Environment Copy Copy to existing environment Biel Ee File Edit Preferences Form 2 x A E u inks a leet Prey Net Dis Abo AARGH B oLE internet Source Environment Dva10 Target Environment P0910 Source Path Code Dva10 Target Path Code P0910 Source Package Dva 10FA Target Package PD910FB V Generate OCM in System Server Map ET Code m Central Object
508. or the given environment are verified 3 Enter O for Proof mode or 1 to recreate all the indexes on selected tables if any missing or mismatch indexes or 2 to create only the missing and mismatch indexes on selected tables The default is proof mode 4 Enter 0 for a summary report of tables with invalid indexes or 1 to print all tables The default is to skip tables with correct indexes Method Four if your business data is Unicode The advantage of this method is that the RSTxxx commands all do multiprocessing while building the indexes a Save the indexes for the table marked with Defer Index from the pristine library For example SAVOBJ F0911_ PS910DTA SAVF X b Restore the indexes to the PRODDTA library For example RSTOBJ OBJ ALL SAVLIB PS910DTA DEV SAVF SAVF X OPTION NEW RSTLIB PRODDTA Method Five if your business data is not Unicode such as when upgrading from Xe a Temporarily create the table in another non Unicode datasource using OMW in 9 1 For example another such non Unicode datasource is Control Tables Prod b Save the indexes from the non Unicode datasource For example SAVOBJ F0911_ PRODCTL SAVF X c Restore the indexes from the SAVF of PRODCTL to the PRODDTA library For example 6 50 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Obsolete Tables RSTOBJ OBJ ALL RSTLIB PRODDTA SAVLIB PRODCTL DEV SAVF
509. or the plan s in the data selection Update the Plan Status 10 60 Enter 30 25 1 2 How to Read the Report Use the Installation Planner Validation report summary section to review basic information about the installation upgrade or cumulative update the number of records validated and the types of processes run Review the main body of the report to verify that each data source machine and package build in the plan was created successfully To verify each detail line should have the value Record Validated in the far right column The report includes the status of the following record types a Location a Data sources listed by database type a Environments a Path codes a Object Configuration Manager OCM a Machines a Table conversions Control table merges Specification table merges a Packages 25 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Environment Database Creation Report R98403 A summary should appear at the end of the report verifying that all records were validated and the plan status was updated to 30 25 2 Table and Index Creation R98407 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne creates a report for each environment that is being upgraded It creates new tables and indexes and recreates changed tables and indexes based on the F9698710 and F9698712 tables It also reads the F9843 table to regenerate additional tables that do not have spec changes or to prevent regeneration of tables or
510. orders ave been setupin job is not run none ype Revisions Or the Document Type of the programs that by running F40039 you must run R48803 Revisi P40040 tor data int C ion Xx in order to correct that Revisions i enter data into onversion from Xe before running F4801 F4801T for R31P40039 If there are a document type in your R31P40039 to convert example large number of order types tables See the Setup A work orders Manufacturing Work to set up the UBE may be instructions in the Order Ent fticient This should Enterprise Asset rder Entry more efficient This shou Equipment Order be set up once prior to the Management Shop Floor and the Engineering Project Management Guides for more details Note See the table below for information regarding the values to enter for the processing options Entry Service Order Entry etc are able to function following steps Manual Table Conversions 13 7 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R8903B571A To set next unique key The table upgrade This job must be run This report adds updates id for FO3B571 when plan should be for Autodebit an entry in the F00022 table upgrading from successfully processing to for the F03B571 table and XE ERP 8 0 completed Suspend function correctly sets the next unique key ID all Automatic Debit equal to the next auto debit processin
511. orted There must be enough space on one disk drive for all logic components During the install you cannot choose to have Printqueue and build areas installed onto another location Additionally you must have sufficient disk space on either the Enterprise Server or a separate Database Server for the scripts and the database components After you have completed an installation you can manually relocate some components of the Enterprise Server on different drives such as printqueue location build areas package location and BI Publisher storage Additionally when using multiple foundations it is possible to use different drives for each set of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne pathcodes However it is important to note that for purposes of the initial installation having the correct amount of space available but not on a single drive is not adequate Up to date disk space requirements are listed in the Release 9 1 Minimum Technical Requirements Refer to Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications Note While the disk space tables accurately represent the disk space requirements the actual requirements for an installation will be greater due to the requirement for temporary space 2 10 Cleaning Up Disk Space on the Servers Make sure you have enough disk space before starting the upgrade You may delete some directories from previous releases to increase space on your system Note Parallel Rele
512. ory record of the software Planner 910 Detail History build program P9622 Stores the status of the build on the operation of that record when the System Local package is finished F9631 System 910 Software Package Detail Stores the detail information for the assembly process of package build Stores the object Planner 910 F names foundation name data name or helps System Local name F9650 System 910 Machine Master Holds the default information regarding all machines used by JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Planner 910 System Local F9651 System 910 Machine Detail Holds specific information about each machine defined in the machine master table Planner 910 b y record type System Local F9652 System 910 Deployment Group Specifies groups that can be used by the Header Release 9 1 administrator for deploying Planner 910 packages System Local F9653 System 910 Deployment Group Detail Stores the users that belong to one or more Definitions groups that were defined in the deployment Planner 910 an header file In addition groups of groups can System Local be defined here F9654 System 910 Deployment Location Enables definition of one or more locations for Definitions deployment This table is used primarily in Planner 910 KA multitier deployment System Local F9660 System 910 Task Breaks Planner 910 System Local F96600 System 910 Deployment Features Planner 910 System Local F96601 System 910 Deployment Regis
513. ose Custom installation on the preceding screen Select Installation Type proceed with the following steps Oracle Universal Installer Available Product Components ie E3 ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Available Product Components EnterpriseOne Deployment Server The following are components that you can install as part of EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Which of these components do you want to install O BEnterpriseOne Deployment Server 9 1 0 0 0 EnterpriseOne Deployment Client 9 1 0 0 0 EnterpriseOne Files 9 1 0 0 0 Development Environment 9 1 0 0 0 Prototype Environment 9 1 0 0 0 Pristine Environment 9 1 0 0 0 Production Environment 9 1 0 0 0 Expand All Collapse All Select All Deselect All l Show all components including required dependencies D ED CD 3 30 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Installing the Deployment Server 11 Note The Available Product Components screen and subsequent screens until the Summary are displayed if you chose Custom installation on Select Installation Type in Step 7 On Available Product Components EnterpriseOne Deployment Server enable the checkboxes to select these features components you want to install EnterpriseOne Deployment Client The selection for EnterpriseOne Deployment Client is mandatory in order to select other components If you do not select this component you cannot select any other components This installs the
514. ote Business Data data sources are specific to the environment and pathcode 5 When you ran Copy Plan some fields were changed to reflect the previous release values Change the following fields Field Description Data Source Type Enter I for IBM iSeries Access iSeries Database Name Enter the name of the data source For example Business Data TEST 6 Click OK Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 41 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 4 11 3 Setting Up the Data Source for Central Objects Caution You should change the data source if Central Objects are not on an IBM i machine To set up the Central Objects data source p Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions Bll File Edit Preferences Form Window Help lal x vy x amp Li nks a m OK Cana Dis ARG w Advan SJOLE Internet i Data Source Name Central Objects DV910 aiec Data Source Use pe oral Dala Saures Data Source Type J DB2 UDB on 05 400 F JDBNET Data Source Data Class fc Central Objects Platform fas4o0 IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name DS2 GQUMSDE ODBC SGUMSDEOLEDB Oracle wl D200 Access Loaical Library Name convar 0 ODBC Data Source Name Central Objects DY910 ae kJ H w 1 On Data Source Setup verify the information for your Central Objects data source 2 Click OK Verify that y
515. oubleshooting Tips The following troubleshooting tips are designed to help avoid known issues with the package build assembly and deployment process Review these tips when working through the process a When naming your packages do not use these names CLIENT a SERVER a Verify the assemble and build processes completed After entering the package information on both the Assembly and Build forms click the End icon to save the information a Verify setting on the package definition screen When selecting servers on the Build Definition form ensure that a check mark appears next to each server selected If no check mark appears highlight the server in the grid and click Select a Recompress the parent packages After building an update package that updates the parent package you must recompress the parent package This step does not occur automatically a Verify the location of server packages When building an update server package the specified parent package must be stored under the package directory on the server If the parent package is not under the package directory the update package does not build 14 6 Building an Alternate Language Package A package represents a copy of the central objects at a point in time It contains replicated objects that Release 9 1 reads at run time If custom modifications or text overrides have been made at the time that a software upgrade is performed or to deploy development ch
516. our Central Objects data source is Central Objects lt Path Code gt Note Central Objects data sources are specific to the pathcode 5 42 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade advanced Set up OU x x amp Links i ae E ee w Displ s OLE Internet F Clustered J LOB Data Type Support V Unicode M AS 400 BLOB Support AML Formatted vvortow Jv Use Julian Dates Supporter Locking Updates M OCM Data Source J Use Table Owner i 7 3 On Advanced Set Up because the central objects data source must be Unicode verify the Unicode setting is checked For IBM i ensure the AS 400 BLOB Support setting is checked 5 4 11 4 Setting Up the Data Source for Control Tables To set up the Control Tables data source a Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions Eel Advanced Pon q File Edit Preferences Form Window Help 18 x x W Links w Advan BJOLE B internet OK Can Dis Abo Data Source Name Control Tables Test Data Source Use pe Local Data Source Data Source Type J DB2 UDB on 08 400 M JDBNET Data Source Data Class i Control Tables Platform fasaoo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name DS2 SGUMEDE ODBC BAlUMEDEGLEDE Gracie Daz UDB mees Monica Library Name fresTcTL ODBC Data Source Name Contra Tables Test
517. our database and server use Installation Workbench to allocate and configure software and resources When using the Installation Workbench for adding servers the Table Conversion and the Specification Merge workbenches do not appear because they are not needed When adding a server plan for a HTML Web Server using the P9654A program you must add all environments prefixed with J to the Enterprise Server and generate a Server Map data source 20 30 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 21 Creating a Language Only Installation Plan This section discusses Section 21 1 Understanding Language Only Installation Plans Section 21 2 Reviewing Requirements for a Language Installation Section 21 3 Installing Languages on the Deployment Server Section 21 4 Running Installation Planner Section 21 6 Running Installation Workbench Section 21 7 Verifying Enterprise Server Requirements Section 21 8 Verifying Workstation Requirements Section 21 9 Completing the Language Installation Section 21 10 Building and Deploying Alternate Language Packages 21 1 Understanding Language Only Installation Plans To make the language only installation as easy and quick as possible you should use the procedures in this chapter when installing an alternate language or multiple languages for the first time These tasks will help you organize the pre installation preparation required for a language only installatio
518. overable tax amount Voucher Match NRTA foreign non activity from the time recoverable tax amount of the upgrade FNRT and base company through successful currency code BCRC The completion of this Purchase Order number job RPPO is left padded with zeros R89069116 To convert F069116 None This table The following fields were from XE conversion added to F069116 LVPT and populates the new PHISH After this program field PHISH is run PHISH will contain 1 LVPT will remain blank R8908601C To convert F08601 The processing This table Country CTR and Incident from XE ERP 8 0 option of this job conversion checks Occurred on Employer s should be set based for and handles the Premises ONPRM on whether only JD following scenarios columns were added to Edwards World was LP ti F08601 used to enter Health 7 _ TOCessing Option is set to 1 indicates and Safety information from the that yes only JD Edwards World was source environment used to enter Health A processing option d Safet value of 1 indicates an aa information that JD Edwards World was used while a processing option value of 0 or Blank indicates that JD Edwards World was not used exclusively for information entry and JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications may have been used to enter Health and Safety information 2 Processing option is set to 0 or Blank indicates that no JD Edwards World was not used exclusively to enter Health and Safety In
519. oyment Tools menu by right clicking the Package Assembly application P9601 and selecting prompt for values 14 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Assembling a Package that Contains Published Business Services U Processing Options Defaults 1 Yersion Selection Default blank Select Specific Versions 1 Include AIXJDE ZJDE Versions 2 Include All Versions Express Director Mode blank Express 0 Director 1 Express Business Services blank Do not build 0 Donot build 1 Build x Cancel 2 Set the processing option entitled Business Services to a value of 1 Note This processing option is blank by default 3 Click OK See Also a To begin the assembly process refer to the chapter entitled Assembling Packages in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Package Management Guide Building a Package with Published Business Services in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Package Management Guide Deploying the Package to the Business Services Server in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Package Management Guide Building and Testing Packages 14 7 Assembling a Package that Contains Published Business Services 14 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 15 Upgrading the Production Environment This chapter discusses Section 15 1 Understanding the Upgrade of the Production Environment a Section 15 2 General Checklist and Considerations Secti
520. padding R05041 To add data items to None To create a record in F06041 Future Data Future Data History Tracking when upgrading from 8 12 or below F06041 and F08041 FieldsF08041 History for each new data Tracking Fields These item added to the tables are pre populated F060116 For records added set respective flags in tables ICDE XCOD N with records that the client may toggle to on or off for tracking history In 90 2 new fields were added that will be shipped with the data set For customers upgrading from say 812 to 90 the ube would be run to add the two new records but maintain the existing data set that the customer may have changed This UBE should ensure that the client s preferences are not lost while gaining the ability to modify the two new records Manual Table Conversions 13 25 Upgrading from 8 12 or Below Upgrading from 8 12 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R98305V When upgrading from None To convert all None 8 12 existing Web Only versions to full versions R8915L101A To change GT15L101 This post install UBE The purpose of this This conversion program Key when upgrading must be run AFTER Table Conversion is does not need to be run from 8 12 or below the R8915L101 TC has to enable customers unless the Media Objects completed to convert existing Storage F00165 table successfully media objects in the contains very spec
521. pgrade 18 3 Upgrading the Production Environment 18 7 Upgrading the Production Environment If you are upgrading the production environment follow the instruction for creating a production plan Keep in mind the notes for Installation Planner and repeat the steps above for removing the listed tables from the Table Conversion Planner 18 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 19 Creating a Remote Installation Plan This section discusses a Section 19 1 Understanding Remote Installation Plans m Section 19 2 Starting Installation Planner a Section 19 3 Entering Information in Installation Planner m Section 19 4 Entering Plan Location Information Section 19 5 Entering Deployment Server Information a Section 19 6 Entering Enterprise Server Information a Section 19 7 Enter Data Source Information for Server Map a Section 19 8 Entering HTML Web Server Information a Section 19 9 Entering Data Server Information Section 19 10 Replicating Information to Remote Locations a Section 19 11 Entering Shared Data Source Information a Section 19 12 Setting Up Environments m Section 19 13 Verifying Advanced Parameters a Section 19 14 Setting Up Data Sources for Environment a Section 19 15 Remote Location Packages m Section 19 16 Finalizing the Installation Plan a Section 19 17 Concluding the Planner Validation Report 19 1 Understanding Remote Installation P
522. plates tables using a combination of information from the new report director templates tables and the change tables in the planner database The merge runs during the Installation Workbench phase The report director templates tables are F91400 F91410 F91420 and F91430 9 1 8 Working with Tips of the Day Merge Note This merge is for upgrades and cumulative updates only The Tips of the Day Merge R96915002 program updates the customer specific tips of the day tables using a combination of information from the new tips of the day tables 9 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Working with Specification Merges and change tables in the planner database The merge runs during the Installation Workbench phase The tips of the day tables are F91500 and F91510 9 1 9 Working with Workflow Merge Note This merge is for cumulative updates only The Workflow Merge R98800 program merges the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne workflow data shipped with a new release with the customer workflow data The merge runs during the Installation Workbench phase The following list shows the workflow tables F98800 F98800D F98800T F98810 F98810D F98811 F98830 F98840 F98845 Note The workflow merge may overwrite your customer defined data as follows Ifyou have modified a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne workflow process and the new JD Edwards EnterpriseOne workflow process has been changed
523. plications Upgrade Guide Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i Wi Oracle Universal Installer Welcome ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Welcome The Oracle Universal Installer guides you through the installation and configuration of your Oracle products Click Installed Products to see all installed products Deinstall Products J About Oracle Universal Installer uaa eD C 7 On Welcome click the Next button Working with the Platform Pack on the IBM i 4 11 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i 4 Oracle Universal Installer Select Installation Type ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Select Installation Type EnterpriseOne IBM i Platform Pack 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 What type of installation do you want Custom The program will be installed with the components you choose Recommended for the advanced users Product Languages D 4 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i Oracle Universal Installer Select Installation Type FTE xi ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Select Installation Type EnterpriseOne IBM i Platform Pack 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 What type of installation do you want C Typical 214MB The program will be installed with the components you choose Recommended for the advanced users Product
524. ponent field configured items tables set the SRCN in F4801T and reassigns the serialized components Convert PARS field and reset the parent work order numbers or generating orders configured work for the configured item through Customer order s parent work orders Service and Warranty If the client doesnot number to the or Equipment and use serialized immediate higher Maintenance components or work related work order with configured in the configured items these item s construction processing options should be set as blank R8948164A To convert F48164 Requires that table To properly convert The media object structure Media Objects from conversions for old Knowledge Base for Failure Analysis has XE ERP 8 0 for old F00165 and F48164 media objects If this changed Previously the Knowledge Base completed is not run that media objects were stored in successfully information is not one structure Now the available for use by media object structure is the new Failure split into three separate Analysis structures applications R8930006D To convert F30006 R8930006C must Blank values inthe The primary key of the Work Center Master have completed work center branch F30006 table was changed from XE ERP 8 0 successfully plant field are no from Work Center MCU to longer supported because application P3003 and P3112 validate the work center and the branch plant being used Branch Plant MMCU and Work Center in order to support the con
525. ppercase when run to ensure all for Invoice Format upgrading from Invoice Format Code INVF to be uppercase XE ERP 8 0 Codes within only Service and Contract Billing are uppercase and consistent across all tables that store this code R8908601 To update HH05 in None The table conversion The OSHA 300 is now F08601 when R8908601 changes consistent with the one on upgrading from the data for HH05in the OSHA website The XE ERP 8 0 F08601 number of injury illness Injury Ilness Case types has been reduced to 5 Master from 1 7 to 01 05 from 7 This is a legislative change 13 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Upgrading from XE ERP 8 0 Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R080101 To set Address Book None This job should be Many tables used in the AT3 and synchronize run to ensure workforce management ALPH and SSN for HR synchronization of suite have ALPH and SSN related Address Book the ALPH and SSN fields The address book records fields between the table also has these two F0101 and the fields In an effort to keep F060116 F08401 and the duplicate data consistent F08901 across the database a flag in the F0101 AT3 is set to a Y to indicate that changes should be updated to these additional tables Previously the synchronization was based solely on search type this method was deemed in adequate because search type is somewha
526. pplications w Recent Reports w Favorites v Media Object Queue Revisions B X B tools Queue Name Help Content Queue Path On Line http www orac k comytec hnetwork doc ume nation ede nt 098 Queue Path Off line http www orack comytec hnetwork doc ume ntation dede nt c9s Type 09 PeopleBooks Help Queue On Line Access Type Read Write Off Line Access Type Read Write 6 On Media Object Queue Revisions complete these fields a Queue Path On Line Enter this value http www oracle com technetwork documentation jdedent 098169 html Queue Path Off line Enter the same value as the preceding field which is http www oracle com technetwork documentation jdedent 098169 html Type Enter the value 09 The Type field description changes to PeopleBooks Help Queue sagas PISMOque Work With Media Object Queues Query All Records vi RIO ew 42 T X tom B tools Records 1 2 Help Customize Grid a amp o Queue path Queue Path On Line Queue Name On Line Offline Type Description Access Help http www oracle com technetwork documentation jdedent 098169 html _http www oracle com technetwork documentation jdedent 098169 html 09 PeopleBooks Help Queue Help Content http www oracle com technetwork documentation jdedent 098169 html _http www oracle com technetwork documentation jdedent 098169 html 09 PeopleBooks Help Queue lt 7 On Work With Media Object Queues enter H
527. print If the value in the Report Name field is ALL the system populates the Version Name field with the default value of ALL and makes the field unavailable for subsequent modification Environment JD Edwards EnterpriseOne provides a default value for this field based on the environment that you are currently logged onto Enter ALL for all environments You can change this information Printer Name Enter the name of your printer Host Name Enter the name of the host server where reports will be processed The visual assist displays the appropriate host names based on the printer name you select To use this printer for all hosts in your environment enter ALL Working With the Enterprise Server 7 13 Enabling Multiple Concurrent Table Conversions Field Description Object Status Define the new printer as the default printer by changing its status to active If an error occurs it means that another printer is currently the active default Change the original default printer to inactive before making the new printer active Change multiple statuses from the Work With Default Printers form as explained at the end of this task Click OK and then click Cancel to access the Work With Default Printers form To change the status of a default printer select a default record and from the Row menu select Change Status If another printer is already set as the active default an error occurs To change the original de
528. program UPDATE QUSRSYS QAQQINI SET QQVAL 10000 WHERE QQPARM LOB_LOCATOR_THRESHOLD Sign out of the IBM i Navigator and make sure the QZDASOINIT job is terminated This is required because a new database connection must be started with the new values for QZDASOINIT 2 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Verifying Software and Hardware Requirements 2 8 2 Setting up Your IBM i This section contains these tasks a Setting Up AS 400 TCP IP Services Setting Up a Network Share for IBM i Root Starting the EDRSQL Service 2 8 2 1 Setting Up AS 400 TCP IP Services Use this procedure to set up the TCP IP services on your IBM i O erled Newslog a annnannnsninannninnnannannnrnninnnnnana ONEONE EE File Edt View Help 7bc00 8 SHS 1 In IBM i Navigator open the node for your IBM i machine and drill down to Network Servers TCP IP and right click on IBM i NetServer and select Properties Before You Begin the Upgrade 2 13 Verifying Software and Hardware Requirements General Advanced WINS Configuration Subsystems IBM iSeries Support for Windows Network Neighborhood Current settings Start when TCP IP is started Yes Server name QDNITSAS3 Sllow iSeries NetServer access using the system name No Domain name 102F77E Description 05 400 Logon server role None Authentication method Encrypted passwords OK Cancel Help 2 On IBM i NetServer File Sh
529. r database machine environment 1 6 2 1 Unicode Unicode specifies that the data stored in the data source is in Unicode format For installs all data sources default to Unicode For DB2 400 the code page is stored at the table level Therefore the Unicode attribute must be consistent within a data source that is within a library Note that the code page still must be set to the correct value even though the data sources may all be Unicode The Unicode flag only indicates what column type is used 1 18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Language Process Overview to store character data in a Unicode database For example for DB2 400 it indicates GRAPHIC VARGRAPHIC with CCSID 13488 is used Refer to the following section for the code page settings See Also JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Unicode Data Conversion Guide for information on how to convert data to Unicode JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Development Standards for Business Function Programming Guide for information on how to convert Business Functions to support Unicode text strings JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Flat File Conversion Guide for information on how to convert Flat Files to Unicode 1 6 2 2 Code Page Settings You should use the code page settings in this guide The correct code page should be set when the database is created 1 6 2 2 1_DB2 400 Code Page Settings The DB2 400 character set CCSID for the database needs to be set correctly
530. r or reader applications are delivered with the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Release 9 1 installation Microsoft Internet Explorer provides a An option for a Web like menu view within JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Explorer a An option for an Internet connection capability directly from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Explorer interface 8 4 Understanding User Profiles and Languages Note Release 9 1 supports group preferences for user profile Development Client configuration and environment assignment For user and group profiles you should use the preloaded users to perform the installation process The system administrator needs to create a user profile before the user can log on to Release 9 1 Installing the Development Clients for Developers and System Administrators 8 5 Understanding User Profiles and Languages All users are assigned a language preference code within the user profile The language preference code field specifies which language is presented on the applicable form or report You can are to be organized and For languages the JDE set up your users and groups when determining how groups what preferences each group shared to have INI on the Windows based Deployment Server are updated automatically For multiple language usage both the Enterprise Server and Development Client JD being installed E INIjde ini need to be modified for the preferred language Existing user profile
531. r portalite index html Performing Post Upgrade Tasks 11 5 Configuring JD Edwards EnterpriseOne for Use with Vertex Quantum Tax Applications Explorer Parameter Description ExplorerStart Defines the Explorer start mode Values are INTERNET This is the default value When you start Solution Explorer the system displays the Internet view first TASK When you start Solution Explorer the system displays the last task view the user viewed To display a specific task view use this syntax ExplorerStart TASK xx where xx is the task ID of the task view 11 4 Configuring JD Edwards EnterpriseOne for Use with Vertex Quantum Tax Applications This topic describes how to configure JD Edwards EnterpriseOne to use the Vertex Quantum tax applications If you do not use these applications with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne skip this section Release 9 1 can be used with the following Vertex Quantum tax applications a Vertex Quantum for Payroll Tax a Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax The Vertex Quantum applications should be installed on your system before starting the configuration tasks Note The Vertex Quantum applications can be used with the Indexed Sequential Access Method ISAM database or Oracle database for either of the Vertex Quantum applications or the SQL Server database for Vertex Quantum for Sales and Use Tax The ISAM database is installed as part of the Vertex Quantum application instal
532. r these Control Tables Prod Versions PD910 Central Objects PD910 Business Data PROD Adding a Remote Location Skip this section After you run the Installation Planner with these settings click OK at the congratulations screen to obtain a report Review each section of the Planner Validation report and check for any of these potential error conditions Duplicate Entry is the result of conversions that have run previously on Data Dictionary and System Tables You can safely disregard these duplicate entries a Source and Target data source entries must be identical and all must read as Business Data PROD You should remove conversions for the Central Objects or System data sources if they are present a Control Table Merge displays the control tables you have chosen to run The remaining Control Table merges are for Solution Explorer UDCs and other Control Tables 15 5 Taking the Production Environment Offline Take the production environment offline before continuing 15 6 Running the Installation Plan for the Production Environment Caution The production environment must be unavailable during this task All users must be logged off the production environment and no production processes can run during this time 15 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Bringing the Production Environment Online After you have created a plan for the production environment as well as ha
533. r you want the ability to modify data source information or just take the default values a Default Environments Select whether you want the ability to select environments or take the default values a Default Data Load Select whether you want the ability to modify data load parameters or take the default values Default Advanced Parameters Select whether you want the ability to modify advanced parameters or take the default values Default Languages 5 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options Select whether you want the ability to select an alternate language or take the default values a Upgrade Update Plan Generation Select whether you want the ability to generate a plan automatically from locations and machines defined in a previous version of the software 5 3 3 4 Verifying Status Change Values Have Not Changed On the Status Change tab this tab form appears Note Do not make any changes on this tab These values are hard coded in the application W Processing Options xX Process Mode Default Mode Status Change Completi 4 gt Enter the Detail Status for the line to be changed to when the following actions are taken Mark as Complete must always be 60 Disable Enable Help x Cancel 5 3 3 5 Specifying Plan Completion Processes To specify plan completion processes 1 Select the Completion tab
534. rarian Object Use source will be created for the remote location and the mappings 280 for the remote environment will be activated to point to the new Constant Tables data source Replicate Master Tables Select this checkbox to replicate Master Tables A new data Object Librarian Object Use source will be created for the remote location and the mappings 210 and 211 for the remote environment will be activated to point to the new Master Tables data source Caution Replication must be implemented using a third party tool 5 Select the Data Load tab Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 23 Setting Up Environments Tools 82 Calendar Calcula Work Center A Internal Mail Q External Mail Internet A Create Shortcut Q Send Shortcut tom Installation Plan Control System Replication Od x p File Edit Preferences Window Help I x v OK Can Dis Abo x R R Links w Displ s OLE internet Replication Setup x m ATLPS910 Environment Data Sources for Location Aurora JV Load Control Tables Select this checkbox to initially load the replicated Control Tables The following version of R98403 will be launched to accomplish the task of copying control tables from base location to remote locations Version fsDE004s Edit Version Control Version Search Control lV Load Constant Tables Select this checkbox to initiall
535. rators and technical consultants who are responsible for installing upgrading and configuring JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Documentation Accessibility For information about Oracle s commitment to accessibility visit the Oracle Accessibility Program website at http www oracle com pls topic lookup ctx acc amp id docacc Access to Oracle Support Oracle customers have access to electronic support through My Oracle Support For information visit http www oracle com pls topic lookup ctx acc amp id info or visit http www oracle com pls topic lookup ctx acc amp id trs if you are hearing impaired Related Documents You can access related documents from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release Documentation Overview pages on My Oracle Support Access the main documentation overview page by searching for the document ID of 876932 1 To navigate to this page from the My Oracle Support home page click the Knowledge tab and then click the Tools and Training menu JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Welcome Center Release Information Overview The most current versions of this guide and all other JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools and Installation Upgrade documentation is available on the Oracle Technology Network http www oracle com technetwork documentation jdedent 098169 html This guide contains references to server configuration settings that JD Edwards EnterpriseOne stores in configuration files such as jde ini jas ini jdbj ini xvii j
536. rce Data Source Type fi DB2 UDB on 08 400 F JDBNET Data Source Data Class E System Platform fasaoo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name DS2 SQUMSDE ODBC SAUMSDE OLEDB Oracle DEZ UDE Access Logical Library Name Javan 0 ODBC Data Source Name System 910 ai Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 33 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 1 On Data Source Setup verify the accuracy of the settings for the System data source 2 Click OK The Environment Selection screen appears See Also For more information about System data source fields or fields for other data sources mentioned in this process refer to Chapter 23 Understanding Data Source Charts 5 4 10 Setting Up Environments By default Release 9 1 configures your system using values for typical environments Depending on the options chosen when you set up your plan Release 9 1 displays one or more of the following parameters which you can customize in the following tasks a Environments a Data Load Options a Advanced Parameters Languages You can customize any of these parameters by turning off the default option on the Environment Selection form As you move through the plan Release 9 1 will display a customization form for each parameter that you turn off Custom Installation Plan Environment Selection 5 34 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation
537. rce_name DNT Tip In order to verify basic functionality of your OCM mappings you should run a sample UBE for example R0006P or R014021 in PS8910 on your Enterprise Server 6 3 Adding an Entry to the Remote Database Directory You can add an entry to the remote database directory by completing these steps Working With Installation Workbench 6 9 Verifying the Language Code Character Set Log on to the IBM i as QSECOFR On the command line enter WRKRDBDIRE Look for an entry on your IBM i for Remote Location LOCAL This entry must have the same name as your machine If you do not have an entry like this enter 1 in the Option column and type you machine name in the Relational Database column and press enter In the Remote Location Name or Address field enter LOCAL and press Enter If you already have a LOCAL entry and the Relational database name is not the same as your machine name you must remove the entry that you have and add a new entry as previously described Note In previous JD Edwards EnterpriseOne releases installation of Vertex required adding an entry to the Remote Database Directory but no special naming was required It is possible in some cases an entry was added with some other naming convention for this purpose Vertex will work with a Remote Database Directory entry that is correct for Release 9 1 Once you have added or change the entry you should recycle the database host server
538. rds EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Table Data Source Description Purpose F986113 System 910 Subsystem Job Master Contains server job records including status location and version Server Map Planner 910 System Local F986115 System 910 Table and Data Source Holds storage sizing and location parameters Sizing table for Oracle with some general information for Server Map all data sources Planner 910 System Local F986116 System 910 MVS table and Data Holds storage sizing and location parameters Source Sizing for MVS Similar to the F986115 table Server Map Planner 910 System Local F98613 System 910 Business View Lists cached tables Environmental Server Server Map Planner 910 System Local F986150 System 910 Server Transfer Package Lists objects belonging to each server package Svstem ocal Contents This table is used by the server package y installation process P986150 F986151 System 910 Server Package Transfer Lists the servers and path codes to which a System Local given server package will be transferred This M table is used by the server package install process P986150 F986152 System 910 Server Package Master Contains the master list of all service Svetem ocal packages This table is used by the server y package install process P986150 F98616 System 910 Printer Lists the printer definitions including logical Svstem Local name physical
539. rdsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 bpm 1 0 0 0 0 resources JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment data JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment data 1 0 0 0 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment data 1 0 0 0 0 resources JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment development JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment development 9 1 0 0 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment development 9 1 0 0 0 resou rces JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment elfiles JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment elfiles 9 1 0 0 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment elfiles 9 1 0 0 0 resources JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment oh4a JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment oh4a 1 0 0 0 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment oh4a 1 0 0 0 0 resources JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment planner JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment planner 9 1 0 0 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment planner 9 1 0 0 0 resources JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment top JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment top 9 1 0 0 0 JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 deployment top 9 1 0 0 0 resources JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com el features JDEdwardsE910 inventory Components21 com e1 features 1 0 0 0
540. re Standard The URL generated will point to a servlet on the Primary HTML Web Server Redirector The URL generated will point to redirector in the Primary HTML Web Server and redirector will point to a servlet on another HTML Web Server for load balancing The servlet name to use is generated by the system a Explicit Servlet Name The user can specify an explicit servlet name in this field In this case the redirector functionality cannot be used The URL generated will point to the specified servlet in the Primary HTML Web Server Usage of Explicit servlet name is for backward compatibility only You should not use it unless you have a direct need Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 27 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Field Description Installation Path Enter the installation directory path to which you are installing Release 9 1 on your HTML Web Server Make sure this is specific to your version of the release and also the platform and application server on which your HTML Web Server is running For default paths refer to the applicable platform and application server dependent version of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne HTML Web Server Reference Guide WebLogic for Windows WebLogic for UNIX WebSphere for Windows WebSphere for UNIX WebSphere for IBM i Otherwise you must obtain this value from the HTML Web Server machine itself or its administrator 4 Click O
541. re lib management re lib security re lib servicetag re lib zi re lib zi Africa re lib zi America re lib zi America Argentina re lib zi America Indiana re lib zi America Kentucky re lib zi America North_Dakota re lib zi Antarctica re lib zi Asia re lib zi Atlantic re lib zi Australia re lib zi Etc re lib zi Europe re lib zi Indian re lib zi Pacific re lib zi SystemV ib ib visualvm ib visualvm etc ib visualvm platform11 ib visualvm platform11 config ib visualvm platform11 config ModuleAutoDeps ib visualvm platform11 config Modules ib visualvm platform11 core ib visualvm platform11 core locale ib visualvm platform11 docs ib visualvm platforml11 lib ib visualvm platform11 lib locale ib visualvm plat form11 modules ib visualvm platform11 modules ext ib visualvm platform11 modules ext locale ib visualvm platform11 modules locale ib visualvm platform11 update_tracking ib visualvm profiler3 ib visualvm profiler3 config ib visualvm profiler3 config Modules Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Directory Structures 23 5 Deployment Server Directory Structure JDEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm profiler3 lib JDEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm profiler3 lib deployed JDEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm profiler3 lib deployed jdk15 JDEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm profiler3 lib deployed jdk15 windows JDEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm profiler3 lib deployed jdk16 JDEdwardsE910 jdk lib visualvm profiler3 lib deployed jd
542. reated for Work the remote location and the mappings for the remote environment will be activated to point to the new Control Tables data source Center Q Internal Mail IV Replicate Constant Tables Object Librarian Object Use 280 Select this checkbox to replicate Constant Tables Anew data source will be created for the remote location and the External mappings for the remote environment will be activated to point to the new Constant Tables data source Mail Internet Replicate Master Tables Object Librarian Object Use 210 and 211 Select this checkbox to replicate Master Tables Anew data source will be created for the remote location and the g mappings for the remote environment will be activated to point to the new Master Tables data source Create Shortcut H Send Replication must be implemented using a third party tool Shortcut 288 4 On Control System Replication select the Replication Setup tab and select the following options to replicate information to remote locations Field Description Replicate Control Tables Select this checkbox to replicate all tables within the Control Tables data source A new data source will be created for the remote location and the mappings for the remote environment will be activated to point to the new Control Tables data source Replicate Constant Tables Select this checkbox to replicate Constant Tables A new data Object Lib
543. receding Table Conversion Workbench To set a task break in unattended workbench mode 1 Open the System Installation Tools menu GH961 2 Select Advanced Operations 3 Double click Work with Task Breaks The Work with Task Breaks form appears 4 Click Find A list of the workbenches appears Working With Installation Workbench 6 11 Solution Explorer To set a break before or after a workbench choose the workbench name and on the Row menu select Break Before or Break After You can clear task breaks on the Row menu On Task Break Revisions specify the following fields a email Address optional Specify or choose from a list the address book number of the person who is to be notified when the task break occurs a Task Break Specify blank for no task break or 2 for a customer task break If the field is left blank then no task break is configured Task Break Short Text required Enter a short text description of the task break Optional Detail optional Enter detailed information about the task break Click OK Task Break Revisions closes and Work with Task Breaks reappears Specify any further task breaks Click Close 6 6 Solution Explorer If you used both Menu and Solution Explorer Task tables in the previous release you need to synchronize the Menu tables If you used Solution Explorer Task tables in the previous release you need to disable the R9000C report before running the Contr
544. references to determine how menus and forms are presented to individual users and where language is to be used in Release 9 1 for that user After user display preferences are set up for a given user the values remain the same on any workstation that the user accesses Refer to the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools System Administration Guide for information about modifying user profiles Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 21 Language Process Overview 1 22 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 2 Before You Begin the Upgrade You should complete the tasks in this chapter before you begin the actual upgrade process This chapter discusses Section 2 1 Preparing to Upgrade to Release 9 1 from Prior Releases Section 2 2 Preparing the Prototype Environment Section 2 3 Preparing the Development Environment Section 2 4 Preparing the DB2 400 Database for Table Conversions Section 2 5 Checking Modification and Merge Flags Section 2 6 Changing the Journal Section 2 7 Refreshing and Verifying Data Section 2 8 Verifying Software and Hardware Requirements Section 2 9 Verifying the Disk Space Requirements Section 2 10 Cleaning Up Disk Space on the Servers 2 1 Preparing to Upgrade to Release 9 1 from Prior Releases The Upgrade order should be 1 Install the Deployment Server which includes JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Release 9 1 Install the Platform Pack which includes J
545. registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services Contents 1 Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 1 Understanding This Guide visicsisicsssccssisesistesissesssvesses inet seavscsssesnivsteves sass sstessnsettutsssnenscutsbaneessbens 1 1 1 2 Understanding the Upgrade Process c ccccccseccscsesssescscseseseseecscsesnseececscsssnseecesessssneseeeeesens 1 2 1 2 1 What an Upgrade Preserves and Replaces oo eeseeseeeseecessseseeesessseneneneees 1 4 1 2 1 1 Interactive Application Rules miisisenissaksiianses ieran 1 4 1 2 1 2 ReportiRules ennemin ure otites aa ea a a upstate taneectdea tive beadlereebeldes 1 5 1 2 1 3 Application Text Changs seene enere techies seed a i ais 1 5 1 2 1 4 UBE Text Changes eeaeee eS an EAEE Ene a EEEa EAE aean ER Se 1 5 1 2 1 5 Table Specification Rules aneen eE e EA EEEE 1 5 1 2 1 6 Control Fable Riles eine eea ecw e aa a aiaa iE 1 6 1 2 1 7 Business View Rules ciccsisic neiise a
546. rge Report R98700 A RESTART merges items which are at a merge status of Not Processed All other statuses are skipped Whether original specifications must be restored for objects with a status of Error Warning or In Process the status must be evaluated based on the merge action type Merge ActionRestore Target Specifications Merge Status ADDNO Any REPLACENO Any CHANGENO NOT PROCESSED CHANGENO SUCCESS CHANGEYES ERROR CHANGEYES IN PROCESS CHANGEYES WARNING To restore specifications for a single object use Object Transfer to copy the object from the new pristine environment to the target environment 25 8 3 1 Modifying the Merge Status of an Object This release contains a new application P98700 for an interactive view of the progress during merges F988810 is a new table used to control and track the merge process Each record is time stamped as processing occurs Before a RESTART operation it is possible to change the merge status to Not Processed following the rules above to repeat a merge for a specific object See Also Restarting the Specification Merge Release 9 1 on a Cluster section in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Server and Workstation Administration Guide The summary report shows the status of the completed Object Librarian Versions List and Specifications Merges 25 8 4 Compare Tables and Indexes Against Central Objects or TAM Specifications R9698711 Yo
547. riseOne Applications Upgrade Guide T Working With the Enterprise Server This chapter contains these sections Section 7 1 Verifying the Enterprise Server Installation Using PORTTEST Section 7 2 Starting Network Services on the Enterprise Server Section 7 3 Stopping Network Services on the Enterprise Server Section 7 4 Creating an Output Queue for the Default Printer Section 7 5 Creating the Job Queue Section 7 6 Working with OCM Generation Section 7 7 Setting Up a Printer on the Enterprise Server Section 7 8 Enabling Multiple Concurrent Table Conversions 7 1 Verifying the Enterprise Server Installation Using PORTTEST Note When running PORTTEST after installing the Enterprise Server the test returns a failure message This is because it is not able to access the F0902 table at this time the format of the F0902 table changes during the Table Conversion Workbench Ignore any errors relating to accessing the F0902 table for example Select all on table F0902 failed rcode 0 Once the Workbench tasks are all complete and the Enterprise Server is configured rerun PORTTEST To verify the Enterprise Server installation using PORTTEST 1 2 Log on to the IBM i Enterprise Server as ONEWORLD or other Release 9 1 user On Current Release 9 1 Versions select the version of Release 9 1 that you want to use and press Enter To verify that Release 9 1 is installed correctly on the
548. riseOne Tools Security Administration Guide Working With Signon Security 12 5 Setting Up JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Single Sign on 12 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 13 Manual Table Conversions This section contains the manual table conversions that are required to finish the upgrade process if you are upgrading from previous releases Note Whenever you submit a Manual Table Conversion from Batch Versions check on the Properties box to ensure you specify the correct Source and Target environments You must also override the location to Local as the Previous Release environment is not defined on the Enterprise Server This chapter describes these tasks a Section 13 1 Running Post Installation Tasks a Section 13 3 Upgrading from 8 9 or Below a Section 13 4 Upgrading from 8 10 or Below a Section 13 5 Upgrading from 8 11 or Below a Section 13 6 Upgrading from 8 11 SP1 or Below Section 13 7 Upgrading from 8 12 or Below a Section 13 8 Upgrading from 9 0 or Below a Section 13 9 Processing Options for R31P40039 a Section 13 10 Upgrading E1PAGE from Release 9 0 to Release 9 1 13 1 Running Post Installation Tasks You must run post installation Universal Batch Engine UBE reports to successfully use your previous data Unless noted otherwise you should run these conversions from a client workstation in the environment that you are upgrading When runni
549. rk next to the Oracle Homes for the Deployment Server Home Deinstalling the Software 27 5 Using the OUI Installer to Deinstall JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from the Deployment Server For example if you followed recommendation in this guide the Oracle Home for your Deployment Server is JDE_DEP910_HOME 6 Select the Remove button Confirmation xi Are you sure you want to deinstall the following products and their dependent components Local Databases 1 0 0 0 0 Foundation 1 0 0 0 0 BPM Broker 1 0 0 0 0 Client Web Development 1 0 0 0 0 Oracle Universal Installer 11 2 0 2 0 A Oracle One Off Patch Installer 11 2 0 0 2 Installer SDK Component 11 2 0 2 0 Sun JDK 1 6 0 21 51 Help Yes 7 On Confirmation verify that you want to deinstall the listed components and their dependent components and if so select the Yes button Deinstalling Local Databases 8 98 2 0 0 Lipdeting the registry Deinstall Action Cancel The Remove dialog indicates the progress of the deinstall action 27 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Using the OUI Installer to Deinstall JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from the Deployment Server Wi Inventory xi Contents You have the following Oracle products installed There are no installed products E show empty homes If you want to remove Oracle software please check the items and click Remove To see the languages installed and other deta
550. rkbench and before Table Conversions After each merge finishes verify the output of the report produced Refer to Working with Reports for more detailed information 6 16 Understanding Table Conversions Table Conversion Workbench runs the table conversions that convert technical and application tables to the new format for Release 9 1 It updates the F98405 table to indicate completion and writes a conversion log record to the F984052 table for each conversion Use the following procedures when running Workbench in attended mode or if a task break is set before Table Conversion Workbench All users must run the table conversions that appear in the Release 9 1 Table Conversion Workbench Tip You can safely ignore GT98DSA and GT98DSB errors reported in R8900165_XJDE0001 6 24 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions Note If you have chosen to run TCs on the Enterprise Server the default the following TCs will still run on the Deployment Server a Any TC below sequence 100 a Any TC with the Run On Deployment Server flag turned on The Data Message column is a flag that tells the TC Workbench NOT to check the table to see if it is already in the target format For other TCs the workbench will not run the Table Conversion if the table is already converted This section discusses Section 6 16 1 Running Table Conversions Section 6 16 2 Table Conversion Workb
551. rmation about System data source fields or fields for other data sources mentioned in this process refer to Chapter 19 Understanding Data Source Charts 20 10 2 Verifying the Data Source for Data Dictionary To verify the data source for Data Dictionary Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 15 Entering Shared Data Source Information a Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions lel File Edit Preferences Form Window Help 18 x OK Can Dis Abo B Data Source Name Data Dictionary 910 Advanced aimata oe Local Data Source a Data Source Type J DB2 UDB on 05 400 M JDENET Data Source Links w Advan 9 OLE a Internet Pon Data Class p Data Dictionary Platform fas4oo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name DSs2 SGUMEDE ODBC DeZUDs Access opal Library Name pos 0 ODBC Data Source Name Data Dictionary 910 SQUMSDE OLEDE Oracle gt 1 On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the settings for the Data Dictionary data source The library name in the Library Name field is the Release 9 1 data dictionary library DD910 2 Click OK 20 10 3 Verifying the Object Librarian Data Source To verify the Object Librarian data source 20 16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering Shared Data Source Information ustom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions oix Fie Edit Prefer
552. rocessing options for Installation Planner also affect the choices that you are given while setting up your plan Note Installation Planner Considerations Depending on which tables you want to replicate you are prompted for different data source information For example if you choose to replicate the control tables you are asked to define the control tables data source Note Data Source Considerations JD Edwards EnterpriseOne provides configured data sources However when you run Installation Planner you might need to modify some data source information to reflect your system specific configuration Only data sources that are referenced in the replication forms appear when you create a remote plan 19 2 Starting Installation Planner To start Installation Planner 1 Log on to Release 9 1 as user JDE with the database password for user JDE 2 Access the planner environment JDEPLAN 3 From the System Installation Tools menu GH961 click Custom Installation Plan 19 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering Information in Installation Planner Custom Installation Plan Work with Installation Plans laj xj gi Edit Preferences Row Window Help 48 xi Y A x 3S fF FR Select Find Add Del Close Seq New Dis Abo inks wv Expand S OLE S Internet a Plan Information Expand 8 INSTALL Install Plan Install E910 Review Finalize
553. rol tables Change tables store information related to control table data that has been changed or added into JD Edwards EnterpriseOne since the last release This information can show detail such as how a menu has changed The customer base merges look for changes from one base release to the next base release for example Release 8 9 to Release 9 1 and update the customer Release 8 9 tables with the new information from Release 9 1 The upgrade performs these customer base merges a Data dictionary merges a User defined code merges a Solution Explorer merges a Favorites merges a Report director templates merges a Tips of the day merges a Workflow merges For some merges you can also specify data selection criteria This feature lets you choose the information to merge into the Release 9 1 control tables The ability to limit the information merged reduces the total merge time required 9 1 2 Working with Language Specific Table Merges This information is only for users who are installing an alternate language The distributed language tables consist of control tables system tables and data dictionary tables The F91100D table must be loaded to display the text from these tables in the desired language The F98800D and F98810D tables must be loaded to display text from these tables in the desired language a The F83100 and F83110 tables must be loaded to display soft code text in reports 9 1 3 Working with Data Dictionar
554. rom entering a machine name that results in a datasource name greater than 30 characters if the machine name for the Enterprise Server is longer than 13 characters the resulting datasource name will be longer than the allowed 30 characters For example if your machine name is 15 characters A23456789012345 the base datasource name input into the Planner would be A23456789012345 910 Server Map Note The field in table F98611 is a hard restriction the field only allows 30 characters The actual field size cannot be modified or changed When the Planner runs it truncates the value to 30 characters because that is the restriction in the F98611 table The Platform Pack does not truncate the value when it builds the jde ini for the Enterprise Server Therefore any value greater than 30 characters will result in a mismatch between the jde ini and the F98611 table That is using the previous example the jde ini would have the full length value A23456789012345 910 Server Map which is 32 characters while the F98611 populated by the Planner would have a value of A23456789012345 910 Server M To remedy you could do any one of the following a Manually modify values in table F98611 to match the truncated value in the jde ini file a Ensure that the value is not truncated by limiting the datasource name to 30 characters this would mean limiting the machine name for the Enterprise Server to 13 characters Manually truncate the
555. rom the previous release are flagged to be merged into the new release as well as which components of that object have been changed or added This report does not have processing options If you have made custom modifications to your business data you can use the Customization Object Analyzer to identify customizations in order to determine the impact and level of effort to retro fit the customizations into the newer release of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne The Customization Object Analyzer is a summary and detail report that reads the custom modifications that have been made to your system The reports are Object Customization Summary Report Object Customization Detail Report See Also The section entitled Customization Object Analyzer in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Software Updates Guide 25 6 Async Launch R98405A Table conversion workbench launches the R98405A program for every conversion when running them asynchronously regardless of whether they will be run on the Deployment Server or Enterprise Server The R98405A program launches the Working with Reports 25 9 Report on Table Conversions R984052 conversion When all conversions complete you can review their status by running the R984052 report which is described in Report on Table Conversions R984052 25 7 Report on Table Conversions R984052 Report on Table Conversions is created by Table Conversion Workbench when conversions are run asynchronously Th
556. ror has occured Please provide the following files to Oracle Support C Program Files OracleiinventonlogsiinstallActions201 1 08 04 _05 01 27PM log C Program Files Oracle inventorlogstoralnstall201 1 08 04 _05 01 27PM err C Program Working with the Platform Pack on the IBMi 4 23 Troubleshooting the IBM i Platform Pack Installation 4 6 3 Business Data or Control Tables Already Exist If you select Install Mode and the Business Data or Control Tables already exist the installer displays the following error An error occurred during the interview for this component Prototype Database 9 1 0 0 0 You have selected to install Prototype Database but CRPDTA or CRPCTL already exists You must change Install Type to Upgrade or Deselect Prototype Database or Delete the CRPDTA CRPCTL library if empty Stop installation of all products C Stop installation of this component only Help OK To remedy the above error your choices are must or Deselect the Prototype Database or a Change the Install Type to Upgrade a Deselect the Prototype Database a Delete the CRPDTA and CRPCTL library if they are empty 4 6 4 Business Data or Control Tables Do Not Exist The following is displayed if you selected the Upgrade mode but the Business Data or Control Tables do not exist 4 24 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Rerunning the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer 4 Ora
557. rs installing Release 9 1 on the IBM i The reports are not for upgrade or cumulative update customers a PY910 a DV910 a P5910 a PD910 a DEP910 25 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Async Launch R98405A The Control Table Workbench creates these reports a Data Dictionary Specification Merge report R98722C a Data Dictionary Text Merge report R98722T Run version ZJDE0001 for both of these reports The data dictionary merge reports show the results of merging modified data dictionary information into the Release 9 1 data dictionary 25 4 1 Processing Options The processing options for both reports are the same The Merge Option tab contains the option to select update mode 25 4 2 Errors and How to Resolve Them Most failures on these reports result from attempting to merge data items that do not exist in the target data dictionary into JD Edwards EnterpriseOne These failures are normal and can be ignored If every item on the report lists a merge status of failed then the source data dictionary could not be found to perform the merge Verify your source data dictionary and run the merge again 25 5 Object Librarian Modifications Report R9840D Note This report is used only by upgrade and cumulative update customers The Object Librarian Modifications report is created when running the Installation Workbench program before you merge any objects It shows which objects f
558. rver If the local database engine is already installed and an ElLocal database exists do not reinstall the database engine go to the section entitled Section 3 8 7 Understanding the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer If you want to install the local database under the default location that is c Oracle you can run InstallManager to do so If you want to install into another directory you must run the database installation program OEESetup exe from a command prompt and provide one or more arguments This section discusses these topics a Section 3 8 5 1 Using InstallManager to Install a Local Database in the Default Location a Running OEEFSetup to Install a Local Database in a Directory Other Than the Default Location 3 18 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Installing the Deployment Server 3 8 5 1 Using InstallManager to Install a Local Database in the Default Location 1 Obtain the appropriate disk images from Oracle Software Delivery Cloud for the local database you wish to install on your Deployment Server 2 Logon to the Deployment Server as a user with Administrator rights Caution Ensure that the Administrator account name that you use does not contain any special characters 3 If you have not already done so expand all disk images to be under a common directory called Disk1 on your Deployment Server Tip Refer to the preceding Tip Installa
559. ry Local Changes By Release between releases This table is used in the data dictionary merge process F9760 Data Dictionary 910 Data Field Specification Lists changes made to field specifications Data Dictionary Local Changes By Release F9210 between releases This table is used in the data dictionary merges F980011 Central Objects xxx Cross Reference Lists cross reference relationships for business Versions Local Relationships views event rules and controls F980021 Central Objects xxx Cross Reference Field Lists cross reference relationships for fields in Versions Local Relationships an application F98101 System 910 Imaging Constants Determines whether you are doing third party System Local a F983051 Versions xxx Versions Versions List Contains one record per version batch or Local interactive For interactive it stores processing option values For batch this table holds data selection sequencing and other template overrides F982xx System 910 Series OMW System Local Planner 910 F98306 Central Objects xxx Processing Option Text Provides processing option text for all Versions Local languages F9840 Version 910 Installation Plan Master Contains general information for the table installation plan with one record per plan Planner 910 se name description and status F98401 Version 910 Data Source Plan Detail Lists data sources for each plan and one Planner 910 table record per plan record per data
560. s Section 5 4 1 Starting Installation Planner Section 5 4 2 Entering a Plan Description Section 5 4 3 Entering Location Information Section 5 4 4 Entering Deployment Server Information Section 5 4 5 Entering Enterprise Server Information Section 5 4 6 Enter Data Source Information for Server Map Section 5 4 7 Entering HTML Web Server Information Section 5 4 8 Entering Data Server Information Section 5 4 9 Entering Shared Data Source Information Section 5 4 10 Setting Up Environments Section 5 4 11 Setting Up Environment Data Sources Section 5 4 12 Adding a Remote Location Section 5 4 13 Finalizing the Installation Plan Section 5 4 14 Concluding the Validation Planner Report Section 5 4 15 Resetting the jde ini Prior to Running Table Conversions Section 5 4 16 Clearing SOL Packages from QRECOVERY 5 4 1 Starting Installation Planner To start Installation Planner from within JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 2 3 Go to the System Installation Tools Menu GH961 From the System Installation Tools menu double click Custom Installation Plan On Work with Installation Plans click Add The Installation Planner form appears Enter a Plan description 5 4 2 Entering a Plan Description To enter a plan description 5 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade custom Installation Plan Installation Planner
561. s An upgrade merges your custom table specifications from one release level to the next An upgrade preserves these changes a New tables a New indexes on JD Edwards EnterpriseOne tables An upgrade replaces columns added or removed from existing JD Edwards EnterpriseOne tables including changing field length field type and decimal position Instead of adding a new column to an existing table use a tag file with product codes 55 through 59 For custom tag files be aware of data item changes in the data dictionary From one release to the next JD Edwards EnterpriseOne might change certain data item attributes such as data item size which can affect data integrity and how data is stored in the database Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 5 Understanding the Upgrade Process For this reason use the Table Conversion tool to convert the custom tag file data to the new release level For base files the upgrade process takes care of the data dictionary changes by upgrading the previous database An upgrade preserves custom indices over the custom tag files 1 2 1 6 Control Table Rules An upgrade merges your control table data not JD Edwards EnterpriseOne tables from one release level to the next using the Change Table process as the basis to do the data merge An upgrade preserves these changes a Data dictionary custom changes These include such as changes to row column and glossary text The upgrade process use
562. s Planning F3007 F0007 F3411 of the logic in conversion and F33133 tables and the existing solution of have converted for running batch applications existing data Data to create Capacity Message for F3460 is already Capacity Peggins and available since the Capacity Load R3380 or table has not been R3382 is the existing batch changed application User has to select either Resource Requirements Planning R3380 or Rough Cut Capacity Planning Capacity Requirements Planning R3382 depending on whether they are using Resource Requirements Planning RRP or Rough Cut Capacity Planning Capacity Requirements Planning RCCP CRP R31P40039 To convert F40039 This is to be run If different types of Itis necessary that all Work when upgrading from immediately after work orders have Order Types be unique XE ERP 8 0 upgrading to been mixed ina which is set up in the If ha hsse a validate all programs single Order Type Document Type Master For A Ka ER using F4801 F4801T value they must example an order type of EW COCUMENE YPE Order Type prior to convert the F4801 WO needs to be set equal for some work orders at oer ane database output work orders to to 02 Manufacturing which is different from ae the docinentt Make sure all order separate the records Work Order This is set up scrap tea ied che types in the 00 DT by order type If this manually using Document you used in the past k b f i ob i t T Revisi P40040 fortkosew rk
563. s and should not contain any special characters Remote Deployment Server If you installed JD EnterpriseOne Files to a remote Deployment Server you should click the OK button to define a new Deployment Server The deployment server name is the remote machine name by default Description Enter a long description for the machine This description should include the location with which this Deployment Server is associated and whether or not it is the primary server Release Enter the Release 9 1 release number you are installing or use the visual assist button to choose one from the list The default value is E910 Host Type Displays the value of 50 appears by default to indicate that the server type is Intel NT Location Displays your current location as the default value Primary User Specify the user to whom an email is sent when a package is deployed The default value for Primary User is JDE 3 On the Deployment tab complete these fields 5 20 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Field Description Primary Define the hierarchy of the servers Values are Deployment ra ites 1 Primary Deployment Server default value 0 Secondary Deployment Server The server share name of the directory to which you installed Release 9 1 on your Deployment Server Verify that the server share name for Release 9 1 is E910 4 Click
564. s C Copy Metadata Repository Copy Central Objects V Copy Object Librarian Rename Metadata Repository C Dontcopy package JV Copy Versions V Configure Package Manifest V Copy ESU History Directory copies Business Data Control Tables IV Copy Path Code Pkg dir local T Copy Business Data V Copy Pkg Hdr Dtl pka inf Copy Control Tables 15 4 Setting Up an Upgrade Plan for the Production Environment Your goal should be to set up a plan similar to the plan used to upgrade the other environments However note that some exceptions might be given in this task Remember that production should be the only environment being upgraded at this time because upgrading other environments at the same time increases downtime To set up an upgrade plan for the production environment perform the all the normal tasks associated with an initial installation with differences as listed in this table Task Difference Entering a Plan Description Press OK to enter the plan information manually Entering Location Information Click Select to enter location information for an existing Location On the next resulting dialog select the Location and click OK Entering Deployment Server Click Select to enter deployment server information for an Information existing Deployment Server if you are not changing servers Entering Enterprise Server Click Select to if you are not c
565. s is specific to your version of the release and also the platform and application server on which your HTML Web Server is running For default paths refer to the applicable platform and application server dependent version of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne HTML Web Server Reference Guide WebLogic for Windows WebLogic for UNIX WebSphere for Windows WebSphere for UNIX WebSphere for IBM i Otherwise you must obtain this value from the HTML Web Server machine itself or its administrator 4 Click OK 5 To add another HTML Web Server click Yes and repeat steps 1 through 4 to define another HTML Web Server 20 9 Entering Data Server Information gt Data Server Biel ES If your database resides on a seperate server press OK to define your data server To select an existing data server press select Ifyou do notwantto define a data server press skip Select Skip X Cancel 1 On Data Server choose one of these options a OK If your database resides on a separate server choose click OK to continue entering unique Data Server information m Select Click this option to select an existing Data Server Click this option if you do not want to define a Data Server Continue with the Planner using the environment selection in Step 6 of this task Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 13 Entering Data Server Information a Custom Installation Plan Data Server R
566. s of 1 and 2 To keep things simple editing was turned on for the DD item so new entries into that fields would be validated against the UDC Since clients could have existing data that used a Y or N this post install was created to correct that data R8976V01 To generate F76C4015 Requires use of from F0411 when Venezuela s upgrading from 8 11 localization and SAR 7668978 has not been previously applied Do not run if upgrading from 8 10 or below For each Credit Debit Note in table F0411 related to a Voucher in table F0411 the TC generates a record into table F76V4015 to relate the Credit Debit Note and the Voucher R8976V02 To generate F76V4011 Requires use of from F76V0401 when Venezuela s upgrading from 8 11 localization and SAR 7668978 has not been previously applied Do not run if For each record in table F76V401 the TC generates a record into table F76V4011 to store the localized voucher information upgrading from 8 10 or below R893016 To populate F3016T None This TC creates a from F3016 when corresponding upgrading from 8 11 or F3016T tag record for below every existing F3016 record Manual Table Conversions 13 21 Upgrading from 8 11 or Below Upgrading from 8 11 or Below Conversion Program Run this Job Requirements Purpose Notes R893283F To fix CTKID in F3283 None This TC cleans up the This report should fix all when upgrading from data in
567. s release The table conversion engine creates a temporary table on this data source Drop all temporary tables before starting the Table Conversion rerun procedure The temporary file name has the notation lt Table gt TCTemp for example FO3B20TCTEMP To find these tables a Test List is Upgrade only a Enter these commands STRSQL SELECT SYSTEM_TABLE SCHEMA TABLE NAME FROM SYSTABLES WHERE TABLE NAME LIKE FSTCTEMP DROP TABLE PRODDTA F0101TCTEMP a Do not drop temp tables for conversions still running a Enter this command CLRPFM PRODDTA F40941 Ifrestarting a conversion first verify the original table was not dropped then drop the temp table For a Table Conversion the base table must be in the old format For Alter and Merge Conversions this is not necessary Data is copied to the temporary table the original table is deleted and the temporary table is renamed to the original table name Clear out tables F40941 F40942 F40943 FO618TA F42140A F42150A F42160A F3201 F3211 P3215 F3216 F3290 See the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Programmers Guide for any additional instructions when rerunning Table Conversions 2 Ifthe table conversion program has run but the table is still in its original format in the data source for the release from which you are upgrading run the conversion program without file restoration If the table conversion program has run but the table format in the data source has changed in the re
568. s step requires you to click Finish and restart the Integrated Microsoft Windows Server Note Rebooting the IXS card does not affect the rest of the IBM i system Restarting the IXS card can be accomplished from the Microsoft Windows screen using normal Microsoft Windows commands such as Shutdown or Control Alt Delete If the IXS card happens to be powered off at any time then the IXS card will need to be varied on under WRKCFGSTS NWS or under IBM i Navigator Network Microsoft Windows Administration Integrated xSeries Servers and right click on name of your IXS server 5 Complete Microsoft Windows 2000 or Microsoft Windows 2003 Server Installation Refer to the Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications for the recommended Microsoft Windows Service Pack level that you get from Microsoft Apply it normally via Microsoft Windows An IBM maintenance wizard is used to install the Microsoft Windows Integration software service pack of PTFs from IBM that get downloaded to Microsoft Windows from IBM i This step also includes directions for setting your Microsoft Windows server to automatically vary on with TCP IP which includes at IPL time Vary on to your Deployment Server and validate it Note In this integrated environment OS 400 and Microsoft Windows typically share the IBM i CD ROM drive In order for Microsoft Windows to use the drive it must first be locked From Microsoft Windows vi
569. s your data dictionary as the base User defined codes The upgrade process merges any new hard coded values These values are system 90 and above and H90 and above Solution Explorer Tasks Consider these affects on the customization of Solution Explorer Tasks 1 During an upgrade your custom changes on any JD Edwards EnterpriseOne base task overrides any new changes from JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 2 If any new custom task TASKNM has been added that conflicts with a new JD Edwards EnterpriseOne base task the custom task will be replaced See Also Chapter 9 Performing Merges for more information about merges 1 2 1 7 Business View Rules Do not remove columns from existing business views Changing business views that applications use can cause unpredictable results when running the application Hide columns at the application design level using either Form Design Aid or Report Design Performance is not gained by deleting a few columns from a business view An upgrade preserves these changes New custom business views a New columns or joins to the existing business views An upgrade replaces columns removed from business views 1 2 1 8 Rules for Event Rules An upgrade preserves these changes a For APPL all retrofitting is done using the Visual FDA ER Merge tools a Custom event rules on anew custom control field a For reports tables and business function events that do not have any event rules attac
570. sE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 JDEdwardsE91 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys 0 sys tem Classes ConsumerWEBXML tem Classes endorsed tem Classes lib tem Classes Orchestration tem Classes samples tem Generator tem IDA tem include tem include connector tem include database tem include jdesaw tem include Metadata tem include netmessaging tem include perfmon tem include workflow tem include xml tem includev tem includev unicode tem JDK tem JRE tem 1ib32 tem libv32 tem Locale tem Locale Iconv tem Locale Uconvtab tem Locale xml tem Locale xml hpux tem Locale xml NT tem Locale xml Solaris tem Mobile tem Mobile Authentication tem Mobile Jrn1SQLCode tem Mobile WebLogic tem OC4d tem OC4J ant tem OC4J ant bin te
571. sa eii 25 4 25 3 1 3 Version XJDE0024 for Running Pristine Data sssssssssssesseessessessersesressesserteesees 25 5 25 3 1 4 How to Read the Report cece cecsennecesesessneseceseseneseseseseneneseseenes 25 6 25 3 1 5 Errors and How to Resolve Them cccccccscessessessecseecsecssessecseceseceseeeeeseeseseeeseenes 25 7 25 4 Data Dictionary Specification Merge Report and Data Dictionary Text Merge Report R98722C and R98722T 25 8 25 4 1 ProcessineOpuons s hweis Lite hese hs a a E AEE 25 9 25 4 2 Errors and How to Resolve Them cccsccssssscesesseseesecseeeeeseaeceeeeeeeceecaeeaeesecaecaeeeeeaeeaees 25 9 25 5 Object Librarian Modifications Report R9840D cece cece ceeeeeeeteseseeeeeeeteteneeees 25 9 25 6 Asynie Latanch R9O8405 A iscccecetsacceseee tease sto siactdcveeseccucststeescusalsteleebesisisistasvtathsvtastecr tives sretters 25 9 25 7 Report on Table Conversions R984052 cccccc esses cece ceseeseesesesesessnesessseeeseneeseeseees 25 10 25 7 1 How to Read th Report sicscsiscn ai Biles ioe ie ia E RER e 25 10 25 8 Object Specification Merge Report R98700 ccccccccse ese c cess cececeeeeseesecesesenenetenenenes 25 10 25 8 1 Processing Opnonsia isissniaiiscandihsmebaiBiei sient give ei Eaa aa TeSa 25 10 25 8 2 How t Read the Report ii 3 cca8 aciadceniaus anlar ware a elena ane 25 11 25 8 3 Errors and How to Resolve Them c ccccccesssssssscesseescessecseessecseceeseaseeeseseseesese
572. sal Installer Install ile Es ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Install Installing EnterpriseOne IBM i Platform Pack 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Copying files for Prototype Environment 9 1 9 1 0 0 0 Setup pending Configuration pending instantiating Z Downloads iSeries JDEINIspec ini Stop installation You can find the log of this install session at C Program Files OraclenventoryYogs installActions201 1 09 14 _01 39 25PM log GED B D After the installation is complete the following End of Installation screen is displayed Working with the Platform Pack on the IBMi 4 21 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i 4 Oracle Universal Installer End of Installation ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne End of Installation The installation of EnterpriseOne IBM i Platform Pack 9 1 was successful Please remember You can find the log of this install at C Program Files Oracle inventonslogs installActions201 1 09 14_03 40 11 PM log CHED CD G 18 On End of Installation verify the installation of the EnterpriseOne Platform Pack was successful Review the Please remember portion for the installer log file location The log file name is specified with the date and stamp when the installer ran For example c Program Files x86 Oracle Inventory logs installActions2011 09 14_ 03 40 11 PM log 19 Click the Exit button to exit OUI
573. sal Installer Summary ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Summary EnterpriseOne Deployment Server 9 1 0 0 0 Global Settings Source C Software DEPSVRiDisk1 stagelproducts xml Oracle Home C JDEdwards E910 JDE_DEP910_HOME Installation Type Custom Product Languages LeEnglish Snare Renuirements Disk space Requirements C Required 28418MB Available 61106MB 16 On Summary verify the list of items to be installed is correct If there is insufficient disk space to complete the installation is available on the Deployment Server target machine an error message is displayed 17 Click the Install button Working with the Deployment Server 3 35 Installing the Deployment Server Wt Oracle Universal Installer Install eiopx ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Install Installing EnterpriseOne Deployment Server 9 1 0 0 0 7 installation in progress Setup pending Configuration pending Extracting files to C JDEdwards E910 7 Stop installation You can find the log of this install session at C Program Files x86 OracleYnventoryYogs installA ctions201 1 08 05_10 34 564M log nD eD CoD The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer displays a panel showing the ongoing status of the installation Oracle Universal Installer End of Installation SS ioixi ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne End of Installation The installation of EnterpriseOne Deployment Server
574. sary because the copy process breaks if another process has a lock on anything within that directory You can use this command where you should substitute your target path code directory For an IBM i Enterprise Server ensure that you delete the target path code and package libraries that may have been created from a already exist from a previous attempt to copy that path code You must run the Copy Environment process on the Deployment Server 1 From menu GH9611 run the application Environment Copy P989400 Upgrading the Production Environment 15 3 Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 Note For information on Processing Options for this application refer to Step 3 of this procedure 3 Copy Environment Packages J OK C oan i This application can be used to copy Data Central Objects Path Goio Packages and ESU history from one environment to another predefined standard environment Orit can be used to create a new environment optionally copying those same objects from an existing environment Copy definitions from System to Planner I Copy Environment definitions Environment Copy Mode m Copy to defined environment Environment defined in Planner database Environment Master Path Code Master and Data Source Temples racore existin planner May not have been installed Eo Create copy to New Envirc New Enviro na Environment not defined in planner d
575. se Sizing Default Sizing OK Can Dis Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions lel File Edit Preferences Form Window Help Y x amp 2 ins w Advan BJOLE B Internet la x Data Source Name Data Source Use Business Data PS910ATL ps Local Data Source Be cena ie Jo ORACLE 7 JDENET Data Source Data Class E Business Data Platform NTSVR NT Server Database Server Name DENSI Al SQUSSEIMSDE ODDC S UMSDE OLEDB De2 oso be2UDB Access Logical KIG Object Owner ID Database Name TNS Jrsa1 ODTA forci a5 2 On Data Source Revisions enter the data source name for the Business Data data source that will be used by the remote location For example Business Data PS910ATL 3 Complete the other fields as applicable for your database and platform 4 Click the OK button Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 27 Setting Up Data Sources for Environment E Custom Installation Plan Data Source Revisions Bfe Zs s i 7 Eile Edit Preferences Form Window Help l x VELKE 2 SC eee Oe Ano Links w Advan 8 OLE internet Form z Data Source Name Control Tables P591 0ATL Advanced Data Source Use fos Local Data Source Data Source Type fo ORACLE JF JDBNET Data Source Data Class fr Control Tables Database Platform NTSVR NT Server Sizing Database Server Name DENLCM1 7 D
576. secccseseseececeesessececssessneneseseseseneseseneeees 6 61 6 19 Using the Package Workbench ssssisisspniseni iana 6 62 6 20 Using Remote Location Workbench 0 c cece cseseseesesecesssseesesessesesesesssseseseseeneeeseees 6 62 6 20 1 Configuring Remote Locations cccccccccceesee cs cesesesescscssseesssesssscssesesssesenesesssenesees 6 63 6 21 Finishing Installation Workbench 0 ccc ee ceeseeeeeeeeceseeeeeseseseseseneseseseseseneseseenenes 6 64 7 Working With the Enterprise Server 7 1 Verifying the Enterprise Server Installation Using PORTTEST eee eeeeeees 7 1 7 2 Starting Network Services on the Enterprise Server c cccesececcscsssesescscseseeecsesessseseeeseees 7 2 7 3 Stopping Network Services on the Enterprise Server c ccccscescsesesteseseeeeseseseenenesesesneenesees 7 2 7 4 Creating an Output Queue for the Default Printer se sssssssssssssrtsssserttesntertesssetessstentessnees 7 3 7 5 Cr ating the Job Queue sassa inisenisi a a an e AAS a na a ani 7 3 7 6 Working with OCM Generation s sssssesssesessesssssitissesstssteninsesstsntentestestnnsenienienenntnnteneenesneens 7 3 7 6 1 Understanding OCM Mappings ss sseessssiesissesssesisseestssessiesiesesntnniesinsesnenneenieneennnneenees 7 4 7 6 2 Understanding Data Source Setup sssessssississersserississesssssiesiesesstesiesiesessenntesieneesenneenees 7 4 7 6 3 Understanding OCM Creation iseis granone ra eea E E E E E 7 4 7 6 3 1 Understa
577. sed for all database accounts created by the installer The default password is the same as the database account s user name For example username JDE password JDE aa Cx CD 14 On Choose E1Local User Password you can specify a secure password to be used for the E1Local Database Users on the Deployment Server This unique password will be used for all database accounts created by the Deployment Server installer The default password is the same as the user name of the database account For example if the user name of the local database account is JDE the default password is JDE Working with the Deployment Server 3 33 Installing the Deployment Server If you do not specify a E1Local user password by default the installer will use this value DEFAULT You cannot leave this field blank 15 Select the Next button Sample Summary Screen for Typical Installation Oracle Universal Installer Summary TIGIX ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Summary EnterpriseOne Deployment Server 9 1 0 0 0 Global Settings Source C Software DEPSVR Disk1 stage products xml Oracle Home C JDEdwards E910 JDE_DEP910_HOME Installation Type Typical Product Languages LEnglish Snare Renanirements Disk space Requirements C Required 19408MB Available 61106MB Sample Summary Screen for Custom Installation 3 34 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Installing the Deployment Server Oracle Univer
578. sees 3 8 3 4 Understanding the Deployment Servef sssss ssssesssessssississessetissisresnentierienesnsnntesieneeneeneesees 3 8 3 5 Local Oracle Enterprise Edition OEE Considerations se sssessesssssississesssssrissesssnesees 3 9 3 5 1 32 Bit Oracle Database Client Required for both 32 bit and 64 bit versions of OEE 3 10 3 5 2 EnterpriseOne Application P96717 0 iiien 3 11 3 5 3 Best Practices for OEE Performance cccccccccsssesscessesscesseseececeseeceecssesaecaecsasessesseeeseeees 3 12 3 5 4 Microsoft Windows Internet Protocol Version 4 IPV4 0 ceescsseseeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 12 3 6 Obtaining and Preparing the Deployment Server Install Image 0 eee 3 13 3 7 Working with JDBC Drivers on the Deployment Server ccccesececcseeeseecceeeeeeeeees 3 14 3 7 1 Obtaining the JDBC Drive Sre hasina e p sn aa a nE 3 14 3 7 2 Copying the JDBC Drivers to the Deployment Server s ss ssssssesississsesserissessressesees 3 15 3 8 Installing the Deployment Servet cccccceccscsssesescsceesescscscsesesescscsssesesescscssseseecssssseeceeeees 3 15 3 8 1 Prerequisites oii sess ennen aen eaa ia ohaas sess igus ari Te aaa aA iee saxbinedansusid epndsesstpunseneds eats 3 17 3 8 2 Installation Process Flow siiniiaseredcsiliee ese eesti die eee a ei e ae a etia 3 17 3 8 3 Before Launching the Deployment Server Installer sn snsssssssssississsssestestestessesees 3 17 3 8 4 Understanding Destination
579. sen for this plan appears in this field by default Primary User The user to whom an email is sent when a package is deployed The default for Primary User is listed in the JDE INI 3 On the HTML tab complete these fields Field Description Primary HTML Server When the system code generates an email message with a web shortcut pointing to a form the web shortcut generated points to the Primary HTML Web Server Only one of all the HTML Web Servers defined in installation planner can be defined as primary 1 Protocol This is the protocol used by the HTML Web Server Valid values are http or https Server URL This is the Domain Name System DNS host name of the HTML Web Server For example www oracle com HTTP Port This is the port number the HTML Web Server is listening to For HTTP the typical port number is 80 For HTTPS the typical port number is 443 Note You can choose to implement a HTML Web Server using a different port number JDENET Listen Port This is the port on which the JOENET communications protocol communicates with the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Enterprise Server The value is dependent on the release of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne For JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 1 the value is 6016 Default Login Defines how shortcuts to a web form are generated by the system code Values are either a reserved value or an explicit servlet name Reserved values a
580. seneneees 6 35 6 16 3 10 1 Enabling the Print UBE Job Log uo cccceeeeecsceseseececscssenseeceneneneseeenenes 6 35 6 16 3 10 2 General Problems miesnie eed ee en ie 6 36 6 16 4 Verifying the Table Conversion Process cccsesssscesssssesesesceesescsescseseseecssessneseessenes 6 40 6 16 4 1 Understanding Table Conversion Dependencies cccccccccccesesee eee eeeeeeees 6 40 6 16 4 2 Verifying Table Conversions sssini i a 6 40 6 16 4 3 Understanding Table Format Verification cccccec esses ce sssessneseeneeesens 6 41 6 16 4 3 1 Verifying Table Porimats ic isses aii anaa EE e E e ii 6 42 6 16 4 4 Rerunning Table Conversion Programs cccccceseseesesssssseseesesesssssesesesssssesesees 6 43 6 16 5 Deferring Index Builds During Table Conversion Workbench Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 6 45 6 17 Understanding Obsolete Tables ccceccsessesesesesssssesesesesesssesesessssesesesesssesesesesseseseecees 6 51 6 17 1 System Code 88 Obsolete Tables c ccccccececcscsssesescscscseseececsssssescecscssseseesscsssnsnesseeees 6 51 6 17 2 System Code 89 Obsoleted Tables cccccccccccsesesecccsceescscssssseecscscssssseecscssensneceseees 6 58 6 18 Understanding Specification Table Merges 0 ccceeeesseecessssseeesensseseseseeeesesesesseseseees 6 60 6 18 1 Merging Specification Tables cccccceccccccteseseececseeeesescssssseesesssesssenesesesessseseseseeesees 6 60 6 18 2 Restarting the Specification Merge cccccccece
581. sesteneneneees 5 2 Mandatory Pre Upgrade Process Upgrading the Pristine Environment 5 3 Running Table Conversions Locally cccccccccececcceeseeecsceseseecscscsssnseecssssensneceeecenens 5 3 Deferring Index Builds Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 cccccccecsesssesnstetetesceeeeseseenens 5 4 Working with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Software Requirement cccecceeeseeeens 5 4 Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options c ccccscecsssesseesesseneescecesesesssnanenenees 5 4 Assumptions About Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options 5 4 Accessing Processing Options cccccccssecsesesesssseseecseteesceesssesssseecscsesesesseseseaesnscsseeeeseeatees 5 5 Choosing Processing Option Values 00 cece cseeeeescecesesseeseneseseseneseseeenees 5 5 Specifying the Prompt Mode wevvccsseses scsssessecctessisseeststisbesecsetdeesooss aries 5 5 Specifying the Process Mod ey iics c icavanslocdsfurtiocsisvateiocets e a aaia 5 6 Specifying the Default Mode on ccc ccc cesses cecscesesescscseseecececssseseececesensneseseeenee 5 7 Verifying Status Change Values Have Not Changed cccccceeseseeceneeseseenenes 5 9 Specifying Plan Completion Processes c ccccccccccsesssecsceseeescscsesescecssensneseeeeenen 5 9 Specifying Replication Options cece ee ceesseeesecesessseeesesesesseeneceteseeees 5 10 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade cccccccceccesseseesesteteseecenesesesnsnenen
582. showing all data items belonging Smart Field Activation to a smart field template Major Technical Tables 24 3 Table Data Source Description Purpose F91430 System 910 Smart Field Template Stores a subset of selection criteria Criteria F91500 System 910 Application Header for Contains application names or tools names Tip of the Day where tips reside F91510 System 910 Tip Details for Tip of the Stores tip texts and a key to modify the Day sequence F9200 Data Dictionary Data Item Master Contains the relational breakdown of data Data Dictionary Local dictionary F9202 Data Dictionary Data Field Display Text Contains display text for each data field for Data Dictionary Local language data item and product code y reporting Used when data items descriptions requested Data dictionary row and column text for all languages The language preference code for data dictionary applies to text only Text includes row and column headings a compressed description and glossaries F9203 Data Dictionary Data Item Alpha Contains alpha descriptions and compressed D Descriptions descriptions of data items Used when data Data Dictionary Local ae ae items descriptions requested Similar to the F9202 table Contains data dictionary alpha descriptions for all languages F9207 Data Dictionary DD Error Message Contains one record per error message Data Dictionary Local Information F9210 D
583. siderations You should review this section prior to beginning an upgrade to the production environment a Copying Central Objects Object Librarian Packages ESU history You will use the Environment Copy application on menu GH9611 to copy the above Refer to Section 15 3 Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 Signon security You should turn off the Security Server when you are running the Installation Workbench Otherwise security issues may occur while the Installation Workbench is running If you have changed the password for JDE in your Enterprise Server database on your IBM i you should sign into the Deployment 15 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 Server using the correct password for the Enterprise Server For example JDE APPLES JDEPLAN You should add any passwords that have changed since the initial install and which might be used during the upgrade process to the JDE INI on the Deployment Server in the DSPWD section For example DSPWD JDE APPLES PRODDTA SNOOPY a Initial Tasks Workbench Most of the processes in the Initial Tasks Workbench will be marked as Duplicates and will not run again The Release Master B9800400 runs every time If you are upgrading from Xe or ERP8 you will need to run the Media Objects conversion for your business data You should edit the Upgrade plan to change the status of R8900165 to 30 W
584. source associated with that plan F98402 Version 910 Host Plan Detail table Lists the Enterprise Server and hosts for each Planner 910 plan one record per plan per server F984021 Version 910 Location Plan Detail table Contains the last location for a plan Planner 910 Major Technical Tables 24 7 Table Data Source Description Purpose F984022 Version 910 Replication Plan Detail Stores replicated plan for remote locations table publisher and subscriber tables Planner 910 F98403 Version 910 Environment Plan Detail Lists environments for each plan Holds flags table for production data demo data and table Planner 910 conversions for an upgrade F984031 Version 910 Language and Lists language and the selected environments Environment Plan Detail for each plan Planner 910 table F98404 Version 910 Package Plan Detail table Lists packages and package definitions for Planner 910 each environment F98405 Version 910 Table Conversion Lists table conversion information merged in Planner 910 Scheduler Table Conversion Scheduler from Environment Planner and Table Conversion Planner This table is similar to the F9843 table F984052 Version 910 Table Conversion Stores the logs for table conversions control Planner 910 History Log table merges and specification merges F9843 System 910 Table Conversion JDE Contains table conversions control table Sch
585. sseseecsess 18 3 19 20 18 7 Upgrading the Production Environment ccccccccssseccscsesesescssseseececscsssnseecscssssaneeeeeees 18 4 Creating a Remote Installation Plan 19 1 Understanding Remote Installation Plans 00 cece ceeeeeee cece ceseeeeeseteneneeenesessnenenes 19 1 19 2 Starting Installation Planner seneni aiai iige sra 19 2 19 3 Entering Information in Installation Planner ssssseesssesseeseessestesteseessestennessesnestensessesses 19 3 19 4 Entering Plan Location Information ss sssessssessesssesississessssstesiesresensresiesrenrnssentesresressen tes 19 5 19 5 Entering Deployment Server Information ssssssssssessssississssisitstsstsstesiestestnsrenteniesreseentes 19 6 19 6 Entering Enterprise Server Information ssses sssssessssssssissesstsstesiesiesensresiesrentnsnentestenressesnes 19 8 19 7 Enter Data Source Information for Server Map ssssssesserisssesessrssiersisrisressenresressesnesse 19 11 19 8 Entering HTML Web Server Information ccceseesesesssssesesescsesesesescscsesesesescsesesnecseees 19 12 19 9 Entering Data Server Information cccceseeessssessseseseesesesesesesssesesesesesssesesesesesesesesesens 19 16 19 10 Replicating Information to Remote Locations ccecccceeseesesessessesesesesesseseseseesesesesens 19 16 19 11 Entering Shared Data Source Information cccceeceessessseeeesessesesescsesseseseseseesesesesens 19 19 19 12 Setting Up En
586. stalled or upgraded Release 9 1 correctly Assuming you use the recommended shared path names the process does not delete or overlay your previous release You will have the Release 9 1 directories in addition to your existing directories The recommended configuration is for all business functions to be mapped to the server The only exception to this rule is a client development environment in which case all business functions should be mapped locally This chapter discusses a Section 23 1 Deployment Server Directory Structure a Section 23 2 Language Directory Structure a Section 23 3 IBM i Libraries a Section 23 4 Workstation General Directory Structure 23 1 Deployment Server Directory Structure After you install Release 9 1 on the Deployment Server you should have the following directory structure DEdwardsE910 CD Templates DEdwardsE910 CD Templates Esu amp Asu DEdwardsE910 CD Templates Esu amp Asu planner DEdwardsE910 CD Templates Esu amp Asu planner Package DEdwardsE910 CD Templates Esu amp Asu planner Package PKGNAME DEdwardsE910 cfgtoollogs DEdwardsE910 cfgtoollogs cfgfw DEdwardsE910 cfgtoollogs oui DEdwardsE910 Change Assistant DEdwardsE910 Change Assistant Downloads DEdwardsE910 Change Assistant Downloads CopiedESUs DEdwardsE910 Change Assistant Downloads ESUs DEdwardsE910 Change Assistant Downloads logs DEdwardsE910 Change Assistant SupportAssistant DEdwardsE910 client DEdwardsE910 database
587. sting SQL packages 1 STRPDM 2 Choose Option 2 with this criteria a Library lt data library gt for example CRPDTA a Name ALL a Type SQLPKG 3 Choose Option 4 4 Press Enter 2 7 3 Refreshing the Control Tables To refresh the control tables 1 From the previous release s planner environment you must map tables for the environment being upgraded as shown in the list below For example for DV733x map these tables to the Control Tables Test data source F0004 F0004D F0005 F0005D F0082 F00821 F0083 F0084 F9100 F9101 F9102 F9105 F9105D F9106 F9106D F9050 F9010 F9020 F9021 F9022 F9023 F9025 F9030 F98840 F91011 2 8 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Refreshing and Verifying Data N Do m a o o N F91012 F91013 F91014 F98810D F98811 F98830 F98845 F98800 F98800D F98800T F98810 From the System Administration Tools menu GH9011 select Batch Versions In the Batch Application field enter R98403 Click Find Run version XJDE0022 locally On the Processing Options Environment tab verify the processing options are set to 1 1 A and 1 Click OK Deactivate the mappings you defined for the tables listed in Step 1 Reactivate the original mappings You must verify that your master control tables for release level B73 3 x or B9 include all custom changes you want to carry forward to Release 9 1 Verify them for each environment you want to upgrade 2 7
588. t 2 Send Shortcut Location Description Location Code Parent Location DENVER Denver Location E Save record 2 On Location Revisions click OK 20 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering Deployment Server Information 20 5 Selecting Additional Server Types Once a plan location is specified specify the types of servers you want to add to your installation plan To select additional server types a dd on Servers Plan Server Add Riel OK Can Dis Location D2 4 x R tins w Dispi B OLE B internet Check the type of servers you would like to add to your existing configuration as a part of this plan Calcula j M Deployment Server Work ey Center g Internal IV Enterprise Server WET g2 External V Data Serer ET cy Internet 2 Create Shortcut g Send 322 1 On Server Add check the types of servers that you want to add to your configuration 2 Click OK A Server Revisions form appears in the order listed on the Server Add form for each type of server that you chose 3 Continue with the relevant sections that follow 20 6 Entering Deployment Server Information When choosing to add an additional Deployment Server to your plan the Deployment Server Revisions form appears To enter Deployment Server information Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 5 En
589. t You can restart these programs after you finish installing the Deployment Server 3 8 2 Installation Process Flow The diagram below illustrates the process flow and the various installation paths le JD Edward Oracle wards Select Installation Typical E1Local Directory Secure Summary Password EnterpriseOne Finish Deployment Server inis Installer ORACLE_HOME Select Remote Shared Directory 7 Component If you have not previously installed Local Selection Oracle OEE on this machine you must install the Database Engine before running the EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Installer 3 8 3 Before Launching the Deployment Server Installer Before you launch the Deployment Server installer you should obtain the JDBC drivers for the Enterprise Server database and also for your local database which is Oracle Enterprise Edition OEE You can place the JDBC drivers in the CD images directory on your Deployment Server either before or after running OUI to install the Deployment Server however it is preferable that you copy the drivers before running OUI For instructions on obtaining and placing the requisite JDBC drivers refer to the section Section 3 7 Working with JDBC Drivers on the Deployment Server Working with the Deployment Server 3 17 Installing the Deployment Server Note The Deployment Server OUI installer delivers the requisite JDK JVM Tip Installation Methods Yo
590. t Client Installation Understanding the JD Edwards Clients Development and Web Understanding the Oracle Universal Installer Creating the Web Development Feature Copying JDBC Drivers and the tnsnames ora file to the Deployment Server Updating the Database Drivers in the JDB ini File Copying the JDK to the Deployment Server OH4A Only Updating the InstallManager htm File Updating the oraparam ini File Setting Up Local Database Installers a Refer to the Development Client Installation Guide for these topics Understanding the Development Client Installation This section describes Understanding Installation Steps and Understanding Destination Paths Installing WebSphere Express 7 0 or WebSphere for Developers 7 0 Installing the Local Database Installing the Development Client Working With SnapShot on the Development Client Deinstalling the Development Client Removing the Local Database Troubleshooting the Installation Process Installing a Development Client from the Command Line Manual Cleanup of a Deinstalled Development Client Manual Cleanup of a Deinstalled Oracle Database Installing Multiple Pathcodes 8 3 Working With Development Client Installation The Development Client installation program copies all necessary components of Release 9 1 to a Development Client During installation the installation program verifies that enough disk space exists and if not you are promp
591. t Server stop it Use Task Manager to verify these processes are stopped a activConsole exe m jdenet_n exe m java exe If any of these processes are running either wait for them to finish or kill them via Task Manager 3 Go to Start gt All Programs gt Oracle JOE_DEP910_Home gt Oracle Installation Products gt Universal Installer 27 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Using the OUI Installer to Deinstall JD Edwards EnterpriseOne from the Deployment Server W Oracle Universal Installer Welcome oax ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Welcome The Oracle Universal Installer guides you through the installation and configuration of your Oracle products Click Installed Products to see all installed products Deinstall Products About Oracle Universal Installer Installed Products T Install 4 On Oracle Universal Installer Welcome select the Deinstall Products button W Inventory xi Contents Environment You have the following Oracle products installed G Oracle Homes OraClient11g_home1 Location Product Information eee F Show empty homes Ifyou want to remove Oracle software please check the items and click Remove To see the languages installed and other details of a component select the component and then click Details Expand All Collapse All Details Remove 5 On Inventory with the Contents tab select put a check ma
592. t all machines names in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne environment conform to specific rules Whenever you manually enter a machine name in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne or whenever a machine name is programmatically determined it is important to note that the machine name a Is case sensitive Cannot exceed 15 characters Must be alphanumeric only and cannot contain any special characters such as underscores or hyphens Any machine whose name does not conform to these rules cannot be used in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne environment 1 3 3 Accessing IBM i Performance Tuning and White Papers In order to optimize performance for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne customers running on IBM i users should be aware of the IBM tuning guide White Paper WP101777 IBM Power Systems with IBM i Performance and Tuning Tips for Oracle s JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 9 0 http www 03 ibm com support techdocs atsmastr nsf WebIndex WP101777 On this IBM Techdocs Technical Sales Library web site you can locate the above referenced White Paper and other documents by searching for EnterpriseOne and the EnterpriseOne release number for example 9 0 or 9 1 http www 03 ibm com support techdocs atsmastr nsf Web TechDocs 1 3 4 Using JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Support Use My Oracle Support to access customer support functions and information including issues Software Action Requests SARs and to access the Oracle JD Edwards Update Center Through the Upd
593. t user defined and hard coding is not appropriate This UBE takes existing records in the F0101 and if a matching record exists in one of three tables F060116 F08401 and F08901 the ATS flag is updated to a Y If either the ALPH or SSN is out of sync the F0101 values are updated to the corresponding table R7611B To update BSTT in Requires clear The ICMS Tax This is a data conversion F7611B when understanding of the Situation Code UBE that converts the ICMS upgrading from Brazil process on BSTT contains Tax Situation Code BSTT XE ERP8 0 and have how to populate the incorrect values if field based on an algorithm not taken ESU F7611B table this job is not run 4937298 correctly Do not execute for a World A9 2 migration Do not re run from the Xe E80 Post Install menu for World A7 3 migration R897611B To populate BST1 in Requires clear The new ICMS Tax Populates a new ICMS Tax F7611B when understanding of the Situation Code Situation code field BST1 upgrading from Brazil process on BST1 has incorrect in table F7611B with the XE ERP 8 0 and have how to populate the values if this job is concatenated value of Item run the pre requisite F7611B table not run Origin BORI and old ICMS R7611B once correctly Tax Situation Code BSTT This new BST1 field is now of size 3 as compared to size 2 for prior releases Do not execute for a World A9 2 migration Do not re run from the Xe E80 Post Install menu for
594. ta source where each of the objects reside 7 Select the appropriate radio button for your data load Radio Button Description Append Adds records to your existing tables This is the typical selection Replace Clears existing tables prior to loading new data 8 Click OK 9 Select one of the following options 5 16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade gP Plan Generation 5 x Ifyou would like to continue manually press Ok If you would like to generate your plan automatically press Take Defaults Ifyou would like to stop generating your plan press Cancel Ifyou choose to take defaults the planner will then proceed to automatically select your locations and machines on this plan Take Defaults X Cancel Note The above screen may not always appear for upgrades which is preferable because the recommended method is to step through the planner rather than taking defaults See Caution When Choosing Take Defaults below a From this form you have the option to automatically enter the locations and machines into the plan that you defined in the previous version of the software 10 Choose a method for generating your plan a To manually create your plan click OK and continue with Section 5 4 3 Entering Location Information a To enable the system to automatically enter the locations and machines from th
595. ta source to the System 910 data source It then updates the F98402 table to indicate completion and uses the environment information to populate the F986101 and F98611 tables in the Server Map data source Only valid environments data sources and server map tables are created 6 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Workbench Components Installation Workbench Component Functional Description Control Table Workbench Runs the batch applications for the planned merges that update the data dictionary user defined codes UDCs Solution Explorer and other Control Tables It then updates the F98405 table to reflect completion and writes a conversion log record to the F984052 table Also runs the batch applications for the planned merges to update language files This workbench runs only for users who are adding an alternate language to their installations For Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 If you wish to defer index builds you can choose to do so beginning with Tools Release 9 1 Update 2 During your upgrade you may choose to defer index builds for very large tables for tables that are converted several times during the Table Conversion Workbench or if you are planning on a Unicode conversion For details and instructions on deferring index builds refer to the subsection in this guide entitled Chapter 6 1 4 Deferring Indexes for Table Conversion Workbench Tools Release 9 1 Update 2
596. tables such as company constants fiscal date patterns and item master are populated with production data during the prototype process Copy the tables to the production environment before going live 1 5 7 Production Environment PD910 Production users have a tested and released package on their system Batch applications can run on the Enterprise Server 1 5 8 Additional Considerations Additional considerations include a Section 1 5 8 1 Cluster Software Options a Section 1 5 8 2 Web Based Options 1 5 8 1 Cluster Software Options When using cluster software additional issues exist that must be taken into consideration before installing Release 9 1 1 5 8 2 Web Based Options The HTML Web Server installation enables the use of Web enabled functions in Release 9 1 See Also HTML Web Server Java Server or JAS in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools HTML Web Server Installation Guide for more information about Web based options 1 5 9 Release History This version of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne is Release 9 1 The following list shows the currently supported previous releases of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Release 9 0 a Release 8 12 ERPS 8 11 and 8 11 SP1 8 11 and 8 11 SP1 are on extended support only OneWorld Xe 1 6 Language Process Overview Note Languages are installed using the Installation Planner The Language installation image is required to implement this functionality If you install add
597. tage Queries elFileQueries 10 2 0 3 0 1 tage Queries elGeneralQueries tage Queries elGeneralQueries 10 2 0 3 0 tage Queries elGeneralQueries 10 2 0 3 0 1 tage Queries elISeriesQueries tage Queries elISeriesQueries 10 2 0 3 0 tage Queries elISeriesQueries 10 2 0 3 0 1 tage Queries elPackageQueries tage Queries elPackageQueries 10 2 0 3 0 tage Queries elPackageQueries 10 2 0 3 0 1 tage Queries fileQueries Deployment Server Directory Structure JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries fileQueries 10 1 0 3 0 1 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries generalQueries JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries generalQueries 10 2 0 2 0 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries generalQueries 10 2 0 2 0 1 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries netQueries JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries netQueries 10 2 0 2 0 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries netQueries 10 2 0 2 0 1 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries NtServicesQueries JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries NtServicesQueries 10 2 0 3 0 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries NtServicesQueries 10 2 0 3 0 1 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries rgsQueries JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries rgsQueries 10 1 0 3 0 JDEdwardsE910 OneWorld Client Install Stage Queries rgsQueries 10 1 0 3 0 1 JDEdwardsE910 On
598. tatus 45 are still running and set the status back to 30 or 50 if you want the TC Workbench to re submit them All the Table Conversions have the same job name which is R98405A When looking in the jde 1log for that job there is a message stating which TC is running 6 16 3 Configuring Table Conversions to Run on the Enterprise Server There are three settings that control the location for running Table Conversions These are a Section 6 16 3 1 Table Conversion Schedule Working With Installation Workbench 6 27 Understanding Table Conversions Section 6 16 3 2 Upgrade Plan Definition m Section 6 16 3 3 Select Enterprise Server and Maximum Jobs On Select Environments Advanced Exit a Section 6 16 3 4 Configuring Queues a Section 6 16 3 5 Starting Table Conversions a Section 6 16 3 6 Monitoring Table Conversions Section 6 16 3 7 Working With Table Conversion Log Files a Section 6 16 3 8 Stopping Table Conversions a Section 6 16 3 9 Restarting Installation Workbench 6 16 3 1 Table Conversion Schedule When the table conversions are scheduled using JD Edwards EnterpriseOne schedule owners decide whether their conversions can run on the Enterprise Server If not then the Run TC on Deployment Server option is selected Most conversions can run on the Enterprise Server Table conversions that cannot include Technical Conversions sequence lt 100 UBEs and cross data source conversions for ex
599. te new file lt Queue Path gt lt filename gt The object is missing or corrupted and must be added manually OLE Fail Cannot create new file lt Queue Path gt lt filename gt Check rights and disk space on OLE queue path and then run again JDB CommitUser Fails Check Database blocks setting and run again Invalid Shortcut Data lt file name gt The object is missing or corrupted and must be added manually Invalid Shortcut Data cannot allocate memory Check virtual memory and run again Invalid Document ID lt vendor name gt The object is missing or corrupted and must be added manually Secondary RTF File fails to open lt Queue Path gt lt filename gt Make sure the file exists in the path that defined in System 910 F988MOQUE based on lt Queue Path gt and run again Cannot allocate memory for RTF Blob Check virtual memory and run again 6 10 2 Changing the Status of Initial Tasks Workbench You use this procedure if you are running Workbench in attended mode or if you set a task break before Initial Tasks Workbench To change the status of Initial Tasks Workbench Working With Installation Workbench 6 17 Working With Initial Tasks Workbench a Installation Workbench Initial Tasks Workbench Ele Edit Preferences Form Row Window Help B ox 8 ow e Blin 3 5 Find Close Seq New Prev Met Con Dis Abo nks w Previo
600. te replicated data dictionary files 1 From the Data Dictionary Design menu GH951 select Recreate Replicated Data Dictionary R92TAM 2 On Work with Batch Versions select version XJDE0001 3 On Version Prompting from the Row menu select Processing Options and enter the following information Language Preference Use the visual assist button to select the correct value for your language a All Languages Enter the value 1 Click OK Select version XJDE0001 On Version Prompting select Advanced from the Form menu On Advanced Version Prompting activate the Override Location option Click OK o 0 N O 0 A On Version Prompting click Submit 10 After the job is completed log off Release 9 1 11 8 Working with SETOWAUT SETOWAUT is a set of tools you can use to secure JD Edwards EnterpriseOne objects on your IBM i Enterprise Server The SETOWAUT objects are delivered in a SAVF by the same name in the JDEOW library However it is recommended that you download the latest version of SETOWAUT from the Update Center This file can be restored using the RSTLIB command It should be restored to a library called SETOWAUT Instructions for using SETOWAUT are found in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Server and Workstation Administration Guide Performing Post Upgrade Tasks 11 13 UBE Performance SQL Package Location 11 9 UBE Performance SQL Package Location Once the Table Conversions are completed chang
601. te the installation of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack 4 3 4 Setting up the TCP IP Protocol for Enterprise Server Note Set up the TCP IP service to start automatically each time you IPL the IBM i For more information about setting it up contact your system administrator or see the appropriate IBM documentation To set up the TCP IP protocol for your IBM i Enterprise Server 1 Log on to the Enterprise Server as QSECOFR or as any user who can access the Configure TCP IP menu On Current OneWorld Versions choose the version of the software for which you are setting up the TCP IP protocol To access the Configure TCP IP menu enter CFGTCP Select Work With TCP IP Host Table Entries On Work With TCP IP Host Table Entries find the network Internet address for the Enterprise Server A single machine could have more than one entry for the same network address Verify that an entry exists for the Enterprise Server network address and that it matches the format that follows Search for the Enterprise Server network address by entering the Enterprise Server name only for example SYS1 If one does not exist you must add one by choosing Add In the Host Name field your Enterprise Server machine name should appear in this format hostname domainname where hostname is the name of your machine and domainname is the local domain of the machine on the network For example SYS1 MFG ABC COM in which SYS1
602. ted to create more space before continuing Caution Before starting a JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Development Client installation you must close all other applications running on that machine The installation process may not run correctly if other applications are open This section discusses these topics a Section 8 3 1 Creating a Desktop Shortcut a Section 8 3 2 Using a Shared Drive a Section 8 3 3 Understanding Third Party Products Installing the Development Clients for Developers and System Administrators 8 3 Working With Development Client Installation 8 3 1 Creating a Desktop Shortcut A system administrator can create a shortcut to Instal1lManager exe from the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne client install directory on the Deployment Server and can deploy the shortcut to the Development Client For example the client install directory is typically JDI Edwards E910 OneWorld Client Install To ensure that the shortcut works correctly ensure the Start in field contains the location of the installmanager htn file To create a desktop shortcut 1 To edit the Start in field in Microsoft Windows Explorer or on the desktop right click the shortcut Click Properties and then click the Shortcut menu Double click the Release 9 1 InstallManager shortcut to start the Release 9 1 installation manager Skip to the next task entitled Using a Shared Drive 8 3 2 Using a Shared Drive
603. ter option fields appear in a box labeled Line Printers which you use to set the paper dimensions and line parameters Complete these fields Field Description Characters Per Inch Enter a value to specify the number of characters in one horizontal inch Columns Per Page Enter a value to specify the number of characters in one line of text in the specified report Lines Per Inch Enter a value to specify the number of lines of text in one vertical inch Lines Per Page Enter a value to specify the number of lines of text on one printed page Printer Paper Width Displays a value that is calculated automatically based on the values entered in the Line Printers box Working With the Enterprise Server 7 9 Setting Up a Printer on the Enterprise Server Field Description Printer Paper Height Displays a value that is calculated automatically based on the values entered in the Line Printers box 11 12 13 14 On the Details tab the Custom option lets you specify a conversion filter to use When choosing the Custom option a field appears beneath the Custom checkbox Enter the name of the conversion filter you want to use or use the visual assist to select a filter from the Conversion Program Search and Select form If you do not want to change or add a conversion filter skip to Step 16 in this task To change or add a conversion filter from the Form menu select Advanced and con
604. tering Deployment Server Information a Typical Installation Plan Deployment Server Revisions Of File Edit Preferences Form Window Help l8 x ae E OK Can Dis Abo Machine Usage js Deployment Server Location ener Machine Name JDENLCMoT Primary User NDE Description ieployment Server Release Eno Host Type feo Intel NT Workstation Enterprise Data Aim Crystal che inks w Window S OLE a Internet Primary Deployment Server Server Share Path 2258 1 On Deployment Server Revisions complete the following fields Field Description Machine Name Enter the name of your additional Deployment Server The name is case sensitive should not exceed 15 characters and should not contain any special characters Description Enter a description of the machine Release Enter E910 Location Displays the system provided default value chosen for this plan Primary User This identifies the user to whom email is sent when a package is eae The default for Primary User is The default value for Primary 2 On the Deployment tab verify or complete the following fields Field Description Primary This field indicates the hierarchy of the servers The default value for a Deployment Server secondary Deployment Server is 0 Server Share Path Enter the server share path where you installedRelease 9 1 on your Deployment Server Verif
605. ternet Data Source Use pe Local Data Source Data Source Type J DB2 UDB on 05 400 F JDBNET Data Source Data Class fv Versions Platform fasaoo IBM AS 400 CISC Database Server Name DSs2 Default Sizing SQUMSDE ODBC SQUMSDE OLEDE Oracle DBZ UDB Access Logical Library Name convar 0 ODBC Data Source Name versions DV910 1 On Data Source Revisions verify the accuracy of the Versions data source 2 Click OK Note Versions data sources are specific to the pathcode and the Unicode flag on the Advanced Form must be checked 20 13 Finalizing the Installation Plan Installation Planner finalizes your installation plan automatically A message appears to let you know that the installation plan is finalized When the plan is finalized a The JD Edwards E910 hosts hosttype hostname directory is created on the Deployment Server This contains the jde ini and the configuration files used by the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer Note The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer cannot be run until the Installation Plan is finalized Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 29 Concluding the Validation Planner Report The status is set to 20 which signals that several adjustments to tables were made according to your plan Create the OCM Modify the jde ini The following tables are upgraded a Release Master table F00945 a Path
606. tes the customer specific user defined codes UDC tables by using a combination of information from the new UDC tables and the change tables in the planner database This merge runs when you run the Installation Workbench The UDC tables are F0004 and F0005 During the installation process this merge is used only for users who are installing an alternate language For upgrade and cumulative update customers who are installing an alternate language the User Defined Codes Merge R9600042 program merges the language UDC text When the merge business function is run any time a UDC Header record in the F0004 table or a UDC Detail record in the F0005 table is added the corresponding language records are added to your UDC language tables F0004D or F0005D A report interconnect to run the language UDC merge is provided with this merge 9 1 6 Working with Favorites Merge Note This merge is for upgrades and cumulative updates only The Favorites Merge R96911002 program updates the customer specific favorites table by using a combination of information from the new favorites table and change tables in the planner database It runs during the Installation Workbench phase The favorites table is F91100 9 1 7 Working with Report Director Templates Merge Note This merge is for upgrades and cumulative updates only The Report Director Templates Merge R96914002 program updates the customer specific report director tem
607. the following registry keys HKI HK HK EY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE ORACLE KEY_E1Local EY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Wow6432Node ORACLE KEY_E1lLocal EY_LOCAL_MACHINE SYSTEM CurrentControlSet services see Keys below Keys Delete any keys with names that start with Oracle and contain E1Local Delete this directory c Oracle ElLocal If you cannot delete the E1Local subdirectory because a file in that directory is locked follow these steps a c Determine which file is locked and which process has the lock on the file A freeware program called Process Explorer can be helpful in determining this information You can obtain a free copy of Process Explorer from this web site http technet microsoft com en us sysinternals Either kill the locking process with Process Explorer or Microsoft Windows Task Manager or if the process was started as a Microsoft Windows service change the Startup Type to Manual and reboot the computer again Try again to delete the E1Local subdirectory Remove the 64 bit Oracle inventory entries a c With a text editor such as Notepad edit this file c Program Files Oracle inventory ContentsXML inventory xml Delete any lines that start with lt HOME NAME E1Local Save the file Remove the entry from the Windows PATH a b 9 e f Navigate to Control Panel gt System Click Adv
608. the updated new JD Edwards EnterpriseOne workflow process overwrites the customer modified workflow process a Ifthe customer has created a new workflow process and used a name that is the same as the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne workflow process that has been updated the updated JD Edwards EnterpriseOne workflow process overwrites the customer created workflow process with the same name If any customer defined processes are in danger of being overwritten you should copy the existing process and rename it with another version number before performing the merge You can check for processes to be overwritten by using proof mode with the merge 9 2 Working with Specification Merges This section discusses Section 9 3 Working with Object Librarian Merge Section 9 4 Working with Versions List Merge Performing Merges 9 5 Working with Object Librarian Merge Section 9 5 Working with Central Objects Merge Section 9 6 Working with Update Language Text Merge This table explains what happens to the following types of objects if they have been modified by the customer when the specification merge programs run during an upgrade or a cumulative update The table assumes the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne action and the customer action are on the same object JD Edwards EnterpriseOne action Customer action Upgrade Update An object is modified No action No action Add or replace An object
609. thin the enterprise It also is a system administration tool that stores all information about the installation plan in a set of preloaded tables in the Planner data source Installation Planner guides you through setting up the installation plan step by step based on options you choose Installation Planner manages these processes Language setup a Location setup Deployment Server setup a Enterprise Server setup a HTML Web Server a Additional server setup This includes setup to servers such as a Database Server a Data source setup This includes setup for both Enterprise Server specific and shared environment data sources Some data sources remain the same between releases a Business data a Control tables Other data sources are release specific System and data dictionary Server map The server map is machine specific and release specific if separate environments are maintained Environment setup This includes all environments for a typical customer configuration and creation of anew environment such as PD910 This process ensures that the Object Configuration Manager OCM mappings are correct and the new environments point to the correct path codes This could include creating custom environments and path codes Control table merges The control table planner program offers these merges for customers upgrading to Release 9 1 from a previous release a Data Dictionary Merge R989200P a User Defined
610. time Before proceeding Apply Planner Update to PS910 and PY910 Build and deploy full server package to P5910 and PY910 Test all custom modifications in PY910 During the first phase of an upgrade all modifications and customizations are transferred into the upgrade environment The upgrade then converts the central objects with the table conversions and specification merge business data table conversions and control table merges Once the upgrade is successfully tested the production environment is ready to be brought up The new production environment will borrow the already successfully merged Central Objects containing all your modifications and customizations and can borrow the successfully merged Control Tables as well The Production Upgrade only converts business data All shared data system data control tables etc needs to be converted Objects and version are copied from the PY910 environment Then the Business Data Table conversions is the only merge or conversion that needs to be run in order for Production to be successfully prepared However if you opt not to copy the Control Tables from the PY to the PD then you will have to run the Control Table Merge again You cannot use the Updating the Production Environment section if you need to bring any additional object specification changes This is a distinguishing factor between an upgrade and an update of the production environment 15 2 General Checklist and Con
611. tinue with the steps in this procedure The Advanced option is enabled only when Custom has been chosen The Work With Conversion Programs form appears Either click Add or highlight one of the filters and click Copy or Select The Advanced Conversion Program form appears Change one or both of these fields Field Description Conversion Program If you clicked Add or Copy on the previous form the Conversion Program field is enabled Enter the name of the conversion program that you want to add or copy When making a copy the Parameter String field is populated with the string that you highlighted on the previous form Parameter String The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne system automatically enters the parameter string in native commands based on the host type from which you are printing and the type of printer PostScript PCL or line For example s string _name 1 library_name f convertPDFToPS where s defines the string name 1 the letter 1 not the numeral 1 defines the library name and f defines the function name 15 16 17 Click OK The Work with Conversion Programs form appears Click Close The Printer Setup form appears In the grid at the bottom of the Printer Setup form double click the row header for each paper type that your printer supports A checkmark appears in the row header for each paper type that you select Note You can add new paper types as necessary Instructions
612. tion records The Rename Metadata Repository option assumes that you have used system or database utilities to copy all the tables in Central Objects to the new database owner library 4 You can override the default copy flags by clicking on the Advanced Copy form exit which displays this screen Advanced Options Environment Pa O69 Eile Edit Preferences Help Y R amp R R i A A Links w Display Internet The components beneath the Copy Package and Copy Environments options If you know you have provided for these components some other way you can check them off You must have copied them before continuing with this Directories paths can be copied on the enterprise server using system Other methods of copying the database components include Oracle export import DB2 UDB db2move SQL detach DB copy mdf Jdt attach new database iSeries SAVLIB RSTLIB are all critical parts of a complete copy process commands 15 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Copy Environment Application P989400 5 On Advanced Options Environment Path Codes if you want to override the default flags click the Override copy options button You are returned to the preceding screen where all the default copy options are unprotected allowing you to pick and choose which components the process will copy This non default method is only recommended if you hav
613. tion Methods for a list of various installation methods Caution Microsoft Windows 2008 For Windows 2008 if you are using a physical DVD and the installation starts automatically you must cancel this process and start the installation manually Caution Microsoft Windows 2008 On the Microsoft Windows 2008 platform you must right click on the executable and select Run as Administrator from the drop down 4 From the Disk1 image execute the InstallManager exe file from the root folder Disk1 InstallManager exe Caution Microsoft Windows 2008 On the Microsoft Windows 2008 platform you must right click on the executable and select Run as Administrator from the drop down DP ID Edwards Install Manager xi ORACLE JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Install EnterpriseOne Database Engine EnterpriseOne E910 Deployment Server IMPORTANT READ ME FIRST 5 OnJD Edwards Install Manager select this link to install the local OEE database EnterpriseOne Database Engine Working with the Deployment Server 3 19 Installing the Deployment Server File Download Security Warning Do you want to run or save this file E Name OEESetup exe Type Application 1 76MB From E Local_Build E900_12_29_OEE CD_IMAGES Disk a While files from the Internet can be useful this file type can O potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not run or save this software Wh
614. tion at runtime 2 Always use without prompting This is the default Replicate System T ables Replicate Data Dictionary T ables Replicate Control T ables Replicate Constant T ables Replicate Master T ables fF F Help x Cancel 2 On the Replication tab complete the fields using these values Value Description 0 Do not use and do not prompt 1 Prompt for option at run time 2 Always use without prompting Replicate System Tables Select whether you have the option to replicate system tables automatically for remote locations Replicate Data Dictionary Tables Select whether you have the option to replicate data dictionary tables automatically for remote locations Replicate Control Tables Select whether you have the option to replicate control tables menus and user defined codes automatically for remote locations Replicate Constant Tables Select whether you have the option to replicate constant tables automatically for remote locations Business data tables are Object Librarian type 280 Replicate Master Tables Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 11 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Select whether you have the option to replicate master tables automatically for remote locations Business data tables are Object Librarian type 210 and 211 5 4 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade This section consists of the following task
615. translated text for descriptions listed Descriptions in the F9106 table ActivEra only F9010 Control Table Environment Setup Answers F9020 Control Table ActivEra Qualifier Rules Defines rule names used by ActivEra Rules Header are applied to conditionally execute an individual task or task relationship tree order F9022 Control Table ActivEra Qualifier Rules Lists conditional statements within rules listed Detail in the F9020 table ActivEra only F9030 Control Table Documentation Stores indexes of HTML documents associated Cross reference with specific tasks ActivEra only F9050 Control Table Rough cut Answer Defines the hierarchical means of eliminating Dependency system codes and subsequent applications which do not apply within a specified system configuration ActivEra only F91100 System 910 Favorites Relationship Categorizes business views on a parent child Properties format F91100D System 910 Favorites All Stores alternate descriptions for different Descriptions languages F91300 System 910 Scheduled Job Master F91310 System 910 Scheduled Job Parameters F91320 System 910 Job Schedule F91330 System 910 Scheduled Job Override Printer Info F91400 System 910 Report Director Templates Contains the design templates for reports that users can create F91410 System 910 Report Director Templates Helps users manipulate data sequencing Sequence Items F91420 System 910 Report Director Template Creates a list
616. try Planner 910 System Local F96602 System 910 Deployment Shortcut Planner 910 System Local F96603 System 910 Deployment Execute Planner 910 System Local F96604 System 910 Deployment Third Party Planner 910 System Local Major Technical Tables 24 5 Table Data Source Description Purpose F96605 System 910 Deployment Initialization Planner 910 System Local F96605T System 910 Deployment Initialization Planner 910 System Local F96606 System 910 Deployment File Set Planner 910 System Local F966071 System 910 Deployment ODBC Data Planner 910 soute System Local F966072 System 910 Deployment ODBC Data Planner 910 Source Attributes System Local F9670 System 910 Software Update Master Planner 910 oe System Local F9671 System 910 Software Update Detail Planner 910 Table System Local F96710 System 910 Impact Analysis Results Planner 910 System Local F9672 System 910 Software Update Pathcode Planner 910 Information System Local F96761 System 910 Software Update Object Planner 910 Detail System Local F967611 System 910 Software Update Planner 910 Language Table System Local F9691100 System Local Change Table Favorites Stores adds changes and deletes to favorites tables between releases F9691400 System Local Change Table Report Stores adds changes deletes to the Report Director Template Header Director template header table b
617. ts as follows Demo data to Development and Pristine environments Production data to Production and Prototype environments To load demo data in Production or Prototype environments you must run a UBE R98403E to copy the data to those environments Note The from source environment can be the Planner environment or your Pristine environment Caution You should not change the record selection on this UBE 1 Run R98403E using the XJDE0009 version and set the processing options as follows 6 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Workbench Components _ Processing Options Environments Advanced R98403E copies each table identified by data selection to the target data source If the table already exists in the target data source data will not be replaced If the table format mismatch the table spec s in the target data source the table will be re created 1 Enter the name of the source environment the JDEPLAN environment of the table to be copied 2 or Enter the name of the source Data Source the data source of the table to be copied 3 Enter the name of the target environment the environment to copy the table to 4 or Enter the name of the target Data Source the data source to copy the table to 2 On Processing Options 1 4 complete these fields Option 1 Enter the name of the source environment which is the environment o
618. ts te eee 4 3 Setting the System Values sessie tieka sets Gia sss no neeh EA E ER E 4 3 Setting up the TCP IP Protocol for Enterprise Server ccccceccceseseseeseneeseeeeseseseenens 4 4 Setting up IBM i Access on your Enterprise Server cccccccesesetececeseeseteesesceseseseseees 4 5 Starting the Remote Database TCP IP Service Optional ccccccseeeeteesesteteseseees 4 6 Optimizing Machine Resources ccccceccsssesecscsesesesescscsesesescscscsesesescscssseesecsessenseeceeenens 4 6 Cleaning Up From Prior Installations ccccccseseesccsssesescsescseesescsesesesesescssssseesseenens 4 7 Testing Long File Names on the IBM i ccceccccssssesestseseseeceseseseecenesesesnsneneseseseeesseesnans 4 7 Checking for Co existence Tables ccccccececsccsssesesescscesesescscsesssesescssssseecsesesssnsneseesnens 4 7 Adding Entries to the System Reply List ccccc ce cecesssesescscscesesescscsesesesescsessseseeesenes 4 8 Rebuilding Cross Reference Tables on the IBM i cccccecceccsesesesescsessneesesceeeecsees 4 8 Understanding the Platform Pack Installation on the IBM iu cece eect ee eeeeeee 4 8 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i 4 9 Troubleshooting the IBM i Platform Pack Installation cccccccseeeseseeceneeseseeneteneeeenes 4 23 Invalid User or PaSSwOrd ccccccccsssecsecssessecsseesecsecessesecessesesescesecesecseecsecasesaecesceaeceeseaseeeees 4 23 Abnormal
619. turing orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 13 30 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Processing Options for R31P40039 Processing Options for R31P40039 Order Type value 05 for Manufacturing Orders The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 05 in the manufacturing orders If no value is entered the default order type assigned is 01 Manufacturing Rework Order Type value 01 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 01 in the Engineering Change engineering change request orders If no value is entered the default order type Request Orders assigned is 01 Order Type value 02 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 02 in the Engineering Change engineering change request orders If no value is entered the default order type Request Orders assigned is 01 Order Type value 03 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 03 in the Engineering Change engineering change request orders If no value is entered the default order type Request Orders assigned is 01 Order Type value 04 for The user defined code that the user wants to replace Order Type value 04 in the Engineering Change engineering change request orders If no value is entered the default order type Request Orders assigned is 01 Order
620. twork vendor or the installation and configuration manuals for third party products used with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Note You should always check My Oracle Support for revisions to this guide subsequent to the initial release which coincides with the General Availability of Release 9 1 Generally this document is republished in its entirety only for the next major applications release of JD Edwards EnterpriseOne The book contains only the procedures required for a typical base upgrade with predefined typical environments and databases However the upgrade is flexible enough to enable you to a Select specific components to upgrade from multiple predefined environments and databases a Install the Platform Pack to either of these machine combinations Enterprise Server and Database Server on one machine and one drive the Installer runs once a Enterprise Server and Database Server on separate machines or different drives in the same machine the Installer runs twice once for each server This guide is designed for management information system MIS managers and installers It outlines the procedures for upgrading to Release 9 1 Understanding JD Edwards EnterpriseOne 1 1 Understanding the Upgrade Process This guide also describes the procedures to migrate from existing JD Edwards World to Release 9 1 To successfully upgrade to Release 9 1 you must understand Hardware and software requirements
621. u can install the Deployment Server using any of these methods a Directly from the Deployment Server installation DVD a From a copy of the Deployment Server installation DVD that exists on a hard disk drive From a downloaded and unzipped image of the installation DVD that was obtained from the Oracle E Delivery web site 3 8 4 Understanding Destination Paths Each Oracle product that is installed on a machine has what is termed an Oracle Home directory or path This is a directory that contains all the files associated with the product This path has a name as well You can specify a name that is intuitive so you do not have to remember the path When you install the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server you specify an Oracle Home and name for that installation as well For example you may enter C JDEdwards E910 as the Oracle Home path and JDE DEP910_HOME as the Oracle Home name Following the this example your Oracle Home on the Deployment Server would be Oracle Home Path Oracle Home Name Comment C JDEdwards E910 JDE_DEP910_HOME This is the Oracle Home of the Deployment Server 3 8 5 Using InstallManager to Install a Local Database on the Deployment Server If you have not already installed the database engine and a database called E1Local does not exist on your Deployment Server use the procedures in this section to install these requisite components before installing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Se
622. u can proceed with installing the Windows server on iSeries If you will not perform the installation right away copy the command string shown on this page and save it until you are ready to install the server The data on this page is not saved if you bookmark this page and return to it later The following installation instructions contain the Install Windows Server INSWNTSVR command string which can be copied and pasted to an OS 400 emulation session This helps to avoid manually entermg the INSWNTSVR command and all of its parameters You may need to use F11 Display full on the OS 400 command entry panel to get enough command entry lines to fit the entire command Perform the following steps to install the Windows server 1 If you are installing from a CD ROM insert the Windows 2000 CD into the iSeries CD ROM drive 2 Start the Windows server install from the OS 400 command line by running the following command INSUNTSVR NWSD AS4IXS1 INSTYPE FULL RSRCNAME 1in06 DMNROLE SERVER WNTVER WINZ000 TCPPORTCFG 1 10 230 14 90 255 255 255 0 10 224 1 124 EVTLOG ALL SVRSTGSIZE S00 5000 SVRSTGASP 2 2 CVINTFS YES TOWRKGRP workgroup RSTDDEVRSC NONE TEXT Deployment Win2k linO6 1 6 GHz 2 GB memory About IBM Privacy Legal Contact Note Before you hit Enter for the INSWNTSVR command be sure to have your keyboard mouse and CRT attached to the IXS card The reason is that the command continues by booting the
623. u can run the R9698711 program from Batch Versions after an install or upgrade The report compares database tables and indexes against Release 9 1 Central Objects or TAM specifications Use this report to verify the format of Release 9 1 tables in your database 25 8 5 UDC Merge Report Data Dictionary Merge Report and Menu Merge Report Note These reports are used only by upgrade and cumulative update customers The UDC Merge Data Dictionary Merge and Menu Merge programs produce these reports 25 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Object Specification Merge Report R98700 UDC Merge and Exception report R987241 a Data Dictionary Merge and Exception report R989200 Menu Merge report R989751B These three merge reports are created when you run Control Table Workbench during Running Installation Workbench in the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Upgrade Guide These reports show the status of the UDCs data dictionary items and menus that were merged 25 8 5 1 Setting Processing Options The processing options are the same for all of these merge reports 25 8 5 1 1_ UDC Merge and Exception Report and Data Dictionary Merge and Exception Report The Release Info tab contains these options Option Value Update Mode Enter 2 Default is Update Mode Environment Name for the Old Release Enter a valid environment name For example PRODB7334 Old Release Name Enter the name of the old r
624. uage installation Helps Language help files SolutionExplorer Solution Explorer language files SolutionExplorer PLANNER Planner path code SolutionExplorer PLANNER DATA Language database 23 3 IBM i Libraries After you transfer Release 9 1 software to the Enterprise Server and run Installation Workbench you should have the following Enterprise Server libraries where xxxx is the release to which you are installing such as E910 Library Type Library Name IFS Definition Install JDEOW Menus and executable programs Host E900SYS E900SYS JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Foundation Application classes include includea includev locale resource INI output queue printqueue OneWorld Package 23 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Workstation General Directory Structure Library Type Library Name IFS Definition Host E900SYS Packages Package source include and spec files Application Shared DD910 Data Dictionary tables OL910 Object Librarian tables SVM910 Server Map tables SY910 System tables OWJRNL Journaling JDE910 EnterpriseOne log files Environment DV910 TESTCTL Control Tables and Data Dictionary tables Development TESTDTA Business Data tables CODV910 Central Objects and Versions tables DV910 Pathcode service programs DV910 Parent package service programs DV910 specfile Pathcode specifi
625. uction data If this report is called from another process the system passes in this flag Enter the source Data Source for Loading of Data Enter OneWorld Local If this report is called from another process the system passes in the data source Enter the Source Environment for the database to be copied from Leave this field blank If this report is called from another process the system passes in the Source Environment The Update Tab contains these options Working with Reports 25 5 Environment Database Creation Report R98403 Option Value Enter a 1 for Proof Mode or a 2 to create the Enter 2 Efivironm nt Dat base The default is Proof Mode Enter a A to recreate existing tables in data sources that Enter A allow an tomanie table creanon The default is not to recreate tables Enter a 1 to only copy tables that exist in the source data Leave this field blank iain The default is to copy all tables Enter a Y to add records without clearing the target Leave this field blank table This is used for language tables The default is to clear the target table The Print Tab contains these options Option Value Enter a 1 to only print exceptions Leave this field blank The default is to print all lines The Licensing Tab contains the following options Option Value Enter a Y to create all tables or a N to create licensed Leave this field blank t bl s o
626. uctures Structure and Item GT98TMPL Object Librarian Media Object Templates Contains templates that can be used for any attachment 24 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 29 Working with Reports During the installation upgrade and cumulative update processes JD Edwards EnterpriseOne creates reports that show detailed information about the plan and summarize the status of the environment builds During upgrades and cumulative updates additional reports summarize the status of tables merges This chapter discusses a Section 25 1 Installation Planner Validation Report R9840B This report is for installation upgrade and cumulative update customers a Section 25 2 Table and Index Creation R98407 This report is for upgrade and cumulative update customers a Section 25 3 Environment Database Creation Report R98403 This report is for installation upgrade and cumulative update customers Section 25 4 Data Dictionary Specification Merge Report and Data Dictionary Text Merge Report R98722C and R98722T This report is for upgrade and cumulative update customers only a Section 25 5 Object Librarian Modifications Report R9840D This report is for upgrade and cumulative update customers only a Section 25 6 Async Launch R98405A This report is for upgrade and cumulative update customers only a Section 25 7 Report on Table Conversions R984052 This report is for upgrade and cum
627. ugh the Installation Planner application you might find that you need to delete a server or machine that you have created You can use Installation Planner to delete machines as needed however doing so can affect related databases shared Enterprise Servers and Deployment Servers and associated records To delete machines from an installation plan 1 Inthe Release 9 1 planner environment enter P9654A in the Fast Path field and press Enter 2 On Work With Locations and Machines click Find 3 Expand the location A list of your locations machines or servers appears for the base location in the tree view 4 Select the location machine or server that you want to delete 5 Click Delete 6 To close the application click Close 5 6 Verify and Configure Data Source for Previous Release Note This section is only applicable if you installed your E910 deployment server a different machine as the previous release If you install the E910 Deployment Server on the same machine as the previous release the Installation Planner automatically detects the local System data source and uses it to configure the upgrade Before you run the Installation Planner for an upgrade you must ensure that you have a data source properly configured on the E910 Deployment Server so this machine can access system tables for the previous release residing on a different machine This is because the installation planner must import infor
628. uild will fail 1 Open the QAQQINI file on the Enterprise Server using this command WRKOBJ QUSRSYS QAQQINI FILE 2 If the QAQQINI file does not exist add it using this command CRTDUPOBJ QAQQINI QSYS FILE QUSRSYS DATA YES 3 Start IBM i Navigator Before You Begin the Upgrade 2 11 Verifying Software and Hardware Requirements Specification Merge Selection Work with Merge Selections File Edit Preferences Row Window Help Disable v A x E amp X line V Enable S OLE S Internet Select Find Close Seg New Dis Abo Path Code Prass ej ams O onaman O emon Gae nag G me amaaa ee ee Name Description Code Flag Type Modified Comment 4 Navigate the Databases node and then expand to show your machine name 5 6 Right click on your machine name and select Run SQL Scripts Run these SQL commands SELECT FROM QUSRSYS QAQQINI In the results you should search for this entry LOB_LOCATOR_THRESHOLD If the LOB_LOCATOR_THRESHOLD entry does not exist you should insert it by running this command INSERT INTO QUSRSYS QAQQINI VALUES LOB_LOCATOR_THRESHOLD 10000 default If the LOB_LOCATOR THRESHOLD entry does exist you should ensure that the value for QQVAL is set to 10000 If the QQVAL value is set to anything other than 10000 for example DEFAULT you must change it using this command Tip If you haveSTRSQL you can also run this command directly from that
629. ulative update customers only a Section 25 8 Object Specification Merge Report R98700 This report is for upgrade and cumulative update customers only Section 25 9 Index Recreation R9698713 This report is for installation upgrade and cumulative update customers a Section 25 10 Pathcode Copy R9800942 This report is for installation upgrade and cumulative update customers Working with Reports 25 1 Installation Planner Validation Report R9840B 25 1 Installation Planner Validation Report R9840B Note This report is used by installation upgrade and cumulative update customers All processes use version XJDE0001 of this report The Installation Planner Validation report summarizes the status of the installation plan and verifies that the plan information is correct before you run the Installation Workbench 25 1 1 Setting Processing Options The Extra Info tab contains these options Option Value Additional data source information flag Enter Y to include additional information OCM Information Flag Enter Y to see all Object Configuration Manager OCM information for the current data selection Enter D to select all default records Enter N to prevent OCM records from being displayed OCM Differences Flag Enter Y to see OCM differences between the new environment and the previous environment Path Code Information Flag Enter Y to display all path code information f
630. ultEnvironment PD910 DataSource System 910 History 0 After you modify the jde ini on the Enterprise Server you must restart the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Services so the settings can take effect Caution If you have changed the password for the JDE user the password you specify on Enterprise Server in jde ini must be the new password 12 3 Enabling Client Side Signon Security Locate the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne client JDE INI that is deployed from the Deployment Server Typically the file can be found at the following location x JDEdwards E910 OneWorld Client Install Misc JDE INI where x is the drive on which JD Edwards EnterpriseOne is installed Ensure that JD Edwards EnterpriseOne client JDE INI has these settings SECURITY SecurityServer server_name DataSource System 910 DefaultEnvironment DV910 Default Role ALL Row Security NO_DEFAULT 12 4 Setting Up JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Single Sign on You must set up JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Single Signon Security using the procedures described in Chapter 13 Setting Up EnterpriseOne Single Sign On of the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Security Administration Guide Caution Using default settings may expose a potential security risk Thus it is highly recommended to overwrite the single sign on settings using the single sign on configuration applications discussed in Chapter 13 Setting Up EnterpriseOne Single Sign On of the JD Edwards Enterp
631. umn headings Object headings Description Obj Type Object type such as BSEN is a business function and TBLE is a table Object Name Alphanumeric identifier for the object Version The report version number run for this object Syst Code Product code Merge Action Indicates the object on source was added replaced or merged on the target Object Librarian Merge Completion status for Object Librarian updates for this object Versions List Merge Completion status for Versions List updates for this object 25 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Object Specification Merge Report R98700 Object headings Description Merge Status Completion status for Specification merge for this object Date Completed Date the object was merged Time Updated Time the object was updated a The fourth section contains detail information for each merged object and includes these common errors a Insert errors a Header and source files that fail to copy Invalid dictionary items for tables or views a Invalid files name or column in business views This table explains the column headings in the section Object headings Description Object Name Alphanumeric identifier for the object Version The report version number run for this object indicates a template for a report Obj Type Object type For example BSFN is a business function and TBLE is
632. unning the Platform Pack installer for IBM i If you follow the recommendation this will be the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Deployment Server Caution Ensure that the Administrator account name that you use does not contain any special characters 2 Create a folder into which you will copy the two zip files that comprise the Platform Pack image For example the folder might be named c IBMPPack Working with the Platform Pack on the IBMi 4 9 Running the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Platform Pack Installer for the IBM i 3 Extract the two zip files within the root of the folder created above Using the example in this guide a correctly extracted structure is BY C IBMPPack File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Qax BP search Folders gt BX fe Address C IBMPPack i Folders Name 9 IBMPPack plete SAVF 4 objects Disk free space 216 GB E9 My Computer 4 Locate the jt400 jar and util400 jar from the location where you installed IBM i Access for Windows For example the location might be c Program Files IBM Client Access jt400 lib 5 Copy these two jar files to this structure in your install image stage ext jlib 6 Inthe above extracted structure locate the setup exe file under the install subdirectory right click on it and select Run as Administrator Note The Oracle Universal Installer takes a few minutes to start up 4 10 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Ap
633. upported Using the wizard is preferred because the end result is the OS 400 command INSWNTSVR that can be pasted into your green screen and then executed in step 3 2 Install IBM i Integration for Microsoft Windows Server this step is unique to the IBM i and a pre requisite to setting up the integrated Deployment Server via the installation command It loads the Integrated Microsoft Windows software 5722 WSV and any PTFs that are required on IBM i 3 Install the Microsoft Windows server this step loads the Microsoft Windows software using regular Microsoft Windows CDs similar to an external Deployment Server except the process is begun with the OS 400 command INSWNTSVR that invokes the Microsoft Windows installation When you click on next in the wizard from step 1 the screen below summarizes the answers from the advisor onto a command line which can be copied and pasted onto your green screen Working with the Deployment Server 3 5 Planning for IBM i Integration iSeries Information Center Netscape a 3 18 xi File Edit View Go Communicator Help artspBaeaeeusee 0s Forward Search Netscape Print Security Shop Stop Advanced search Search tips Windows server om iSeries gt mic iSeries Ite for Windows Server gt Windows Server installation advisor Windows Server installation advisor Results Now that the key properties of the server have been determined yo
634. ustom In the Default box specify one of the Printer Definition Language options as the default value You can select multiple PDLs but only one default PDL A user can override this default PDL at the time a batch process is submitted Choosing PostScript or Printer Command Language PCL Release 9 1 disables the Line Printer option Choosing Line Printer Release 9 1 disables the PostScript and PCL options When choosing the Line Printer option this logic occurs a Release 9 1 disables the grid at the bottom of the form and any paper types you have chosen are cleared JD Edwards EnterpriseOne automatically provides a printer type of JDE LINE PAPER for the printer a The Fields in the box labeled Line Printers are used to set the paper dimensions and line parameters This procedure is explained in later steps in this section The custom option uses advanced features of the printers application which are explained in the later steps in this procedure On the Details tab when choosing the PostScript option the Paper Source box appears and you can change these options Field Description Max Number of Paper Enter a numeric value in this field to indicate the number of paper Sources trays this printer has available Default Paper Source Enter a numeric value in this field to indicate which tray number you want Release 9 1 to draw paper from as the default tray 10 On the Details tab when choosing the Line Prin
635. ut Oracle Home Page 2 On JD Edwards Installation Manager click the link for the language that you want to install In this example the language installation image is for French 21 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Installing Languages on the Deployment Server v Client Workstation Setup JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Client Install ORACLE 3 On the Welcome screen click Next Creating a Language Only Installation Plan 21 3 Installing Languages on the Deployment Server vi Client Workstation Installation Setup Type Install Language Database JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Client Install Space Available ECA 8759 MB 486 MB Ocb OE ce o 4 On Client Workstation Installation Setup Type complete these fields Field Description Select Setup Type Ensure the radio button for your language is selected Install Path The Installer provides a default path to the existing client installation on this machine c JDEdwards 910 You must verify that this drive and path is valid for your installation You can use the browse function to locate the directory 5 Click Finish 21 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running Installation Planner Client Workstation Installation Progress SolutionExplorer Data Specification Data Final Configuration Copying files SpecificationData _ ooo
636. value in the F98611 table for example A23456789012345 910 Svr Map In any case you must ensure that the values for Server Map datasource names in the F98611 table exactly match those in the jde ini file on the Enterprise Server Description Enter a description for the machine Release Enter the Release 9 1 release number to which this plan applies or use the visual assist button to choose one from the list The default value is E910 Host Type Click the visual assist button and select the type of Enterprise Server you are adding to the plan In this case IBM i AS 400 Location Displays the location chosen for this plan by default Primary User Specify the user to whom an email is sent when a package is deployed The default value for Primary User is JDE Note The case of machine name must also match the network ID for that machine Caution For information on supported clustering environments see Release 9 1 on a Cluster in JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Tools Server and Workstation Administration Guide and the clustering vendor s software documentation Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 5 23 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade 3 On Enterprise Server Revisions select the Enterprise tab and complete or verify these fields Field Description Port Number The port number value 6016 for this Enterprise Server
637. ve this field blank The default is to print all lines The Licensing Tab contains these options Option Value Enter a Y to create all tables or a N to create licensed Leave this field blank tables Only The default is to create all tables Enter a Y to print all tables in the report or an N to print Leave this field blank licensed tables only The default is to print all tables 25 3 1 2 Version XJDE0004 for Updates The Environment Tab contains these options Option Value Enter the Environment for the database to be created Leave this field blank Enter the Data Source for the database to be created Leave this field blank Enter a 1 to load Production Data or a 2 to load Enter 1 Demonstration Data The default is to load production data If this report is called from another process the system passes in this flag Enter the source Data Source for Loading of Data Leave this field blank If this report is called from another process the system passes in the data source Enter the Source Environment for the database to be copied from Leave this field blank If this report is called from another process the system passed in the Source Environment The Update Tab contains these options 25 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Environment Database Creation Report R98403 Option Value Enter a 1 for Proof Mode or a 2 to create the
638. ve turned on the Security Server in the jde ini file on the Deployment Server Enterprise Server or both As previously stated you cannot run Table Conversions with the Security Server turned on Refer to the jde 1log for more details This setting in the jde ini indicates whether the Security Server is turned on SECURITY SecurityServer value_or_blank In order to turn off the Security Server the value for the SecurityServer setting must be blank Services Inactive Cannot Run on Server This error occurs if your Upgrade Plan specifies to run table conversions on the Enterprise Server but the services are not started You must ensure that the JD 6 38 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions Edwards EnterpriseOne services on your Enterprise Server are up and running before running table conversions on the server Submission Problems This section discusses troubleshooting submission problems for these tables a F9843 and F9843T a F98405 a 984052 a 986110 a F986130 F9843 and F9843T The Table Conversion Schedule GH9611 application reads these tables to find all conversions that will be run They are conversion types 3 31 and 32 Table Conversions that must run on the Deployment Server are flagged here These tables reside in the System Local and System 910 data sources F98405 The Workbench Status GH961 application reads this table to find table conversion sc
639. ver Manager Platform Pack installer Concurrent Tasks None 20 2 Starting Installation Planner Caution In order to run EnterpriseOne on an additional server you must deploy JD Edwards EnterpriseOne to the server using either Server Manager a Platform Pack installer Begin your installation plan by logging on to Release 9 1 and starting Installation Planner To start the Installation Planner 1 Log on to Release 9 1 as user JDE with the database password for user JDE 2 Access the planner environment JDEPLAN 3 From the System Installation Tools menu GH961 double click Add on Servers Plan 4 On Work with Installation Plans click Add Release 9 1 displays the following warning CE o Warning You are about to define a plan which is solely used to add servers to your existing configuration Press OK to continue or press Cancel to exit You can change the type of plan by modifying processing options NOTE This plan should be defined as a custom install J X Cancel 5 Click OK The Installation Planner form appears 20 3 Entering a Plan Description After starting Installation Planner enter basic plan information such as plan name and description To enter a plan description 20 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Entering a Plan Location Typical Installation Plan Installation Planner le Edit Preferences Form Window Help
640. verify that no unfinished accounts payable processing records exist tables F04571 and F04572 should both be empty 2 8 Verifying Software and Hardware Requirements Certain minimum hardware and software requirements must be met to run Release 9 1 on various operating systems and servers Verify that the Deployment Server Enterprise Servers and workstations meet the hardware and software requirements Because the software and hardware requirements change rapidly as manufacturers constantly update their products requirements are not provided in this documentation Refer to Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications Note Make sure that you have taken and installed the latest Planner Update ESU from the Oracle JD Edwards Update Center Failing to do so may prevent proper installation of the software Additionally a new compiler requirement is added for Release 9 1 Before you run the Deployment Server or Platform Pack installer you should install a Microsoft Visual C compiler on any machine on which the installer will be run The MTRs list supported C compilers on Microsoft Windows based machines Refer to Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications 2 8 1 Adding a New Entry to the QAQQINI File Once you have put the latest PTFs onto the IBM i you need to enable the new LOB locator functionality If you do not do this Specifications Merge and Package B
641. verview When upgrading to a new release you might need to retrofit some of your modifications to the new release Because it is a laborious process to recreate custom modifications each time you upgrade the software the upgrade process preserves most of your custom modifications This chapter explains how to integrate any custom modifications that the upgrade process did not preserve into your new Release 9 1 software This integration called retrofitting enables refitting of your customizations that could not be merged into the new version of the software Retrofitting modifications only needs a workstation with the upgraded software and the development tools provided with Release 9 1 These tools compare the customizations that Release 9 1 merged into the new software with any pathcode in the system Thus you can easily compare your upgraded modifications with a version of your modifications before the upgrade or with the pristine environment of the new release Note The ability to carry forward the deletion of standard JD Edwards EnterpriseOne text overrides is not a supported custom modification That is if a text override is deleted by a customer it is re deployed with the next ESU or upgrade The original static text control should be hidden A new control with the desired text should be added in its place 16 2 Retrofitting Custom Modifications To retrofit custom modifications 1 From the workstation on which you will
642. ving copied all the necessary components from the prototype environment you are ready to run the plan using Installation Workbench During Installation Workbench run Table Conversion Workbench and Control Table Workbench These processes preserve and merge the business data and control tables from your production environment To run the Installation Plan for the production environment 1 2 3 Take the production environment offline Log on to the planner environment On Installation Workbench double click the installation plan you created for the production environment Perform the tasks in the Installation Workbench section 15 7 Testing the Production Package The next step in upgrading production is testing your modifications on the workstation where you should surface test the Release 9 1 production environment After you finish testing the environment you can deploy it to other workstations 15 8 Bringing the Production Environment Online The final step in upgrading the production environment is to bring the production environment online Upgrading the Production Environment 15 15 Bringing the Production Environment Online 15 16 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 16 Retrofitting Custom Modifications This section discusses these topics a Section 16 1 Overview a Section 16 2 Retrofitting Custom Modifications a Section 16 3 Using JD Edwards Compare and Merge Tools 16 1 O
643. vironments sosisini a a ni E ise iuisevese a eiei eriei 19 20 19 13 Verifying Advanced Parameters esss sessssessessessistessesststiesessesntntitsinsesstnnienienisnenntenieneeneen 19 25 19 14 Setting Up Data Sources for Environment sssssssisesississessestirsissesnitinsessissnnneenieneeseese 19 26 19 15 Remote Location Packages cssscscccsestssseseseussssvsesenscssetevebicessues n a a a 19 29 19 16 Finalizing the Installation Plan ccceecccscsseseceeescsceeseseseececssseseecececsssssnesesesesessnesesesenes 19 32 19 17 Concluding the Planner Validation Report cccccccc cscs ce ceceeeseececessnensnesecenenes 19 32 Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration 20 1 Assumptions about Adding a Server to an Existing Installation Plan cccseee 20 1 20 2 Starting Installation Planned cccsseseesssesseesesescsesesesesesesesesesescsssesesescsesssesescsesessseseeees 20 2 20 3 Entering a Plan DeSCYiption 0 c cece ccc E E EEEE A RE AAEE E 20 2 20 4 Enterinig a Plant Location 2 r csscets cessed csvset iian aA R r e aiai 20 3 20 5 Selecting Additional Server Type cccccccccssesesecscsesesescscscseseecscsssnseececscsssnseecesessnsneseeses 20 5 20 6 Entering Deployment Server Information ccccc cece cceesesescscsesesesescssseseececsssssnesseeees 20 5 20 7 Specifying an Enterprise Server c ccce cece ce cscseeseecscssseseseecscssssseececessnesesesesessneseseenes 20 7 20 7 1 Entering Enterprise Serv
644. w Advan S OLE S Internet i Data Source Name PORET System 910 Data Source Use os Local Data Source Data Source Type fi DB2 UDB on OS 400 l JDBNET Data Source Data Class fs System Platform fasaoo IBM AS57400 CISC Database Server Name fritanic Be UDB Access logical aA gt Bal opae Samene olea Gracie Library Name jeva 0 ODBC Data Source Name System 910 On Data Source Revisions complete the following fields Field Description Data Source Name Enter the name of the System data source to be upgraded For example System 910 Data Source Use You can accept the default value of DB 5 14 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade Field Description Data Source Type Choose the type of data source Valid value is I IBMi Platform Enter your platform For example AS400 Database Server Enter the name of your database server on which your previous System Name data source resides Library Name Enter the Library Name ODBC Data Source Enter the ODBC data source name Name 3 Click OK ustom Installation Plan Pr s J D Edwards Configuration File Edit Preferences Form Window Help vy x amp amp OK Can Dis Abo tins w Data s OLE a Internet Installation Planner must import information from your previous system data source so it can recognize and upgrade
645. will be reloaded at the new release level when you run the Installation Workbench Do not delete the F0002 and F00021 tables these control tables must match the business data tables in order for the Next Numbers to be correct Alternatively you can save the control tables menu UDC and data dictionary tables and run the Control Table merge to update the tables with the new software release information See Also Section 2 7 4 Verifying Custom Changes in Master Control Tables in the Chapter 2 Before You Begin the Upgrade section of this guide 18 3 Installing the Deployment Server Install the Deployment Server as instructed in the upgrade guide for your platform You must then load central objects for the environment that you are installing for example if you are upgrading the production environment run the loaded or reloaded executable program 18 4 Planning the Upgrade When defining the plan do the following a Verify that the Upgrade Environment and Table Conversions options are turned on Set up the plan to upgrade the chosen environment a Do not turn on Specification Merges If you choose not to delete the control tables set the Control Tables Merges to merge Once you have defined your plan go back to Work with Installation Plans Highlight your plan and click Expand and then choose the table conversion section and click Select Because you need to run only the vertical application table conversions del
646. with the Platform Pack on the IBM i 4 27 Working with Database Security 4 28 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 9 Working with the Installation Planner for an Upgrade This chapter consists of the following topics a Section 5 1 Understanding the Planner Process for Upgrades a Section 5 2 Working with JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Software Requirements a Section 5 3 Reviewing Installation Planner Processing Options a Section 5 4 Running the Installation Planner for an Upgrade m Section 5 5 Deleting Machines from an Installation Plan a Section 5 6 Verify and Configure Data Source for Previous Release See Also A separate chapter in this guide entitled Chapter 19 Creating a Remote Installation Plan A separate chapter in this guide entitled Chapter 20 Adding a Server to an Existing Configuration A separate chapter in this guide entitled Chapter 21 Creating a Language Only Installation Plan 5 1 Understanding the Planner Process for Upgrades Installation Planner is an Release 9 1 application that runs on the Deployment Server It is a system administration tool that guides through the process of configuring the machines on which you will run Release 9 1 This chapter contains the tasks for defining a custom installation plan The information you provide on the Installation Planner forms such as database type and Enterprise Server type determines the information you see on
647. word logon denied 3 46 3 tisnames Ora ansiar cance ieee cliceads a A ASES S Ea aari Ea EORR erit 3 47 Administering the Local Oracle Database Using SQL Plus cecceeeeeeeteees 3 47 Encrypting the Password of the Local Oracle Database ccccceccseteteeeees 3 47 0 Decrypting the Password of the Local Oracle Database cccccsscseseeeees 3 48 1 Import and Export Tablespaces to the Local Oracle Database cccece 3 49 1 1 Import Tablespace Script attach_planner bat ccce eee ee eeeeeeeees 3 49 1 2 Export Tablespace Script detach_planner bat 00 0 0 ccc cee ee eens 3 49 2 Updating the InstallManager htm File 0 0 0 0 cc cscs cceneseescesseseececsesseeseecees 3 50 3 Deployment inf and lt Package_name gt ine ccccce cee cece ce ceeeeeneeeeeeees 3 51 4 Working with the Platform Pack on the IBM i vi 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 3 4 4 3 5 4 3 6 4 3 7 4 3 8 4 3 9 4 3 10 4 3 11 4 3 12 4 4 4 5 4 6 4 6 1 4 6 2 4 6 3 4 6 4 4 7 4 7 1 4 7 2 Understanding the Platform Pack ccccccceccssseseseceseesescscseseseecscsesssesescsesssesesescsssnsneeseesens 4 1 Platform Pack Process FLOW ex cscccsciceicescce eel Sescuces dbs de ccenside e E dosacteest a a 4 2 Configuring the Enterprise Server Prior to Installing the Platform Pack cccce 4 2 Understanding the Prerequisites c ccccceccccce esse naa ania 4 3 Understanding Security for the Platform Pack Installer eec
648. workstation uses to access the server where the media object queues reside For example N Mediaobj ComposerCBT 5 To change an existing media object queue click Find to display a list of queue names and their paths 6 On Work With Media Object Queues select the queue name you want to modify 10 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Specifying the Help Location Used by the Web Client and Development Client a Media Object Queues Media Object Queue Revisions 4 ile Edit Preferences Window Help W inks i q Di Gan Deen Abo w Displ S OLE Internet Tools HZ Calendar Calcula Queue Name BusinessFunctionDoc Work Center Queue Path On Line Server_Name E910 PrintQueue g Internal Mail f Q Path Off li External ueue Pal line OEL Internet Type for Image File Queue g Create Shortcut g On Line Access Type Read Write Send Shortcut Off Line Access Type Read Write 7 On Media Object Queues change the information in the Queue Path On Line field to reflect the new location 8 Copy the image files and OLE objects to the new location 9 Exit Release 9 1 and log back on to enable the changes 10 3 Specifying the Help Location Used by the Web Client and Development Client To specify the help location used by the Web Client and Development Client 1 From System Administration Tools GH9011 select Media Object Queues P98MOQUE 2 To
649. xt Saye Dis Abo Links v Saye ROLE Bintemet Plan Name PD910UPG PD910 Upgrade naped R89986167A XJDE0001 39D XJDE0001 i i H R89421998 XJDEO001 6 32 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Understanding Table Conversions Use Submitted Reports GH9011 to view the status of submitted conversions Notice all the jobs show the R98405A program To link the jobs to conversions note the job number The jde log jdedebug log and conversion log all have the job number in the name The jde log contains a message with the conversion name For more on the log files see the section below d Submitted Reports Submitted Job Search z Processing R98405A_XJDEO001_2_PD DEVNTA Processing R9B405A_XJDE0001_4_PD DEVNTA Processing i R98405A_XJDE0001_6_PD DEVNTA Processing i i R984054_XJDE0001_8_PD DEVNTA Waiting R98405A_XJDE0001_14_P DEVNTA Waiting R98405A XJDE0001_16_P DEVNTA Waiting i R98405A_XJDE0001_18_P DEVNTA Waiting l R98405A_XJDE0001_20_P DEVNTA Waiting R98405A_XJDE0001_22_P DEVNTA Waiting R98405A_XJDE0001_28_P DEVNTA Waiting R98405A_XJDE0001_30_P DEVNTA Waiting i i R98405A_XJDE0001_34_P DEVNTA Waiting 1R98405A_XJDE0001_36_P DEVNTA Waiting R984054_XJDE0001_40_P DEVNTA Waiting l i R98405A_XJDE0001_10_P DEVNTA Waiting R98405A_XJDE0001_12_P DEVNTA Waiting i R98405A_XJDE0001_24_P DEVNTA Waiting R98405A_XJDE0001_38_P DEVNTA
650. y Merge Note This merge is for upgrades and cumulative updates 9 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Working with Control Table Merges The Data Dictionary Merge R989200P program updates the customer specific data dictionary tables by using a combination of information from the new Release 9 1 data dictionary tables and the change tables in the planner database It runs during the Installation Workbench phase For installation customers only the Data Dictionary Merge program copies changes made to IBM i data dictionary items into the Release 9 1 data dictionary tables After you run the Installation Workbench you run a specification update program to convert the relational database records into the System Local replicated objects This process includes the Data Dictionary Specification merge R98722C and Data Dictionary Text merge R98722T programs You should run these programs to merge your modified IBM i data dictionary files with the Release 9 1 relational database tables and then into the replicated tables that will be used by each workstation and logic server The Release 9 1 data dictionary tables are stored as follows The following pristine data dictionary tables are stored in a relational database Changes made to the data dictionary items that will be replicated to other workstations must be made here a F9200 a F9202 a F9203 a 9207 a F9210 a F9211 a F9212 a FOQ0165 a Replic
651. y load the replicated Constant Tables The following version of R98403 will be launched to accomplish the task of copying constant tables from base location to remote locations Version fxJDE0046 Edit Version Constant Version Search Constant V Load Master Tables Select this checkbox to initially load the replicated Master Tables The following version of R98403 will be launched to accomplish the task of copying master tables from base location to remote locations Version fxiDE0047 Edit Version Master Version Search Master SEs 2 the remote locations Field Description 6 On the Data Load tab choose from the following options to copy selected tables to Load Control Tables Select this checkbox to initially load the replicated Control Tables The following version of R98403 will be launched to accomplish the task of copying Control tables from the base location to remote locations Load Constant Tables Select this checkbox to initially load the replicated Constant Tables The following version of R98403 will be launched to accomplish the task of copying Constant tables from the base location to remote locations Load Master Tables Select this checkbox to initially load the replicated Master Tables The following version of R98403 will be launched to accomplish the task of copying Master tables from the base location to remote locations Note T
652. y might be c Oracle ElLocal At the end of the deinstallation verify that the Oracle_Home directory has been deleted for example c Oracle E1local If it still exists you should attempt to manually delete it Caution Prior to any reinstall an Oracle local database on this same machine the Oracle_Home directory for example c Oracle Ellocal must not exist If you attempt to reinstall the local Oracle database and this directory still exists it is likely that the new installation will fail Tip You may not be able to delete the Oracle_Home directory for example c Oracle E1local1 if a process has it locked In that case to determine which process es has it locked run the steps in the section of this guide entitled Section 3 11 5 4 Process Explorer 27 4 Manual Cleanup of a Deinstalled Oracle Database on the Deployment Server If the deinstallation of the OEE database fails for some reason you need to perform the manual steps in this procedure to completely remove the old installation before reinstalling the database 1 Deinstall the Deployment Server Be sure the Deployment Server is deinstalled before attempting to deinstall the database This should ensure that no EnterpriseOne tablespaces are imported attached to the EnterpriseOne database 27 2 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Manual Cleanup of a Deinstalled Oracle Database on the Deployment Server Delete
653. y need to deinstall the Deployment Server and Oracle database as described in the chapter of this guide entitled Chapter 27 3 3 12 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Obtaining and Preparing the Deployment Server Install Image Deinstalling the Local OEE from the Deployment Server Also you may possibly need to perform additional cleanup for the Oracle Database as described in the section of this guide entitled Section 27 4 Manual Cleanup of a Deinstalled Oracle Database on the Deployment Server After the deinstall and cleanup is complete you must apply a software patch from Microsoft to disable IPv6 before reinstalling the Oracle local database and EnterpriseOne Standalone or Web Development Client The Microsoft patch for disabling IPv6 is at the following link How to disable IPv6 or its components in Windows http support microsoft com kb 929852 On the above Microsoft web page click the link labelled Disable IPv6 Microsoft Fix it 50409 After you apply the Microsoft patch to disable IPv6 you can reinstall the Oracle database and EnterpriseOne Standalone Client using the procedures in this guide MICROSOFT DISCLAIMER ON DISABLING IPV6 Important Internet Protocol version 6 IPv6 is a mandatory part of Windows Vista and later versions We do not recommend that you disable IPv6 or its components or some Windows components may not function For more information see the What are Microsoft s recom
654. y that this path matches your version of the release for example for Release 9 1 the server share path is E910 3 Click OK 20 6 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide Specifying an Enterprise Server Tip If you enter invalid information into a tab field a stop sign icon appears next to the tab name such as Deployment Server For more information about the error click on the stop sign icon in the bottom right hand corner of the form 4 You are prompted to add another Deployment Server a To add another Deployment Server click Yes Repeat Section 20 6 Entering Deployment Server Information a To continue with the additional server plan click No Continue with the relevant sections that follow 20 7 Specifying an Enterprise Server This section discusses a Section 20 7 1 Entering Enterprise Server Information a Section 20 7 2 Entering Enterprise Server Data Source Information 20 7 1 Entering Enterprise Server Information To enter the base information for the Enterprise Server that you use in this plan Custom Installation Plan Enterprise Server Revisions iol File Edit Preferences Form Window Help 18 x vy x R R OK Can Dis Abo Machine Usage 20 Enterprise Server Location Peme Emen Machine Name Ens Primary User JDE Il Description Enterprise SereriSeres Generate Release a7 oe Host Type fio ASi400 Links w Window 8 OLE s Internet
655. y to ONEWORLD which you can revoke after a short while To grant ALLOBJ authority from a green screen enter the following command CHGUSRPRF USRPRF ONEWORLD SPCAUT ALLOBJ JOBCTL JOBD LIBL ONEWORLD Troubleshooting 17 3 Resolving Errors Due to Lack of ALLOBJ and JOBCTL Authority 17 4 JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Applications Upgrade Guide 18 Performing a Data Only Upgrade This chapter describes an abbreviated upgrade method that can be used if the customer has made no software modifications that need to be brought forward to the new release of the software In this method only customer business data is preserved and all other changes that might have been made to the software are overwritten Basically the process is a new installation of the software for everything except the business data The business data is then converted to the new release by running table conversions on this data source only In this abbreviated method you can skip many of the tasks required for a normal upgrade In some cases you might need to slightly modify normal upgrade tasks as well For the data only upgrade the term business data refers to application tables only Changes to control tables such as user defined codes UDCs menus and data dictionary are merged and additions to the Object Librarian are populated when you run the Environment Workbench However changes to the specification tables including Versions List are not m
656. ype I Object Owner ID Blank Library Name OWJRNL Library List Name RDB name of the IBM i Note To find the IBM i RDB name use the WRKRDBDIRE command Database Name OWJRNL Server Name Name of the machine where your database resides Platform IBM i Use Table Owner Blank Use Julian Dates Selected Use Decimal Shift Selected Support for Updates Selected OCM Data Source Blank IBM i BLOB Support Blank Understanding Data Source Charts 26 7 Server Map 26 10 Server Map This chart lists the characteristics of the Server Map data source Field Valid Value for Client Access Data Source Name machinename 910 Server Map Data Source Use DB Data Source Type I Object Owner ID Blank Library Name SVM910 Library List Name RDB name of the IBM i Note To find the IBM i RDB name use the WRKRDBDIRE command Database Name machinename 910 Server Map Server Name Name of the machine where your database resides Platform IBM i Use Table Owner Blank Use Julian Dates Selected Use Decimal Shift Selected Support for Updates Selected OCM Data Source Selected IBM i BLOB Support Blank LOB Data Source Selected 26 11 System This chart lists the characteristics of the System data source Field Valid Value for Client Access Data Source Name list includes possible System 910 sources Data Source Use DB Data Sourc
657. ype Permissions JDE Change Production users No Access Development users No Access CNC administrators and application leads No Access 11 1 8 Setting Security on the System Directory This table lists the settings to set security on the system directory User Type Permissions JDE Change Production users Read Only Development users Read Only CNC administrators and application leads Change Performing Post Upgrade Tasks 11 3 Using the Adobe SVG Viewer on Web Clients 11 2 Using the Adobe SVG Viewer on Web Clients Per the Minimum Technical Requirements MTRs for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne web clients refer to Section 1 3 1 Accessing Minimum Technical Requirements Certifications you must have the Adobe Scalable Vector Graphics SVG viewer installed on your web clients in order to use specific JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications such as Demand Flow Manufacturing Within such JD Edwards EnterpriseOne applications the Graphical Product Synchronization uses the Adobe SVG viewer for displaying the graphics associated with the product synchronization The JD Edwards EnterpriseOne application automatically detects the Adobe viewer if it is already installed for the browser If the viewer is not installed for the browser the system displays a link that you can use to install the viewer from the Adobe web site The URL for this link is http www adobe com svg viewer install main html Note SVG isa graphi
658. ystem TCEngine tcinit c 1581 TCEngine Level 1 D JDEdwards E910 system TCEngine tcinit c 1581 There is ER logic associated with the event Row Fetched from F03B20 TCEngine Level 1 D JDEdwards E910 system TCEngine tcinit c 1581 System function Insert Row into format F03B20 TCEngine Level 1 D JDEdwards E910 system TCEngine tcinit c 1581 TCEngine Level 1 D JDEdwards E910 system TCEngine tcrun c 689 Conversion R8903B20 XJDE0001 done successfully Elapsed time 1 843000 Seconds TCEngine Level 1 D JDEdwards E910 system TCEngine tcrun c 697 Fetched 11 rows from F03B20 TCEngine Level 1 D JDEdwards E910 system TCEngine tcrun c 705 Inserted 11 rows failed to insert 0 rows into F03B20 Use the information above to verify the conversion program using the following procedures a If the bottom of the log file says the conversion was unsuccessful review the rest of the log from the beginning for specific errors Also review the jde log and jdedebug log for more specific error information If the bottom of the log file says that the conversion was successful review the file format of the physical file to see that the number of columns has changed From the example log shown above F03B20 should now have 61 columns in the target data source instead of 55 Verify the record count in the physical file based on the log information From the example log shown above F03B20 shou

Applications Upgrade Guide for IBMi with DB2/400

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents